GSE 60 SERIES Technical Reference Manual
GSE 60 Series Programmable Process Controllers are versatile and reliable devices designed for a wide range of industrial applications. With their advanced features and intuitive user interface, these controllers offer precise control and monitoring capabilities for various processes.
Advertisement
Advertisement
GSE 60 SERIES
Technical Reference Manual
P
R O G R A M M A B L E
P
R O C E S S
C
O N T R O L L E R S
V
E R S I O N
3 . 0
Part Number: 39-10-X60REF
GSE 60 Series Programmable Process Controllers Technical Reference Manual
Copyright © 2001 GSE Scale Systems, All rights reserved.
Published by:
GSE Scale Systems
22705 Heslip Drive
Novi, MI 48375
USA
Information in this Technical Reference Manual is subject to change without notice due to correction or enhancement. The information described in this manual is solely the property of GSE. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording and sold for any monetary figure without the express written permission of GSE.
This Technical Reference Manual is a reference tool that explains installation, setup, and operation of the Model 60
Series Instrumentation. Due to the programmable nature of these controllers, your application configuration is likely to be unique. Any questions concerning setup or service of this product should be addressed to your local GSE distributor.
Information in this Technical Reference Manual reflects the installation, setup and operation of the Model 60 Series
Instrumentation manufactured at the time this manual was released.
Your GSE distributor is:
GSE Locations Worldwide
GSE Scale Systems
22705 Heslip Drive
Novi, MI 48375
U.S.A.
Phone:(800) 755-7875 www.gse-inc.com
GSE Canada, Inc.
617 East Lake Road
Airdrie, Alberta Canada T4B 2B8
Phone:(403) 948-9921
Fax: (403) 948-1449
GSE Advanced Industrial Technologies
GmbH
Hausinger Strasse 4
Langenfeld, Germany 40764
Phone: (49) 21 739 16399-0
Fax: (49) 21 739 16399-9
GSE 60 SERIES
Technical Reference Manual
Version 2.0
T
ABLE OF
C
ONTENTS
C H A P T E R 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
I NTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
About This Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Conventions ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
C H A P T E R 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
I
NSTALLATION
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
E
NVIRONMENTAL
S
UITABILITY
....................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
460
AND
465 I
NDICATORS
............................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Standard 460 and 465 Indicators .............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Panel Mount 460 and 465 Indicators........................................................................................................................................ 2-5
560
AND
562 C
ONTROLLERS
........................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Standard 560 and 562 Controllers ............................................................................................................................................ 2-7
Panel Mount 560 and 562 Controllers ....................................................................................................................................2-10
660, 661, AND 662 C ONTROLLERS ................................................................................................................................................2-12
Standard 660, 661 and 662 Controllers..................................................................................................................................2-12
Panel Mount 660, 661 and 662 Controllers............................................................................................................................2-14
663 C ONTROLLER ..........................................................................................................................................................................2-16
665 C
ONTROLLER
..........................................................................................................................................................................2-17
Standard 665 Controller ..........................................................................................................................................................2-18
Panel Mount 665 Controller ....................................................................................................................................................2-19
L
OAD
C
ELL
C
ONNECTIONS
............................................................................................................................................................2-21
Transducer Excitation ..............................................................................................................................................................2-21
Cable Recommendations ..........................................................................................................................................................2-22
Sense Lead Connections...........................................................................................................................................................2-22
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................2-22
DC P OWER C ONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................2-24
460 Series ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-24
560 Series ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-25
660 Series ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-26
LCD O
PERATION
...........................................................................................................................................................................2-26
LCD Hardware Setup ...............................................................................................................................................................2-26
LCD Parameter Setup ..............................................................................................................................................................2-27
LCD Contrast Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................2-27
K
EYPAD
C
ONFIGURATION
.............................................................................................................................................................2-28
460 Keypad................................................................................................................................................................................2-28
465 Keypad................................................................................................................................................................................2-28
560 Series Keypad ....................................................................................................................................................................2-29
660 Series Keypad ....................................................................................................................................................................2-29
C H A P T E R 3 SETUP PARAMETERS........................................................................................................................................3-30
S ETUP P ARAMETERS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
Accessing The Parameter Setup Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Navigating Setup Parameters .................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Parameter Types ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Exiting the Parameter Setup Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Downloading Setup Parameters ..............................................................................................................................................3-11
Setup Parameter Map ...............................................................................................................................................................3-12 i
Parameter Descriptions ...........................................................................................................................................................3-26
S
CRIPT
F
ILES
..................................................................................................................................................................................3-47
Loading Script Files .................................................................................................................................................................3-48
C H A P T E R 4 CALIBRATION........................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
C
ALIBRATION
................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Quick Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Calibration Upon Exiting Setup Mode...................................................................................................................................... 4-2
C ALIBRATION M ETHODS ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
General Notes on Calibration .................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
New Zero ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Last Zero...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Temporary Zero .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Only Zero..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Calibration Reset ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-8
Known Loadcell Output.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-8
M
ULTI
- S
CALE
C
ALIBRATION
.......................................................................................................................................................4-10
C
ALIBRATION
U
NITS
......................................................................................................................................................................4-10
Multi - Point Linearization.......................................................................................................................................................4-10
A/D C ALIBRATION .........................................................................................................................................................................4-11
Printing A/D Calibration Values .............................................................................................................................................4-11
Restoring A/D Calibration Values ...........................................................................................................................................4-13
C ALIBRATION E RROR M ESSAGES ..................................................................................................................................................4-15
R ESTORING T HE C ALIBRATED Z ERO R EFERENCE ........................................................................................................................4-16
C H A P T E R 5 WEIGH MODE OPERATION .............................................................................................................................. 5-1
W
EIGH
M
ODE
O
PERATION
............................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Keypad Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Character Entry .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Disabling Front Panel Keys ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
T
IME
& D
ATE
................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Viewing The Time And Date ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Entering The Time ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Entering The Date....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Operator Access To Time/Date.................................................................................................................................................. 5-8
Time/Date Transmit Code (Formats) ........................................................................................................................................ 5-8
Time And Date Parameter Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Time/Date Specifications............................................................................................................................................................ 5-8
Time / Date Operation ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-8
A
CCUMULATION
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-9
Accumulation Parameters .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Performing Accumulations......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Preventing Double Accumulations ..........................................................................................................................................5-10
Accumulation Counter ..............................................................................................................................................................5-10
Large Accumulation Values .....................................................................................................................................................5-11
Accumulations and NTEP.........................................................................................................................................................5-11
C OUNTING ......................................................................................................................................................................................5-11
Counting Mode (Key Operation) .............................................................................................................................................5-11
Negative Piece Sampling ..........................................................................................................................................................5-12
Using Auto-enhance ..................................................................................................................................................................5-13
Using Minimum Accuracy Assurance ......................................................................................................................................5-13
Achieved Accuracy Less Than Required .................................................................................................................................5-14
Achieved Accuracy Met Requirements ....................................................................................................................................5-14
Counting Parts ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-15
Additional Counting Related Parameters To Consider..........................................................................................................5-17
M
ULTI
-R
ANGE
O
PERATIONS
.........................................................................................................................................................5-17 ii
Scale Number And Range Indication.......................................................................................................................................5-17
Accumulations ...........................................................................................................................................................................5-18
Warnings ...................................................................................................................................................................................5-18
Cal Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................5-19
Printing......................................................................................................................................................................................5-19
Variables ...................................................................................................................................................................................5-19
C H A P T E R 6 LEGAL-FOR-TRADE............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
L EGAL F OR T RADE ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
OIML And International Operation........................................................................................................................................... 6-2
International Keypad (460 Series)............................................................................................................................................. 6-3
International Keypad (560 Series)............................................................................................................................................. 6-4
International Keypad (660 Series)............................................................................................................................................. 6-5
International Characters ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
Renaming Operating Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Presettable Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
NTEP............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-8
Sealing And Audit Trails ..........................................................................................................................................................6-10
D
ATA
S
TORAGE
D
EVICE
(DSD) ....................................................................................................................................................6-13
Database Structure ...................................................................................................................................................................6-14
Setup Parameters......................................................................................................................................................................6-16
DSD Function Selection Menu.................................................................................................................................................6-17
MAKE ROW...............................................................................................................................................................................6-18
DSD Custom Transmit..............................................................................................................................................................6-21
DSD Communication Port .......................................................................................................................................................6-21
DSD Macro Commands............................................................................................................................................................6-21
C H A P T E R 7 OPERATING PARAMETERS.............................................................................................................................. 7-1
O
PERATING
P
ARAMETERS
............................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Operating Parameter Identification .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Accessing Operating Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Mode Menu Access ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Macro Access .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
R ENAMING O PERATING P ARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Renaming Parameters In The Setup Mode................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Renaming Parameters with Macros .......................................................................................................................................... 7-8
W EIGHT P ARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Gross (Mode 0) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Net (Mode 1)................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-9
Tare (Mode 2) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-9
A
CCUMULATION
P
ARAMETERS
.....................................................................................................................................................7-10
Gross Total (Mode 3)................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Gross Total + Current Gross (Mode 4) ..................................................................................................................................7-10
Gross Total - Current Gross (Mode 5)....................................................................................................................................7-11
Net Total (Mode 6)....................................................................................................................................................................7-11
Net Total + Current Net (Mode 7)...........................................................................................................................................7-11
Net Total - Current Net (Mode 8)............................................................................................................................................7-11
Number Of Accumulations (Mode 9).......................................................................................................................................7-11
Scale Number (Mode 10)..........................................................................................................................................................7-12
T IME & D ATE .................................................................................................................................................................................7-12
Time & Date (Mode 11)............................................................................................................................................................7-12
W
EIGHT
A
VERAGING
P
ARAMETERS
..............................................................................................................................................7-13
Average Gross (Mode 15) ........................................................................................................................................................7-14
Average Net (Mode 16).............................................................................................................................................................7-14
Average Count (Mode 17)........................................................................................................................................................7-14
P
EAK
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
.........................................................................................................................................................7-14 iii
iv
Peak Gross (Mode 18)..............................................................................................................................................................7-14
Peak Net (Mode 19)..................................................................................................................................................................7-15
R
OUNDED
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
.................................................................................................................................................7-15
Rounded Gross (Parameter 20)...............................................................................................................................................7-16
Rounded Net (Parameter 21) ...................................................................................................................................................7-16
R
ATE
P
ARAMETERS
........................................................................................................................................................................7-16
Rate (Mode 23)..........................................................................................................................................................................7-16
Free Fall (Mode 24) .................................................................................................................................................................7-17
Future Gross (Mode 25)...........................................................................................................................................................7-18
Future Net (Mode 26)...............................................................................................................................................................7-19
Free Fall 2 (Mode 27) ..............................................................................................................................................................7-19
Future Gross 2 (Mode 28)........................................................................................................................................................7-19
Future Net 2 (Mode 29)............................................................................................................................................................7-19
C
OUNTING
P
ARAMETERS
...............................................................................................................................................................7-19
Quantity (Mode 30)...................................................................................................................................................................7-19
Quantity Total (Mode 31).........................................................................................................................................................7-20
Quantity Total + Current Quantity (Mode 32).......................................................................................................................7-20
Quantity Total - Current Quantity (Mode 33).........................................................................................................................7-20
Average Piece Weight (Mode 34) ............................................................................................................................................7-20
Average Piece Weight x 1000 (Mode 35)................................................................................................................................7-21
Percent Accuracy (Mode 36)....................................................................................................................................................7-21
Last Sample Size (Mode 37).....................................................................................................................................................7-21
M ULTI SCALE P ARAMETERS ..........................................................................................................................................................7-21
Gross Total Of All Scales (Mode 40).......................................................................................................................................7-21
Net Total of All Scales (Mode 41)............................................................................................................................................7-21
Tare Total of All Scales (Mode 42)..........................................................................................................................................7-21
Total of All Gross Totals (Mode 43)........................................................................................................................................7-22
Total of All Net Totals (Mode 44)............................................................................................................................................7-22
Quantity Total of All Scales (Mode 45)...................................................................................................................................7-22
Total of All Quantity Totals (Mode 46)...................................................................................................................................7-22
P ROGRAMMABLE D IGITAL I/O P ARAMETERS (PDIO) .................................................................................................................7-22
Pdio A (Mode 50)......................................................................................................................................................................7-23
Pdio B (Mode 51)......................................................................................................................................................................7-23
Pdio C (Mode 52)......................................................................................................................................................................7-23
E XTENDED W EIGHT P ARAMETERS ................................................................................................................................................7-24
Extended Resolution Gross (Mode 60)....................................................................................................................................7-24
Extended Resolution Net (Mode 61)........................................................................................................................................7-24
Extended Resolution Tare (Mode 62)......................................................................................................................................7-24
A/D Conversion Number (Mode 63)........................................................................................................................................7-24
DSD P
ARAMETERS
........................................................................................................................................................................7-25
DSD Parameters (Parameters 64.1 – 64.9)............................................................................................................................7-25
S
ETPOINT
T
IMERS
..........................................................................................................................................................................7-25
Setpoint Countdown Timer (Parameter 76)............................................................................................................................7-26
Setpoint Delay Timer (Parameter 77) .....................................................................................................................................7-26
Setpoint Status (Parameter 78)................................................................................................................................................7-26
R ANDOM N UMBERS .......................................................................................................................................................................7-27
Random Number (Parameter 79).............................................................................................................................................7-27
V ARIABLES .....................................................................................................................................................................................7-28
Variable Types ..........................................................................................................................................................................7-28
Accessing Variables..................................................................................................................................................................7-28
Assigning Values To Variables ................................................................................................................................................7-29
Entering String Values .............................................................................................................................................................7-33
Displaying String Values..........................................................................................................................................................7-33
Naming Variables .....................................................................................................................................................................7-33
Saving Values During Power Loss ..........................................................................................................................................7-34
Locking Variables.....................................................................................................................................................................7-34
I
NDEPENDENT
T
IMERS
...................................................................................................................................................................7-34
Timer Ticks (Mode 81) .............................................................................................................................................................7-34
Timer Seconds (Mode 82).........................................................................................................................................................7-34
P
ROMPTING
P
ARAMETERS
.............................................................................................................................................................7-35
Macro Select (Mode 90)...........................................................................................................................................................7-35
Weigh Mode Message (Mode 91) ............................................................................................................................................7-36
Get Displayed Data (Mode 92)................................................................................................................................................7-38
D IAGNOSTIC W EIGHT P ARAMETERS .............................................................................................................................................7-38
Status (Parameter 97)...............................................................................................................................................................7-39
Displayed Weight/Count (Parameter 98)................................................................................................................................7-39
Extended Gross (Parameter 99) ..............................................................................................................................................7-39
C H A P T E R 8 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................................................................................................. 8-1
C
OMMUNICATION
C
ONNECTIONS
.................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
COMM Port Connections (General) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
COMM1 & COMM2 Port Connections .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
COMM3 Port Connections (560/660 Series)............................................................................................................................ 8-3
COMM4 Port Connections (660 Series) ................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Communications Cables ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
COMM P ORT S ETUP P ARAMETERS ................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
R ECEIVE O PERATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Receive Buffer ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Macro Language ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
C USTOM T RANSMIT .......................................................................................................................................................................8-19
Custom Transmit Setup Parameters ........................................................................................................................................8-19
Default Custom Transmit .........................................................................................................................................................8-19
Sending a Custom Transmit .....................................................................................................................................................8-19
Defining a New Custom Transmit............................................................................................................................................8-20
Creating a Custom Transmit Table .........................................................................................................................................8-21
Entering Fixed Text ..................................................................................................................................................................8-21
Entering Control Codes............................................................................................................................................................8-22
Custom GSE Control Codes .....................................................................................................................................................8-23
Entering Parameter Data .........................................................................................................................................................8-26
Parameter Format Codes .........................................................................................................................................................8-27
Navigating a Custom Transmit Table......................................................................................................................................8-28
Editing a Custom Transmit Table ............................................................................................................................................8-29
T RANSMITTING DISPLAY D ATA .....................................................................................................................................................8-33
M ODBUS
C OMMUNICATIONS ......................................................................................................................................................8-34
Supported Modbus Commands ................................................................................................................................................8-34
Setup Parameters......................................................................................................................................................................8-35
Modbus “Input” Setpoints .......................................................................................................................................................8-35
Modbus Protocol (RTU Mode).................................................................................................................................................8-36
Other Setup Parameters ...........................................................................................................................................................8-38
Modbus Packet Formats...........................................................................................................................................................8-39
C
HECKSUM
P
ROTOCOL
..................................................................................................................................................................8-41
Printer Interface Example........................................................................................................................................................8-44
T RANSMIT T HE C URRENT S CALE N UMBER (ASCII)....................................................................................................................8-45
M ISCELLANEOUS P ROTOCOL (B INARY T O T EXT C ONVERSION ) .................................................................................................8-45
T RANSMIT N ETWORK A DDRESS (ASCII) .....................................................................................................................................8-46
T RANSMIT S ETPOINT S TATUS A S A B INARY C ODE .....................................................................................................................8-46
P RINTING O PERATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................8-47
I
NPUT
I
NTERPRETER
.......................................................................................................................................................................8-48
Setup ..........................................................................................................................................................................................8-50
General Setup and COMM Port Selection ..............................................................................................................................8-50
Termination Character .............................................................................................................................................................8-50
Input Specification Type...........................................................................................................................................................8-51 v
Input Specification Format Line ..............................................................................................................................................8-51
Input Specification Macro Number .........................................................................................................................................8-52
Clear Interpreter .......................................................................................................................................................................8-52
Operation...................................................................................................................................................................................8-52
Multiple Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................8-52
Trailing Data.............................................................................................................................................................................8-53
Multiple Matches ......................................................................................................................................................................8-53
Disabling the Input Interpreter................................................................................................................................................8-53
Using a String as a Parameter.................................................................................................................................................8-53
Advanced Concepts...................................................................................................................................................................8-54
Input Interpreter Examples ......................................................................................................................................................8-55
R S -485 N ETWORKING (O PTION ) ...................................................................................................................................................8-60
Setup ..........................................................................................................................................................................................8-60
Operation...................................................................................................................................................................................8-61
Network Protocol......................................................................................................................................................................8-62
C H A P T E R 9 MACROS................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
M
ACRO
S
ETUP
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2
Macro Setup Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-2
Using The Macro % Character.................................................................................................................................................. 9-4
Creating A New Macro............................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Editing Macros............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-5
Deleting Macros.......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6
I NVOKING M ACROS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
Front Panel Keypress ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Macro Menu................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-9
Setpoint Activation / Deactivation ...........................................................................................................................................9-10
Input Interpreter........................................................................................................................................................................9-10
Serial Data ................................................................................................................................................................................9-10
Other Macros ............................................................................................................................................................................9-10
M
ACRO
E
XECUTION
.......................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Macro Stack ..............................................................................................................................................................................9-11
Entry Buffer...............................................................................................................................................................................9-12
Using Macros In The Setup Mode ...........................................................................................................................................9-15
Macro Abort..............................................................................................................................................................................9-16
Disabling Macros At Power-up ...............................................................................................................................................9-17
M ACRO L ANGUAGE .......................................................................................................................................................................9-18
Macro Commands.....................................................................................................................................................................9-18
Complete Macro Command .....................................................................................................................................................9-30
B
OOLEAN
L
OGIC
..........................................................................................................................................................................9-152
The "If" Statement ...................................................................................................................................................................9-153
The "Else" (If Not) Statement .................................................................................................................................................9-154
The 'And' Condition ................................................................................................................................................................9-154
The 'Or' Condition ..................................................................................................................................................................9-155
Grouping "If" Statements .......................................................................................................................................................9-156
Nested "If" Statements ............................................................................................................................................................9-157
P OINTERS ......................................................................................................................................................................................9-160
Variable Pointers....................................................................................................................................................................9-160
Non-variable Pointers ............................................................................................................................................................9-161
I
NTERRUPT
M
ACROS
....................................................................................................................................................................9-161
Invoking An Interrupt Macro .................................................................................................................................................9-162
M
ACRO
D
EBUG
............................................................................................................................................................................9-163
Reviewing The Macro Debug Table ......................................................................................................................................9-164
Printing The Macro Debug Table..........................................................................................................................................9-164
Clearing The Macro Debug ...................................................................................................................................................9-166
Using Macro Debug Macro Commands ...............................................................................................................................9-166 vi
Downloading Individual Macros ...........................................................................................................................................9-166
C H A P T E R 1 0 ...................................................................................................................................................................SETPOINTS
10-1
S
ETPOINTS
......................................................................................................................................................................................10-2
S
ETPOINT
S
ETUP
P
ARAMETERS
.....................................................................................................................................................10-2
S
ETPOINT
O
PERATION
....................................................................................................................................................................10-3
Setpoint Status Mode ................................................................................................................................................................10-3
Setpoint Status Serial Transmission ........................................................................................................................................10-4
Setpoint Inputs...........................................................................................................................................................................10-4
S ETPOINT K EYPAD E NTRY .............................................................................................................................................................10-5
S ETPOINT O UTPUT R ESPONSE T IME ..............................................................................................................................................10-5
S ETPOINT S ETUP E XAMPLES ..........................................................................................................................................................10-6
S
ETPOINT
O
PTIONS
......................................................................................................................................................................10-10
C H A P T E R 1 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... DATABASE
11-1
I
NSTALLATION
................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
What is a Database? .................................................................................................................................................................11-2
Database Applications..............................................................................................................................................................11-3
Transaction Recorder Database..............................................................................................................................................11-3
Part Number Look-Up Database.............................................................................................................................................11-4
Quantity On Hand Database....................................................................................................................................................11-4
Batch Formula Lookup Database............................................................................................................................................11-4
Database Setup .........................................................................................................................................................................11-4
D ATABASE M ENU ..........................................................................................................................................................................11-6
Recall Row (Function 1)...........................................................................................................................................................11-8
Update Row (Function 2).........................................................................................................................................................11-8
Make Row (Function 3)............................................................................................................................................................11-9
Print Database (Function 4)....................................................................................................................................................11-9
Advanced Database Menus ......................................................................................................................................................11-9
First Row (Function 5)...........................................................................................................................................................11-10
Next Row (Function 6)............................................................................................................................................................11-10
Next Match (Function 7) ........................................................................................................................................................11-11
Clear Row (Function 8)..........................................................................................................................................................11-11
Clear Column (Function 9)....................................................................................................................................................11-12
Clear Database (Function 10)...............................................................................................................................................11-12
Set Database (Function 11)....................................................................................................................................................11-12
Set Column (Function 12) ......................................................................................................................................................11-13
Download Database (Function 13) .......................................................................................................................................11-14
Print Row (Function 14).........................................................................................................................................................11-15
Print Errors (Function 15).....................................................................................................................................................11-16
Upload New (Function 16).....................................................................................................................................................11-16
Upload Update (Function 17)................................................................................................................................................11-17
Sort Database (Function 18)..................................................................................................................................................11-18
Auto Test (Function 19)..........................................................................................................................................................11-19
P RINT F ORMAT .............................................................................................................................................................................11-19
Down-Load Format ................................................................................................................................................................11-20
Upload Data Format ..............................................................................................................................................................11-21
Time/Date Handling ...............................................................................................................................................................11-21
Database Information Parameters ........................................................................................................................................11-22
Defaulting the Entire Database .............................................................................................................................................11-22
Memory Consumption ............................................................................................................................................................11-22
Database Errors......................................................................................................................................................................11-23
Notes Regarding the Storing and Recalling of Weight Data ...............................................................................................11-24
Database Examples ................................................................................................................................................................11-24 vii
C H A P T E R 1 2 ...........................................................................................................................PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL I/O
12-1
A
PPLICATIONS
................................................................................................................................................................................12-2
Encoders....................................................................................................................................................................................12-2
Flow Meters ..............................................................................................................................................................................12-2 conveyors...................................................................................................................................................................................12-2
Diverters....................................................................................................................................................................................12-2
Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................................................12-2
C ONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................12-3
T ERMINOLOGY ...............................................................................................................................................................................12-3
I/O P ARAMETERS ...........................................................................................................................................................................12-4
I/O Parameter Numbers ...........................................................................................................................................................12-4
Referencing I/O Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................12-4
Viewing I/O Parameters...........................................................................................................................................................12-4
Scaling I/O Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................12-5
S
ETUP
A
ND
O
PERATIONAL
D
ETAILS
.............................................................................................................................................12-5
F
UNCTIONS
.....................................................................................................................................................................................12-7
None: (Function 0)...................................................................................................................................................................12-7
Frequency Output: (Function 1).............................................................................................................................................12-8
Setpoint (Function 2).............................................................................................................................................................12-10
Frequency Measurement Method ‘A’ (Function 3)..............................................................................................................12-10
Frequency Measurement Method ‘B’ (Function 4).............................................................................................................12-14
Phase Time (Function 5)........................................................................................................................................................12-16
Delay In, Delay Out (Functions 6 & 7).................................................................................................................................12-19
Quadrature Decode, 2 Wire (Function 8).............................................................................................................................12-21
Quadrature Decode, 3 Wire (Function 9).............................................................................................................................12-23
PDIO Sampled Frequency (Function 10) ............................................................................................................................12-26
C H A P T E R 1 3 ....................................................................................................................................................................... OPTIONS
13-1
O
PTIONS
.........................................................................................................................................................................................13-2
660 S ERIES B US O PTIONS ..............................................................................................................................................................13-3
60 S ERIES B US M ODULES (SBM) .................................................................................................................................................13-5
Mounting Internal 660 Series SBMs........................................................................................................................................13-5
Mounting An Internal 460 SBM...............................................................................................................................................13-7
2-O PTION M OUNTING P LATE K IT .................................................................................................................................................13-8
Mounting SBMs to the RF Cover.............................................................................................................................................13-8
Mounting SBMs to the 663 Sub-panel ...................................................................................................................................13-10
Mounting SBMs to the 665 Option Mounting Bracket .........................................................................................................13-12
Mounting More Than 2 SBMs on the 665 Option Mounting Bracket .................................................................................13-14
Mounting SBMs Externally ....................................................................................................................................................13-15
S
ERIAL
I/O M
ODULES
..................................................................................................................................................................13-16
60 S
ERIES
I/O M
ODULES
.............................................................................................................................................................13-17
16 P OSITION I/O S ETPOINT O PTION ............................................................................................................................................13-21
Installing the 24663B-100C0 16 Position I/O Board in the 663 .........................................................................................13-21
Installing the 420819-31396 16 Position I/O Board ............................................................................................................13-22
660 Series Interface Connections ..........................................................................................................................................13-23
M ULTI -S CALE I NSTALLATION .....................................................................................................................................................13-24
Multi-Scale Setup Parameters ...............................................................................................................................................13-25
A/D Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................................13-26
Scale Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................................13-26
Weigh Mode Operation ..........................................................................................................................................................13-26
Connecting Multiple SBMs .....................................................................................................................................................13-27
A
NALOG
O
UTPUT
I
NSTALLATION
................................................................................................................................................13-27
Analog Output Parameter Setup ............................................................................................................................................13-28 viii
Analog Output Calibration.....................................................................................................................................................13-28
Connecting Multiple SBMs .....................................................................................................................................................13-30
R
EMOTE
D
ISPLAY
M
ODULE
I
NSTALLATION
...............................................................................................................................13-30
Remote Display Parameter Setup..........................................................................................................................................13-32
Connecting Multiple SBMs .....................................................................................................................................................13-32
RS-485 M
ODULE
I
NSTALLATION
................................................................................................................................................13-33
Network Parameter Setup ......................................................................................................................................................13-34
20 M A C URRENT L OOP M ODULE .................................................................................................................................................13-38
20mA Parameter Setup ...........................................................................................................................................................13-39
20 mA Current Loop Connections .........................................................................................................................................13-39
SCR M ODULE ..............................................................................................................................................................................13-40
Specifications ..........................................................................................................................................................................13-40
Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................................13-40
Connections .............................................................................................................................................................................13-41
SCR Module Parameter Setup ...............................................................................................................................................13-42
Testing The SCR Module ........................................................................................................................................................13-42
460 S
ERIES
T
IME
/D
ATE
M
ODULE
...............................................................................................................................................13-43
S
PLASH
G
UARDS
..........................................................................................................................................................................13-43
D URA S HIELD ................................................................................................................................................................................13-43
A LPHA K EYPAD ...........................................................................................................................................................................13-44
Alpha Keypad Features ..........................................................................................................................................................13-45
Function Keys .........................................................................................................................................................................13-45
Installing the Alpha Keypad ...................................................................................................................................................13-46
Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................................13-47
Using the Alpha Keypad .........................................................................................................................................................13-52
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................................................13-53
A
LPHANUMERIC
S
ERIAL
K
EYBOARD
C
ONVERTER
K
IT
..............................................................................................................13-54
Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................................13-54
Character Map ........................................................................................................................................................................13-55
C
ABLES
.........................................................................................................................................................................................13-55
4X20 VF D ISPLAY .......................................................................................................................................................................13-59
Hardware Setup ......................................................................................................................................................................13-59
Display Commands.................................................................................................................................................................13-60
R E F LASH S OFTWARE ...................................................................................................................................................................13-65
BDM F LASH S OFTWARE .............................................................................................................................................................13-65
C H A P T E R 1 4 .............................................................................................................................INFORMATION PARAMETERS
14-1
I
NFORMATION
P
ARAMETERS
.........................................................................................................................................................14-2
Accessing Information Parameters..........................................................................................................................................14-2
Memory Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................14-2
Processing Speed Parameters..................................................................................................................................................14-7
Identification Parameters.........................................................................................................................................................14-7
Audit Trail Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................14-8
Calibration Parameters............................................................................................................................................................14-8
Diagnostic Parameters ...........................................................................................................................................................14-11
Utility Parameters...................................................................................................................................................................14-14
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................................... A-1
P ERFORMANCE ................................................................................................................................................................................ A-1
E
LECTRICAL
.................................................................................................................................................................................... A-2
C
OMMUNICATIONS
.......................................................................................................................................................................... A-2
A
PPROVALS
..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-2
I
NPUT
/O
UTPUT
................................................................................................................................................................................ A-3
E
NCLOSURE
..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-3
D
ISPLAY
........................................................................................................................................................................................... A-4 ix
6-Digit, 7-Segment Display........................................................................................................................................................A-4
4 X 20 Character VFD................................................................................................................................................................A-4
8 X 40 Character Graphic LCD.................................................................................................................................................A-5
16 X 40 Character Graphic LCD...............................................................................................................................................A-5
K
EYPAD
........................................................................................................................................................................................... A-6
460 Keypad..................................................................................................................................................................................A-6
465 Keypad..................................................................................................................................................................................A-8
560 Series Keypad ......................................................................................................................................................................A-9
660 Series Keypad ......................................................................................................................................................................A-9
C ONFIGURATIONS ......................................................................................................................................................................... A-10
D IMENSIONAL D RAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................................ A-11
C LOCK M ODULE S PECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................................ A-16
FCC C
OMPLIANCE
I
NFORMATION
................................................................................................................................................ A-17
APPENDIX B ASCII CHART..................................................................................................................................................... B-17
APPENDIX C VFD / LCD CHARACTER SETS ....................................................................................................................... C-1
APPENDIX D PARAMETER SETUP ......................................................................................................................................... D-1
APPENDIX E ERROR CODES / MESSAGES........................................................................................................................... E-1
O
PERATIONAL
M
ODE
E
RROR
C
ODES
..............................................................................................................................................E-1
S ETUP M ODE E RROR C ODES ...........................................................................................................................................................E-2
H ARDWARE P ROBLEM E RROR C ODES ............................................................................................................................................E-2
C ALIBRATION E RROR C ODES ..........................................................................................................................................................E-3
G ENERAL E RROR C ODES .................................................................................................................................................................E-4
M ACRO E RROR C ODES ....................................................................................................................................................................E-5
S ETUP E RROR C ODES .......................................................................................................................................................................E-6
C
OMMUNICATIONS
E
RROR
M
ESSAGES
...........................................................................................................................................E-6
M
ISCELLANEOUS
M
ESSAGES
...........................................................................................................................................................E-7
APPENDIX F ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS.....................................................................................................................................F-1 x
C h a p t t e r r 1
I
NTRODUCTION
This chapter contains information on the conventions used within this manual.
O V E R V I E W
About This Manual 1-2
Conventions 1-2
Symbols 1-2
Operator Interface 1-2
Examples 1-4
1-1
1-2 Chapter 1
GSE Scale Systems
I
NTRODUCTION
The 60 Series Technical Reference Manual contains installation, configuration, and calibration information for all GSE 60 Series
Instrumentation. Newer firmware is usually backward compatible with prior revisions. Refer to previous documentation for units with older firmware.
A BOUT T HIS M ANUAL
This manual is divided into chapters that focus on specific topics:
Chapters 2, 3 and 4 contain installation, configuration, and calibration information.
Chapter 5 describes the weigh mode operation.
Chapters 6 through 12 cover advanced configuration information.
Chapter 13 describes the installation and configuration of optional components.
Chapter 14 contains information parameter information.
Appendixes A through F contain supplementary information such as specifications, assembly drawings, and error codes and messages.
C ONVENTIONS
Throughout this manual the term “ 60 Series Instrumentation ” makes a collective reference to all models for the 660 Series, 560 Series and 460
Series family of instrumentation. The term “ indicator ” also refers to all 60
Series instrumentation when used without reference to a specific model.
Where differences arise between product families, the term “ 660 Series
Controllers ”, “ 560 Series Controllers ” and “ 460 Series Indicators ” will be used to identify the respective family.
Reference to a specific model within a family uses that model’s number.
For example, 661 refers specifically to the Model 661.
S
YMBOLS
S
WARNING!
!
CAUTION!
?
REMINDER i
INFORMATION
Identifies an electrical shock hazard.
Indicates important considerations.
Emphasizes a statement.
Provides additional information.
O PERATOR I NTERFACE
Procedures often refer to information that appears on the 60 Series display as well as the keystrokes required to perform a certain function.
Introduction 1-3
Display Information
Display information is shown in examples exactly as it would appear on the 7-segment VFD or 4X20 VFD:
SetUP
Keyin
Code:
SetUP Keyin Code:
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
Display information may also appear within chapter text, such as the message “ Need Code
”
or “ Mot’n Delay ”.
Keystrokes
Keystrokes are listed in examples exactly as they should be keyed in using the front panel keypad:
100 ó 23640 é å
Multiple keys that need to be pressed simultaneously are designated as:
ã + ó
Keystrokes listed within chapter text may also appear in bold type:
100 [SELECT] 23640 [ID] [ENTER]
- or -
[CLR] + [SELECT]
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
1-4 Chapter 1
E XAMPLES
Examples combine sequential keystroke and display information:
Example:
Access Setup Mode
100 ó
SetUP Keyin
Code:
23640 é å
SetUP Allow
Mods!
P10*01 Scale
1
GSE Scale Systems
1-1
C h a p t t e r r 2
I
NSTALLATION
This chapter provides instructions for installation of the 60 Series instruments and load cells connections.
I
NSTALLATION
O V E R V I E W
Installation 2-1
Environmental Suitability 2-2
460 and 465 Indicators 2-2
560 and 562 Controllers 2-7
660, 661, and 662 Controllers 2-12
663 Controller 2-16
665 Controller 2-17
Load Cell Connections 2-21
DC Power Connections 2-24
2-1
2-2 Chapter 2
This chapter provides instructions for installing the 60 Series instruments and connecting them to load cells. Please review the step-by-step procedures for your particular controller model before you install it.
i
See Appendix A for controller dimensions and drawings.
E
NVIRONMENTAL
S
UITABILITY
All 60 Series instrumentation share the following features:
•
The keypads are made of silicon rubber. Specifications that describe the reactions of this material to various solvents are available from
GSE.
•
The display window is made from a polycarbonate material. The gasket for the display is a closed cell polyethylene foam with a rubber based pressure sensitive adhesive. Although resistant to water, detergent, and alcohol, this gasket may be adversely affected by aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons.
•
The rear panel gasket on stainless steel indicators is made from an
FDA approved Silicone.
•
60 Series instruments are supplied in a sealed enclosure. Stainless steel models may be used in a washdown environment. Care must be taken to ensure that the AC power socket outlet is properly protected.
For the 460 Series, 560 Series and models 660, 661, and 662, GSE offers a Splash Guard transparent vinyl cover for added protection. For models
465, 560, 562, 660, 661, 662, and 665, a dura-shield is also available to protect the lens and keypad. Contact your local GSE distributor for more information.
460
AND
465 I
NDICATORS
Model 460 and 465 indicators are offered in standard and panel mount versions. All general setup, calibration, and custom programming operations of the panel-mount versions are identical to those of the respective standard versions. Differences between the standard and panel mount versions are mainly in the enclosure and the position of both the main printed circuit board and display.
Standard 460 and 465 controllers have a swivel bracket for table-top use.
Panel-mount versions of the 460 and 465 controllers are designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments and do not have a swivel bracket. The main printed circuit board is orientated so that the component side faces away from the display and the non-component side faces the same direction as the keypad, allowing easy servicing. In addition, a rear cover protects the main board and components against physical and electrical damage.
GSE Scale Systems
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source. Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure!
Installation 2-3
S TANDARD 460 AND 465 I NDICATORS
The standard 460 and 465 indicators can be installed for table-top use or permanent mounting.
T ABLE -T OP U SE
For tabletop use, position the indicator for convenient viewing. A swivel bracket with non-slip rubber feet enables tilting of the controller face to any viewing angle without the controller sliding when you press the keys.
P ERMANENT M OUNTING
The swivel bracket has four holes for mounting to a fixed surface. The holes are 0.7 mm (0.28 in) diameter to accommodate M6 metric or 1/4 in fasteners. For the mounting hole pattern and overall dimensions, see
Appendix A.
To remove the rear panel:
1. Remove AC power by unplugging the indicator from the power outlet socket.
2. Disconnect any cables from their source connectors.
3. Using a #2 cross-tip (Phillips) screwdriver or an 8mm socket, remove the eight 8-mm hex head screws from the rear panel (see Figure 2-1).
Figure 2-1: 460 and 465 Rear Panel
4. Carefully lift the rear panel from the enclosure, and disconnect the keypad ribbon cable from J8 on the main printed circuit board (see
Figure 2-2).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-4 Chapter 2
GSE Scale Systems
Figure 2-2: 460 and 465 Main Board
5. Disconnect the display cable from J1 on the main printed circuit board.
6. Connect the load cell leads to J2 on the main board (see Figure 2-2 and refer to page 2-19).
To re-install the rear panel:
1. Connect the keypad ribbon cable to J8 on the main board (see Figure
2-2).
2. Connect the display cable to J1 on the main printed circuit board.
3. Move the rear panel into position.
4. Tighten the strain relief to ensure a firm grip on each cable.
5. Mount the rear panel to the indicator with the eight 8-mm hex head screws.
6. Using a #2 cross tip (Phillips) screwdriver, tighten the screws on the rear panel. First tighten all the screws hand tight in order to provide even pressure on the gasket, then tighten each screw until it begins to visibly compress the gasket. This ensures the best environmental seal and maximum electromagnetic interference (EMI), radio-frequency
(RFI), and electrostatic discharge (ESD) shielding performance. Over tightening the screws can deform the rear panel resulting in a poor seal.
7. Reconnect any cables to the respective source connectors.
8. Plug the indicator to the AC power outlet socket.
9. Test the indicator for proper operation.
Installation 2-5
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source! Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure.
P ANEL M OUNT 460 AND 465 I NDICATORS
Panel mount versions of the 460 and 465 indicators are designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments.
P ANEL M OUNT V ERSION R EAR C OVER
Panel mount versions of the 460 and 465 indicators offer a rear cover to protect the main board against physical and electrical damage. The rear cover enables easy access to the main board. There is no need to remove the entire panel mount unit for servicing.
The rear cover snaps onto the board mounting plate. A single M4x0.7 hex bolt is included for installing a legal-for-trade seal and for fastening the rear cover.
Two slots are positioned at the bottom of the cover to enable power, load cell, printer, computer, and other wire routing. All wire strain relieves and terminals should be positioned below or near this area.
The serial number, power requirements, and approvals label is on the cover.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
I NSTALLATION
The procedure for installing a 460 and 465 panel mount indicator is identical with the exception of the panel cut-out size (see Figure 2-3 and
Figure 2-4).
Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (460)
Figure 2-3 shows the cut-out dimensions for the 460 panel mount indicator.
Figure 2-3: 460 Panel Mount Cut-Out Dimensions
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-6 Chapter 2
Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (465)
Figure 2-4 shows the cut-out dimensions for the 465 panel mount indicator.
GSE Scale Systems
Figure 2-4: 465 Panel Mount Cut-Out Dimensions
To install panel-mount 460 and 465 indicators:
1. Make a cut-out in the panel using the dimensions specified in Figure
2-3 for a 460 indicator or Figure 2-4 an for a 465 indicator.
The corners are typically 0.1R maximum.
2. Remove the 8 hex nuts holding the main board front panel to the back bracket.
3. Make sure the gasket remains on the front panel side. When installed, the gasket will be compressed against the front of the enclosure cutout.
4. Position the main board front panel inside the cut-out making sure the keypad is facing in the correct upright position.
5. From the inside of the enclosure fit the back bracket over the studs on the main board front panel.
6. Install the 8 hex nuts from the inside of the panel.
7. Tighten nuts until they are hand tight and pressing against the back panel surface. Then tighten each nut by 3/4 turn to compress the gasket to the front of the panel.
To open the panel-mount 460 and 465 indicators:
1. Remove AC power by unplugging the indicator from the power outlet socket.
2. Disconnect any additional cables from the respective source connectors.
Installation 2-7
3. Remove the M4 hex bolt, if installed. Hook a finger under the edge of the cover. Pull outward and upward to disengage the cover from the mounting plate tabs.
4. Install the load cell leads into J2 on the main board (see Figure 2-2 and refer to page 2-19).
To re-install the rear panel:
1. Move the rear cover into position. Ensure that all of the cables are positioned within the cutouts of the cover. Press the cover straight towards the panel until the left and right side slots snap over the tabs on the mounting plate.
2. Mount the rear cover, if used, to the indicator with the four 8-mm hex head screws.
3. Install the M4 hex bolt in the upper left corner using a 7mm socket.
4. Reconnect any cables from the respective source connectors.
5. Plug the indicator into the AC power outlet socket.
6. Test the indicator for proper operation.
560
AND
562 C
ONTROLLERS
Model 560 and 562 controllers are offered in standard and panel mount versions. All general setup, calibration, and custom programming operations of the panel-mount versions are identical to those of the respective standard versions. Differences between the standard and panel mount versions are mainly in the enclosure and the position of both the main printed circuit board and display.
Standard 560 and 562 controllers have a swivel bracket for table-top use.
Panel-mount versions of the 560 and 562 controllers are designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments and do not have a swivel bracket. The main printed circuit board is orientated so that the component side faces away from the display and the non-component side faces the same direction as the keypad, allowing easy servicing. In addition, a rear cover protects the main board and components against physical and electrical damage.
S TANDARD 560 AND 562 C ONTROLLERS
The standard 560 and 562 controllers can be installed for table-top use or permanent mounting.
T
ABLE
-T
OP
U
SE
For tabletop use, position the controller for convenient viewing. A swivel bracket with non-slip rubber feet enables tilting of the controller face to any viewing angle without the controller sliding when you press the keys.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-8 Chapter 2
P ERMANENT M OUNTING
The swivel bracket has four holes for mounting to a fixed surface. The holes are 0.7 mm (0.28 in) diameter to accommodate M6 metric or 1/4 in fasteners.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source. Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure!
To remove the rear panel:
1. Remove AC power by unplugging the controller from the power outlet socket.
2. Disconnect any cables from their source connectors.
3. Using a #2 cross-tip (Phillips) screwdriver or an 8mm socket, remove the eight 8-mm hex head screws from the rear panel (see Figure 2-5).
Figure 2-5: 560 and 562 Rear Panel
4. Carefully lift the rear panel from the enclosure, and disconnect the keypad ribbon cable from J5 on the main printed circuit board (see
Figure 2-6).
GSE Scale Systems
Installation 2-9
Figure 2-6: 560 Series Main Board
5. For the Model 560, disconnect the display cable from J3 on the main printed circuit board.
- or -
For the Model 562, disconnect the display ribbon cable from J3 on the
LCD driver board #420921-36617. Disconnect the backlight cable from
J4 on the LCD driver board.
6. Connect the load cell leads to J2 on the main board (see and refer to page 2-19).
To re-install the rear panel:
1. Connect the keypad ribbon cable to J5 on the main board (see Figure
2-6).
2. For the Model 560, connect the display cable to J3 on the main printed circuit board.
or -
For the Model 562, connect the display ribbon cable to J3 on the LCD driver board #420921-36617. Connect the backlight cable to J4 on the
LCD driver board.
3. Move the rear panel into position.
4. Tighten the strain relief to ensure a firm grip on each cable.
5. Mount the rear panel to the controller with the eight 8-mm hex head screws.
6. Using a #2 cross tip (Phillips) screwdriver, tighten the screws on the rear panel. First tighten all the screws hand tight in order to provide even pressure on the gasket, then tighten each screw until it begins to visibly compress the gasket. This ensures the best environmental seal and maximum electromagnetic interference (EMI), radio-frequency
(RFI), and electrostatic discharge (ESD) shielding performance. Over
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-10 Chapter 2
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source! Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure.
tightening the screws can deform the rear panel resulting in a poor seal.
7. Reconnect any cables to the respective source connectors.
8. Plug the controller to the AC power outlet socket.
9. Test the controller for proper operation.
P ANEL M OUNT 560 AND 562 C ONTROLLERS
Panel mount versions of the 560 and 562 controllers are designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments.
P ANEL M OUNT V ERSION R EAR C OVER
Panel mount versions of the 560 and 562 controllers offer a rear cover to protect the main board against physical and electrical damage. The rear cover enables easy access to the main board. There is no need to remove the entire panel mount unit for servicing.
The rear cover snaps onto the board mounting plate. A single M4x0.7 hex bolt is included for NTEP sealing and for fastening the rear cover.
Two slots are positioned at the bottom of the cover to enable power, load cell, printer, computer, and other wire routing. All wire strain relieves and terminals should be positioned below or near this area.
The serial number, power requirements, and approvals label is on the cover.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
I
NSTALLATION
The procedure for installing a 560 and 562 panel mount controller is identical.
GSE Scale Systems
Figure 2-7: 560 and 562 Panel Mount Cut-Out
Installation 2-11
To install panel-mount 560 and 562 controllers:
1. Make a cut out in the panel using the dimensions shown in Figure 2-7.
The corners are typically 0.1R maximum.
2. Remove the 8 hex nuts holding the main board front panel to the back bracket.
3. Make sure the gasket remains on the front panel side. When installed, the gasket will be compressed against the front of the enclosure cutout.
4. Position the main board front panel inside the cutout making sure the keypad is facing in the correct upright position.
5. From the inside of the enclosure fit the back bracket over the studs on the main board front panel.
6. Install the 8 hex nuts from the inside of the panel.
7. Tighten nuts until they are hand tight and pressing against the back panel surface. Then tighten each nut by 3/4 turn to compress the gasket to the front of the panel.
To open the panel-mount 560 and 562 controllers:
1. Remove AC power by unplugging the controller from the power outlet socket.
2. Disconnect any additional cables from the respective source connectors.
3. Remove the M4 hex bolt, if installed. Hook a finger under the edge of the cover. Pull outward and upward to disengage the cover from the mounting plate tabs.
4. Install the load cell leads into J2 on the main board (see page 2-19).
To re-install the rear panel:
1. Move the rear cover into position. Ensure that all of the cables are positioned within the cutouts of the cover. Press the cover straight towards the panel until the left and right side slots snap over the tabs on the mounting plate.
2. Mount the rear cover, if used, to the controller with the four 8-mm hex head screws.
3. Install the M4 hex bolt in the upper left corner using a 7mm socket.
4. Reconnect any cables from the respective source connectors.
5. Plug the controller into the AC power outlet socket.
6. Test the controller for proper operation.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-12 Chapter 2
660, 661,
AND
662 C
ONTROLLERS
Model 660, 661 and 662 controllers are offered in standard and panel mount versions. All general setup, calibration, and custom programming operations of the panel-mount versions are identical to those of the respective standard versions. Differences between the standard and panel mount versions are mainly in the enclosure and the position of both the main printed circuit board and display.
Standard 660, 661 and 662 controllers have a swivel bracket for table-top use.
Panel-mount versions of the 660, 661, and 662 controllers are designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments and do not have a swivel bracket. The main printed circuit board is orientated so that the component side faces away from the display and the non-component side faces the same direction as the keypad, allowing easy servicing. In addition, a rear cover protects the main board and components against physical and electrical damage.
S TANDARD 660, 661 AND 662 C ONTROLLERS
The standard 660, 661 and 662 controllers can be installed for table-top use or permanent mounting.
T ABLE -T OP U SE
For tabletop use, position the controller for convenient viewing. A swivel bracket with non-slip rubber feet enables tilting of the controller face to any viewing angle without the controller sliding when you press the keys.
P ERMANENT M OUNTING
The swivel bracket has four holes for mounting to a fixed surface. The holes are 0.7 mm (0.28 in) diameter to accommodate M6 metric or 1/4 in fasteners.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source. Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure!
To remove the rear panel:
1.
Remove AC power by unplugging the controller from the power outlet socket.
2.
Disconnect any cables from their source connectors.
3.
Using a #2 cross-tip (Phillips) screwdriver or an 8mm socket, remove the eight 8-mm hex head screws from the rear panel (see Figure 2-8).
GSE Scale Systems
Installation 2-13
Figure 2-8: 660, 661 and 662 Rear Panel
4.
Carefully lift the rear panel from the enclosure, and disconnect the keypad ribbon cable from J5 on the main printed circuit board (see
Figure 2-9).
Figure 2-9: 660 Series Main Board
5.
For the Model 660, disconnect the display cable from J3 on the main printed circuit board.
- or -
For the Model 661, disconnect the three wire display cable from J7 on the main printed circuit board.
- or -
For the Model 662, disconnect the display ribbon cable from J3 on the
LCD driver board #420921-36617. Disconnect the backlight cable from
J4 on the LCD driver board.
6.
Connect the load cell leads to J2 on the main board (see Figure 2-9 and refer to page 2-19).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-14 Chapter 2
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source! Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure.
To re-install the rear panel:
1.
Connect the keypad ribbon cable to J5 on the main board (see Figure
2-9).
2.
For the Model 660, connect the display cable to J3 on the main printed circuit board.
or -
For the Model 661, connect the three wire display cable to J7 on the main printed circuit board.
or -
For the Model 662, connect the display ribbon cable to J3 on the LCD driver board #420921-36617. Connect the backlight cable to J4 on the
LCD driver board.
3.
Move the rear panel into position.
4.
Tighten the strain relief to ensure a firm grip on each cable.
5.
Mount the rear panel to the controller with the eight 8-mm hex head screws.
6.
Using a #2 cross tip (Phillips) screwdriver, tighten the screws on the rear panel. First tighten all the screws hand tight in order to provide even pressure on the gasket, then tighten each screw until it begins to visibly compress the gasket. This ensures the best environmental seal and maximum electromagnetic interference (EMI), radio-frequency
(RFI), and electrostatic discharge (ESD) shielding performance. Over tightening the screws can deform the rear panel resulting in a poor seal.
7.
Reconnect any cables to the respective source connectors.
8.
Plug the controller to the AC power outlet socket.
9.
Test the controller for proper operation.
P ANEL M OUNT 660, 661 AND 662
C ONTROLLERS
Panel mount versions of the 660, 661, and 662 controllers are designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments.
P
ANEL
M
OUNT
V
ERSION
R
EAR
C
OVER
Panel mount versions of the 660, 661, and 662 controllers offer a rear cover to protect the main board against physical and electrical damage.
The rear cover enables easy access to the main board. There is no need to remove the entire panel mount unit for servicing.
The rear cover snaps onto the board mounting plate. A single M4x0.7 hex bolt is included for NTEP sealing and for fastening the rear cover.
Two slots are positioned at the bottom of the cover to enable power, load cell, printer, computer, and other wire routing. All wire strain relieves and terminals should be positioned below or near this area.
GSE Scale Systems
Installation 2-15
The serial number, power requirements, and approvals label is on the cover.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
I
NSTALLATION
The procedure for installing a 660, 661 and 662 panel mount controller is identical.
Figure 2-10: 660, 661 and 662 Panel Mount Cut-Out
To install panel-mount 660, 661 and 662 controllers:
1.
Make a cut out in the panel using the dimensions shown in Figure
2-10.
The corners are typically 0.1R maximum.
2.
Remove the 8 hex nuts holding the main board front panel to the back bracket.
3.
Make sure the gasket remains on the front panel side. When installed, the gasket will be compressed against the front of the enclosure cutout.
4.
Position the main board front panel inside the cutout making sure the keypad is facing in the correct upright position.
5.
From the inside of the enclosure fit the back bracket over the studs on the main board front panel.
6.
Install the 8 hex nuts from the inside of the panel.
7.
Tighten nuts until they are hand tight and pressing against the back panel surface. Then tighten each nut by 3/4 turn to compress the gasket to the front of the panel.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-16 Chapter 2
To open the panel-mount 660, 661, and 662 controllers:
1.
Remove AC power by unplugging the controller from the power outlet socket.
2.
Disconnect any additional cables from the respective source connectors.
3.
Remove the M4 hex bolt, if installed. Hook a finger under the edge of the cover. Pull outward and upward to disengage the cover from the mounting plate tabs.
4.
Install the load cell leads into J2 on the main board (see page 2-19).
To re-install the rear panel:
1.
Move the rear cover into position. Ensure that all of the cables are positioned within the cutouts of the cover. Press the cover straight towards the panel until the left and right side slots snap over the tabs on the mounting plate.
2.
Mount the rear cover, if used, to the controller with the four 8-mm hex head screws.
3.
Install the M4 hex bolt in the upper left corner using a 7mm socket.
4.
Reconnect any cables from the respective source connectors.
5.
Plug the controller into the AC power outlet socket.
6.
Test the controller for proper operation.
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source! Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure.
663 C
ONTROLLER
The Model 663 controller is designed for permanent installation as a control panel. It has four mounting flanges. The holes and slots are 0.44 in
(11.2 mm) diameter to accommodate 7/16-in diameter or M8 metric fasteners.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
To open the 663 Controller:
1. Turn off the controller by disconnecting it from the AC power supply.
2. Using a large, flat-tip screwdriver, loosen the spring-loaded 1/4-20 slotted pan head screws in the two fastening clamps on the right side of the controller, and slide the clamps to the right (see Figure 2-11).
3. Open the controller door.
4. Remove the M4 hex bolt, if installed. Hook a finger under the edge of the cover. Pull outward and upward to disengage the cover from the mounting plate tabs.
5. Locate the main board near the middle right of the controller door interior (see Figure 2-12).
GSE Scale Systems
Installation 2-17
6. Install the load cell leads into J2 on the main board (see Figure 2-9 and refer to page 2-19).
To close the 663 Controller:
1. Move the rear cover into position. Ensure that all of the cables are positioned within the cutouts of the cover. Press the cover straight towards the panel until the left and right side slots snap over the tabs on the mounting plate.
2. Mount the rear cover, if used, to the controller with the four 8-mm hex head screws.
3. Install the M4 hex bolt in the upper left corner using a 7mm socket.
4. Reconnect any cables from the respective source connectors.
5. Close the controller enclosure door.
6. Slide the exterior door fastening clamps to the left (see Figure 2-11).
7. Using a large, flat-tip screwdriver, tighten the 1/4-20 slotted pan head screws on the fastening clamps.
8. Connect the controller to an AC power supply to power it on.
Figure 2-11: 663 Front Panel
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-18 Chapter 2
GSE Scale Systems
Figure 2-12: 663 Internal View
665 C
ONTROLLER
The 665 controller is offered in standard and panel mount version. All general setup, calibration, and custom programming operations of the panel-mount versions are identical to those of the standard version.
Differences between the standard and panel mount versions are mainly in the enclosure and the position of both the main printed circuit board and display.
The standard 665 controller has a swivel bracket for table-top use.
The panel-mount version of the 665 controller is designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments and does not have a swivel bracket.
The main printed circuit board is orientated so that the component side faces away from the display and the non-component side faces the same direction as the keypad, allowing easy servicing. In addition, a rear cover protects the main board and components against physical and electrical damage.
S TANDARD 665 C ONTROLLER
The standard 665 controller can be installed for table-top use or permanent mounting.
T
ABLE
-T
OP
U
SE
For tabletop use, position the 665 controller for convenient viewing. The
665 has a swivel bracket that enables tilting of the controller face to any angle for viewing. The bracket also has non-slip rubber feet to prevent sliding when you press the keys.
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source! Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure.
Installation 2-19
P ERMANENT M OUNTING
The swivel bracket on the 665 controller has four holes for mounting to a fixed surface. The holes are 0.7 mm (0.28 in) diameter to accommodate
M6 metric or 1/4 in fasteners.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
To remove the rear panel:
1. Remove AC power by unplugging the controller from the power outlet socket.
2. Disconnect any additional cables from their source connectors.
3. Using a #2 cross-tip (Phillips) screwdriver or an 8mm socket, remove the 10 8-mm hex head Phillips screws from the rear panel. See Figure
2-13 for a view of the rear panel.
Figure 2-13: 665 Rear Panel
4. Disconnect the keypad ribbon cable from J5 on the main printed circuit board. See Figure 2-9.
5. For the 665 VF display model, disconnect the six digit display ribbon cable from J3 on the main printed circuit board. Disconnect the 4x20 cable from J7 on the main printed circuit board.
For the 665 LCD display model, disconnect the display ribbon cable from J3 on the LCD driver board #420921-36617. Disconnect the backlight cable from J4 on the LCD driver board.
6. Connect the load cell leads to J2 on the main board (see Figure 2-9 and refer to page 2-19).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-20 Chapter 2
To re-install the rear panel:
1. Reconnect the keypad ribbon cable to J5 on the main board.
2. Move the rear panel into position.
3. Tighten the strain relief to ensure a firm grip on each cable.
4. Mount the rear panel to the controller with the 10 8-mm hex head
Philips screws.
5. Using a #2 cross tip (Phillips) screwdriver, tighten the screws on the rear panel. First tighten all the screws hand tight in order to provide even pressure on the gasket, then tighten each screw until it begins to visibly compress the gasket. This ensures the best environmental seal and maximum electromagnetic interference (EMI), radio-frequency
(RFI), and electrostatic discharge (ESD) shielding performance. Over tightening the screws can deform the rear panel.
6. Reconnect any cables to the respective source connectors.
7. Plug the controller to the AC power outlet socket.
8. Test the controller for proper operation.
!
Any operation that involves opening the controller enclosure should be performed only by qualified service personnel and only after the power is completely disconnected from the power source! Hazardous voltage is accessible within the enclosure.
P ANEL M OUNT 665 C ONTROLLER
The panel mount version of the 665 controller is designed for permanent mounting in washdown environments.
P ANEL M OUNT V ERSION R EAR C OVER
The panel mount 665 controller offers a rear cover to protect the main board against physical and electrical damage. The rear cover enables easy access to the main board. There is no need to remove the entire panel mount unit for servicing.
The rear cover snaps onto the board mounting plate. A single M4x0.7 hex bolt is included for NTEP sealing and for fastening the rear cover.
Two slots are positioned at the bottom of the cover to enable power, load cell, printer, computer, and other wire routing. All wire strain relieves and terminals should be positioned below or near this area.
The serial number, power requirements, and approvals label is on the cover.
Refer to Appendix A for dimensional drawings.
GSE Scale Systems
I NSTALLATION
Installation 2-21
Figure 2-14: 665 Panel Mount Cut-Out Dimensions
To install panel-mount 660, 661 and 662 controllers:
1. Make a cut out in the panel using the dimensions shown in.
The corners are typically 0.1R maximum.
2. Remove the 8 hex nuts holding the main board front panel to the back bracket.
3. Make sure the gasket remains on the front panel side. When installed, the gasket will be compressed against the front of the enclosure cutout.
4. Position the main board front panel inside the cutout making sure the keypad is facing in the correct upright position.
5. From the inside of the enclosure fit the back bracket over the studs on the main board front panel.
6. Install the 8 hex nuts from the inside of the panel.
7. Tighten nuts until they are hand tight and pressing against the back panel surface. Then tighten each nut by 3/4 turn to compress the gasket to the front of the panel.
To open the panel-mount 660, 661, and 662 controllers:
1. Remove AC power by unplugging the controller from the power outlet socket.
2. Disconnect any additional cables from the respective source connectors.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-22 Chapter 2
3. Remove the M4 hex bolt, if installed. Hook a finger under the edge of the cover. Pull outward and upward to disengage the cover from the mounting plate tabs.
4. Install the load cell leads into J2 on the main board (see page 2-19).
To re-install the rear panel:
1. Move the rear cover into position. Ensure that all of the cables are positioned within the cutouts of the cover. Press the cover straight towards the panel until the left and right side slots snap over the tabs on the mounting plate.
2. Mount the rear cover, if used, to the controller with the four 8-mm hex head screws.
3. Install the M4 hex bolt in the upper left corner using a 7mm socket.
4. Reconnect any cables from the respective source connectors.
5. Plug the controller into the AC power outlet socket.
6. Test the controller for proper operation.
L
OAD
C
ELL
C
ONNECTIONS
This section provides information on connecting the load cell the 60 Series instruments.
T RANSDUCER E XCITATION
All 60 Series instruments are designed to be connected to any
Wheatstone bridge design strain gage-based force measuring transducer.
The instrument supplies 10 VDC developed from +5VDC and -5VDC referenced to common for the excitation voltage. The maximum excitation supply current available for the load cell (s) is
•
460 Series 350 mA; twelve (12) 350 ohm load cells
•
560 Series 400 mA; fourteen (14) 350 ohm load cells
•
660 Series 400 mA; fourteen (14) 350 ohm load cells
C ABLE R ECOMMENDATIONS
A high quality cable that has an overall braided shield and 16 to 24 gage
(AWG) stranded wire is recommended for the connection to the weigh platform. The load cell cable should be routed into the controller enclosure through the strain relief nearest the J2 loadcell connector.
GSE Scale Systems
i
The PC board mounting nut is used to establish the earth ground reference for the PC board circuitry, so the nut must always be in place when the controller is powered up!
For load cells with six conductors, two jumpers (E1 and E2, next to
J2 on the Main PC Board) must be adjusted so external sensing can be operational.
i
Load cell connections are labeled on the PC board next to the J2 connector.
Installation 2-23
S ENSE L EAD C ONNECTIONS
Four-lead or six-lead scale platforms can be connected to any 60 Series instrument. Refer to Table 2-1 for wiring information.
Table 2-1: Load Cell Connections
Load Cell Function
+ Excitation
- Excitation
+ Signal
- Signal
+ Sense
- Sense
GSE Platform
Color Code
Red
Black
White
Green
Red (optional)
Black (optional)
Six-lead cables include two extra wires for sensing the actual excitation voltage at the load cell. This connection compensates for variations in the resistance of the excitation wiring which can change due to variations in temperature, especially over long distances.
If the load cell has six leads, the jumpers (E1 and E2) next to the J2 connector should be set to the EXT (bottom) position.
If the load cell has four leads, the jumpers (E1 and E2) must be set to the
INT (top) position. This jumpers the excitation voltage to the sense leads on the main board, providing the required excitation feedback in the absence of the sense leads.
I NSTALLATION
To connect the load cell:
1. Strip back the jacket of the weigh platform load cell cable approximately 3 cm (1.25 in) from the end of the cable.
2. Using a small screwdriver, create an opening in the braided shield, just past the end of the jacket. Pull the wires out of the braided shield.
3. Strip back the insulation of each conductor wire 0.6 cm (1/4 in).
4. Twist the strands of each conductor to aid insertion into J2. Do not tin the leads. The lever connectors are designed to provide a gas tight vibration proof connection to stranded wires. Tinning the leads decreases the connection reliability.
5. Loosen the nearest strain relief and route the load cell cable through it.
6. View the main PC board and locate the lever connector labeled J2.
7. Connect the four or six conductors to the proper terminals, as described in Table 2-1. Refer to the load cell’s color wiring code for the proper colors for each connection.
8. Use a small screwdriver to apply force to the lever connector, as shown in Figure 2-15.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-24 Chapter 2
GSE Scale Systems
Figure 2-15: Inserting Load Cell Wires
9. Insert the lead in place, as shown in Figure 2-16 for a 460 Series indicator or Figure 2-17 for a 560 Series or 660 Series controller.
10. Test all connections by pulling lightly on each conductor.
11. Connect the load cell shield to the lever connector SHIELD.
12. Pull any excess cable back out of the controller through the strain relief until there is no slack between the shield connection and the strain relief.
13. Tighten down the strain relief securely to ensure a firm grip on the cable.
Figure 2-16: 460 Series Load Cell Connections
Figure 2-17: 660 Series Load Cell Connections
Installation 2-25
DC P
OWER
C
ONNECTIONS
All 60 Series instruments can be powered by an external 10-32 VDC power supply.
460 S ERIES
Connect an external DC power source to the 24V and GND pins on the
J10 battery connector.
The mating female connector for J10 is available from GSE:
•
4-Position Female Connector P/N: 26-20-3380
•
4-Position Connector Cover P/N: 26-20-3393
!
DO NOT connect an external power source to the ‘L’ or ‘S’ pins on
J10.
Figure 2-18: 460 Series Main Board J10 DC Power Connection
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-26 Chapter 2
560 S ERIES
Connect an external DC power source to the 24V and GND spring-lever terminals on the J15 connector.
Figure 2-19: 560 Series Main Board J15 DC Power Connection
660 S ERIES
Connect an external DC power source to the 24V and GND spring-lever terminals on the J11 connector.
Figure 2-20: 660 Series Main Board J11 Power Connection
GSE Scale Systems
Installation 2-27
LCD O
PERATION
The 8X40 LCD is the standard display for the 562 and 662 controllers. A
16X40 LCD is available as the primary display for the 663 and 665 controllers. Both displays interface to the same factory-installed LCD driver board as shown in Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20.
LCD H ARDWARE S ETUP
The LCD driver board is installed on new indicators at the factory.
Jumpers E2 and E3 are both set to match the display size (SM = 8X40
LCD; LG = 16X40 LCD) as shown in Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21: LCD Interface Board
Connections to the LCD driver board are the LCD interface ribbon cable
(J3) and the LCD backlight (J4).
i
A low-tone, variable speed warble will occur at power-up if the LCD driver board is installed but the display is not connected to J3.
LCD P ARAMETER S ETUP
The LCD driver board is auto-detected at power-up. Once detected, the
LCD is automatically selected as the primary display. Therefore, it is not possible to use the 7-segment VFD or 4X20 VFD with the LCD connected.
Model 660 Series controllers that use the LCD will have P425 set to “ LCD
Alwys ”, indicating that the LCD display will always be used as the primary display when the driver board is installed.
U SING T HE 4X20 VFD W ITH A N LCD
Although it is possible to connect a 4X20 VFD while using an LCD, there are several issues that complicate simultaneous use of both displays:
•
It would not be possible to use macro commands to transmit data to the 4X20 VFD as they will instead be automatically routed to the LCD.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-28 Chapter 2
GSE Scale Systems
•
It would not be possible to get an operator input on the 4X20 VFD using the %G or %K commands.
•
Only a custom transmit directed out comm4 would allow communication to the 4X20 VFD.
LCD C ONTRAST A DJUSTMENT
The contrast of the LCD changes with temperature. A contrast setting that allows good viewing at a high temperature might make the display impossible to read at a low temperature. This would make it difficult to access P430 to change the contrast.
If the display is not visible at power-up you can adjust the contrast as follows:
1.
Power down.
2.
Hold down the left, down and right arrow keys.
3.
Power up.
4.
Continue to hold the left, down and right arrow keys until you can see the contrast adjustment menu on the display, then release.
5.
Make fine adjustments to the contrast by pressing the up and down arrow keys.
6.
Press [ENTER] to exit the menu and permanently store the new contrast setting.
K
EYPAD
C
ONFIGURATION
All 60 Series indicators are shipped with the keypad properly configured.
However proper keypad operation can not always be guaranteed when installing a replacement main board due to the fact that some indicators support multiple keypad styles. A keypad will not operate correctly when it does not match the configuration of the main board. And since the keypad does not operate correctly, it is impossible to use the conventional method to access the setup mode and change P450 to the correct style keypad.
Instead, holding down various keys at power-up as described below will automatically configure P450 to reflect the connected keypad.
460 K EYPAD
If the keypad does not operate correctly at power-up, configure the keypad as follows:
1.
Power down.
2.
Hold down the [ENTER] key.
3.
Power up.
4.
Continue holding the key until “ M460 Keypd ” is displayed, then release.
Installation 2-29
465 K EYPAD
If the keypad does not operate correctly at power-up, configure the keypad as follows:
1.
Power down.
2.
Hold down the [SCALE SELECT] + [F1] + [SELECT] keys.*
3.
Power up.
4.
Continue holding the keys until “ M460 Keypd ” is displayed, then release.
* Use these keys for firmware dated after September 28, 2001.
Previously the [ZERO] + [SCALE SELECT] + [F1] keys were used to configure the keypad at power-up.
560 S ERIES K EYPAD
The 560 Series controllers offers only one 23-key keypad style and therefore should not require reconfiguration. However, should the keypad not operate correctly, follow the same procedure as described above for the 465 to display “ M560 Keypd ” at power-up.
660 S ERIES K EYPAD
The 660 Series controllers offers only one 28-key keypad style. However, the 25-key keypad used by the 650 Series is also compatible and would require reconfiguration if connected to a 660 Series main board.
If the keypad does not operate correctly at power-up, configure the keypad as follows:
1.
Power down.
2.
Hold down the [ID] + [F1] + [F2] keys.*
3.
Power up.
4.
Continue holding the keys until either “ M660 Keypd ” or “ M653
Keypd ” is displayed, then release.**
* Use these same three keys on both the 25-key and 28-key keypads.
** “ M660 ” is displayed for firmware dated after September 28, 2001.
Previously “ M650 ” was displayed.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
2-30 Chapter 2
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 3
S
ETUP
P
ARAMETERS
This chapter contains detailed information on the parameter setup mode.
Topics covered include accessing the parameter setup mode, navigating setup parameters, entering parameter values, exiting the parameter setup mode, and downloading setup parameters.
O V E R V I E W
Setup Parameters 3-3
Accessing The Parameter Setup Mode 3-3
Navigating Setup Parameters 3-6
Parameter Types 3-8
Exiting the Parameter Setup Mode 3-9
Downloading Setup Parameters 3-11
Setup Parameter Map 3-12
Parameter Descriptions 3-26
Script Files 3-47
3-1
3-2 Chapter 3 i
R efer to Appendix D for a complete list of setup parameters and parameter selections.
i
You can key in the full-edit access code when viewing parameters if you with to begin making changes.
S
ETUP
P
ARAMETERS
Setup parameters are dedicated memory registers within the 60 Series
Instrument that collectively define how the scale operates. These parameters can only be accessed by entering the setup mode as described later in this chapter.
A setup parameter is identified by the letter “P” followed by a three, four or five-digit number and a decimal point. The example below shows parameter 109, the parameter used to enable a scale for use.
P10( 02
Scl —
Enbld
The digits to the right of the decimal point define the current numeric selection for the displayed parameter.
P10( 02
Scl —
Enbld
The parameter name and text selection appears in the prompting section of the display.
P10(02
Scl —
Enbld
A CCESSING T HE P ARAMETER S ETUP M ODE
Viewing and/or editing setup parameters requires that you first access the setup mode.
V IEW -O NLY A CCESS
It is possible to view the current configuration of any 60 Series Instrument by simply keying in the desired parameter number and pressing
[SELECT] , then [ENTER] . For example,
100 ó å will display the first setup mode parameter. Note that the display briefly shows –-No- Mods!
before accessing the parameter. This indicates that no modifications can be made to any parameter. Changing parameter selections are only possible by entering the setup mode using the full-edit access method.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Accessing Setup Mode / Full-Edit
100 ó
SetUp
23640 é å
SetUp
P10*01
Keyin
Code:
Allow
Mods!
Scale
1
?
If the program jumper is set to
‘NO’ you will not be granted access to edit setup parameters by any means.
Attempting to do so will result in a
Code 16 Check
Jumpr
error message.
Setup Parameters 3-3
F ULL -E DIT A CCESS
In order to change the current selection for any of the setup parameters you must access the setup mode by keying in the desired parameter number and entering a security access code. The default GSE access code is 23640 [ID] [ENTER] . For example,
100 ó 23640 é å will display the first setup mode parameter and allow changes to all parameter selections (see example: Accessing Setup Mode / Full-Edit ).
Accessing a Specific parameter
You can access a specific parameter by keying in the parameter number
(and applicable instance) prior to pressing [SELECT] . For example,
5100.2 ó 23640 é å will proceed directly to parameter 5100 for setpoint #2 upon entering the setup mode. This method also works with view-only and limited access.
L IMITED A CCESS
Whereas the full-edit access method allows changes to all setup parameter selections, using the limited access code permits changes to be made to all parameters except any macros or custom transmits that are protected by limited access.
The default GSE limited access code is 21353 [ENTER] . Thus,
100 ó 21353 å will access the setup mode using limited access. Any macros or custom transmit tables that are protected by limited access (yes) at P9994 or P999 respectively will not be viewable, cannot be changed and will not appear in the download output at P64000. This allows the programmer to give others access to important field configurable parameters such as zero tracking and motion delay while protecting the main program routines from unauthorized changing or copying. When using the limited access code it is advisable to assign a PIN number to the full-edit access code at P400 as the default GSE access code is widely known and if used will give full access to all setup parameters.
Table 3-1: Parameters Affected by Limited Access Code
P ARAMETER
P10001-19999
P400-402
P1000-4999
P50001
P64000-64001
D ESCRIPTION C OMMENT
Macros will not be viewable if specified as limited access at P9994.
PIN#s will not be viewable.
Custom transmits will not be viewable or printable if specified as limited access at parameter P999.
Macro debug will not be viewable if specified as limited access at
P50000.
Sending setup will not print any parameter protected by limited access.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-4 Chapter 3
PIN N UMBER A CCESS
A PIN number can be assigned at P400 and P402 to override the GSE default full-edit access and limited access codes. If a PIN number is in effect, use the PIN number as the access code omit the [ID] key from the keypress sequence. For example,
100 ó 7875 å will allow access to the setup mode if stored PIN number is ‘7875’.
!
DO NOT FORGET YOUR PIN NUMBER!
If you forget your PIN number, you will not be able to access the setup mode by any means. There is no “back door” access. If the PIN number is forgotten, you must either send the indicator back to GSE to have the
PIN number cleared and restored to the default access code or replace the
EEPROM. The later will force a default setup upon power-up, however
ALL SETUP INFORMATION WILL BE PERMANENTLY LOST!
A CCESS D ENIED
If you cannot access the setup mode for edit using the methods previously described, there are two probable reasons – the wrong code was entered or the main board program jumper is in the ‘NO’ position.
Wrong Access Code
If you enter the setup mode access code incorrectly, a
Code11
WRONG
CODE!
error message is displayed and access is denied. If you are sure you entered the code correctly, then it is likely that a PIN number has been entered or changed.
Program Jumper in ‘NO’ Position
It is not possible to enter the setup mode by any means if the main board program jumper is in the ‘NO’ position. Attempting to do so will result in a
Code16 Check Jumpr error message. Move the program jumper to the ‘YES’ position and try again.
Keys Disabled
Front panel keys can be disabled in the setup mode or redefined to invoke macro routines. This could effect the normal use of the keys required to invoke the setup mode. This situation usually does not generate an error message – it simply ignores key presses or performs other functions when keys are pressed. You can reset the keypad to a normal condition by holding down the [CLR] key on power-up until Macro Disbl is displayed. This will enable all keys to their normal function and inhibit the execution of all macros, thus allowing you to access the setup mode.
A CCESSING THE 460 S ETUP M ODE
The M460 uses the same access codes as previously described in this section, however since it does not have a numeric keypad the access method is different.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-5
V IEW -O NLY A CCESS (M ODEL 460)
Access the setup parameters in the view-only mode by pressing [ZERO] +
[SELECT] , then [TARE/ENTER] .
ú + ó ô
F ULL -E DIT A CCESS (M ODEL 460)
Access the setup parameters in the full-edit mode by pressing [ZERO] +
[SELECT] , then [SELECT] [ZERO] [PRINT] [UNITS] [TARE/ENTER] .
ú + ó ó ú ð õ ô
Accessing a Specific parameter
Accessing a specific parameter requires the scale to be in a mode such as the tare mode that allows numeric entry using the character scroll keys
(see Character Entry on page 5-6). You can then scroll in the desired parameter number prior to pressing [SELECT] . For example, from the tare mode
500 ó ó ú ð õ ô will access P500 directly.
L IMITED A CCESS & PIN N UMBER A CCESS (M ODEL 460)
Accessing the setup mode using limited access or PIN number access requires use of the character scroll keys (see Character Entry on page 5-
6) to enter the code. For example,
ú + ó 21353 ô will access the setup parameters using the GSE default limited access code. PIN numbers are also entered this way.
N AVIGATING S ETUP P ARAMETERS
Once you have entered the setup mode you can move freely through all parameters to view and/or change any parameter’s configuration.
A
DVANCING
T
HROUGH
P
ARAMETERS
Press [SELECT] to advance sequentially through all parameters. Multipleinstance parameters will be repeated for each enabled instance.
Press [SCALE SELECT] or [.] [SELECT] to move back one parameter.
On the M460 press [PRINT] [SELECT] .
A CCESSING A S PECIFIC P ARAMETER
Key in a parameter number and press [SELECT] to access that parameter directly. For example,
300 ó
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-6 Chapter 3
?
If an instance is not specified for multiple instance parameters, the parameter accessed will be the first instance of the first parameter within the parameter group.
will take you directly to P300 from any other parameter. On the M460, use of the character scroll keys (see Character Entry on page 5-6) to enter the parameter number.
Multiple Instance Parameters
A multiple instance parameter can be directly accessed by including the desired instance number with the parameter number. Separate the parameter number and instance with a decimal. For example,
200.2 ó will proceed directly to P200 (baud rate) for communication port 2.
O
THER
N
AVIGATING
T
OOLS
There are several short-cut and special function keys used to aid in navigating the setup mode. The function of these keys depends on the currently selected setup parameter (see Table 3-2). For a complete list of key functions, see page A-6.
Table 3-2: Setup Mode Key Functions
660 S ERIES K EY 560 S ERIES K EY 465 K EY 460 K EY D ESCRIPTION
ó
à
å
ã
ó
à
å
ã
ó
å
ã
ó
Advances to the next parameter or directly to a keyed-in parameter.
à ô + ó
Moves back one parameter.
ô
ú
Scrolls through a list of choices or enters a keyed-in value.
Clears a keyed-in value or an entry in process.
ô ..ó ..ó õ + ô Advances to the next instance of the currently displayed setup parameter.
õ .0ó .0ó ð + ô Moves back to the previous instance of the currently displayed setup parameter.
.
#
ó .
#
ó .
#
ó Moves directly to the instance specified by ‘#’ for the currently displayed setup parameter (for example
.12ó
).
é é ð + ó Shows the instance of the currently displayed multi-instance setup parameter.
• ð + õ Toggles between an operating parameter’s name and its parameter number / instance.
€
ƒ
ð
ð + õ
Begins alpha entries. Scrolls forward through alpha characters.
Scrolls through the list of operating parameters in the “Pick Parm” list.
Scrolls backward through alpha characters.
Toggles between the normal and expanded view modes in a custom transmit table.
„
‚
ú ú ú
õ Advances one character in the custom transmit, input interpreter and macro tables.
Shifts right during alpha entry to begin scrolling next character.
Moves back one character in the custom transmit, input interpreter ú + ð and macro tables.
Shifts left (backspace) one character during alpha entry.
ú
Exit setup mode or enter calibration.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-7
P ARAMETER T YPES
There are three types of setup parameters – parameters that require a value to be keyed in, parameters that require a numeric entry representing one selection from a list of choices and parameters that require the entry of an operating parameter. Refer to Table 3-3 for each parameter’s type.
K
EY
-I
N
V
ALUE
P
ARAMETERS
A key-in value parameter requires a number or name to be entered. The entry will appear as the new parameter value exactly as it was keyed in.
Examples of key-in parameters include full scale capacity (P110), time
(P500) and variable names (P682).
P11)
F.S.—
100.0
To change the value of a key in parameter, simply key in the desired value and press [ENTER] . For example,
1000 å will change the full scale capacity to 1000.
S ELECTABLE V ALUE P ARAMETERS
A selectable value parameter requires the entry of a numeric value that corresponds to a selection from a list of choices. The number entered will be displayed to the right of the parameter number and the lower portion of the prompting display will show the text equivalent of the selection.
Examples of selectable value parameters are units (P131), baud rate
(P200) and beeper volume (P460).
P20) 02
Baud—
9600
To change a selection, key in the number corresponding to the desired selection (see Appendix D for a complete list of parameter selection values). For example,
11 å will change the baud rate to 57600 (‘11’ is the selection value for 57600 baud). If you don’t know the selection number you can press [ENTER] to scroll sequentially through all selections.
O
PERATING
P
ARAMETER
E
NTRY
P
ARAMETERS
Some setup parameters require the entry of an operating parameter (see
Table 7-1for a complete list of operating parameters). The entry will
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-8 Chapter 3 appear as the name of the referenced parameter. Examples of setup parameters requiring operating parameter entries are select modes
(P300), database columns (P701) and setpoint comparison parameters
(P5150).
P515)
CmPar
Gross
To change an operating parameter, key in the desired parameter number and instance (if required) and press [ENTER] . For example, selecting
P5150 and keying in
1.3 å will enter the net weight of scale 2 as the setpoint compare parameter. If you forget to enter a required instance, the display will prompt you to enter one.
If you do not know the number of the parameter you wish to specify, you can press [ENTER] to display the Pick Parm: list. The list starts with the “Gross” parameter. Pressing the up/down arrow keys will scroll forwards and backwards through all parameters. Press [ENTER] again to choose the displayed parameter and enter the instance if prompted.
Clearing an Operating Parameter
If you wish to clear an operating parameter rather than enter a new one, key in 99 [ENTER] as the operating parameter selection. The display will show None!
as the operating parameter name. Note that some setup parameters such as the setpoint compare parameter (P5150) require you to specify an operating parameter before allowing you to exit the setup mode. If you have not entered a required operating parameter before exiting, the display will revert to the offending parameter and allow you to enter one.
Viewing an Operating Parameter’s Number & Instance
When viewing an operating parameter entry, all you see is the parameter name. You can toggle the display to show the parameter’s number and instance by pressing [F2] on a 660 Series Controller, [TARGET] on a 465 or [UNITS] on a 460.
E XITING THE P ARAMETER S ETUP M ODE
You can exit the setup mode from any parameter by pressing [ZERO] to initiate the exit routine. When exiting you are given the opportunity to calibrate and save or undo all changes you made while in the setup mode.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Exiting & Saving Changes
ú
SetUp CAL
?
SetUp
ã
SETUP
SETUP
å
SETUP
ENTER
=CAL!
Save
Mods?
ENTER
=SAVE
Sav’g
Setup
SETUP
SETUP
MODS
SAVED
Doing
Setup
SETUP Exit
Setup
SETUP
å
)00
ENTER
=EXIT lb±²³
Gross
Setup Parameters 3-9
E XIT AND S AVE C HANGES
The most common procedure for exit the setup mode is pressing
ú ã å å to exit and save all changes without calibrating the scale. With each keystroke you are prompted through the exit sequence (see example:
Exiting & Saving Changes ).
E
XIT AND
U
NDO
C
HANGES
You can exit the setup mode without saving any parameter changes by pressing [CLR/NO] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. The display will then show
SETUP
ENTER
=UNDO
at which point you can press [ENTER] to undo all changes and [ENTER] again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit without saving.
C ANCEL E XIT
Pressing [SELECT] at any time while exiting the setup mode will cancel the exit routine and revert to the last parameter accessed. If changes were already saved, returning the setup mode before exiting will not undo changes.
E
XIT
E
RROR
M
ESSAGES
When you exit the setup mode, parameters are checked to ensure proper selections were made. For example, selecting even parity and 2 stop bits is not a valid combination for communication protocol. When you press
[ZERO] to exit the setup mode, an error message is displayed. This type of error must be corrected before you are allowed to exit. Pressing any key while the error message is displayed will advance immediately to the offending parameter and allow you to correct it.
Less critical errors will display a message and wait for you to press a key to acknowledge the error. A Code39 ƒA/D Cal is an example of this type of warning.
Non-critical messages such as an indication that the clock speed has changed are displayed briefly when exiting the setup mode and do not require acknowledgement to complete the exit process.
A complete list of error messages can be found in Appendix E.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-10 Chapter 3
C ALIBRATE D URING E XIT R OUTINE
Every time you exit the setup mode, the first prompt to appear is a request to calibrate the scale.
SETUP
ENTER
=CAL!
Usually this is only necessary during initial setup or when a change has been made to a scale parameter such as the full scale capacity. To enter the calibration mode, press [ENTER] at the calibration prompt. When the calibration is complete the exit routine will resume with the ENTER=SAVE prompt at which point both calibration and setup information can be saved.
Refer to chapter 4 for information on the calibration procedure.
D OWNLOADING S ETUP P ARAMETERS
Once you have completed the scale setup you can download all of the setup information through any of the communication port to a computer to create a backup file or to another indicator to “clone” the setup. Refer to
Chapter 14, Information Parameters for the download procedure.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-11
S ETUP P ARAMETER M AP
Table 3-3 lists all setup mode parameters for the 60 Series
Instrumentation. Parameters and selections apply to all 60 Series
Instruments except as otherwise noted.
Table Key:
M Multiple Instance Parameter
L Select from List
K Key-In Parameter
P Operating Parameter
Table 3-3: Complete Parameter Listing
S ETUP P ARAMETER
Scale Configuration
M L K P D ESCRIPTION
Scale Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P109 à P136)
P10*01 Scale
1
ü
P10(02
P11) 00
P11!09
P11@ 00
P11# 00
P11$ 00
P11% 00
P11^09
P11& 00
P11*12
P11(00
P12@03
P12$ 00
P12% 00
P12^ 00
Scl —
Enbld
F.S.—
100.0
1div—
.01
ZTAp—
1.0 d
ZTDl—
0.5 s
Motn—
1.0 d
MtDl—
1.0 s
Fltr—
4.0sA
Rate—
0.05s
Zrng—
100.%
Lnrz—
Disbl
RTZ —
0.1%
QRes—
0.000
EFac—
1.000
L.R.—
0.000
ü ü
ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
P12&09 LDiv—
.01
ü ü
Scale Enable
Full Scale Capacity
Division Size
Zero Track Divisions
Zero Track Delay
Motion Divisions
Motion Delay
Digital Filter
Display Update Rate
Zero Range
Linearization
Return To Zero
Count Resolution
(P179 must be ‘Enabled’)
Count Adjustment Factor
(P179 must be ‘Enabled’)
Low Range Capacity
Low Range Division Size
S ELECTIONS
460 Series
Scale: 1 à 2
560 Series
Scale: 1 à 4
660 Series
Scale: 1 à 8
Disabled, Saved, Enabled
0.01 à 1,000,000
0.00001 à 500
Off, 0.1d à 20.0d
(Enter as 0 à 200 )
0.05s à 10.0s
(Enter as 0 à 100 )
Off, 0.1d à 20.0d
(Enter as 0 à 200)
0.05s à 10.0s
(Enter as 0 à 100)
Off, 0.06s à 8.0s
0.05s à 20.0s
(Enter as 0 à 200)
0.01% à 100%
Disabled, Enabled
0.01% à 100%
100.0 à 1,000,000
0.100 à 20.00
0.01 à 1,000,000
0.00001 à 500
R EFERENCE
3-26
3-28
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-26
3-27
3-27
3-27
3-27
3-27
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-12 Chapter 3
S ETUP P ARAMETER
Scale Configuration (continued)
P12* 00 M.R.—
0.000
P12(09 MDiv—
.01
P13)00
P13!00
P13@01
P13#09
P13$09
P13% 00
P13^00
P14@01
Rnge—
Gross
Unit— lb
Unit— kg
Unit—
NONE
Unit—
NONE
RMP.—
Off
RTU.— sec
DspCZ
Enbld
Status
P14# 00
P14$ 00
P14% 00
P14^
P14&
OLNam
O
MtNam
M
StNam
S
ULNam
O
ErNam
E
M L K P
ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
First Units
Third Units
Fourth Units
D ESCRIPTION
Middle Range Capacity
Middle Range Division Size
Multi-Range Mode
Second Units
Rate Measurement Period
Rate Time Unit
Center-Of-Zero Annunciator
Status Overload Name
Status Motion Name
Status Stable Name
Status Underload Name
Status Error Name
Units
P15)00
P15!
00
P15@ 00
P15# 00
P15$ 00
UNITS
=lb
Unam1
????1
Ucon1
1.000
Unam2
????2
Ucon2
1.000
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Default Units
Custom Unit1 Name
Custom Unit1 Conversion Factor
Custom Unit2 Name
Custom Unit2 Conversion Factor
Tare Functions
P16@00 TrNEG
Disbl
ü
Negative Tare Enable
P16#01 TrRND
Enbld
ü
Tare Rounding Enable
Analog Output (P171 must be enabled to access P172
à
P176)
Analog Output Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P171 à P176)
P17)01 AnOut
1
ü
S ELECTIONS
0.01 à 1,000,000
0.00001 à 500
Gross, Net lb = pounds kg = kilograms oz = ounces g = grams ton = US tons t = metric tons
????1 = custom unit 1
????2 = custom unit 2 lb oz = pounds & ounces
NONE = disable units 2, 3, 4
0=Off, 0.02s à 900s
Seconds, Minutes, Hours
Disabled, Enabled
Name Entry
(9 characters maximum)
Same as P131 à P134
Name Entry
(5 characters maximum)
0.000001 à 9,999,999
Name Entry
(5 characters maximum)
0.000001 à 9,999,999
Disabled, Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
460 Series
Analog Output: 1 à 2
560 Series
Analog Output: 1 à 4
660 Series
Analog Output: 1 à 8
R EFERENCE
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-30
GSE Scale Systems
S ETUP P ARAMETER
Analog Output (continued)
P17!00
AOut—
Disbl
P17@ 00
P17# 00
Parm—
Gross
F.S.—
None!
P17$ 00 Zero—
None!
M L K P
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Zero Offset
D ESCRIPTION
Analog Output Enable
Output Parameter
Full Scale Output
P17% 00
P17^00
P17(01
Rnge—
None!
Dflt—
Max
Count
Enbld
ü
ü ü
P17&00 Type—
0-10v
ü ü
Output Signal Type
Counting (P179 must be enabled to access P180 à P189)
ü
ü
Output Signal Range
Default Output in Setup Mode
Count Enable
P18)00
P18!01
Asmpl off
Aenhn on
ü
ü
Auto Sample Enable
Auto Enhance Enable
P18@10
P18# 00
P18$00
SmpSz
10
%Accy
98.52
AcDsp off
ü
ü
ü
Default Sample Size
Required Accuracy
Accuracy Display Enable
Pre-Sample Scale
P18%00 PreSm
None!
ü
After-Sample Scale
P18^00 AftSm
None!
P18&06
P18*00
P18(00
Communication Ports
SmpFl
4.0 s
AcEnf off
SmpMt
0.0 d
ü
ü
ü
ü
Sample Filter
Enforce Sample Accuracy
Sample Motion Divisions
Serial Port Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P200 à P219)
P19(01 Port—
1
ü
Setup Parameters 3-13
S ELECTIONS
Disabled, Enabled
Valid Operating Parameter
Maximum, Minimum, Same
0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
R EFERENCE
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-30
3-30
3-30
Disabled, Enabled
Off, On
Off, On
1 à 9999
0, 90% à 99.96%
Off, On
460 Series
Scale: None, 1 à 2
560 Series
Scale: None, 1 à 4
660 Series
Scale: None, 1 à 8
460 Series
Scale: None, 1 à 2
560 Series
Scale: None, 1 à 4
660 Series
Scale: None, 1 à 8
None, 0.13s à 8.0s
Off, On
0.0d à 1.5d
(Enter as 0 à 15)
460 Series
Port: 1 à 2
560 Series
Port: 1 à 3
660 Series
Port: 1 à 4
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
Communication Ports (continued)
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-14 Chapter 3
S ETUP P ARAMETER
P20)02 Baud—
9600
M L K P
Baud Rate
D ESCRIPTION
ü ü
S ELECTIONS
460 Series
58300*, 38400, 37400, 19200,
9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600,
300, 150
* Available for comm1 only
560 Series
58300*, 38400, 37400, 19200,
9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600,
300, 150
* Available for comm1 only
660 Series
115K*, 112K*, 57600*, 56200*,
39300, 38400, 19200, 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300, 150
R EFERENCE
3-32
P20!01
P20@00
P20#00
P20$02
P20%01
P20^00
Data—
8bits
Prty— none
Stop—
1bit
Flow—
Xon
Recv—
Std
Full— delay
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü ü
ü
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
Handshaking
Receive Mode
Transmit Mode
* Available for comm1 only
7, 8
None, Even, Odd
1, 2
None, CTS, Xon, Both
0=Disabled, 1=Standard, 2=Interpreter,
3=Modbus,
Macro: 4
à
250
Delay, Abort
P20& 00 TxBf—
512
ü ü
Transmit Buffer Size (bytes) 460 Series
8 à 3967
560 Series
8 à 3967
660 Series
8 à 16255
RxBf—
1024
Receive Buffer Size (bytes) 460 Series
8 à 3967
P20* 00
P20(01
P21)00
MdAd—
1
MdMd—
ASCII
ü
ü
ü ü
ü
ü
Modbus Address
(P205 must be ‘Modbus’)
Modbus Mode
(P205 must be ‘Modbus’)
560 Series
8 à 3967
660 Series
8 à 16255
1 à 247
ASCII, RTU
P21!00
MdWO—
HiLo
ü ü
Modbus Word
(P205 must be ‘Modbus’)
HiLo, LoHi
Input Interpreter (First select a communication port at P199; P219 must be assigned to access P220 à P224)
P21& 00
P21* 00
NoNUL
Disbl
RxTrm
<LF>
ü
ü
ü
ü
NULL Character Enable
Receive Termination Character
Disabled, Enabled
0 à 255
(Enter as .000 à .255)
P21(00 RxIn#
None!
ü
Input Interpreter Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P220 à P224)
460 Series
Interpreter: 1 à 15
560 Series
Interpreter: 1 à 100
660 Series
Interpreter: 1 à 250
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
Input Interpreter (continued)
P22) 00 RxNam
None!
ü ü
Interpreter Name Name Entry
(79 characters maximum) 3-33
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-15
S ETUP P ARAMETER
P22!00
P22@ 00
P22# 00
RxTyp
Char
Rx 1
††††‡
RxChr
<NUL>
M L K P
ü ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü
D ESCRIPTION
Interpreter Type
Line Interpreter Entry Table
(P221 must be set for ‘Line’)
Interpreter Character
(P221 must be set for ‘Character’)
Interpreter Macro#
P22$00 RxMac
None!
ü ü
Numeric Parameter Formatting
P24)08
P24!00
Width
8
SgnJu
Right
Networking & Remote Communications
ü
ü
P25)00 NtWrk
Disbl
ü
P25!00
Addrs
Disbl
ü
Minimum Transmit Width
Sign Justification
Network Enable
(Applies to communication port #1 only)
Network Address
(P250 must be ‘Enbld’, P205 not ‘Modbs’)
Echo Display
P29)00 Echo
Off
ü
P29!02
P29@03
P29#00
P29$00
Start
<STX>
End
<ETX>
RmDsp
Disbl
Rm BL
Disbl
Weigh Mode Parameter Selections
P30) 00 MODE0
Gross
ü ü
ü ü
P30!
00
P30@ 00
P30# 00
P30$ 00
P30% 00
MODE1
Net
MODE2
Tare
MODE3
None!
MODE4
None!
MODE5
None!
P30^ 00 MODE6
None!
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Weigh Mode Parameter Selections (continued)
P30& 00 MODE7
None!
ü
Echo Start Character
Echo End Character
Remote Display Enable
Remote Display Backlight Enable
[SELECT] Mode 0
[SELECT] Mode 1
[SELECT] Mode 2
[SELECT] Mode 3
[SELECT] Mode 4
[SELECT] Mode 5
[SELECT] Mode 6
[SELECT] Mode 7
S ELECTIONS
Character, Line
Table Entry
(text, parameter, control code)
0 à 255
(Enter as .000 à .255)
460 Series
1 à 15
560 Series
1 à 100
660 Series
1 à 250
1 à 15
Left, Right
R EFERENCE
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
Disabled, Enabled
3-34
0=Disable, 4 à 254
460 Series
Off, Comm: 1 à 2
660 Series
Off, Comm: 1 à 3
660 Series
Off, Comm: 1 à 4
0 à 255
0 à 255
0=Disable, 1=LCD, 2=LED
0=Disable, 1=Enable
3-34
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
Valid Operating Parameter
3-35
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-16 Chapter 3
S ETUP P ARAMETER
P30* 00
P30( 00
Access Codes
P40) 00
P40!
00
P40@ 00
MODE8
None!
MODE9
None!
PIN
None!
QCAL
None!
Lmt’d
21353
OIML
P41) 00
P41!00
P41@00
OIML
Disbl
LANG
USA
PrSET
Disbl
VFD/LCD Display Setup
P42)01
P42!02
Dsply
ON
WtThr
6d
P42@05 TmOut
5min
P42#10
P42$00
P42%00
P43)12
NTEP
P44)00
Keypad
Brite
100%
Dim
OFF
4x20
Disbl
Contr
12
NTEP
Disbl
M L K P
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
D ESCRIPTION
[SELECT] Mode 8
[SELECT] Mode 9
Personal Identification Number
Quick Calibration Access Number
Limited Access Number
OIML Enable
Language Character Set
Preset Enable
Standard VF Display Mode
Weight Threshold Divisions
(Used only if P420 set to ‘Auto’)
Timeout
(Used only if P420 set to ‘Auto’)
Display ‘ON’ Brightness
Display ‘OFF’ Dimness
(Used only if P420 set to ‘Auto’)
4X20 VF / LCD Display Enable
(660 Series; Auto-detects LCD display)
LCD Contrast
(LCD display must be installed)
NTEP Enable
Keypad Selection
P45)00
P45!06
P46)03
Time & Date
P50)00
Keypd
28Key
KyRpt
Fast
Beepr
Low
Time
00:00
Time & Date (continued)
P50!70
Date
01/01
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Keypad Repeat Rate
Beeper Volume
Time
Date
S ELECTIONS
Alpha-Numeric Entry
(5 characters maximum)
Alpha-Numeric Entry
(5 characters maximum)
Alpha-Numeric Entry
(5 characters maximum)
Disabled, Enabled
(Enter as 9990 or 9991)
USA, France, German, UK, Denmark,
Sweden, Italy, Spain, Japan, Norway,
Denmark2, Spain2, Latin America
Disabled, Enabled
Off, On, Auto
2d à 32d
30s à 2hr
10% à 100%
Off, 10% à 100%
Disabled, Enabled, LCD Always
0 à 255
Disabled, Enabled
460 Series
5 Key, 22 Key
(Entered as 9990 or 9991)
560 Series
22 Key
(No entry allowed)
660 Series
28 Key, 25 Key
(Entered as 9990 or 9991)
None, Very Slow, Slow, Medium Slow,
Medium, Medium Fast, Fast, Very Fast
Off, Minimum, Extra Low, Low, Medium,
Medium High, High, Maximum
Time Entry
(Enter as HH.MM.SS)
Date Entry
(Enter as MM.DD.YY)
R EFERENCE
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-38
3-38
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-17
S ETUP P ARAMETER
P50@00
P50#01
TDAcc
Disbl
AM/PM
yes
M L K P
ü
ü
D ESCRIPTION
Time/Date Access
AM/PM Time Format
P50$00 Style
U.S.A
ü
Date Format
DSD Configuration (P590 must be enabled to access P591 à P595)
P59)00 DSD
Disbl
ü
DSD Enable
DSD Serial Port Selection
P59!1
Port
None!
ü
P59@0
P59#1
RxChr
<NUL>
CusTx
1
P59$0
P59%0
Parameter Renaming
P60) 00
P60!
00
P60@ 00
P60# 00
P60$ 00
P60% 00
P60^ 00
P60& 00
P60* 00
P60( 00
P61) 00
P61!
00
MxRow
0
#Warn
0
Accum
None!
Scale
None!
Tm/Dt
None!
Gross
None!
Net
None!
Tare
None!
GrTOT
None!
GrT+C
None!
GrT-C
None!
NtTOT
None!
NtT+C
None!
NtT-C
None!
P61% 00 AvGrs
None!
Parameter Renaming (continued)
P61^ 00 AvNet
None!
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
DSD Receive Character
DSD Custom Transmit Selection
DSD Maximum Number of Rows
DSD Number of Warning Rows
Rename Gross
Rename Net
Rename Tare
Rename Gross Total
Rename Gross Total + Current
Rename Gross Total - Current
Rename Net Total
Rename Net Total + Current
Rename Net Total – Current
Rename Accumulation
Rename Scale Number
Rename Time/Date
Rename Average Gross
Rename Average Net
S ELECTIONS
Disabled, Enabled
No, Yes
USA, International
Disable, Enable
560 Series
Comm: 0 à 3
660 Series
Comm: 0 à 4
0 à 255
(Enter as .000 à .255)
560 Series
Custom Transmit: 1 à 100
660 Series
Custom Transmit: 1 à 250
0 à Maximum Rows Available
0 à Maximum Number of Rows
(per P594)
Name Entry
(79 characters maximum)
Note:
Only the first 5 characters of a parameter’s name will be displayed. All characters will be printed.
R EFERENCE
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-18 Chapter 3
S ETUP P ARAMETER
P61& 00
P61* 00
AvgCt
None!
PkGrs
None!
P61( 00
P62) 00
P62!
00
P62# 00
P62$ 00
PkNet
None!
RndGr
None!
RndNt
None!
Rate
None!
FreFl
None!
P62% 00
P62^ 00
P62& 00
P62* 00
P62( 00
P63) 00
P63!
00
P63@ 00
P63# 00
P63$ 00
P63% 00
P63^ 00
P63& 00
P64) 00
P64!
00
P64@ 00
P64# 00
FutGr
None!
FutNt
None!
FrFl2
None!
FuGr2
None!
FuNt2
None!
Qty
None!
QtTOT
None!
QtT+C
None!
QtT-C
None!
APW
None!
APW*K
None!
%Accy
None!
Sampl
None!
GrAll
None!
NeAll
None!
TrAll
None!
GTAll
None!
P64$ 00 NTAll
None!
Parameter Renaming (continued)
P64% 00 QuAll
None!
M L K P
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
D ESCRIPTION
Rename Average Count
Rename Peak Gross
Rename Peak Net
Rename Rounded Gross
Rename Rounded Net
Rename Rate
Rename Free Fall 1
Rename Future Gross 1
Rename Future Net 1
Rename Free Fall 2
Rename Future Gross 2
Rename Future Net 2
Rename Quantity
Rename Quantity Total
Rename Quantity Total + Current
Rename Quantity Total - Current
Rename Average Piece Weight
Rename Average Piece Weight x K
Rename Percent Accuracy
Rename Sample
Rename Gross Total of All Scales
Rename Net Total of All Scales
Rename Tare Total of All Scales
Rename Total of All Gross Totals
Rename Total of All Net Totals
Rename Quantity Total of All Scales
GSE Scale Systems
S ELECTIONS R EFERENCE
Setup Parameters 3-19
S ETUP P ARAMETER
P64^ 00 QTAll
None!
M L K P
ü
D ESCRIPTION
Rename Total of All Quantity Totals
Total & Tare Save
P66)02 TotSv
Auto
ü
Total Values Save Method
P66!00
TarSv
NoSav
ü
Tare Value Save Method
Variables (Variables must allocated at P680 for access to P681 à P689)
Variable Allocation
S ELECTIONS
No Save, On Request, Auto
No Save, On Request, Auto
R EFERENCE
3-39
460 Series
0 à 15
P68)00
P68!01
#Vars
None!
Var.#
1
ü
ü
Variable Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P682 à P689)
560 Series
0 à 100
660 Series
0 à 999
460 Series
1 à 15
560 Series
1 à 100
660 Series
1 à 999
Name Entry
(79 characters maximum)
3-40
3-40
P68@ 00
P68$00
P68%00
P68^00
VName
None!
VSave
NoSav
VLock
Disbl
VType
Float
ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
Variable Name
Variable Value Save Method
Variable Lock
Variable Type
No Save, On Request, Auto
Disabled, Enabled
Float, Integer, Unsigned Integer,
String
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-40
P68&06 FStyl
Auto
ü ü
Float Style
(P686 must be ‘Float’)
460 Series
1 à 5 decimal places, Auto,
Scale: 1 à 2
560 Series
1 à 5 decimal places, Auto,
Scale: 1 à 4
3-40
660 Series
1 à 5 decimal places, Auto,
Scale: 1 à 8
P68*00
P68(10
IStyl
Numbr
Ssize
10
ü ü
ü ü
Integer Style
(P686 must be ‘Int’ or ‘U-Int’)
String Size
(P686 must be ‘Strng’)
Number, Time/Date, Time, Date
1 à 63
3-41
3-41
Database (Databases must be assigned at P699 for access to P700 à P799; P701 à P799 are sequentially allocated as needed)
P69(00
P70) 00
P70!
00
DB #:
None!
DBNam
None!
Col01
*END*
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Database Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P700 à P799)
Database Name
Database Column Parameter
460 Series
Database: 1 à 15
560 Series
Database: 1 à 100
660 Series
Database: 1 à 250
Name Entry
(79 characters maximum)
Valid Operating Parameter
3-41
3-41
3-41
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-20 Chapter 3
S ETUP P ARAMETER
Keypad Key Assignments
P80)00 Selct
Enbld
P80!00
Zero
Enbld
P80@00 Tare
Enbld
P80#00
P80$00
P80%00
Units
Enbld
SSlct
Enbld
Enbld
M L K P
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
D ESCRIPTION
[SELECT] Key Function
[ZERO] Key Function
[TARE] Key Function
[UNITS] Key Function
[SCALE SELECT] Key Function
[PRINT] Key Function
[ID] Key Function
P80^00 IDUse
Enbld
ü
S ELECTIONS
460 Series
Enabled, Macro: 1 à 15
560 Series
Enabled, Macro: 1 à 100
660 Series
Enabled, Macro: 1 à 250
465 Only
0=None, 1=Menu, 2=Database, 3=Menu
& Database, Macro: 4
à
15
560 Series
0=None, 1=Menu, 2=Database, 3=Menu
& Database, Macro: 4
à
100, 101 =
Macro 3
660 Series
0=None, 1=Menu, 2=Database, 3=Menu
& Database, Macro: 4
à
250
460 Series
Enabled, Macro: 1 à 15
560 Series
Enabled, Macro: 1 à 100
660 Series
Enabled, Macro: 1 à 250
P80&00
P80*00
P80(00
P81)00
P81!00
P81@00
P81#00
P81$00
P81%00
P81^00
P81&00
P81*00
P81(00
P82)00
Enter
Enbld
Clear
Enbld
DecPt
Enbld
’0’
Enbld
’1’
Enbld
’2’
Enbld
’3’
Enbld
’4’
Enbld
’5’
Enbld
’6’
Enbld
’7’
Enbld
’8’
Enbld
’9’
Enbld
AnyKy
Enbld
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
[ENTER] Key Function
[CLEAR] Key Function
[.] Key Function
[0] Key Function
[1] Key Function
[2] Key Function
[3] Key Function
[4] Key Function
[5] Key Function
[6] Key Function
[7] Key Function
[8] Key Function
[9] Key Function
Any Key Function
R EFERENCE
3-41
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-21
S ETUP P ARAMETER M L K P D ESCRIPTION S ELECTIONS R EFERENCE
Programmable Digital Input/Output – 660 Series Only (Channels must be assigned a function at P851 for access to P852 à P864)
P85)01 Chan#
1
ü
Channel Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P851 à P864)
Channel: 1 à 8
3-41
P85!02
Func—
Setpt
ü ü
Channel Function None, Freq Out, Setpoint, Freq In A, Freq
In B, Phase Time, Dly In, Dly Out, Q-
Decode2, Q-Decode3, Freq Debounce
3-42
P85@ 00 FNam—
None!
ü ü
First I/O Parameter Name Name Entry
(79 characters maximum) 3-42
P85# 00
P85$ 00
P85^ 00
P85&00
P85*00
P85(00
P86)00
P86!00
P86@00
Pnam—
None!
Rnam—
None!
MaxF—
65536
CSrc—
ClckA
Edge—
Rise
Perd—
0.000
#Pls—
1
Mtyp—
Low
Ptyp˜
Low
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Second I/O Parameter Name
Third I/O Parameter Name
Maximum Expected Frequency
(P851 must be ‘FDbnc’)
Clock Source
(P851 must be ‘FqOut’, ‘FqInA’ or ‘DlyOt’)
Pulse Edge Detection
(P851 must be ‘FqInA-B’, ‘DlyIn’ or ‘QdDc3’)
Pulse Measurement Period
(P851 must be ‘FqInA’ or ‘FDbnc’)
Number of Pulses to Measure
(P851 must be ‘FqInB’ or ‘PhsTm’)
Phase Measurement Type
(P851 must be ‘PhsTm’)
Pulse Type
(P851 must be ‘DlyOt’)
Note:
One or more of these parameters may not appear or may appear with a different name depending on the selection for
P851.
48 Hz à 10752 Hz
Clock A, Clock B
Rise, Fall
0.001s à 500.0s
1 à 255
Low, High
Low, High
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-43
P86#00
P86$00
SFac—
None!
# DP—
0 dp
ü
ü ü
ü
Pulse Scaling Factor
(P851 ‘FqInA-B’, ‘PhsTm’ or ‘QdDc2-3’)
Number of Decimal Places
(P863 must be assigned a parameter)
Valid Operating Parameter
0 à 5 Decimal Places, Auto,
Scale: 1 à 8
Custom Transmit (Custom Transmits must be assigned at P989 for access to P990 à P4999)
P98) 00 TxRat
0.5 s
ü
Continuous Transmit Rate 0=Disabled; 0.1s à 25.0s
(Enter as 1 à 250)
P98(01 CusTx
1
ü ü
Custom Transmit Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P990 à P4999)
460 Series
Custom Transmit: 1 à 4
660 Series
Custom Transmit: 1 à 100
P99) 00 TxNam
None!
ü ü
Transmit Name
660 Series
Custom Transmit: 1 à 250
Name Entry
(79 characters maximum)
Off, On Request, Prompt P99!01
Send:
OnReq
ü ü
Transmit Mode
P99@01 Port
Comm1
ü ü
Serial Port Selection
(On Request not available on the
460)
460 Series
Comm: 1 à 2
560 Series
Comm: 1 à 3, LCD
660 Series
Comm: 1 à 4, LCD
Ignored, Delayed Current Scale Motion
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
P99#01 CSMtn
Dly’d
ü ü
3-44
Custom Transmit (continued)
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-22 Chapter 3
S ETUP P ARAMETER M L K P D ESCRIPTION
Scale Motion
P99$00 Mot’n
Ignrd
ü ü
P99%00
P99^00
P99&00
P99*00
See
P994!
See
P994!
See
P994!
Cont.
Disbl
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
Scale 2 Motion
Scale 3 Motion
Scale 4 Motion
Continuous Transmit Enable
P99(00
P100) 0
LmtAc
no
Tx 1
††††‚
ü ü
ü ü ü
Transmit Table Limited Access
Transmit Entry Table
Setpoints (Setpoints must be assigned at P5099 for access to P5100 à P5150)
Setpoint Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P5100 à P5150)
P509(1 Setpt
1
ü
P510)0
P510!
0
SPTyp
Disbl
SPNam
None!
ü ü
ü ü
Setpoint Mode
Setpoint Name
Activation Condition
P511)0
P511!
0
Activ
Above
AcDly
0.00
ü ü
ü ü
Activation Delay
Activation Macro#
P511@0 AcMac
None!
ü
P511#0
P511$ 0
AcMtn
Ign’d
ALPar
None!
P511% 0 AUPar
None!
Setpoints (continued)
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
Activation Motion
ü
Lower Activation Parameter
ü
Upper Activation Parameter
S ELECTIONS
460 Series
Any combination of scale numbers 1 à 2
560 Series
Any combination of scale numbers 1 à 4
660 Series
Any combination of scale numbers 1
à
8
Ignored, Delayed
(These parameters are maintained for upload backward compatibility with the M650 and are not intended to accept keyboard entry; refer to P994).
Disabled, Enabled
R EFERENCE
3-44
3-44
3-44
No, Yes
3-44
Table Entry
(text, parameter, control code ) 3-44
460 Series
Setpoint: 1 à 16
560 Series
Setpoint: 1 à 48
660 Series
Setpoint: 1 à 256
Disabled, Output, Input
Name Entry
(79 characters maximum)
460 Series
Above, Below, Between, Outside, Always,
Never, Motion1-2, Stable 1-2, Motion
Current, Stable Current
560 Series
Above, Below, Between, Outside, Always,
Never, Motion1-4, Stable 1-4, Motion
Current, Stable Current
660 Series
Above, Below, Between, Outside, Always,
Never, Motion1-8, Stable 1-8, Motion
Current, Stable Current
0.01s à 5,767,168s
460 Series
Macro: 1 à 15
560 Series
Macro: 1 à 100
660 Series
Macro: 1 à 250
Ignored, Delayed
Valid Operating Parameter
Valid Operating Parameter
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-23
S ETUP P ARAMETER M L K P D ESCRIPTION S ELECTIONS
P513)0 Deact
Above
ü ü
Deactivation Condition 460 Series
Above, Below, Between, Outside, Always,
Never, Motion1-2, Stable 1-2, Motion
Current, Stable Current
560 Series
Above, Below, Between, Outside, Always,
Never, Motion1-4, Stable 1-4, Motion
Current, Stable Current
660 Series
Above, Below, Between, Outside, Always,
Never, Motion1-8, Stable 1-8, Motion
Current, Stable Current
0.01s à 5,767,168s P513!
0 DeDly
0.00
ü ü
Deactivation Delay
P513@0 DeMac
None!
ü ü
Deactivation Macro# 460 Series
Macro: 1 à 15
560 Series
Macro: 1 à 100
660 Series
Macro: 1 à 250
Ignored, Delayed P513#0
P513$ 0
P513% 0
P515) 0
DeMtn
Ign’d
DLPar
None!
DUPar
None!
CmPar
Gross
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Deactivation Motion
Lower Deactivation Parameter
Upper Deactivation Parameter
Compare Parameter
Valid Operating Parameter
Valid Operating Parameter
Valid Operating Parameter
Modbus Parameter Map (Parameters are sequentially allocated at P6001 à P6247 as needed)
P600!
0 Modbs
None!
ü
Modbus Address Translation Table Valid Operating Parameter
Macros (Macros must be assigned at P9990 for access to P9991 à P19999)
P998)0
P998!0
Abort
None!
Abort
Menu
ü
ü
Abort Macro#
Macro Abort Method
460 Series
Macro: 1 à 15
560 Series
Macro: 1 à 100
660 Series
Macro: 1 à 250
Menu, Immediate
P999)0 Mac.#
None!
MName
None!
ü
ü ü
Macro Instance Selection
(Defines instance for P9991 à P19999)
Macro Name
460 Series
Macro: 1 à 15
560 Series
Macro: 1 à 100
660 Series
Macro: 1 à 250
Name Entry
(79 characters maximum)
P999!
0
P999@0
P999#0
P999$0
P1000!
Macro Debug
P5000)
P5000!
Invok
Std
Menu
Disbl
LmtAc
no
Mc 1
††††‡
LmtAc
no
None!
‡‡‡‡‡
ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
Macro Priority
Macro Menu Enable
Macro Table Limited Access
Macro Entry Table Table Entry
(text only)
Macro Debug Table Limited Access No, Yes
Macro Debug Table
Standard, Immediate
Disabled, Enabled
No, Yes
Read-Only Diagnostic Table
R EFERENCE
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-24 Chapter 3
GSE Scale Systems
P ARAMETER D ESCRIPTIONS
This section provides a brief description of each setup parameter.
Parameters are presented in numeric order. Refer to this section when installing options to ensure proper configuration.
S CALE C ONFIGURATION
The scale configuration parameters provide the basic configuration for each enabled scale.
P108: Scale Instance
Sets the scale# in effect when accessing the remainder of the scale configuration parameters P109 à P145.
P109: Scale Enable
Determines whether the scale in effect at P108 is disabled, saved or enabled.
When a scale is disabled , the scale is not accessible from the weigh mode. All of the scale’s setup parameters (P110 à P145) are disabled for viewing in the setup mode and any previous configuration for that scale is lost. Calibration data for that scale is also lost along with A/D calibration values. Therefore, do not disable a scale if you intend to re-enable it.
Instead select the save option.
A saved scale is not accessible from the weigh mode, however all scale configuration including calibration data and A/D calibration values are retained. Thus a saved scale can be re-enabled without having to be reconfigured or re-calibrated.
An enabled scale is a fully active scale accessible from the weigh mode for viewing via the [SCALE SELECT] key. All weight-based operating parameters for the enabled scale will be considered valid instances when using them in macros or when assigning operating parameters to setup parameters.
P110: Full Scale Capacity
Sets the scale’s full scale capacity. The capacity is entered in terms of the default units specified at P150. Capacity entries of 100,000 or greater will be displayed with the ‘kilo’ abbreviation (i.e. 100K).
An overload condition is considered to be 104% of full scale.
P111: Division Size
Selects the scale’s division size. Pressing [CLR] will automatically select the nearest division size less than or equal to 10,000 based on the capacity selected at P110. A warning message is displayed if you select a division size that exceeds 25,000 divisions.
P112: Zero Track Divisions
Selects the number of zero tracking divisions to a resolution of 0.1
divisions. For example, an entry of 35 will be accepted as ±3.5 divisions of zero tracking. If the live weight on the scale remains within the zero
Setup Parameters 3-25 tracking range for a period of time specified by the zero track delay (P113), then the weight is tracked to center-of-zero.
Note that when the weight on the scale falls within the zero tracking range, the weight is not displayed providing a visual indication that zero tracking is in effect.
P113: Zero Track Delay
Selects the zero track time delay to a resolution of 0.1 seconds. For example, an entry of 15 will be accepted as 1.5 seconds.
P114: Motion Divisions
Selects the number of motion divisions to a resolution of 0.1 divisions. For example, an entry of 35 will be accepted as ±3.5 divisions of motion. If the live weight on the scale remains within the motion range for a period of time specified by the motion delay (P115), then the weight is considered to be stable.
Note that when the weight on the scale is considered to be in motion, the units will be not visible on the display. The units will be displayed once the scale becomes stable.
P115: Motion Delay
Selects the motion time delay to a resolution of 0.1 seconds. For example, an entry of 25 will be accepted as 2.5 seconds.
P116: Digital Filter
Selects the degree of A/D filtering used in calculating weight-based parameters. The longer the filter duration, the more stable the weight will appear. However, increasing the filter duration will also result in a slower response to rapidly changing weights and may therefore be undesirable in applications that require a prompt and accurate response to weight fluctuations. Auto-filter selections (identified as ‘sA’) can be used in such situations to provide a stable reading (heavy filter) when weight changes are small and switch to a light filter when the rate of change in weight increases.
P117: Display Update Rate
Selects the display update time delay to a resolution of 0.1 seconds. For example, an entry of 5 will be accepted as 0.5 seconds. The display update rate does not provide any filtering effects. It can be thought of as a shutter, controlling how often the display is updated to view the current weight value.
P118: Zero Range
Selects the amount of weight as a percentage of full scale that can be zeroed out using the [ZERO] key.
P119: Linearization
Enables the five-point linearization feature used during load cell calibration.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-26 Chapter 3
GSE Scale Systems
P122: Return-to-Zero
Selects a weight threshold as a percentage of full scale below which the gross weight must fall before another accumulation can be performed.
P124: Count Resolution
Selects the internal count resolution used in determining the quantity.
Normally this is set to zero (0) which uses the maximum internal resolution when determining the quantity. However, when displaying a very large count of very light pieces, the display may appear unstable. Decreasing the count resolution will increase the count division size, thus making the count appear more stable.
P125: Count Adjustment Factor
Assigns a conversion factor to the number of additional pieces that can be added and still ensure the required accuracy is met. For example, if the adjustment factor is 1.0 and the display reports you can add up to 200 additional pieces after performing a sample, changing the adjustment factor to 0.1 would allow you to add up to 2000 pieces – changing the adjustment factor to 10.0 would only allow you to add up to 20 pieces.
P126 – P130: Multi-Range
Configures the operation of the multi-range feature (see page 5-17).
P131 – P134: Units
Assigns the units selectable via the [UNITS] key from the weigh mode.
The units assigned at P131 will become the power-up units for the scale presently specified at P108. Three additional units can be assigned at
P132 à P134 for access via the [UNITS] key.
P135: Rate Measurement Period
Assigns the rate measurement period (RMP) over which the rate of weight change is averaged. For example, an entry of 2.5 will result in a 2.5
second rate averaging period. Thus, every 1/60 th
of a second (the A/D conversion rate) the rate reported at 23P will be updated to reflect the average rate over the last 2.5 seconds (150 readings). A longer the RMP will yield a more stable the rate display but will be slower to respond to rapid changes in rate.
P136: Rate Time Unit
Sets the time measurement criteria for calculating the rate (i.e.
rate/second, rate/minute, rate/hour).
P142: Center-of-Zero Annunciator
Enables the center-of-zero annunciator. In multi-scale applications, disabling the center-of-zero annunciator will allow you to view the scale number when the weight is at center-of-zero.
S
TATUS
The status parameters allow renaming of the status word transmitted when using operating parameter 97P.
Setup Parameters 3-27
P143 – P147: Status Name
Assigns the transmitted text of the status parameter (97P) for overload, underload, motion, stability, underload and error (bad A/D) status at P143
à P147 respectively. Pressing [CLR] without an entry in process will restore the default status name.
U
NITS
The units parameters are used to assign the default units of measure and provide custom unit configuration.
P150: Default Units
Selects the scale’s default units of measure. All weight-based parameter values are stored in terms the default units.
P151 – P154: Custom Units
Configures up to two (2) custom units of measure. P151 and P153 are used to assign the name for custom unit 1 and custom unit 2 respectively.
P152 and P154 are the conversion factors for custom unit 1 and custom unit 2 respectively. The conversion factor is a conversion from the default units specified at P150.
T ARE F UNCTIONS
The tare functions are used to enable the negative tare and tare rounding features.
P162: Negative Tare
Enables the entry and use of negative tare values.
P163: Tare Rounding
Enables tare rounding. When enabled, the tare value is stored internally to the display resolution. This is done to ensure that the addition of multiple tare and net values will yield the correct sum when compared to the displayed values. When disabled, the tare value is stored to a higher precision and may result in a discrepancy between the accumulation of tare and net values as compared to the displayed values.
A NALOG O UTPUT
The analog output parameters provide configuration of the analog output modules.
P170: Analog Output Instance
Sets the analog output# in effect when accessing the remainder of the analog output configuration parameters P171 à P177.
P171: Analog Output Enable
Enables the analog output currently specified at P170.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-28 Chapter 3
P172: Output Parameter
Assigns the operating parameter that the analog output will track.
P173: Full Scale Output
Assigns the full scale analog output. If set to “ None!
” the full scale capacity assigned at P110 is assumed. To specify a different full scale value, assign a variable to P173. Then, assign the desired full scale value to the assigned variable. It is advisable to configure the variable for autosave at P684 to ensure the value is retained during power loss.
P174: Zero Offset
Assigns the zero offset for the analog output. If set to “ None!
” the full zero offset is assumed to be zero (0). To specify a different zero offset value, assign a variable to P174. Then, assign the desired zero offset value to the assigned variable. It is advisable to configure the variable for autosave at P684 to ensure the value is retained during power loss.
P175: Output Signal Range
Assigns the signal range for the analog output. If set to “ None!
” the signal range is assumed to be the maximum allowable output (10V or 20mA). To specify a different signal range value, assign a variable to P175. Then, assign the desired signal range value to the assigned variable. It is advisable to configure the variable for auto-save at P684 to ensure the value is retained during power loss.
If the output signal range is specified to be 5 for a 0-10VDC output, then the maximum output will be linearized between 0VDC (with no zero offset) and 5VDC at full scale. If the output signal range is specified to be 16 for a 4-20mA output, then the maximum output will be linearized between
4mA (with no zero offset) and 16mA at full scale.
P176: Default Output in Setup Mode
Selects the analog output signal level when entering the setup mode.
When you enter the setup mode, the A/D conversion process and all weight calculations are suspended. Thus the analog output can no longer track the value of a weight-based parameter.
Select Max to generate the maximum analog output signal while in the setup mode (10V or 20mA).
Select Min to generate the minimum analog output signal while in the setup mode (0V or 0mA or 4mA).
Select Same to keep the analog output at the same level it was at immediately prior to entering the setup mode.
P177: Output Signal Type
Selects the analog output signal type (0-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4-20mA).
C
OUNTING
The counting parameters provide configuration of the counting feature.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-29
P179: Count Enable
Enables the counting feature and makes P124, P125 and P180 à P189 available for configuration. It also makes all of the counting operating parameters available as valid parameter selections.
P180: Auto Sample Enable
Enables the auto sample feature. When the auto sample feature is in effect, a quantity will be automatically calculated upon stability after adding the sample.
P181: Auto Enhance Enable
Enables the auto enhance feature. When the auto enhance feature is in effect, adding additional pieces will result in a recalculation of the APW upon stability, providing the number of pieces added did not exceed the accuracy requirement. The APW is continually enhanced based on a larger sample size without the need for counting additional pieces.
P182: Default Sample Size
Sets the default sample size.
P183: Required Accuracy
Selects the accuracy requirement for sampling and auto enhancement.
P184: Accuracy Display Enable
Enables the accuracy display. When enabled, the calculated accuracy of the current sample will be shown on the display.
P185: Pre-Sample Scale
Selects the scale# to be automatically selected every time a sample routine is initiated.
P186: After-Sample Scale
Selects the scale# to be automatically selected after a sample routine is completed.
P187: Sample Filter
Selects the filter setting to be used when performing a sample operation
(separate from P116).
P188: Enforce Sample Accuracy
Enables sample accuracy enforcement. If the required accuracy specified at P183 is not achieved during a sample routine, the sample will not be accepted. More pieces will be required to complete the sample routine.
P189: Sample Motion Divisions
Selects the number of motion divisions to be used during a sampling routine (separate from P111) to a resolution of 0.1 divisions. For example, an entry of 15 will be accepted as ±1.5 divisions of motion.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-30 Chapter 3
GSE Scale Systems
C OMMUNICATION P ORTS
The communication port parameters provide comm port configuration.
P199: Serial Port Instance
Sets the communication port# in effect when accessing the remainder of the serial port configuration parameters P200 à P211.
P200 – P204: Protocol
Selects the comm port’s communication protocol. The port’s protocol must match that of the connected device.
P205: Receive Mode
Selects the comm port’s receive mode.
If the port is disabled , all received data is ignored
If the port is set to standard receive, all receive characters are processed normally.
If the port is set to interpret , all received characters are screened through the input interpreter (P217 à P224) before being used or discarded.
If the port is set for Modbus , all received characters are processed as
Modbus protocol. Enabling Modbus at P205 makes P209 à P211 available for configuration.
If the port is set for selection 4 à 250, a received character will invoke macro 4 à 250 respectively.
P206: Transmit Mode
Selects whether or not a transmission will be delayed when the transmit buffer becomes full.
If set to delay , the transmission will be put on hold until the transmit buffer empties to the point where handshaking is asserted.
If set to abort , the transmission will be immediately aborted once the transmit buffer becomes full.
P207 – P208: Transit / Receive Buffer Size
Sets the size of the transmit and receive buffers at P207 and P208 respectively.
P209: Modbus Address
Selects the Modbus address. P205 must be set for Modbus for this parameter to be available.
P210: Modbus Mode
Selects Modbus ASCII or RTU mode. P205 must be set for Modbus for this parameter to be available.
P211: Modbus Word
Selects the Modbus word format. HiLo will transmit a Modbus high byte followed by the low byte, LoHi will reverse the order.
Setup Parameters 3-31
I NPUT I NTERPRETER
The input interpreter parameters provide configuration of each communication port’s input interpreter. P205 of the communication port setup must be set to “ interpret ” or have been over-ridden by the %H macro command for P217 à P224 to take effect.
Refer to 8-48 for a more complete definition of the input interpreter configuration.
P217: NULL Character Enable
Enables the use of a null character in an input string. If enabled, any null character included in an input will be converted to a US control code
(0x1F).
P218: Receive Termination Character
Selects the receive termination character for all line type input interpreters.
Received data will not be interpreted until the termination character is received.
P219: Input Interpreter Instance
Sets the interpreter# in effect when accessing the remainder of the input interpreter configuration parameters P220 à P224.
P220: Interpreter Name
Assigns a name to the input interpreter for documentation purposes.
P221: Interpreter Type
Selects whether the interpreter is a character type or line type.
P222: Line Interpreter Entry Table
Begins the input interpreter table for line-type interpreters.
P223: Interpreter Character
Assigns the interpreter character for character-type interpreters.
P224: Interpreter Macro#
Assigns the macro to be invoked upon receiving a valid interpreter character/string.
N UMERIC P ARAMETER F ORMATTING
The numeric parameter formatting parameters set the data format for transmitting numeric data.
P240: Minimum Transmit Width
Assigns the minimum number of character to send when transmitting weight data. If the number of digits that make up the weight is less than the minimum transmit width, the number is left-padded with spaces to make up the difference.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-32 Chapter 3
P241: Sign Justification
Selects whether the polarity sign will appear right justified (to the immediate left of the most significant digit) or left justified (in the left-most position of the data field) when transmitted.
For example, assuming a minimum transmit width of 8 specified at P240, the number –10.25 would be transmitted as
-10.25
with left justification, and
- 10.25
with right justification.
Note that with right justification, the left-most space or padded zero (0) will be replaced with the polarity sign. Thus if you wish to maintain space for eight digits in the data field, you must specify a minimum transmit width of nine (9).
N ETWORKING & R EMOTE C OMMUNICATIONS
The networking parameters configure an indicator’s network address.
Remote communication parameters configure communication to a remote display, other indicators used in the remote display mode and other devices requesting display information.
P250: Network Enable
Enables network addressing and makes P251 available for configuration provided P205 is not set for Modbus.
P251: Network Address
Assigns the network address for the indicator. Note that the network address is assigned as a single ASCII byte value. An entry of ‘4’ does not refer to the actual number four (4), rather it is and ASCII ‘4’ or an <EOT> control code. If you want the indicator’s address to be the number four (4), you would have to enter the address as 52 (the ASCII value of 4). Refer to
Appendix B for a list of ASCII character values.
P290: Echo Display
Selects the communication port# to be used to echo the displayed data to a remote indicator or other serial device. Once a port is chosen, display data will begin echoing immediately without requiring you to save changes and exit the setup mode.
P291: Echo Start Character
Assigns the start character that signifies the beginning of echoed display data.
P292: Echo End Character
Assigns the end character that signifies the ending of echoed display data.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-33
P293: Remote Display Enable
Selects the type of remote display connected to the optional remote display serial bus module.
P294: Remote Display Backlight Enable
Enables the LCD remote display backlight.
W
EIGH
M
ODE
P
ARAMETERS
The weigh mode parameters assign the order in which operating parameters are selected for viewing in the weigh mode via the [SELECT] key.
P300 – P309: Mode Selections
Assigns the operating mode selectable via the [SELECT] key from the weigh mode. The parameter assigned at P300 will become the power-up mode for the scale.
A
CCESS
C
ODES
The access code parameters assign alternate user-defined access codes for entering the setup mode and calibration mode. See page 3-5 for complete details in using PIN numbers.
P400: Personal Identification Number
Assigns a custom PIN number as the setup mode access code.
P401: Quick Calibration Access Number
Assigns a custom PIN number as the quick calibration access code.
P402: Limited Access Number
Assigns a custom PIN number as the setup mode limited access code.
OIML
The OIML parameters are used to configure the indicator for alternate language character sets and for compliance with OIML regulations. See page 6-2 for complete details on OIML configuration.
P410: OIML Enable
Enables OIML operation.
P411: Language Character Set
Selects the language for the ASCII character set. Selecting alternate languages will result in various display character substitutions as shown in
Table 6-4 on page 6-6.
P412: Preset Enable
Enables the preset status identifier for manually entered tare and accumulation values.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-34 Chapter 3
VFD / LCD D ISPLAY S ETUP
The VFD/LCD display setup parameters define the operation of the standard displays.
P420: Standard VF Display Mode
Selects the operation of the standard 7-segment VF display and control the backlighting of the LCD.
If set to ON , the VFD will always remain on with the intensity set at P423.
The LCD backlight will also remain on provided the backlight is enabled at
P294.
If set to OFF , the VFD will always remain off with the intensity set at P424.
The LCD backlight will also remain off regardless of the backlight setting at
P294.
If set to AUTO , the VFD will remain on with the intensity set at P423 as long as the scale does not become stable within the number of divisions set at P421 for the length of time specified at P422. This condition will also maintain the LCD backlight. Once stability is achieved within the parameters of P421 and P422, the VFD will turn off with the intensity set at
P424. In the case of the LCD, the backlight will turn off. This serves as a power saving feature when the indicator is being powered by battery. Use of this feature may also extend the life of the VFD.
P421: Weight Threshold Divisions
Selects the number of divisions required to yield a stable condition for
P420.
P422: Time-out
Selects the time-out period required to yield a stable condition for P420.
P423 – P424 Display Brightness (7-segment VFD only)
Selects the degree of VFD brightness when the display is on (P423) and off (P424).
P425: 4X20 VF / LCD Display Enable
Enables the 4X20 VF display for displaying the auto-update information normally sent to the 7-segment VFD. This parameter is normally enabled only for the model 661 where the 7-segment display is not present and there is no other means of displaying the auto-update information.
When an LCD display is installed, it is auto-detected by hardware. This will result in P425 being automatically set to LCD Always . It will not be possible to over-ride this setting as long as the LCD is installed.
P430: LCD Contrast (LCD only)
Selects the power-up contrast setting for the LCD display. Pressing [CLR] will restore the default contrast setting.
The LCD contrast can also be set at power-up without accessing the setup mode. Refer to the section on LCD Contrast Adjustment on page 2-27.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-35
NTEP
The NTEP parameter is used to aid in ensuring compliance with NTEP regulations. See page 6-8 for complete details on NTEP configuration.
P440: NTEP Enable
Enables NTEP operation.
K EYPAD
The keypad parameters are used to assign the type of keypad in use and sets the keypress characteristics.
P450: Keypad Selection
Selects the type of keypad (number of keys) installed.
The keypad selection can also be set at power-up without accessing the setup mode. Refer to the section on Keypad Configuration on page 2-28.
P451: Keypad Repeat Rate
Selects the speed at which a held key will repeat its keypress.
P460: Beeper Volume
Selects the volume of the beeper when a key is pressed.
T IME & D ATE
The time & date parameters are used to set and format the time and date.
P500: Time
Assigns the current time. Time must be entered in 24-hour format using the form hh.mm.ss
or hh:mm:ss (seconds are optional).
P501: Date
Assigns the current date. If P504 is set for USA style, the date is entered using the form mm.dd.yy
or mm/dd/yy . If P504 is set for International style, the date is entered using the form dd.mm.yy
or dd/mm/yy .
P502: Time / Date Access
Enables the time & date accessibility so they can be changed from the weigh mode when the time/date parameter is selected.
P503: AM / PM Time Format
Selects 12-hour or 24-hour format for displaying and transmitting time & date values.
P504: Date Format
Selects USA (mm/dd/yy) or international (dd.mm.yy) format when displaying and transmitting date values.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-36 Chapter 3
GSE Scale Systems
DSD C ONFIGURATION
DSD parameters are used to configure the Data Storage Device (DSD) feature. Refer to page 6-13 for a complete description of DSD operation.
P590: DSD Enable
Enables the Data Storage Device feature (DSD) and provides access to the other DSD parameters (P591 à P595)
Enabling DSD will override P806 to redefine the [ID] key to invoke the
DSD Menu. It will also redefine P205 as the DSD receive mode for the specified DSD communication port.
!
When enabling or disabling DSD, you will be prompted to clear the
DSD database records before the change is allowed. Be sure to download any stored data before proceeding.
P591: DSD Serial Port
Selects the communication port to be used for DSD transmissions.
The usage of the DSD port selected at P591 can be temporarily overridden by usage of the %H macro command. If the selection is turned off, then no DSD transmits or receives will occur. If the port number is changed, then the new port will be used.
Nothing prevents other indicator transmissions from being sent over the
DSD port. No other processing of received data will occur on this port.
Note that if a comm port selected is programmed as receive disabled, selecting it does not turn the port on, no data will be received.
P592: DSD Receive Character
Specifies a single character used to create a row in the DSD database when received on the DSD communication port.
P593: DSD Custom Transmit
Specifies a custom transmit used to automatically transmit DSD data after a row has been created in the DSD database. The custom transmit specified will not allow non-DSD parameter entries. Transmission will be motion delayed by virtue of the stored data row. The custom transmit communication port can be specified at P991.
P594: DSD Maximum Number of Rows
Specifies the maximum number of DSD data rows that can be stored in the database. An attempt to store a record in a full database will result in a 1 second OVER-WRITE warning message indicating that the oldest record will be deleted before storing the new data row.
P595: DSD Number of Warning Rows
Specifies the number of unused rows at which point a 1 second warning message will be displayed. For example, if the maximum number of rows is 1000 and the number of warning rows is 100, then a warning message will be displayed for every data row stored after the 900 th
record. The maximum number of warning rows is 999.
Setup Parameters 3-37
P ARAMETER R ENAMING
The parameter renaming parameters provide the ability to rename various operating parameters.
P600 – P646: Rename Parameters
Assigns alternate names to operating parameters. Assigned names are displayed and transmitted in place of the default names. This feature is useful when configuring the indicator for foreign languages.
Note that counting must be enabled at P179 in order for the counting rename parameters to become available.
T OTAL & T ARE S AVE
The total & tare save parameters are used to enable the tare and accumulation parameter values to be saved in non-volatile memory and restored in the even of power loss.
P660 – P661: Total / Tare Save Method
Selects whether accumulation values and tare values will be written to the
EEPROM each time the values change so that the values may be retained and restored in the event of a power loss.
If set to AUTO , the values are automatically stored to the EEPROM when changed.
If set to No Save , the values are not written to the EEPROM and will be lost during a power failure.
If set to On Request , the values can only be written to the EEPROM via the %v macro command.
V
ARIABLES
The variable parameters allow configuration of variables.
P680: Number of Variables
Assigns the number of variable registers to be dynamically allocated.
Once allocated, the number of variables may be increased or decreased as necessary (memory permitting).
P681: Variable Instance
Sets the variable# in effect when accessing the remainder of the variable configuration parameters P682 à P689.
P682: Variable Name
Assigns a name to the variable for documentation and display purposes.
To display the name of a string variable or scale-specific float variable, the name must be 5 characters or less. If the name is greater than 5 characters, the default variable name (V#xxx) will be displayed. However, the entire given name will still be transmitted.
To display the name of a all other variables, the name must be 10 characters or less. If the name is greater than 10 characters, the default
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-38 Chapter 3 variable name (V#xxx) will be displayed. However, the entire given name will still be transmitted.
P684: Save Method
Selects whether variable values will be written to the EEPROM each time the values change so that the values may be retained and restored in the event of a power loss.
If set to AUTO , the values are automatically stored to the EEPROM when changed.
If set to No Save , the values are not written to the EEPROM and will be lost during a power failure.
If set to On Request , the values can only be written to the EEPROM via the %v macro command.
P685: Variable Lock
Enables a variable to be locked so that its value cannot be changed manually through the front panel keypad.
P686: Variable Type
Selects the variable type; float, integer, unsigned integer or string.
P687: Float Style
Selects the style of a float-type variable in terms of the number of decimal places. Selecting a scale specific float style ties the number of decimal places and displayed division size of the float value to that of the specified scale. Scale specific float values can also be viewed in alternate units of measure by pressing the [UNITS] key when displayed.
P686 must be set for “Float” for P687 to be available for selection.
P688: Integer Style
Selects the style of an integer-type variable. Integers and unsigned integers may be represented as either a whole number, a time, a date, or a time & date.
P686 must be set for “Int” or “U-Int” for P688 to be available for selection.
P689: String Size
Assigns the maximum string size allowed for the string variable.
P686 must be set for “Strng” for P689 to be available for selection.
D ATABASE
The database parameters provide configuration of database structure.
P699: Database Instance
Sets the database# in effect when accessing the remainder of the database configuration parameters P700 à P799.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-39
P700: Database Name
Assigns a name to the database for documentation purposes.
P701 – P798: Column Parameter
Assigns an operating parameter to each column of the database. P701 refers to column 1, P702 refers to column 2 and so on.
K
EYPAD
K
EY
A
SSIGNMENTS
The key assignments parameters allows individual keys to be redefined to invoke macros.
P800 – P820: Key Assignments
Assigns a front panel key to invoke a macro. Doing so disables the key’s normal function. To completely disable an individual key, assign the key to an undefined macro number.
P
ROGRAMMABLE
D
IGITAL
I
NPUT
/ O
UTPUT
The programmable digital I/O parameters provide configuration for each of the eight (8) PDIO channels (660 Series only). Refer to chapter 12 for a complete description of PDIO functions.
P850: Channel Instance
Sets the channel# in effect when accessing the remainder of the PDIO configuration parameters P851 à P864.
P851: Channel Function
Selects the PDIO channel’s function.
P852: First I/O Parameter Name
Assigns a name to the PIOA parameter for documentation and display purposes.
The name must be 10 characters or less if it is to be displayed. If the name is greater than 10 characters, the default name (PIOAx) will be displayed. However, the entire given name will still be transmitted.
P853: Second I/O Parameter Name
Assigns a name to the PIOB parameter for documentation and display purposes.
The name must be 10 characters or less if it is to be displayed. If the name is greater than 10 characters, the default name (PIOBx) will be displayed. However, the entire given name will still be transmitted.
P854: Third I/O Parameter Name
Assigns a name to the PIOC parameter for documentation and display purposes.
The name must be 10 characters or less if it is to be displayed. If the name is greater than 10 characters, the default name (PIOCx) will be displayed. However, the entire given name will still be transmitted.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-40 Chapter 3
P856: Maximum Expected Frequency
Assigns the maximum expected frequency when P851 is set for frequency debounce.
P857: Clock Source
Selects clock source A (65,536 Hz) or clock source B (524,288 Hz). A higher clock speed will provide more accuracy for some functions but could also shorten the duration of the measurement period for others.
P858: Pulse Edge Detection
Selects either a rising or falling edge as the reference for determining pulse count and frequency.
P859: Pulse Measurement Period
Assigns the time period in milliseconds for determining the frequency when P851 is set for Frequency Input A.
P860: Number of Pulses to Measure
Assigns the number of pulses to measure for determining the frequency when P851 is set for Frequency Input B.
P861: Phase Measurement Type
Selects whether to monitor Low time or High time for determining the duty cycle when P851 is set for Phase Time.
P862: Pulse Type
Permanently set for sink when P851 is set for Delay Output.
P863: Pulse Scaling Factor
Assigns a variable to be used as the pulse input scaling factor. If a variable is not assigned to P863, the scaling factor will be 1:1 (each pulse will be counted and displayed).
If a variable is assigned, then the variable’s value is used as a conversion factor for displaying received pulses. For example, a scaling factor of 0.1
will display one pulse for every 10 pulses received.
P864: Number of Decimal Places
Selects the number of decimal places to use when displaying a pulse count with a scaling factor.
C USTOM T RANSMIT
The custom transmit parameters provide configuration of the custom transmit tables and the criteria for transmission.
P980: Continuous Transmit Rate
Assigns the interval to a resolution of 0.1 seconds at which continuous transmits are transmitted.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-41
P989: Custom Transmit Instance
Sets the custom transmit# in effect when accessing the remainder of the custom transmit configuration parameters P990 à P4999.
P990: Transmit Name
Assigns a name to the custom transmit for documentation purposes.
P991: Transmit Mode
Selects the method of initiating a custom transmit.
If set to Off , the [PRINT] key or %p macro command cannot be used to initiate the transmission. Only the %Q macro command can initiate a custom transmit set to Off .
If set to On Request , the [PRINT] key can be used to initiate the custom transmit. If multiple custom transmits are set to On Request , all of those transmits will be transmitted in sequential order with one press of the
[PRINT] key.
If any custom transmits are set to Prompt , the [PRINT] key will invoke the prompt “ Which Tx# ?
”. The operator can then key in the desired transmit number and press [ENTER] to send only that transmit. Any custom transmits set for On Request will immediately follow the prompted transmit in sequential order. The selection for Prompt is not available on the 460.
P992: Serial Port
Selects the communication port that the custom transmit will be sent out.
P993: Current Scale Motion
Selects whether the custom transmit will be motion delayed based on motion of the currently selected scale.
P994: Scale Motion
Selects whether the custom transmit will be motion delayed based on motion of any combination of enabled scales. To specify a scale for motion delay, include that scale number in the entry at P994. For example, to specify motion delay for scales 1, 2, and 3, key in
123 [ENTER]
The display shows the scales in sorted order after pressing [ENTER] . If more than 5 scales are specified, the display would show the first 4 scales and an inverse down arrow. Pressing the down-arrow key will scroll the remaining specified scale numbers onto the display, one at a time.
Continued pressing or the down arrow will cause the first 4 scales to be shown. If all scales were specified, then the bottom line will display “ All ”.
If zero (0) was entered, the bottom line will show " None!
".
Requiring motion delay on multiple scales is useful for applications such as multiple-axle truck scales where all scales must become stable before printing a ticket.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-42 Chapter 3
GSE Scale Systems
P995 – P997: Scale Motion (Model 650 Compatibility)
Provided only for backward compatibility with the GSE 650 Series upload files. Selections entered here for scale’s 2, 3 and 4 will be reflected in
P994. For example, enabling motion delay for scale #2 at P995 (by entering a value of ‘1’) will result in scale #2 appearing at P994.
P998: Continuous Transmit Enable
Enables the custom transmit for continuous transmission. The continuous transmit interval is specified at P980 or through use of the %I macro command.
P999: Transmit Table Limited Access
Enables the contents of the custom transmit table to be blocked from viewing, downloading or editing if only the limited access code specified at
P402 was used to enter the setup mode.
P1000: Transmit Entry Table
Begins the custom transmit data table.
S
ETPOINTS
The setpoint parameters provide configuration of physical and logical input/output.
P5099: Setpoint Instance
Sets the setpoint# in effect when accessing the remainder of the setpoint configuration parameters P5100 à P5150.
P5100: Setpoint Mode
Selects whether the setpoint is configured as an Output , Input or
Disabled setpoint. The mode selected will determine which of the subsequent setpoint setup parameters will be available for configuration.
P5101: Setpoint Name
Assigns a name to the setpoint for documentation purposes.
P5110: Activation Condition
Selects the setpoint’s activation criteria.
P5111: Activation Delay
Assigns an activation delay (in seconds) before the setpoint will become active once the activation criteria is met.
P5112: Activation Macro#
Selects the macro to be invoked when the setpoint becomes activated.
P5113: Activation Motion
Selects whether the activation of the setpoint will be motion delayed or ignored .
Setup Parameters 3-43
P5114: Lower Activation Parameter
Assigns the operating parameter, usually a variable with a pre-assigned value, to be used as the activation threshold. The setpoint will activate when the value of the parameter assigned at P5114 is equal to or greater than the value of the compare parameter assigned at P5150.
If the setpoint is set for Outside or Between at P5110, P5114 serves as the lower limit value for the activation window.
P5115: Upper Activation Parameter
Assigns the operating parameter, usually a variable with a pre-assigned value, to be used as the upper limit value for the activation window when the setpoint is set for Outside or Between at P5110.
P5130: Deactivation Condition
Selects the setpoint’s deactivation criteria.
P5131: Deactivation Delay
Assigns an deactivation delay (in seconds) before the setpoint will become active once the activation criteria is met.
P5132: Deactivation Macro#
Selects the macro to be invoked when the setpoint becomes deactivated.
P5133: Deactivation Motion
Selects whether the deactivation of the setpoint will be motion delayed or ignored .
P5134: Lower deactivation Parameter
Assigns the operating parameter, usually a variable with a pre-assigned value, to be used as the deactivation threshold. The setpoint will deactivate when the value of the parameter assigned at P5134 falls below the value of the compare parameter assigned at P5150.
If the setpoint is set for Outside or Between at P5130, P5134 serves as the lower limit value for the deactivation window.
P5135: Upper deactivation Parameter
Assigns the operating parameter, usually a variable with a pre-assigned value, to be used as the upper limit value for the deactivation window when the setpoint is set for Outside or Between at P5130.
P5150: Compare Parameter
Assigns the operating parameter to be monitored for activation and deactivation criteria.
M ODBUS P ARAMETER M AP
The Modbus parameter map provides mapping for the memory locations of operating parameters to be used with Modbus reading and writing register functions.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-44 Chapter 3
P6001: Modbus Address Translation Table
Begins the Modbus address translation table. An operating parameter is assigned to each address. The first one is assigned at P6001, the second at P6002 and so on.
M
ACROS
The macro parameters provides configuration for each macro table.
P9980: Abort Macro#
Assigns the macro# to be invoked when another macro is aborted via the
[CLR] + [SELECT] key combination or the serial macro abort character
<248>.
P9981: Macro Abort Method
Specifies whether or not the abort menu will be invoked when a macro is aborted via the [CLR] + [SELECT] key combination or the serial macro abort character <248>.
If set to Menu , the abort menu will be displayed awaiting operator input to continue.
If set to Immediate , the abort menu will not appear. The macro will be immediately aborted and the abort macro# assigned at P9980 will be executed.
P9990: Macro Instance
Sets the macro# in effect when accessing the remainder of the macro configuration parameters P9991 à P19999.
P9991: Macro Name
Assigns a name to the macro for documentation purposes. A named macro can also be used as a method of invoking a macro via the macro menu feature.
P9992: Macro Priority
Selects the priority of the macro when invoked.
If set for Standard , the macro will be pushed onto the macro stack if another macro is running.
If set for Immediate , any macro presently running will be interrupted so that the interrupt macro can begin immediate execution. The interrupted macro will resume execution upon completion of the interrupt macro.
Refer to Interrupt Macros on page 9-161 for complete details.
P9993: Macro Menu Enable
Enables the named macro (P9991) to be invoked by selecting it via the macro menu.
GSE Scale Systems
Setup Parameters 3-45
P9994: Macro Table Limited Access
Enables the contents of the macro table to be blocked from viewing, downloading or editing if only the limited access code specified at P402 was used to enter the setup mode.
P10001: Macro Entry Table
Begins the macro program table.
M ACRO D EBUG
The macro debug parameters provide access to the macro debug table for program diagnostics.
P50000: Macro Debug Table Limited Access
Enables the contents of the macro debug table to be blocked from viewing, downloading or editing if only the limited access code specified at P402 was used to enter the setup mode.
P50001: Macro Debug Table
Begins the macro debug diagnostic table. Press [PRINT] and select a comm port to download the macro debug to a printer or PC for analysis.
Pressing [ID] (or [PRINT] + [SELECT] on the 460) at P50001 will briefly display the total number of bytes allocated for the macro trace buffer
(Bsize) followed by the number of bytes used (Bused). If no macros are programmed both numbers will be zero (0).
S
CRIPT
F
ILES
Script files are pre-programmed setup files residing within the firmware that can be loaded to perform various applications. Script file parameters, macros, custom transmits, etc. are loaded into the setup parameters directly from the firmware by defaulting the indicator to a script file selection.
L OADING S CRIPT F ILES
To load a script file:
1.
Access the setup mode using the setup access code.
2.
Select the Default All parameter (P65001).
3.
Press [TARE] or [UNITS] on the 465, 560 and 660 Series or [ZERO] +
[PRINT] or [UNITS] on the 460 to scroll forward and backward through the available script files.
4.
When the desired script file is displayed, press [ENTER] to initiate the default process.
5.
When the default is complete, exit and save changes to begin using the script file software.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
3-46 Chapter 3
C ONFIGURING R EMOTE K EYS (460 S ERIES )
Remote keys are configured in the same manner as script file. To configure a remote key, access P65003 and follow the same procedure used to load a script file.
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 4
C
ALIBRATION
In addition to general calibration information, this chapter provides information on the New Zero, Last Zero, Temp Zero, Only Zero, Cal Reset, and Known LCOut calibration methods. You will also learn about multiscale calibration, calibration units, and A/D calibration.
O V E R V I E W
Quick Calibration 4-2
Calibration Methods 4-3
Multi - Scale Calibration 4-10
Calibration Units 4-10
A/D Calibration 4-11
Calibration Error Messages 4-15
Restoring The Calibrated Zero Reference 4-16
4-1
4-2 Chapter 4
Example:
Accessing Quick Calibration Mode
100 ó
SetUp Keyin
Code:
54321 é å
SetUp Quick
Cal!
)00 New
Zero?
Example:
Calibration When Exiting Setup
ú
CAL
?
SETUP
SETUP
å
ENTER
=CAL!
)05 New
Zero?
C
ALIBRATION
The weight indicator to load cell(s) is calibrated by establishing zero (no load) and span (known test load) reference points. There are two ways to access the calibration menu, directly from the weight mode using the
Quick Calibration procedure, or upon exiting the setup mode.
Q UICK C ALIBRATION
Once all setup parameters are configured, the Quick Cal procedure is the easiest way to access the calibration routine. Typically used for recalibration, Quick Cal can be accessed directly from the weigh mode without entering the setup mode.
Q UICK C AL A CCESS
An access code is required to enter the Quick Cal. From the weigh mode, key in 100 [SELECT] to access the Keyin Code: display. Key in the
Quick Cal access code routine (see example: Accessing Quick Calibration
Mode ). The default Quick Cal access code is 54321 [ID] [ENTER] .
Q UICK C AL A CCESS (460)
The GSE default Quick Calibration access code for the 460 is
ú + ó ú ð õ ô
Changing the Quick Cal Access Code
The default Quick Cal access code can be changed at P401 of the setup mode. Access the setup mode (see Accessing The Parameter Setup
Mode on page 3-3), then key in 401 [SELECT] to access the Quick
Calibration Access Number parameter. If P401 displays QCAL None!
, then the default access code is in effect. Otherwise the custom code will be displayed. To enter a new Quick Cal access code, key in the new code and press [ENTER] . To restore the default Quick Cal access code, press
[CLR] .
The Quick Cal access code consists of up to five alpha-numeric characters. Alpha characters may be entered through the front panel (see
Character Entry on page 5-6). Alpha characters should not be included in the access code unless an alpha keyboard is used to access the calibration routine. Although it is possible to scroll in the code from the front keypad, characters are not viewable during entry.
C ALIBRATION U PON E XITING S ETUP M ODE
You should calibrate the scale system after making changes to the setup parameters, especially after setting the capacity and division size.
Every time you exit the setup mode, the prompt ENTER=CAL!
is displayed. Press [ENTER] at this prompt to access the calibration routine
(see example: Calibration When Exiting Setup ). Changes to parameters and calibration are saved upon exiting the calibration routine.
GSE Scale Systems
Calibration 4-3
Example:
Selecting a Calibration Method
C
ALIBRATION
M
ETHODS
)05
ó
New
Zero?
There are six methods of calibration. Press [SELECT] to select a calibration method (see example: Selecting a Calibration Method ). Press
[ENTER] to begin the calibration method selected. Refer to the appropriate section for calibration instructions.
• )05 Last
Zero?
New Zero - Establishes a new zero (no load) and span (test load)
• ó Last Zero - Performs a span re-calibration without removing the test load. (This selection is not available with linearization enabled .
)
• )05 Temp
Temp Zero - Performs a calibration without removing the current gross weight. The zero reference determined during the last calibration is maintained. (This selection is not
•
•
)05 Only
Zero?
default values for maximum sensitivity.
Only Zero - Establishes a new zero reference without affecting span.
Cal Reset - Adjusts the zero and gain factors of the A/D amplifier to
Known LCOut - Calibrates without the use of test weights. The mV/V value and full scale capacity of each load cell must be known.
)05 Cal
Reset
G ENERAL N OTES ON C ALIBRATION
ó
•
Pressing [CLR] at any point in the calibration routine moves back one
Known
LCOut
•
Pressing [CLR] at the New Zero? prompt exits calibration mode.
•
A calibration weight can be applied before or after entering the calibration weight value. The display prompts you to Keyin CalWt (key in calibration weight) or Add CalWT (add calibration weight) at the appropriate time.
•
The digital filter is automatically set to 4 seconds during calibration.
•
A motion delay is enforced during zero and span calibration.
•
New calibration values are not permanently saved until the calibration mode is exited and changes are saved by pressing [ENTER] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. If power is lost during calibration, the previously saved calibration values will be in effect when power is restored.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-4 Chapter 4
Example:
New Zero Calibration
)05
100 ó lb
Gross
SETUP Keyin
Code:
54321 é å
SETUP Quick
Cal!
)05
å
)05
New
Zero?
Mot’n
Delay
)05
)00
Units
=lb
Keyin
CalWt
ADD TEST WEIGHT
100 å
10)00 Mot’n
Delay
10)00
å
SETUP
CAL
OK ?
Save
Mods?
SETUP
å
SETUP
SETUP
å
10)00
ENTER
=SAVE
Exit
Setup
ENTER
=EXIT lb
Gross
N EW Z ERO
The most common calibration procedure, New Zero establishes a new zero (no load) and span (test load) calibration reference. Use this method for first-time calibration and complete re-calibration.
To perform a New Zero calibration:
1.
Remove all weight from the scale.
2.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
3.
Select the New Zero calibration method as described in Calibration
Methods on page 4-3.
4.
Press [ENTER] at the New Zero?
prompt to establish the new zero reference.
5.
After establishing the zero reference, the default calibration units are displayed momentarily followed by the Keyin CalWt prompt.
Apply the calibration weight, key in the calibration weight value in terms of the default calibration units and press [ENTER] to establish span.
i
If the calibration weight value was entered before the weight was applied, the display will prompt Add CalWT . Add the calibration weight and press [ENTER] .
6.
After establishing span, CAL OK?
is displayed suggesting that the calibration is acceptable, or ReCal???
is displayed suggesting that the calibration procedure should be repeated.
Accept the calibration by pressing [ENTER] at the CAL OK?
prompt or [CLR] at the ReCal???
prompt.
- or -
Repeat the calibration by pressing [CLR] at the CAL OK?
prompt or [ENTER] at the ReCal??? prompt.
8.
Once the calibration is accepted in step 6, press [ENTER] at the
ENTER=SAVE prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to save the new calibration and exit the calibration mode.
- or -
To exit the calibration mode without saving the new calibration, press [CLR] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. Then press [ENTER] at the ENTER=UNDO prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit the calibration mode.
!
If you choose to “undo” the calibration when exiting the setup mode, you will also undo any unsaved changes made to the setup parameters.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Last Zero Calibration
2)
ú
0) lb
Gross lb
Gross
ADD 10,000 LB TEST WEIGHT
1004)
100 ó lb
Gross
SETUP Keyin
Code:
54321 é å
SETUP Quick
Cal!
1004)
ó
1004)
å
1004)
New
Zero?
Last
Zero?
Units
=lb
1004)
10000 å
Keyin
CalWt
1000)
å
SETUP
CAL
OK ?
Save
Mods?
SETUP
å
SETUP
SETUP
å
ENTER
=SAVE
Exit
Setup
ENTER
=EXIT
Calibration 4-5
L AST Z ERO
Last Zero allows span re-calibration without removing the applied test weight. The last zero established by pressing [ZERO] from the weigh mode will be used as the zero reference. This procedure is especially useful when performing routine tolerance checks on large capacity scales.
A scale found to be out-of-tolerance can be easily calibrated without having to remove the test weights to reestablish a zero reference.
To perform a Last Zero calibration:
1.
Remove all weight from the scale.
2.
Press [ZERO] to zero the scale in the weigh mode.
3.
Apply the calibration test weight.
4.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
5.
Select the Last Zero calibration method as described in Calibration
Methods on page 4-3.
6.
Press [ENTER] at the Last Zero?
prompt to display the Keyin
CalWT prompt.
7.
Key in the calibration weight value in terms of the default calibration units and press [ENTER] to establish span.
8.
After establishing span, CAL OK?
is displayed suggesting that the calibration is acceptable, or ReCal???
is displayed suggesting that the calibration procedure should be repeated.
Accept the calibration by pressing [ENTER] at the CAL OK?
prompt or [CLR] at the ReCal???
prompt.
- or -
Repeat the calibration by pressing [CLR] at the CAL OK?
prompt or [ENTER] at the ReCal???
prompt.
9.
Once the calibration is accepted in step 6, press [ENTER] at the
ENTER=SAVE prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to save the new calibration and exit the calibration mode.
- or -
To exit the calibration mode without saving the new calibration, press [CLR] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. Then press [ENTER] at the ENTER=UNDO prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit the calibration mode.
!
If you choose to “undo” the calibration when exiting the setup mode, you will also undo any unsaved changes made to the setup parameters.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-6 Chapter 4
Example:
Temporary Zero Calibration
2105)
100 ó lb
Gross
SETUP Keyin
Code:
54321 é å
SETUP Quick
Cal!
2105)
ó ó
2105)
å
2105)
New
Zero?
Temp
Zero?
Mot’n
Delay
2105)
0)
Units
=lb
Keyin
CalWt
ADD TEST WEIGHT
2000 å
201) Mot’n
Delay
200)
å
SETUP
SETUP
å
CAL
OK ?
Save
Mods?
ENTER
=SAVE
!
If you choose to “undo” the calibration when exiting the setup mode, you will also undo any unsaved changes made to the setup parameters.
T EMPORARY Z ERO
Temp Zero is used to calibrate without establishing a new zero.
Calibration can be performed without removing the currently applied gross load. A temporary zero is established so that test weights can be added during calibration. The original zero reference determined during the previous calibration is not affected. This procedure is commonly used to calibrate hopper scales where it is impractical to empty the product before calibrating.
To perform a Temp Zero calibration:
1.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
2.
Select the Temp Zero calibration method as described in Calibration
Methods on page 4-3.
3.
Press [ENTER] at the Temp Zero?
prompt to establish a temporary zero reference.
4.
After establishing the temporary zero reference, the default calibration units are displayed momentarily followed by the Keyin
CalWT prompt.
5.
Apply the calibration weight, key in the calibration weight value in terms of the default calibration units and press [ENTER] to establish span.
i
If the calibration weight value was entered before the weight was applied, the display will prompt Add CalWT . Add the calibration weight and press [ENTER] .
6.
After establishing span, CAL OK?
is displayed suggesting that the calibration is acceptable, or ReCal???
is displayed suggesting that the calibration procedure should be repeated.
Accept the calibration by pressing [ENTER] at the CAL OK?
prompt or [CLR] at the ReCal???
prompt.
- or -
Repeat the calibration by pressing [CLR] at the CAL OK?
prompt or [ENTER] at the ReCal???
prompt.
7.
Once the calibration is accepted in step 6, press [ENTER] at the
ENTER=SAVE prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to save the new calibration and exit the calibration mode.
- or -
To exit the calibration mode without saving the new calibration, press [CLR] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. Then press [ENTER] at the ENTER=UNDO prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit the calibration mode.
GSE Scale Systems
Calibration 4-7
Example:
Only Zero Calibration
9%
100 ó
SETUP lb
Gross
SETUP Keyin
Code:
54321 é å
Quick
Cal!
9%
å
9%
Only
Zero?
Mot’n
Delay
0)
å
SETUP
CAL
OK ?
Save
Mods?
SETUP
å
SETUP
ENTER
=SAVE
Exit
Setup
SETUP
å
0)
ENTER
=EXIT lb
Gross
O NLY Z ERO
Only Zero is used for zero calibration only. This calibration procedure is primarily used for the zero reference after changing a scale’s dead-load, such as adding safety rails to a scale deck or installing a mixer motor on a hopper scale. Because the full scale capacity is referenced from the last zero calibration, performing a zero calibration helps to ensure that the full scale over-load will not occur prematurely due to the additional dead-load.
To perform an Only Zero calibration:
1.
Remove all weight from the scale.
2.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
3.
Select the Only Zero calibration method as described in Calibration
Methods on page 4-3.
4.
Press [ENTER] at the Only Zero?
prompt to establish the new zero reference.
5.
After establishing zero, CAL OK?
is displayed suggesting that the calibration is acceptable.
Accept the calibration by pressing [ENTER] at the CAL OK?
prompt.
- or -
Repeat the calibration by pressing [CLR] at the CAL OK?
prompt.
6.
Once the calibration is accepted in step 5, press [ENTER] at the
ENTER=SAVE prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to save the new calibration and exit the calibration mode.
- or -
To exit the calibration mode without saving the new calibration, press [CLR] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. Then press [ENTER] at the ENTER=UNDO prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit the calibration mode.
!
If you choose to “undo” the calibration when exiting the setup mode, you will also undo any unsaved changes made to the setup parameters.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-8 Chapter 4 i
If an over-load condition exists at the time of calibration, the calibration method prompts are replaced by an Over load!
message. Press [CLR] to proceed directly to the Cal Reset procedure.
C ALIBRATION R ESET
Cal Reset sets the gain factors of the A/D amplifier to minimum values and clears the A/D’s zero offset. These gain values are stored in the
Information Parameters at P61104 à P61107 (see the Calibration
Parameters section). A Cal Reset should be performed if calibration is not possible due to an over-load condition, or if the displayed weight value does not change when the test weight is applied.
To perform a Calibration Reset:
1.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
2.
Select the Cal Reset calibration method as described in Calibration
Methods on page 4-3.
3.
Press [ENTER] at the Cal Reset prompt reset the A/D amplifier.
4.
The display prompts New Zero?
. Proceed with calibration.
K NOWN L OADCELL O UTPUT
Known LCOut is used to calibrate without test weights. The exact full scale mV/V rating must be known for each load cell. All load cells must be of the same full scale capacity. This procedure works best for hopper scales where weight is evenly distributed and signal trimming is not required.
To perform a Known Loadcell Output calibration:
1.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
2.
Select the Known LCOut calibration method as described in
Calibration Methods on page 4-3.
3.
Press [ENTER] at the Known LCOut prompt to display #of LC .
The number of load cells specified during the last calibration will also be displayed. A value of zero (0) indicates that this calibration method has not yet been performed.
4.
Key in the number of load cells (8 maximum) and press [ENTER] .
- or -
Press [ENTER] to accept the displayed value.
5.
The display prompts LC#x mVv (where ‘x’ is the load cell number) and then shows the mV/V value (0.1 à 5.0) last entered for this load cell.
6.
Key in the load cell’s mV/V value and press [ENTER] .
- or -
Press [ENTER] to accept the displayed value.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Known Loadcell Calibration
2%
å
2%
1 å
2%
Known
LCOut
#ofLC
0
LC# 1
FSmVv
2% 2.0
00000
3.0012 å
2% UNITS
=lb
2%
2500 å
2%
LC FS
100.0
Updtg
Gains
)
å
)
å
SETUP
CurWt
Zero?
CAL
OK ?
Save
Mods?
SETUP
å
SETUP
ENTER
=SAVE
Exit
Setup
SETUP
å
)
ENTER
=EXIT lb
Gross
Calibration 4-9
7.
Steps 5-6 will be repeated for as many load cells as specified in step
4.
8.
The display prompts LC FS showing the value last entered for the load cell full scale.
9.
Key in the full scale capacity for the load cell(s) and press [ENTER] .
- or -
Press [ENTER] to accept the displayed value.
10.
The display briefly shows Updtg Gains as it updates the gain values, then prompts CurWt Zero?
.
11.
Press [ENTER] to establish the current input signal as the zero reference.
- or -
Press [SELECT] to display Zero=0mVv?
. Press [ENTER] to use a 0mV/V output as the zero reference.
- or -
Press [SELECT] to display Keyin CurWt . Key in the known gross weight already applied to the scale and press [ENTER] .
- or -
Press [CLR] to bypass the zeroing option.
12.
The display shows CAL OK?
suggesting that the calibration is acceptable.
Accept the calibration by pressing [ENTER] at the CAL OK?
prompt.
- or -
Repeat the calibration by pressing [CLR] at the CAL OK?
prompt.
13.
Once the calibration is accepted in step5, press [ENTER] at the
ENTER=SAVE prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to save the new calibration and exit the calibration mode.
- or -
To exit the calibration mode without saving the new calibration, press [CLR] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. Then press [ENTER] at the ENTER=UNDO prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit the calibration mode.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-10 Chapter 4
M
ULTI
- S
CALE
C
ALIBRATION
When more than one scale is enabled, the prompt Keyin Scl# appears before accessing the calibration method selections. Key in the scale number to be calibrated and press [ENTER] . Proceed with a calibration method as described in Calibration Methods on page 4-3.
After completing a calibration, the Keyin Scl# appears once again.
Enter the next scale number to be calibrated, or press [CLR] to exit the calibration mode and save the new calibration data.
i
It is not possible to select lb/oz as calibration units.
C
ALIBRATION
U
NITS
It is expected that a calibration weight will be entered in terms of the selected calibration units as determined by P150 in the setup mode. The default calibration units are displayed briefly during calibration just prior to the Keyin CalWT prompt.
Alternate units may be used during calibration by pressing the [UNITS] key at the Keyin CalWT prompt. This will scroll through any units that have been assigned to P131 à P134 of the setup mode for the selected scale.
M ULTI - P OINT L INEARIZATION
Multi-point linearization provides up to five calibration points for each scale input. This allows you to compensate for load cell non-linearity. Multi-point linearization must be enabled in the setup mode at P119. Once enabled, you can define up to five points of linearization in during the calibration routine.
To perform Multi-Point
Linearization:
1.
Access the calibration mode as described on page 4-2.
2.
Select a calibration method as described in Calibration Methods on page 4-3 and proceed with the calibration routine.
3.
Enter the calibration weight value for the first linearization point when prompted to Keyin CalWT .
4.
Once the first linearization point is established, Keyin Pnt2 is displayed.
GSE Scale Systems
Calibration 4-11 i
Linearization calibration weights and calibration factors can be viewed at P61130
à
P61139 in the information parameters.
If there was a significant change in span for the first linearization point, ReCal???
is displayed suggesting that the calibration procedure must be repeated for the first point.
5.
Enter the calibration weight value for the second linearization point.
6.
Repeat this process for up to five linearization points. If fewer than five linearization points are specified, press [ENTER] without keying in the next weight value to end calibration.
7.
After establishing all linearization points, CAL OK?
is displayed suggesting that the calibration is acceptable.
Press [ENTER] at the CAL OK?
prompt to accept the calibration and exit.
- or -
Press [CLR] at the CAL OK?
prompt to repeat the calibration.
i
A/D calibration is performed at the factory and should never require re-calibration.
!
Disabling a scale at P109 deallocates memory reserved for it’s
A/D calibration values. A/D values will be lost!
A/D C
ALIBRATION
Electrical characteristics of every Analog-to-Digital converter vary slightly.
The analog-to-digital converter for each scale input is factory calibrated to achieve optimum linear response throughout the entire signal input range.
A/D calibration should not be confused with the load cell calibration procedure. It is a one-time factory procedure that requires the use of a precision load cell simulator with a 1 mV/V output. This procedure calculates a series of A/D calibration values which can be viewed in the information parameters P61110 à P61121. These values are stored in
EEROM. A copy of these values are also permanently stored in the
FLASH ROM for the purposes of restoring them in the EEPROM as needed. Defaulting the instrument will not affect the A/D calibration values.
P RINTING A/D C ALIBRATION V ALUES
A/D calibration values should be printed or transferred to another storage medium for permanent record. They can then be restored in the event they are inadvertently deleted or when transferring multi-scale options from one scale to another.
The following figure shows a typical list of A/D calibration values. A similar printout is provided with each multi-scale option. Once saved in
EEPROM, this information can be transmitted out any of the communication ports to a printer or computer as described in the following procedure.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-12 Chapter 4 i
If A/D calibration values have not been entered for P61110 à
P61121, these parameters will show values of 0 or 1.
100%s23640%i%e Access Setup Modes, Allowing Changes
61099%s2%e P61099. Scale 2
61100%s%e P61100. Crrnt mv/v
61101%s 1.000000%e P61101. CAL Factr 1.000000
61102%s 0.000000%e P61102. ReZro Wght 0.000000
61103%s 0.000000%e P61103. ZrTrk Wght 0.000000
61104%s8%e P61104. CZero 0%%
61105%s 704623%e P61105. Fine Zero 704623
61106%s2%e P61106. CGain 100
61107%s 0.914005%e P61107. Fine Gain 0.914005
61110%s 71451%e P61110. Zero Adj25 71451
61111%s -9366%e P61111. Zero Adj50 -9366
61112%s -164049%e P61112. Zero Ad100 -164049
61113%s 0.941097%e P61113. Gain Adj1 0.941097
61114%s 0.944094%e P61114. Gain Adj2 0.944094
61115%s 0.950346%e P61115. Gain Adj4 0.950346
61116%s 0.951587%e P61116. Gain Adj8 0.951587
61117%s -186805%e P61117. AIN NROff -186805
61118%s -372531%e P61118. AIN NROff -372531
61119%s -739554%e P61119. AIN NROff -739554
61120%s -1571870%e P61120. AIN NROff -1571870
61121%s -3374%e P61121. VREF NROff -3374
61122%s 123456%e P61122. SN: 123456
64102%s View errors after uploading!
Figure 4-1: A/D Calibration Values
To print A/D calibration values:
1.
From the weigh mode, key in 60100 [SELECT] to access the GSE copyright parameter.
2.
Select A/D calibration values for the scale(s):
Key in 23640 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for all scales.*
Key in 23641 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #1.*
Key in 23642 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #2.*
Key in 23643 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #3.
Key in 23644 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #4.
Key in 23645 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #5.
Key in 23646 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #6.
Key in 23647 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #7.
Key in 23648 [PRINT] to send A/D calibration values for scale #8.
3.
The display prompts Enter Comm#. Key in the communication port number (1 à 4).*
4.
A/D calibration values are transmitted (note that all parameters from
P60000 à P61122 are transmitted if you use the code 23640 ).
* When using the 460, scroll in the number and press [ENTER] instead of [PRINT] in step #2. It is also necessary to press [ENTER] after scrolling in the comm# in step #3.
GSE Scale Systems
Calibration 4-13 i
Always verify that the serial number of the multi-scale option board or 60 Series main board matches the serial number shown for P61122.
i
Press [F1] to begin an entry with a minus ( - ) sign.
R ESTORING A/D C ALIBRATION V ALUES
The error Code 39 ƒA/D Cal appears when exiting the setup mode if a scale’s A/D calibration values are not found. This will occur after installing a new multi-scale option without completing the entire installation procedure. Since A/D calibration values must be stored in EEPROM, a list of the factory calibration values accompanies each option and must be entered in P61110 à P61121 of the information parameters. Once a multi-scale’s A/D calibration data has been saved in the EEPROM, a copy of these values are also permanently stored in FLASH ROM.
Likewise, if a scale is disabled at P109 and changes are saved when exiting the setup mode, reserved EEPROM memory is de-allocated and
A/D calibration values will be lost for that scale. To avoid this problem when temporarily disabling a scale, set P109 for “Saved” rather than
“Disabled”. This retains the scale’s A/D calibration values in EEPROM yet the scale will not be accessible from the weigh mode. The scale can later be enabled without having to restore the calibration values.
If an error Code 39 ƒA/D Cal appears but you know that the A/D calibration values were previously entered and saved, it is possible to recover them from the FLASH ROM by pressing [ENTER] at the Code 39 prompt and entering the module’s serial# as prompted.
The serial number of the 60 Series main PC board and multi-scale options is used to reference A/D calibration values. Compare the board serial number with the serial number recorded at P61122 to ensure the correct values will be entered. If you do not have access to the correct values, contact GSE to obtain them or perform the A/D calibration procedure described in the Entering A/D Calibration section.
E NTERING A/D C ALIBRATION V ALUES
If the A/D calibration values are stored as a text file on a computer using the method described in Printing A/D Calibration Values on page 4-11, then the same file can be transmitted back to the scale to restore the values. These values can also be entered manually through the front panel keypad by accessing each parameter and entering the appropriate value.
To perform an A/D Calibration:
1.
Power down the scale and disconnect existing load cell connections.
2.
Move the E1 & E2 sense jumpers to the external (EXT) position.
Failure to do so will short the load cell input connections resulting in a system reset!
3.
Short together the following load cell J1 connections:
+ SIG positive signal
- SIG negative signal
+ SEN positive sense
- SEN negative sense
SHD shield connection
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-14 Chapter 4
!
If the calibration was performed for a multi-scale option, you must enter a serial number. Key in the serial number found on the option board and press [ENTER]. This number is stored in P61122.
4.
Restore power and enter the calibration routine:
100 [SELECT] 54321 [ID] [ENTER]
5.
At the New Zero?
prompt, key in 23640 [ENTER] .
6.
The display prompts ReCAL A/D?
. Press [ENTER] .
7.
The display prompts Gnd. Input . Assuming you have already made the connections in step 3, press [ENTER] .
8.
The display will show Mot’n Delay and begin processing calibration values for several seconds.
9.
The display prompts Undo GND , then Set To 0 mV .
10.
Remove the connections from step 3 which short the signal, sense and shield.
11.
Attach a precision load cell simulator to the J1 load cell connector using excitation and signal connections.
12.
Move the sense jumpers E1 & E2 back to the internal (INT) position.
13.
Set the simulator to 0 mV and press [ENTER] .
14.
The display will show Mot’n Delay and begin processing calibration values for several seconds.
15.
The display prompts Set To 1 mV . Set the simulator to 1 mV and press [ENTER] .
16.
The display shows Mot’n Delay and begin processing calibration values for several seconds.
17.
The display shows A/D CAL’d indicating that calibration is complete. Press [ENTER] .
18.
Press [ENTER] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt and again at the
ENTER=EXIT prompt to save the new calibration and exit the calibration mode.
- or -
To exit the calibration mode without saving the new calibration, press [CLR] at the ENTER=SAVE prompt. Then press [ENTER] at the ENTER=UNDO prompt and again at the ENTER=EXIT prompt to exit the calibration mode.
GSE Scale Systems
Calibration 4-15
C
ALIBRATION
E
RROR
M
ESSAGES
If calibration problems occur despite an apparently proper configuration, carefully inspect all hardware. Moisture, obstructions, defective or worn components, improper grounding techniques, and an unsuitable environment are factors which could contribute to calibration problems.
Table 4-1: Calibration Error Messages
E RROR M ESSAGE
Error Messages During Calibration
Code02
Code03
Code08
Under
Load!
Over
Load!
Check
Conn.
D ESCRIPTION
Code30
Code31
F.S.>
MAX !
F.S.<
.1mVv
The entered calibration weight, together with the currently applied signal, results in a full scale output that exceeds the maximum allowed. Verify that correct calibration weight was entered, and that the capacity at P110 of the setup mode is appropriate for the connected load cell(s). Refer to P61100 of the information parameters to view the mV/V output of the connected load cell(s).
The entered calibration weight, together with the currently applied signal, results in a full scale output less than the minimum allowed. Verify that correct calibration weight was entered, and that the capacity at P110 of the setup mode is appropriate for the connected load cell(s). Refer to P61100 of the information parameters to view the mV/V output of the connected load cell(s).
The calibration weight applied does not produce an adequate change in the output signal.
Increase the test weight.
Code32 ADD
MORE!
Code33 ReCal
???
The calibration is insufficient to guarantee accurate results due to the calibration weight being less than 5% of capacity, or because the coarse gain was adjusted due to a significant difference in the calibration values. Repeating calibration is recommended.
The calibration weight is less than 0.1% of full scale. Increase the test weight.
)00
)00
)00
CalWt
<0.1%
CalWt
<Norm
Entry
>F.S.
The calibration weight is less than 2% of full scale. Increasing the test weight is recommended.
The calibration weight value entered exceeds the scale capacity set at P110 of the setup mode. Verify the weight entry and the full scale capacity.
)00
)00
Large
Offst
Add
CalWT
The zero reference has changed by more than ±175%. This usually indicates the presence of a significant load on the scale when the zero reference was established. Remove all weight from the scale, press [CLR] and recalibrate.
The calibration weight was not added prior to entering the weight value. Apply the test weight and press [ENTER] .
)00
)00
Must
Keyin
Entry
Error
The calibration weight value was not entered before pressing [ENTER] . Key in the test weight value and press [ENTER] . This message is also displayed if a scale number was not entered at the Keyin Scl# prompt before pressing [ENTER] .
An invalid entry was made. For example, entering scale #3 at the Keyin Scl# prompt with only
2 scales enabled, or entering a test weight value during multi-point linearization that was less than the previously calibrated value.
Errors Messages When Entering or Exiting Calibration
The input signal is less than negative full scale. Verify that the signal connections are not reversed and that the load cell is properly installed. Check P61100 of the information parameters to view the mV/V output of the connected load cell(s).
The input signal is greater than full scale. Verify that the load cell is properly installed and that all dead load has been removed from the scale. Check P110 of the setup mode for the correct capacity. If this is a first-time calibration, a calibration reset may be necessary. Press
[CLR] from the calibration mode to access the Cal Reset method.
The input signal is greater than ±2 times full scale. Check for proper load cell connections.
Code39 ƒ A/D
Cal
The A/D calibration values for one or more enabled scales have not been entered. Press any key to continue. Enter the A/D calibration values as described in the Restoring A/D
Calibration Values section beginning on page 4-13.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
4-16 Chapter 4
R
ESTORING
T
HE
C
ALIBRATED
Z
ERO
R
EFERENCE
The calibrated zero reference cannot be changed by pressing [ZERO] from the weigh mode or through zero tracking. These actions only serve to establish a new gross zero reference. In the case of a larger hopper scale partially full of material, the possibility of inadvertently zeroing out the existing material can pose a significant problem if it is not possible or practical to empty the hopper to reestablish zero. Should this situation occur, you can restore the last zero calibration reference, and thus restore the gross weight, by clearing P61102 (re-zero weight) and P61103 (zero track weight) in the information parameters. To prevent this situation, set the zero tracking parameters (P112, P113) and zero range parameter
(P118) appropriately.
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 5
W
EIGH
M
ODE
O
PERATION
The Weigh Mode Operation section of this book provides information on keypad functions, time & date, accumulation, and counting.
O V E R V I E W
Weigh Mode Operation 5-2
Disabling Front Panel Keys 5-6
Time & Date 5-7
Accumulation 5-9
Counting 5-11
Multi-Range Operations 5-17
5-1
5-2 Chapter 5
W
EIGH
M
ODE
O
PERATION
The Weigh Mode is the primary operating mode of any 60 Series instrument when it is connected to a scale platform or load cell. Depending upon the operating mode, the standard keypad keys assume different functions. This chapter defines the functions of the keys when the controller is in the Weigh Mode, plus how to disable the keys and use them in tare operations.
K EYPAD F UNCTIONS
Figure 5-1: 660 Series Keypad
GSE Scale Systems
Figure 5-2: 465 Keypad
Figure 5-3: 460 Keypad
Weigh Mode Operation 5-3
Z ERO
Press [ZERO] to zero the current quantity/weight reading. When the controller is at Center-of-Zero , the international center-of-zero symbol
Ò 0 Ñ appears on the top line of the dot matrix display. If the name of a
Custom Unit is greater than two characters, the center-of-zero symbol does not display.
If the controller is in the quantity mode, pressing [ZERO] sets the current mode to a gross zero quantity. If it is in the weigh mode, pressing [ZERO] sets the current mode to Gross Weight.
U NITS
Pressing the [UNITS] key in the quantity mode has no effect. Pressing
[UNITS] in the weigh mode toggles the display through the available units selections. The operation of the units key is associated with a specific scale. Each scale can have its own units selection. The units key only affects the units of the selected scale. When another scale is selected, the units reverts to the units selection that was in effect the last time that scale was selected.
To change units on a non-selected scale, key in the desired units selection followed by a decimal point and the scale number to be affected, and then press [ENTER] . Converted units are rounded to the appropriate increment automatically. If the “lb/oz” units selection is used, the first digits of the numeric display show the value for pounds and the last digits show ounces. Since the upper line of the dot matrix display is used to show the units, there is no center zero symbol. As with other units designations, characters that show units turn to blanks when motion is present.
S CALE S ELECT
Pressing [SCALE SELECT] toggles the weight display through all the enabled scale inputs, maintaining the mode of the currently selected scale for all other scales.
S
ELECT
Press [SELECT] to toggle the display through the gross, net and tare weights. Additional or alternate modes of operation can be assigned to the [SELECT] key at P300 à P309 in the setup mode.
The [SELECT] key can also be used to access an operating parameter directly by keying in the parameter number (followed by a decimal and the parameter instance if required) before pressing [SELECT] . For example, key in
3.2 [SELECT] to view the Gross total on Scale #2
30.4 [SELECT] to view the Quantity on Scale #4
80.17
[SELECT] to select Variable 17
80.204
[SELECT] to select Variable 204
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-4 Chapter 5
GSE Scale Systems
T ARE
Press [TARE] alone to perform an auto-tare. (A net weight of zero is then displayed.) To enter a known Tare Weight, key in the value and press
[TARE] . In either case, the controller is placed in the net mode, unless it is already in the tare mode.
Auto-Tare and / or Keyboard Tare can be disabled in the setup mode
(P802). This parameter enables the standard auto-tare key operations or allows a macro to be selected. If the macro is not programmed, the tare key is effectively disabled. The macro can also be programmed to detect keyboard entries. A macro setup such as this allows for keyboard tare entries or strictly auto-tare operations.
Also refer to P162, P163 and P660 for setup parameters that control the tare operation.
P
RINT
Press [PRINT] to send custom specified data to a printer, computer, or other device. If the specified custom transmit does not exist (for example, has not been set up yet) or is set for “off” at P991 then “NOT FOUND” is displayed and the print operation is aborted.
ID
The [ID] key has multiple functions. You can use it to:
•
Access variables
•
Access the macro menu selections (see page 9-9)
•
Access the database menu selections (see page 11-6)
•
Invoke a specific macro (see page 3-41).
The exact function of this key depends on the how it is defined in the setup mode at P806 (see page 3-41).
To access a variable using the [ID] key, simply key in the variable number and press [ID] . For example, pressing
5 [ID] will access variable #5.
A RROW / F UNCTION K EYS
The arrow keys, also known as the cursor keys or function keys, have two primary functions outside the setup mode – invoking macros and scroll in alpha-numeric characters during an operator entry.
Invoking Macros
In the weigh mode, pressing [F1] , [F2] , [F3], [F4] or [F5] will invoke macros 1 à 5 respectively. If a macro is not programmed for one of these keys, the key is considered disabled for invoking macros in this manner.
Entering Alpha-Numeric Characters
During operator entries for string variables or entries initiated by a macro command, the arrow keys take on the role of cursor keys allowing you to
Weigh Mode Operation 5-5 scroll in the alpha-numeric text to be entered. See Character Entry on page 5-6 for complete details.
S TART
Pressing [START] will invoke macro 6. This key has no other function. If macro 6 is not programmed, this key is disabled.
S TOP
Pressing [STOP] will invoke macro 7. This key has no other function. If macro 7 is not programmed, this key is disabled.
S ETUP
Pressing [SETUP] will invoke macro 8. This key has no other function. If macro 8 is not programmed, this key is disabled.
E NTER /Y ES
Press [ENTER/YES] to confirm certain numeric entries. As entries are keyed into the entry buffer, the [ENTER Yes] key completes the entry.
T HE N UMERIC K EYS
Press the numeric keys to enter numeric values 0 through 9.
T HE D ECIMAL P OINT K EY
Press [.] to establish a decimal point or perform an accumulation in the weigh or count mode (see page 5-9).
CLR/N
O
Press [CLR/NO] to clear an entry in process.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-6 Chapter 5
;
0
.
/
2
1
,
-
+
*
)
(
'
&
%
7
6
9
:
8
5
4
3
< = >
| u x y z
{
}
~ t v w
?
s
(space)
!
"
$ # r
@ A q p
B C D o n m l i h g f e k j b a
` d c
_
E
^
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
] \
Figure: Character Listing
C HARACTER E NTRY
When alpha characters and other non-numeric characters are to be entered using the front panel keypad, use the [F1
•
] , [F3
ƒ
] , [F4
€
] , and
[F5
„
] arrow keys to “build” the entry:
[F1 • ] scrolls forward through the list of uppercase and lowercase alphabetic, ASCII punctuation, and numeric characters. See the figure
Character Listing for the order of how these characters are listed.
[F4 € ] scrolls backward through the list of characters.
[F3 ƒ ] is used as a backspace key.
[F5 „ ] advances the cursor to the next character position.
To begin data entry:
1.
Press [F1 • ] to display an “A” in the bottom-right position of the dot matrix display.
2.
Use the [F1
•
] and [F4
€
] keys to cycle through the character set.
Holding down the [F1
•
] or [F4
€
] key cycles the controller through the selections more quickly.
3.
When the desired character is displayed, press [F5 „ ] to move the cursor to the next location where another “A” will be displayed. Repeat the character selection process of step 2 until you have selected all of the characters needed for the entry.
4.
Press [ENTER] to complete the entry.
460 C URSOR K EYS
Refer to Figure 5-4 for the cursor key functions on a Model 460. Note that the left and down arrow keys are two-key combinations.
Figure 5-4: 460 Cursor Keys
D ISABLING F RONT P ANEL K EYS
Front panel keys can be individually disabled at P800 à P819 in the setup mode by assigning an undefined macro number to a key. Refer to page 3-
41 for more details.
Disabled keys can be temporarily re-enabled by holding the [CLR] key at power-up until Macro Disbl is displayed. This resets all key functions to normal until power is cycled or upon exiting the setup mode.
GSE Scale Systems
Weigh Mode Operation 5-7 i
Your controller’s time and date is set at the factory.
0%2!01
12:00
:00am
T
IME
& D
ATE
The 660 Series controllers include a battery backed time-date feature. This means the time and date do not have to be entered every time the controller is powered up.
The 460 Series indicators offer an optional battery backed time-date module. Without this module, the time and date must be re-entered each time the indicator is powered up.
The Time-Date feature enables printouts of the time, day of the week, and date in many possible formats. By combining macro and setpoint capabilities with the Time-Date feature, alarm sequences can be devised to cause certain events to occur at pre-timed intervals.
V IEWING T HE T IME A ND D ATE
When the indicator is in the weigh mode, the time and date can be displayed simultaneously by keying in 11 [SELECT] . The date is then displayed on the large numeric display in the format MM.DD.YY (or
DD.MM.YY for international style) and the time is displayed on the dot matrix display in the format HH:MM:SS.
The time can be displayed in a 24-hour or 12-hour format, showing a.m. or p.m. as appropriate, depending on how the time-date feature is set up.
You must press [SELECT] to return to where you were.
E NTERING T HE T IME
You can enter a new time in the Setup Mode at P500 by keying in
HH.MM.SS in a 24-hour format. You must separate hours and minutes entries must by a decimal point. Seconds entries are optional, and if omitted, they are initially set to zero.
To specify seconds, you must also use a decimal point to separate them from minutes. You do not have to enter leading zeroes. For example, if you enter 8.9.45 and press [ENTER] , the time will be set to 08:09:45. If you enter 15.02 and press [ENTER] , the time is set to 15:02:00.
If you enter the time improperly, the prompt “try h.m.s” is displayed.
E NTERING T HE D ATE
You can enter a new date at power-up or into P501 by keying in the numbers for MO.DA.YR (or DA.MO.YR if the international format was selected) and pressing [ENTER] .
You must separate month, day, and year entries by decimal points. You do not have to enter leading zeroes. For example, if you enter 8.1.96 and press [ENTER] , the date is set to 08/01/96. If you enter the date improperly, the prompt “try m.d.y” (or “try d.m.y” for the international format) is displayed.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-8 Chapter 5
O PERATOR A CCESS T O T IME /D ATE
You can access and change the time and date directly from the weigh mode by selecting parameter 11. If P502 is set for “Enbld” (changeable), then you will be allowed to change the time when you select parameter 11.
This allows end users to adjust the time without having to know the setup access code for the controller. If Parameter P502 is set for “Disbl”, then the time/date can only be changed by accessing the setup mode at P500 and P501.
T IME /D ATE T RANSMIT C ODE (F ORMATS )
Format code combinations are included in the time/date format selections for transmitting the T/D parameter from a custom transmit table or a macro. These format codes allow a time/date type variable (current time, or variables defined as U-INTs) to be transmitted as a numeric value in terms of the number of seconds elapsed since Jan 1, 1970. This is useful in uploading time/date information to a computer for spreadsheet applications. Refer to Chapter 8, Communications for more information on time/date transmitting (multiple formats).
T IME A ND D ATE P ARAMETER S ETUP
Time and date setup parameters begin at P500 à P504. Refer to page 3-
37 for complete details.
The default name used when transmitting the time & date parameter can be changed in the setup mode at P611 (see page 3-38).
T IME /D ATE S PECIFICATIONS
The 60 Series battery-backed time/date module is a continuously running clock, even when the indicator is powered down. The time and date is set
(as Eastern Standard Time) at the factory prior to shipment. See page A-
16 for complete specifications.
T IME / D ATE O PERATION
Apply power to the controller and verify proper operation. To verify the time and date values, select the time/date mode. Key in 11 [SELECT]
The display will show the date on the large numeric digits and the time on the dot matrix display. For example, for July 16, 1996 at 3:27:23 p.m., the display will appear as 07.16.96 03:27:23pm.
Refer to the P500 setup parameters to enter the time and date or to change the format of the time and date. To include the current time and / or date into the data transmissions to a printer or other peripheral, refer to the Custom Transmit (Selections) Parameter Setup section Chapter 8,
Communications , Chapter 9, Macros , and Chapter 10, Setpoints for examples on setting up alarm routines (alarm routines configured using macros and setpoints).
GSE Scale Systems
Weigh Mode Operation 5-9
A
CCUMULATION
Many applications such as multiple dump batching systems, axle weighing systems, and inventory control require accumulation of weight values. The accumulation parameters provide an easy method for totaling multiple weighments. Separate accumulation parameters are maintained for
GROSS and NET weights for each enabled scale.
A CCUMULATION P ARAMETERS
Table 5-1 lists all operating parameter that are affected an accumulation operation.
Table 5-1: Accumulator Parameters
P ARAMETER
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
43
44
D ESCRIPTION
Gross Total
Gross Total + Current Gross Weight
Gross Total – Current Gross Weight
Net Total
Net Total + Current Net Weight
Net Total – Current Net Weight
Number of Accumulations
Total of All Gross Totals
Total of All Net Totals
P ERFORMING A CCUMULATIONS
Before attempting an accumulation, either the GROSS parameter (0P),
GROSS TOTAL parameter (3P), NET parameter (1P) or NET TOTAL parameter (6P) must be selected. An accumulation may then be performed by placing a load on the scale and pressing [ . ] [ENTER] .
Accumulations are motion inhibited, meaning the accumulation will not occur until the scale becomes stable within the limits defined in the setup mode at P114 (motion divisions) and P115 (motion time delay). Mot’n
Delay is displayed while the scale is unstable.
Once the scale becomes stable, all accumulation parameters for both
GROSS and NET are updated.
I NITIALIZING A CCUMULATION T OTALS
Accumulation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory, saving their values during power loss so that accumulations can resume when power is restored.
To reset accumulation parameters, select either the GROSS TOTAL or
NET TOTAL parameter and press [CLR] . The display prompts ENTER
=CLR!
. Press [ENTER] to confirm. All accumulation parameters are reset to zero (0).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-10 Chapter 5
GSE Scale Systems
To initialize accumulation parameters, select either the GROSS TOTAL or
NET TOTAL parameter, key in the desired total and press [ENTER] . The display prompts ENTER =New!
. Press [ENTER] again to confirm. Only the selected parameter is initialized, the other remains unchanged. The
NUMBER OF ACCUMULATIONS parameter is reset regardless of which parameter is initialized.
P REVENTING D OUBLE A CCUMULATIONS
Double accumulations occur when the same load is added to the accumulation totals more than once. This potential problem can be eliminated by properly setting the Return-to-Zero setup parameter (P122
RTZ).
The RTZ parameter mandates that the applied gross weight fall below a predetermined value before the next accumulation may occur. If the weight is not removed, CLEAR WGHT!
is displayed indicating that an accumulation can not occur.
As an example, suppose we are accumulating the weight of aluminum cans on a 100 pound capacity scale. The cans are dumped into a container that has been tared on the scale, then accumulated. The container is emptied, refilled and accumulated again just before the change of a work shift. A new worker arrives at the same station to find a container full of cans and attempts to perform an accumulation. The display prompts CLEAR WGHT!
indicating that these cans have already been accumulated. Assuming we had set P122 to a 1% Return-to-Zero value, the GROSS weight must fall below 1 pound before the next accumulation can occur.
Note that if P122 was set to 100%, a double accumulation would have occurred and the same cans would have been counted twice.
A CCUMULATION C OUNTER
Operating parameter 9, accumulation counter, is incremented by one (1) each time after every accumulation. This parameter tell us how many accumulations have occurred. This can be useful to determine the average weight of each weighment. For example, the macro assignment
80.1P=3.0P/9.0P%o divides the GROSS TOTAL of the currently selected scale by the
NUMBER OF ACCUMULATIONS and assigns the average to variable #1.
The value of P9 can not be preset manually. It is reset (set to zero) any time either the GROSS TOTAL or the NET TOTAL parameter is reset or initialized manually. It can, however, be assigned a value with a macro assignment
9.1P=10%o
L ARGE A CCUMULATION V ALUES
As the GROSS TOTAL or NET TOTAL increases, the number of decimal places will change to accommodate the number on the 6 digit display. For example, a value of 9999.00 may be displayed exactly as that number.
Weigh Mode Operation 5-11
Yet a value of 99999.00 will be displayed as 99999.0 (one decimal place is lost). When an accumulation value exceeds 999,999 it can not be represented on the 6 digit display. Instead, Code04 Num > Dsply is displayed. The actual value is still retained and may be transmitted to another display or printer.
A CCUMULATIONS AND NTEP
It should be noted that enabling setup parameter 440, NTEP, has several significant effects on the operation of the accumulation parameters. When using the accumulation feature in a legal-for-trade application these effects should be studied. Refer to page 6-8 for more details.
C
OUNTING
The ability to establish a piece-weight and count parts to a high degree of accuracy is another feature of the 60 Series instruments. The counting feature is not enabled as a standard default.
The Counting Operation is the ability of the controller to count the quantity of parts on the weigh platform. In order for the controller to accomplish this, a sampling operation must first be performed to establish the actual weight of one of the pieces to be counted.
C OUNTING M ODE (K EY O PERATION )
In order to activate the counting operations, the controller must be in the quantity mode. To access the quantity mode, place parameter 30 in the selectable modes of controller operation. Pressing the [SELECT] key, simply step through all enabled modes of controller operation, including the quantity mode, or enter the quantity mode directly by keying in 30
[SELECT] .
Once in the quantity mode, if you press the [ENTER] key alone, without first pressing a number key, the controller will perform an auto-tare, establishing a net zero as a starting point.
The current net weight will then be actively displayed and the prompt " Add
XX " will be shown, where "XX" is the default value set at parameter P182 .
If the specified number of parts is added, press the [ENTER] key to accept the sample. If a different number of parts are added other than the default sample size set at P182 , key in the actual number of parts added and then press the [ENTER] key. The subsequent results depend on the selections made for the auto-enhance and minimum accuracy selections. Refer to those sections for further information.
If you enter a number before you press [ENTER] , the controller does not perform an auto-tare. The entry is assumed to be the number of parts already present on the scale platform. If, when you enter a number, the current mode is GROSS or GrTot, then the stored tare weight is assumed to be from a previous weighment and is cleared out. Otherwise, any previous tare is assumed to be for a container that is in use, the tare is
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-12 Chapter 5 i
When the quantity mode is accessed and the residing piece weight value is 0.00, the prompt
“Must Sampl” will be displayed.
Press [ENTER] to begin a sample to determine a piece weight mode
(refer to the next section) or key in a piece weight value at P34.
retained, and the current net weight is used to calculate the piece weight based on sample size entered. This allows for a situation where the tare weight of the container (if any) is consistent and has already been established. Then you can add the parts and key in the number of parts.
Note, however, that the first method is recommended and will eliminate the possibility of inappropriate tare weights from affecting the piece weight calculation.
Although the sampling process may be performed in a number of ways, the recommended method is to access the quantity mode , place an empty box or empty container on the scale platform, and then press the [ENTER] key. The controller will perform an auto-tare resulting in a zero net weight.
The display will then prompt you to Add xx where the "xx" is the sample quantity of parts (sample size) set by parameter P182. (The manufacturer default setting is 10 pieces)
Now, add the requested number of parts to the controller’s scale platform, and press the [ENTER] key. If the sample's total weight was sufficient, the piece weight will be calculated and the sample quantity will be displayed.
Otherwise, you may be prompted to add more parts. Additional parts are requested if accuracy minimums are not met. The exact prompts will depend on whether the auto-enhance and/or minimum accuracy assurance features (Parameter 181 and Parameter 183, respectively) have been enabled.
The minimum amount of weight required for the sample routine to meet the selected accuracy requirements for the specified scale capacity is considered. If the weight of the sample is not detectable or barely detectable then the message Code 32 ADD MORE!
is displayed briefly.
This will most often occur when you press the [ENTER] key without adding any parts. If, in fact, you have placed the parts on the scale, either the parts are too light to count on that capacity platform or you must hand count a much larger quantity of parts in order to perform the sample.
N EGATIVE P IECE S AMPLING
In order to perform a negative sample routine, access the quantity mode , place a full or partially full container of parts on the scale, and press
[ENTER] . The controller will perform an auto-tare resulting in a zero net weight.
The display will prompt you to Add: xx where "xx" is the sample quantity of parts (sample size) set by parameter P182. Disregard the Add:xx prompt, assume Take:xx , and remove the requested number of parts. The weight difference of the requested number of parts is then calculated by the controller. Press the [ENTER] key. If the sample's total weight was sufficient, the piece weight will be calculated and the sample quantity will be displayed. Otherwise, you may be prompted to Take additional parts.
The exact prompts will depend on whether the auto-enhance and/or minimum accuracy assurance features have been enabled.
The minimum amount of weight required for the sample routine to meet the selected accuracy requirements for the specified scale capacity is considered. Continue to enhance, as desired. Key in the tare weight of the empty container, add the parts removed for sampling back into the container. The quantity displayed will be the total quantity of parts in the container.
GSE Scale Systems
Weigh Mode Operation 5-13
If the weight of the sample removed is not detectable or barely detectable, the message Code 32 ADD MORE!
is displayed briefly. This actually means “Take” if a negative sampling is to be performed. The controller does not know if the operator intends to perform a positive or a negative sampling if no weight is removed. This prompt indicates that more weight must be removed adding to the overall sample weight. This will most often occur when the [ENTER] key is pressed without taking out any parts. If the parts were in fact taken from the scale, either the parts are too light to count on that capacity platform or a much larger quantity of parts must be hand counted out in order to perform the sample.
U SING A UTO ENHANCE
When the auto-enhance feature (P181) is enabled, after a sample operation is performed the controller calculates the number of parts that may be added to the scale while keeping the controller's uncertainty of the number of parts on the platform within +/- 1/3 of a part.
If the total number of parts that may be counted without error is more than the number sampled, the controller will briefly display the maximum number of parts that can be used to perform an auto-enhance. If additional parts are added—while keeping the total displayed quantity less than or equal to the displayed maximum enhance amount—then as soon as motion ceases, the controller will automatically re-calculate the piece weight based on the new larger quantity. Then it will display the new maximum enhancing quantity and the process will repeat. The controller does, however, have a minimum threshold of the piece weight for which enhancements can occur. This minimum enhancing piece weight is
0.0084% of capacity. If the piece weight is less than this amount then enhancements are not possible and the message Can't Enhnc will be displayed. Whenever you key in a piece weight, the controller clears its calculated accuracy register and last sample register since neither the accuracy nor the sampled quantity of the entered piece weight are known.
Therefore, auto-enhancements are not possible with entered piece weights.
U SING M INIMUM A CCURACY A SSURANCE
The minimum accuracy feature (P183) ensures that parts counting operations will result in a pre-specified minimum accuracy. This is accomplished two ways:
•
By requiring the sampled parts to meet or exceed a minimum weight
•
When the enhance feature is enabled, by requiring additional enhancements after the initial sample operation has been performed before a large number of parts may be counted.
If the enhance feature is disabled and the weight of the sampled parts is insufficient to guarantee the required accuracy (as set by P183), you are prompted to Add xx parts. "Xx" represents the additional number of parts that you must hand-count and add to the scale in order for the accuracy to be achieved. However, if the enhance feature has been enabled , the results of a sampling operation may vary. These variations are detailed in the following sections.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-14 Chapter 5
• should be 2 times the value stated.
•
A CHIEVED A CCURACY L ESS T HAN R EQUIRED
Achieved accuracy is insufficient to allow an enhancement to occur with at least 5 additional pieces: The controller prompts you to Add xx parts, where "xx" is the number of additional parts required to allow either enhancements to be achieved, or the number required to achieve the required accuracy, whichever is less. Add the specified number of parts and press [ENTER] , or add even more parts, key in the TOTAL number of parts on the scale, and press [ENTER] .
The controller will show the current quantity on the numeric display and the message Enhn# xx on the alpha display. "Xx" is the maximum number of parts that may be on the scale in order for an enhancement to occur.
You can then add more parts, up to the number shown.
As soon as motion ceases, if the quantity displayed is more than the original sampled amount and less than the displayed maximum enhance amount, the piece weight will be re-calculated. Then the achieved accuracy will be re-evaluated. If the required accuracy still has not been achieved, another enhancement will be required and this step will be repeated with a larger maximum enhance amount. If you add more parts than specified, Code 53 Accy >Req'd is displayed, indicating that the required accuracy has not been achieved and counting may not continue.
A CHIEVED A CCURACY M ET R EQUIREMENTS
Achieved accuracy is insufficient to allow an enhancement to occur: The message Can't Enhnc is displayed briefly. This will not normally occur unless the sampled number of parts was very large and / or the piece weight was relatively small. Sampled amount is sufficient to allow enhancements: The maximum number of parts which can be counted and allow an enhancement to occur is displayed briefly and the quantity is then displayed.
In order for a given accuracy to be achieved, the weight of the sampled parts must meet or exceed a specific minimum. Table 5-2 shows the required sample weight for various accuracy requirements on a variety of platform capacities.
Table 5-2 s calculated for the filter selection of 8 seconds. It also is based on a load cell full scale input of 2 mV/V.
If a 1 mV/V full scale cell is used, all minimum weight requirements
If a 3 mV/V cell is used, the value should be 2/3 the value shown.
GSE Scale Systems
Weigh Mode Operation 5-15
Table 5-2: Minimum Sample Weight Accuracy Requirements
2LB P LATFORM R EQUIRED
A CCURACY
98%
98.48%
99%
99.20%
99.40%
99.60%
99.68%
99.80%
99.88%
99.96%
90%
91%
92%
93%
94%
95%
96%
97%
P ERCENT OF
C APACITY
0.140%
0.185%
0.280%
0.350%
0.470%
0.700%
0.875%
1.400%
2.340%
7.000%
0.028%
0.032%
0.035%
0.040%
0.047%
0.056%
0.070%
0.094%
0.00056lb
0.00064lb
0.00070lb
0.00080lb
0.00094lb
0.00112lb
0.00140lb
0.00187lb
0.00280lb
0.00370lb
0.00560lb
0.00700lb
0.00940lb
0.01400lb
0.01750lb
0.0280lb
0.04670lb
0.14000lb
10LB P LATFORM
0.0028lb
0.0032lb
0.0035lb
0.0040lb
0.0047lb
0.0056lb
0.0070lb
0.0094lb
0.0140lb
0.0185lb
0.02800lb
0.0350lb
0.0470lb
0.0700lb
0.0875lb
0.1400lb
0.2340lb
0.7000lb
50LB
0.070lb
0.093lb
0.140lb
0.175lb
0.235lb
0.350lb
0.438lb
0.700lb
1.170lb
3.500lb
0.014lb
0.016lb
0.018lb
0.020lb
0.024lb
0.028lb
0.035lb
0.047lb
P LATFORM 200LB P LATFORM
0.280lb
0.370lb
0.560lb
0.700lb
0.940lb
1.400lb
1.750lb
2.800lb
4.680lb
14.000lb
0.056lb
0.064lb
0.070lb
0.080lb
0.094lb
0.112lb
0.140lb
0.187lb
If a different filter selection is used other than the 8 second filter, refer to
Table 5-2 for minimum weight required multiplication factors. Take the minimum weight required value from the table using the 8 second filter and multiply it by the factor for the specified filter selection. This will yield the minimum weight required for the new filter selected.
Note, however, that parts counting based on weight is dependent on a reasonably consistent part weight. Some plastic parts vary in weight from piece to piece by 10% or more. Attempting to count these items with a high degree of accuracy will require a very large hand-counted random sample of the items during the piece weight calculation process. The minimum accuracy assurance is intended to guide the operator in sampling parts with a fairly consistent piece weight.
C OUNTING P ARTS
Several ways to count parts using the 60 Series indicators:
Method 1: Counting a specific number of parts
1. Access the quantity mode.
2. Place the empty container on platform (optional).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-16 Chapter 5
GSE Scale Systems
3. Press the [ENTER] key. The controller tares to a zero net weight. The display shows the current net weight and prompts, Add 10 (the actual number can be programmed by setup parameter P182).
4. Place the specified number of parts on the scale.
5. Press [ENTER] . (Or add any number of parts, key in the number added, then press [ENTER] .) The controller calculates the piece weight of the sample parts. If the number of parts added was insufficient to achieve the required accuracy as set by P183, then you are prompted to add an more parts.
6. Add the specified number of parts and press [ENTER] .
7. Add the additional parts to be counted on the scale.
Method 2: Counting with piece weight enhancement
1. Access the quantity mode.
2. Place empty container on platform (optional).
3. Press the [ENTER] key. The controller tares to a zero net weight. The display shows the current net weight and prompts: Add 10 (the actual number can be programmed in setup parameter P182).
4. Place the specified number of parts on the scale.
5. Press [ENTER] .
6. The controller calculates the piece weight of the sample parts and momentarily displays the maximum number of parts that can be added for a piece weight enhancement to occur. Then it displays the minimum achieved accuracy.
7. If a greater accuracy is desired, add more parts but not more than the maximum enhancing quantity.
8. As soon as motion ceases, the controller recalculates the piece weight and briefly displays the new maximum number of pieces that can be added and still accurately enhance the piece weight.
9. Repeat as many times as desired.
10. Add the additional parts to be counted.
Method 3: Counting with a known container weight
1. Access the quantity mode.
2. Place the full container of parts on the weigh platform.
3. Press the [ENTER] key.
The controller tares to a zero net weight. The display shows the current net weight and prompts, Add 10 . (Add means take in this instance). The actual number can be programmed in setup parameter
P182).
4. Remove the specified number of parts from the box.
5. Press [ENTER] .
Weigh Mode Operation 5-17
The controller calculates the piece weight of the sample parts removed.
6. Key in (or bar-code scan) the tare weight of the container.
7. Add the sample parts back in that were removed.
The displayed quantity then is the total number of parts in the container.
A DDITIONAL C OUNTING R ELATED P ARAMETERS
T O C ONSIDER
For the best counting results, certain setup parameter selections should be set. Refer to parameters P112 à P116, P119 and P162 à P163 beginning on page 3-27 for additional information.
12250
Range 1 (Low Range) lb ˆ
Gross
55550
Range 2 (Middle Range) lb ‰
Gross
277250
Range 3 (High Range) lb Š
Gross
M
ULTI
-R
ANGE
O
PERATIONS
Multi-Range operation allows the scale’s division size to change as weight increases. Two or three ranges can be specified. This feature is often used in truck/railroad scales where a truck might be weighed in 20 pound divisions up to 200,000 pounds, then switch to 50 pound divisions up to
400,000 pounds for weight rail cars.
S CALE N UMBER A ND R ANGE I NDICATION
The current range is determined by the gross weight. Upon power-up, range 1 is in effect, the division size specified at P127. When the gross weight exceeds the limit of range 1 specified at P126, range 2 goes into effect using the increment specified at P129. When the gross weight exceeds range 2 specified at P128, range 3 goes into effect. The limit of range 3 is the full scale capacity set at P110 using the division size specified at P111.
In order for the range in effect to change back to the lowest range, any of the following three events must occur.
•
The gross weight must fall below plus ¼ grads on range 1 i.e. P127 = 20 Lbs. The scale must fall below 5 Lbs.
•
The scale must be re-zeroed with the [ZERO] key (or %z macro command)
If the net weight is less than –5 grads and the gross weight is within the zero range (per P118), then the gross weight is zeroed and the tare is cleared and the range is reset to range 1.
The current range applies to the displaying and printing of the gross, net, and tare weights. Also, whenever rounded gross (20P) or rounded net
(21P) are referenced, the rounding is done according to the range in effect at the time of the reference. Of course, the rounding of 20P and 21P is done to the default units, not the current units.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-18 Chapter 5
GSE Scale Systems
Scale number and range indication are not shown for net or gross if the net or gross is less than 1.25 grads.(same as before, except it now applies to 1.25 grads for lowest defined range.) When [ZERO] is pressed, if the indicator is within the zero range, then it re-establishes a new zero, clears the tare, and sets the range to the low range.
A CCUMULATIONS
When accumulations are performed, the rounded values (20P & 21P) are added to the previous total. Since a total may be the result of several additions of data from different ranges (thus having different increments), it is necessary that the increment used for rounding displayed and transmitted totals to be the number of decimal places of the increment of the current units in the lowest range. This should cause the total to be displayed as the exact value of the sum of the individual values accumulated, at least in the default units.
i.e.
range 1 x .02 example value: 1.38
range 2 x .05 example value: 5.35
range 3 x .1 example value: 10.2
--------------
total: 16.93
Note: The least significant digit of the total, 0.03, is not divisible by any of the specified increments for the three ranges.
W ARNINGS
A warning message will appear when (P126) LowRangeMax > (P110) capacity OR (P128) MidRangeMax < (P126) LowRangeMax then error message "Code 38" "RangeError" is displayed briefly and you cannot exit the setup mode. Press any key and you are bounced back into the setup mode for the offending parameter.
Also, if the resolution in either the low or middle range exceed the high or low values, then warnings are displayed only. If resolution exceeds minimum or maximum values an error is displayed:
•
MAX_RES 100000.
•
HIGH_RES 25000.
•
LOW_RES 100
•
MIN_RES 1
In case of a resolution or range error, once a key is pressed the indicator returns to the setup parameter in question.
C AL M ODE
The multi-range feature does not take effect during the cal mode. The increment during cal is always that specified by P111 or the associated increment for alternate units.
Weigh Mode Operation 5-19
P RINTING
When default units is specified in the format code for printing a parameter that has units, the default units will always print with the increment specified for full scale (P111), regardless of the current range in effect on that scale.
V ARIABLES
Float type variables that are set to be scale specific at P687 will be rounded according to the magnitude of the variable’s value in comparison to the range settings for that scale. For example, if the multi-range limits are
Low Range 0 - 10 by .001
Middle Range 10 - 50 by .002
High Range 50 - 100 by .01
then copying the value 45.327 into a scale specific variable would be represented as 45.328. Copying the value 55.327 into the same variable would be represented as 55.33.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
5-20 Chapter 5
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 6
L
EGAL
-
FOR
-T
RADE
This chapter contains information on NTEP and OIML regulations, sealing and audit trails, and other requirements.
O V E R V I E W
OIML And International Operation 6-2
International Keypad (460 Series) 6-3
International Keypad (560 Series) 6-4
International Keypad (660 Series) 6-5
International Characters 6-6
Renaming Operating Parameters 6-7
Presettable Parameters 6-7
NTEP 6-8
Sealing And Audit Trails 6-10
Physical Seal 6-11
Audit Trail Parameters 6-12
Data Storage Device (DSD) 6-13
6-1
6-2 Chapter 6
?
Legal-for-Trade requirements vary by location. Ensure that the indicator is installed in accordance with all local regulations.
L
EGAL
F
OR
T
RADE
The 60 Series parameter setup does not ensure compliance with legal-fortrade installations as mandated by local weights and measures authorities.
This section explains how to configure the 60 Series instruments to comply with various regulations and describes other features that make the indicators suitable for installations worldwide.
OIML A ND I NTERNATIONAL O PERATION
The International Organization of Legal Metrology is an inter-governmental body which harmonizes the national metrology regulations of its worldwide members. A list of regulation publications can be obtained from the
Bureau International de Métrologie Légale (BIML) in Paris, France.
In order to configure the indicator to comply with OIML requirements, P410 must be enabled in the setup mode. Doing this will ensure the following:
An over-load condition will result when the gross weight exceeds nine (9) graduations over the full scale capacity.
Full scale capacity is always referenced from the last zero calibration reference, not the last zero acquired by pressing [ZERO] .
The keypad is remapped for the international version (see the International
Keypad section on page 6-3).
Presettable parameters will give indication that a value has been entered manually (see Renaming Operating Parameters on page 7-7).
Most NTEP requirements will also apply. See the NTEP section of this chapter for additional considerations.
Enabling OIML Operation
OIML operation is enabled at P410 of the setup mode.
P41) OIML
Enbld i
To disable OIML, key in 9990
[ENTER] in step 3. Performing a
Default All (P65001) or Default –
Cal (P65002) will also disable
OIML.
To enable OIML operation:
1. Access the setup mode as described in the Accessing The Parameter
Setup Mode section beginning on page 3-3.
2. Key in 410 [SELECT] to access the “OIML” parameter.
3. Key in 9991 [ENTER] . The display prompts Enter toCLR .
4. Press [ENTER] to enable OIML.
5. Exit the setup mode as described in the Exiting The Parameter Setup
Mode section on page 3-9.
GSE Scale Systems
Legal-For-Trade 6-3
I NT ’ L USA
I NTERNATIONAL K EYPAD (460 S ERIES )
Table 6-1 shows the correlation between the US keypad and the international keypad for the 460 Series controllers.
F UNCTION
Decimal Point
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Invokes Macro 1
Invokes Macro 2
SCALE SELECT
CLEAR/NO
ENTER/YES
ID
SELECT
TARE
UNITS
ZERO
%`
%c
%e
%i
%p
%s
%t
%u
%z
6
7
8
3
4
5
9
1%^
2%^
.
0
1
2
Table 6-1: 460 Series International Keypad Functions
S ERIAL C OMMAND D ECIMAL H EX
56
57
128
129
224
227
50
51
52
46
48
49
53
54
55
229
233
240
243
244
245
250 x38 x39 x80 x81 xE0 xE3 x2E x30 x31 x32 x33 x34 x35 x36 x37 xE5 xE9 xF0 xF3 xF4 xF5 xFA
P804
P808
P807
P806
P805
P800
P802
P803
P801
R EASSIGNMENT
P ARAMETER
P809
P810
P811
P812
P813
P814
P815
P816
P817
P818
P819
-
-
The following models use the 460 Series international keypad:
•
Model 460 (U.K. line cord)
•
Model 460 (Euro line cord)
•
Model 465 (U.K. line cord)
P/N: 200460-03100
P/N: 200460-04100
P/N: 200465-03100
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-4 Chapter 6
I NT ’ L USA
•
Model 465 (Euro line cord) P/N: 200465-04100
F UNCTION
Decimal Point
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Invokes Macro 1
Invokes Macro 2
ID
SCALE SELECT
CLEAR/NO
ENTER/YES
SELECT
TARE
UNITS
ZERO
%p
%s
%t
%u
%z
1%^
2%^
%i
%`
%c
%e
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
.
0
I NTERNATIONAL K EYPAD (560 S ERIES )
Table 6-2 shows the correlation between the US keypad and the international keypad for the 560 Series controllers.
Table 6-2: 560 Series International Keypad Functions
S ERIAL C OMMAND D ECIMAL H EX
233
224
227
229
240
243
244
245
250
54
55
56
57
128
129
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
P805
P800
P802
P803
P801
-
-
P806
P804
P808
P807
R EASSIGNMENT
P ARAMETER
P809
P810
P811
P812
P813
P814
P815
P816
P817
P818
P819 xE9 xE0 xE3 xE5 xF0 xF3 xF4 xF5 xFA x36 x37 x38 x39 x80 x81 x2E x30 x31 x32 x33 x34 x35
The following models use the 560 Series international keypad:
•
Model 560 (U.K. line cord)
•
Model 560 (Euro line cord)
•
Model 562 (U.K. line cord)
P/N: 200560-03100
P/N: 200560-04100
P/N: 200562-03100
GSE Scale Systems
I NT ’ L USA
Legal-For-Trade 6-5
•
Model 562 (Euro line cord) P/N: 200562-04100
I NTERNATIONAL K EYPAD (660 S ERIES )
Table 6-3 shows the correlation between the US keypad and the international keypad for the 660 Series controllers.
F UNCTION
Decimal Point
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Invokes Macro 1
Invokes Macro 2
Invokes Macro 3
Invokes Macro 4
Invokes Macro 5
Invokes Macro 6
Invokes Macro 7
Invokes Macro 8
SCALE SELECT
CLEAR/NO
ENTER/YES
ID
SELECT
TARE
1%^
2%^
3%^
%e
%i
%p
%s
%t
4%^
5%^
6%^
7%^
8%^
%`
%c
6
7
4
5
8
9
1
2
3
.
0
Table 6-3: 660 Series International Keypad Functions
S ERIAL C OMMAND D ECIMAL H EX
56
57
128
129
52
53
54
55
46
48
49
50
51
130
131
229
233
240
243
244
132
133
134
135
224
227 x38 x39 x80 x81 x34 x35 x36 x37 x2E x30 x31 x32 x33 x82 x83 xE5 xE9 xF0 xF3 xF4 x84 x85 x86 x87 xE0 xE3
R EASSIGNMENT
P ARAMETER
P809
P810
P811
P812
P813
-
-
-
P807
P806
P805
P800
P802
-
-
-
-
-
P804
P808
P814
P815
P816
P817
P818
P819
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-6 Chapter 6
UNITS
ZERO
%u 245 xF5
%z 250 xFA
The following models use the international keypad:
•
Model 660 (U.K. line cord)
•
Model 660 (Euro line cord)
•
Model 661 (U.K. line cord)
•
Model 661 (Euro line cord)
P/N: 200660-03100
P/N: 200660-04100
P/N: 200661-03100
P/N: 200661-04100
•
Model 662 (U.K. line cord)
•
Model 662 (Euro line cord)
P/N: 200662-03120
P/N: 200662-04120
•
Model 665 VFD (U.K. line cord) P/N: 200665-03110
•
Model 665 LCD (U.K. line cord) P/N: 200665-03120
•
Model 665 VFD (Euro line cord) P/N: 200665-04110
•
Model 665 LCD (Euro line cord) P/N: 200665-04120
P803
P801
I NTERNATIONAL C HARACTERS
The 60 Series instruments can display a variety of international characters.
Set P411 to a character set as shown in Table 6-4. The language selection can also be changed temporarily without accessing the setup mode using the %L Language Selection macro command.
I NTERNATIONAL C HARACTER S ET
Decimal Character
à
Hex Character à
Selection
(P411)
0
Name
(P411)
USA
Description
United States
1 Frnce France
2 Gernn Germany
3
4
UK
Dnmrk
England
Denmark I
5 Swedn Sweden
6
7
Italy
Spain
Italy
Spain I
8 Japan Japan
9
10
Norwy
Dnmrk2
Norway
Denmark II
11 Spn2 Spain II
Table 6-4: International Characters
35
23
36
24
64
40
91
5B
R E -M APPED C HARACTERS
92
5C
93
5D
94
5E
96
60
#
#
$
$
@
à
[
°
# $ § Ã
£ $ @ [
# $ @ Æ
# ¤ É Ã
# $ @ °
þ $ @ ¡
# $ @ [
# ¤ É Æ
# $ É Æ
# $ á ¡
123
7B
124
7C
125
7D
126
7E
\ ] ^ ` { | } ~
Çç
Ö
\
ø
Ö
\
Ñ
¥
§
Ü
]
Â
Â
é
¿
]
^
^
^
^
Ü
^
^
^
`
`
`
`
é
ù
`
`
é
ä
{
æ
ä
à
¨
{
ù
ö
|
ø
ö
í
ñ
|
è
ü
}
å
å
è
}
}
¨
ß
~
~
ü
Ìì
~
~
ø Â Ü é æ ø å ü
ø Â Ü é æ ø å ü
Ñ ¿ é ` í ñ ó ú
GSE Scale Systems
12
Legal-For-Trade 6-7
LatAm Latin America
# $ á ¡ Ñ ¿ é ü í ñ ó ú
0)
P41@01 kg±²³
Bruto
PrSET
Enbld i
Legal-for-trade installations may require the preset character to be defined on each weight receipt, such as including the text “ PTare
= Manual Tare Entry ”.
R ENAMING O PERATING P ARAMETERS
Operating parameters can be permanently renamed in the setup mode or with the %R Rename Mode macro command. A renamed parameter will display the new name every time it is accessed. This allows you to customize the standard display for international applications and provides additional prompting capability. Refer to Renaming Operating Parameters on page 7-7 for complete details on renaming operating parameters.
P RESETTABLE P ARAMETERS
In some legal-for-trade applications it is required to identify certain parameters that contain manually entered values rather than automatically calculated values. By enabling the “Preset” parameter (P412), the indicator identifies manually entered parameter values with a “P” preceding the parameter name. Table 6-5 lists the presettable operating parameters.
P RESETTING P ARAMETERS
Parameters in Table 6-5 are considered “preset” if their value was not automatically calculated by the 660. Entering values manually, changing values through serial communication, recalling values from a database or copying values from other parameters are examples of actions that will preset a parameter.
i
The %F macro command can be used to determine if a parameter is preset.
Table 6-5: Presettable Operating Parameters
P ARAMETER N AME O PERATING
P ARAMETER
2
3
6
31
34
35
Tare
Gross Total
Net Total
Quantity Total
Average Piece Weight
Average Piece Weight X1000
D ISPLAYED
N AME
Tare
GrTOT
NtTOT
QtTOT
APW
APW*K
D EFAULT
P RESET N AME
PTare
PGrTO
PntTO
PQtTO
PAPW
PAPW*
Tare Preset
The preset status for the tare parameter is cleared (not preset) when an auto-tare is performed, when it is cleared by pressing 0 [TARE] , or after an interruption in power and the tare save parameter (P641) is set for
“NoSav”.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-8 Chapter 6
!
Presettable parameters should not be renamed with the %R macro command.
?
Legal-for-trade installations using accumulations require the
“number of accumulations” parameter (9) to be accessible when not using a printer. When using a printer, this parameter must be printed on the receipt.
Gross, Net & Quantity Total Presets
The preset status for the gross total, net total and quantity total parameters is cleared (not preset) when the accumulation total is cleared. Performing an accumulation does not affect the preset status of an accumulation parameter.
Average Piece Weight Preset
The preset status for the average piece weight parameters is cleared (not preset) when the average piece weight is determined through the sampling routine.
C HANGING THE P RESET I DENTIFIER
The preset parameter identifier can be changed from the default “P” to any other character. If an operating parameter is renamed in the setup mode
(see the Renaming Parameters in the Setup Mode section beginning 7-7), then the first character of the new name will be used as the preset identifier. For example, if the tare parameter is renamed “MTare” at P602, then MTare will be displayed when the tare parameter is preset. If not preset, Tare is displayed. The first character of the new parameter name is ignored and will not be displayed or printed.
NTEP
The National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) is a widely accepted weights and measures standard in the United States. Most states abide by some or all of the requirements set forth by NTEP. A complete list of these regulations is available in the “Handbook 44” publication distributed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). For more information on this and other NIST publications, visit their web site at http://www.nist.gov.
E
NABLING
NTEP O
PERATION
In order to configure the indicator to comply with NTEP requirements, the
NTEP parameter (P440) must be enabled in the setup mode. This will have the following effects on the standard operation:
•
Pressing [TARE] with a gross weight of zero (0) or pressing 0 [TARE] will not automatically switch to the net mode.
•
Negative tare values are not accepted regardless of the selection for the “Negative Tare Enable” parameter (P162).
•
Tare values are automatically rounded regardless of the selection for the “Tare Rounding Enable” parameter (P163).
•
Received serial data will not be processed while in the setup mode until P440 is manually enabled.
•
Accumulations using the . [ENTER] method can only be performed from the gross, net or quantity mode.
•
Printing using the [PRINT] key is only possible from the gross, net or quantity mode.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Accessing the NTEP Custom Setup
List
)00
60205 ó lb±²³
Gross
P6020% Custm
Setup
P6020% MUST!
CHECK
P6020% Check
P130—
P6020% Check
P205—
P6020% Check
P205˜
P6020% Check
P205™
P6020% Check
P205š
P6020% Check
P240!
P6020% Check
P440!
P6020% Check
P9990
P6020%
ú
)00
MUST!
CHECK lb±²³
Gross
Legal-For-Trade 6-9
•
Weight values that exceed the minimum width specified at P240 will be transmitted as dashes "-------".
NTEP C USTOM S ETUP
The “Custom Setup” parameter, P60205 of the information parameters, displays a list of parameters which, if configured improperly, could facilitate fraud in a legal-for-trade installation. A weights & measures inspector might check this parameter and inquire about the configuration of any parameters that appear in this list.
Accessing the Custom Setup List
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ACCESS THE CUSTOM SETUP LIST DURING
CRITICAL WEIGHT PROCESSING!
It is important to note that all functions of the operating mode will be suspended immediately upon accessing the information parameters. This includes suspension of weight conversions, deactivation of all setpoints and cancellation of custom transmits. The “Custom Setup” list may be accessed from the weigh mode as shown in the example – Accessing the NTEP Custom Setup List . An access code is not required to view this list.
To access the custom setup list:
1. From the weigh mode, key in 60205 [SELECT] .
2. The Custom Setup list begins scrolling through each parameter to check. If there are no parameters to check, Std. Setup is displayed.
3. The Custom Setup list may be repeated by pressing [ENTER] at
P60205.
4. Press [ZERO] to return to the weigh mode.
Custom Setup Parameters
A setup parameter that appears in the “Custom Setup” does not imply that it is improperly configured. Consider the application and refer to the following descriptions to determine if the parameter is configured appropriately.
P130 – Multi-Range Mode
P130 must be set based on “Gross” to ensure the highest range achieved remains in effect until the gross weight returns to zero.
P205 – Receive Mode
If the receive mode is enabled for any of the four communication ports, any device connected to that port should not be used to transmit data to the indicator which could facilitate fraud.
P205 will appear in the “Custom Setup” list for each receive port enabled.
For example, if the receive mode is enabled for all four ports, the list will display P205— , P205˜ , P205™ , and P205š .
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-10 Chapter 6
GSE Scale Systems
P240 – Minimum Transmit Width
A weight value that cannot be displayed due to the 6-digit limitation of the standard VF display may not be printed. To ensure this is not possible,
P240 must be set to a width of not greater than 7 (6 digits and a decimal point). NTEP must also be enabled at P440. Any weight value that exceeds the minimum width specified will be printed as dashes "-------".
P440 – NTEP Enable
P440 appears in the “Custom Setup” list if disabled. Refer to Enabling
NTEP Operation on page 6-8 for possible implications.
P9990 – Macro Instance Selection
P9990 appears in the “Custom Setup” list if at least one macro is configured. Macro operation should be checked to verify its conformance to all regulations.
A DDITIONAL C ONFORMANCE C ONSIDERATIONS
Several parameters must be considered on an individual basis as their configuration may vary with different applications. These parameters include, but are not limited to those listed in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6: Additional Conformance Parameters
P ARAMETER D ESCRIPTION C OMMENT
P110
P111
P112
P114
Full Scale Capacity Verify proper scale capacity.
Division Size Verify allowable scale divisions.
Zero Track
Motion
Verify required selection.
Verify required selection.
P118 Zero Range Verify required selection.
P212
P126 à P130
P131
à
P134
Print Stability
Multi-Range
Verify required selection.
Verify proper configuration.
Unit selection Verify certifiable unit selection. †
P151 à P154 Custom Units Verify name and conversion factor.
P600 à P646 Rename Parameters Verify acceptable names.
† Custom units must be site approved. Lb/oz is not approved for legal-for-trade installations.
S EALING A ND A UDIT T RAILS
Most legal-for-trade installations will require the indicator to be sealed. A sealed indicator cannot be accessed for setup or calibration changes without breaking a physical seal or incrementing an event counter, thus providing evidence that the unit has been tampered with. Each model in the 60 Series has two types of sealing provisions:
•
Physical seal used in conjunction with an internal program jumper
•
Three-event audit trail counter
?
Before applying a wire seal, be sure to move the main board program jumper to the ‘NO’ position to prevent access to the setup and calibration modes.
Legal-For-Trade 6-11
Check with your local weights and measures authority to determine which method(s) are required.
P HYSICAL S EAL
The most common sealing method is a lead-wire seal. The 460, 465, 660,
661, 662 and 665 provide two tamper-proof screws used for sealing the rear panel to the front of the enclosure. A lead-wire seal can be applied by passing the lead-wire seal wire through a hole in these two screws, thus preventing the screws from being removed without breaking the seal. The
460, 465, 660, 661, 662 and 665 panel mount versions use a lead-wire seal and one screw. The 663 has a locking clasp on the front door to which the seal can be applied, or the indicator can be sealed using the same method as with the panel mount versions.
See Figure 6-1 through Figure 6-6 for seal locations.
Figure 6-1: 460 Legal-for-Trade Seal
Figure 6-2: 460 Panel Mount Legal-for-Trade Seal
Figure 6-3: 465, 660, 661 and 662 Legal-for-Trade Seal
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-12 Chapter 6
Figure 6-4: 465, 660, 661, 662, and 665 Panel Mount Legal-for-Trade Seal
Figure 6-5: 663 Legal-for-Trade Seal
Figure 6-6: 665 Legal-for-Trade Seal
!
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ACCESS
AUDIT TRAIL PARAMETERS
DURING CRITICAL WEIGHT
PROCESSING! Weight conversions and custom transmits will be suspended and all setpoints will be deactivated!
A UDIT T RAIL P ARAMETERS
Three separate incrementing, non-resettable audit trail parameters are used to indicate changes to various parameters:
•
P60201 – OIML
•
P60203 – Calibration
•
P60204 – Setup
An audit trail counter will increment only once upon exiting the setup mode and saving changes regardless of how many settings were changed.
Each audit trail counter will increment to 99999 before beginning again at
00001.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Accessing Audit Trail Parameters
)00
60201 ó lb±²³
Gross
P6020!
Audit
Trail
P6020!
60203 ó
OIML
00001
P6020# Audit
Trail
P6020#
60204 ó
Cal.
00001
P6020$ Audit
Trail
P6020$
ú
)00
Setup
00001 lb±²³
Gross
Legal-For-Trade 6-13
Accessing Audit Trails
The audit trails may be accessed from the weigh mode as shown in example – Accessing Audit Trail Parameters . An access code is not required to view audit trail parameters.
1. Key in 60201 [SELECT] to access the OIML audit trail.
2. Key in 60203 [SELECT] to view the Calibration audit trail.
3. Key in 60204 [SELECT] to view the Setup audit trail.
4. Press [ZERO] to return to the weigh mode.
OIML Audit Trail
Changes to any of the following parameters will increment the OIML audit trail at P60201:
•
P109 à P119
•
P122
•
P131 à P134
•
P150 à P154
•
P162, P163
Scale Setup
Return to Zero
Units
Calibration & Custom Units
Negative Tare Enable, Tare Rounding Enable
•
P300 à P309
•
P410, P412
•
P420
•
P600 à P646
Selectable Modes
OIML Enable, Preset Enable
Standard VF Display Mode
Rename Parameters
•
P800 à P820
•
P989 à P4999
Key Functions
Custom Transmit
•
P61101 à P61140 Calibration & Linearization
•
P65001, P65002 Default All, Default –Cal
Calibration Audit Trail
Any changes to the existing calibration will increment the Calibration audit trail at P60203. This includes any changes to P60101 à P61140 of the information parameters.
Setup Audit Trail
Changes to any of the setup mode parameters will increment the Setup audit trail at P60204.
D
ATA
S
TORAGE
D
EVICE
(DSD)
The DSD feature of the 560 and660 Series controllers provides a means of recording weight data in a secure database structure that ensures data integrity. The database option is required for DSD usage. Information can
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-14 Chapter 6 only be written to the database manually via the DSD menu or through a serial command. Standard macro database commands do not apply to the
DSD database. Once written, stored data cannot be updated. Nor can data rows be individually deleted at will. A checksum is stored with each data row and verified each time the row is accessed to further ensure data integrity.
DSD data can be printed via custom transmit at the time it is stored, printed in report format or downloaded in a comma-delimited format.
ID#
(64.1P)
000001
000002
000003
↓
999999
D ATABASE S TRUCTURE
The DSD database is a fixed structure using the data columns shown below. Operation is completely independent of existing database routines.
When a row is accessed, data values are recalled into parameters 64.1P
à 64.9P. These parameters can be used in macro commands, but cannot be assign values. They are also the only parameters permissible in the
DSD custom transmit specified at P593.
SCALE #
(64.2P)
1
1
2
1
GROSS
(64.3P)
101.2 kg
150.1 kg
10030 kg
10.5 kg
NET
(64.4P)
101.2 kg
100.1 kg
9900 kg
0.5 kg
TARE
(64.5P)
0.0 kg
50.0 kg
130 kg
10.0 kg
GROSS
TOTAL
(64.6P)
101.2 kg
251.3 kg
0 kg
10.5 kg
NET
TOTAL
(64.7P)
101.2 kg
201.3 kg
0 kg
0.5 kg
# OF
ACCUMS
(64.8P)
TIME / DATE
(64.9P)
1 14:03:32 14/03/01
2 14:03:58 14/03/01
0 15:24:07 14/03/01
1 08:43:30 11/04/01
P64.1: ID#
Serves as a unique “lookup” value for recalling rows in the DSD database.
It is automatically incremented and stored with each new row. The ID# can not be reset or preset by any means. It begins at ‘1’ and will increment to a value of 999,999. When this value is exceeded, the value returns to zero (0) and continues incrementing as before.
P64.2: SCALE#
Identifies which scale was considered when storing the data values for a given row.
P64.3: GROSS
Represents the gross weight for the specified SCALE# at the time the data row was created.
P64.4: NET
Represents the net weight for the specified SCALE# at the time the data row was created.
GSE Scale Systems
Legal-For-Trade 6-15
P64.5: TARE
Represents the tare weight for the specified SCALE# at the time the data row was created.
P64.6: GROSS TOTAL
Represents the accumulated gross total for the specified SCALE# at the time the data row was created.
P64.7: NET TOTAL
Represents the accumulated net total for the specified SCALE# at the time the data row was created.
P64.8: # OF ACCUMS
Represents the number of times an accumulation was performed to derive the gross and net totals reported in the previous columns.
P64.9: TIME / DATE
Represents the time and date the data row was created.
U NITS OF M EASURE
The DSD database weight data is stored in the default calibration units specified at P150. If this parameter where changed, it would corrupt the display of the database data. Therefore, P150 cannot be changed if the
DSD is enabled and data rows exist. Trying to do so will generate an error message.
M EMORY A LLOCATION
The DSD database requires the use of the 60 Series database option.
The maximum amount of memory that can be allocated will depend on the total amount of database option memory and how much is allocated to other functions. Allocation of this memory requires that this memory exist and has been initialized.
The amount of memory to allocate for DSD must be specified in terms of a number of data rows at P594. The amount allocated can be changed, but any stored DSD data will be cleared.
A maximum of 99,999 rows can be specified. If more rows than can be assigned are requested, the maximum available will be created.
The ID# starts at 1. Its max value is 999999, at which point it rolls over to
0. This number is stored in the database memory.
If database boards are swapped, this will be detected by the indicator serial number copied into the database initialization not matching that of the new indicator. At this point new data records cannot be generated. A warning message is generated at power up or when trying to create a row, indicating this condition. You can print/download and then clear the database, at which point the serial number will be updated and all functionality will be restored. A warning message is generated at the beginning of the print/download indicating this condition. Note that if no data records exist, the serial number field will be automatically updated to the current value.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-16 Chapter 6
?
When enabling or disabling DSD, you will be prompted to clear the
DSD database records before the change is allowed. Be sure to download any stored data before proceeding.
The database also contains a count of how many columns are defined for the database. If this number does not match what the indicator expects, then no functionality of the database is available. This would be expected if new data columns were added in the future and the database being used did not match the firmware being used. This problem requires placing the database into a indicator with the appropriate firmware, or initializing the database memory (P65001 or P65010) or disabling the database. Note that if no data records exist, the storage will automatically be released and reallocated, using the current indicators database structure.
Disabling the DSD database (P590) causes all storage allocated for the database to be released, meaning the data is lost.
D ATA I NTEGRITY
Each DSD database row includes a checksum for data integrity. The checksum will be verified each time a row is accessed. If the accessed row fails it checksum test, a error message will be displayed. When printing or downloading, the next line sent will be an error message.
S ETUP P ARAMETERS
P590: DSD Enable
Enables the Data Storage Device feature (DSD) and provides access to the other DSD parameters (P591 à P595).
Enabling DSD will override P806 to redefine the [ID] key to invoke the
DSD Menu. It will also redefine P205 as the DSD receive mode for the specified DSD communication port.
P591: DSD Serial Port
Selects the communication port to be used for DSD transmissions.
The usage of the DSD port selected at P591 can be temporarily overridden by usage of the %H macro command. If the selection is turned off, then no DSD transmits or receives will occur. If the port number is changed, then the new port will be used.
Nothing prevents other indicator transmissions from being sent over the
DSD port. No other processing of received data will occur on this port.
Note that if a comm port selected is programmed as receive disabled, selecting it does not turn the port on, no data will be received.
P592: DSD Receive Character
Specifies a single character used to create a row in the DSD database when received on the DSD communication port.
P593: DSD Custom Transmit
Specifies a custom transmit used to automatically transmit DSD data after a row has been created in the DSD database. The custom transmit specified will not allow non-DSD parameter entries. Transmission will be motion delayed by virtue of the stored data row. The custom transmit communication port can be specified at P991.
GSE Scale Systems
Legal-For-Trade 6-17
P594: DSD Maximum Number of Rows
Specifies the maximum number of DSD data rows that can be stored in the database. An attempt to store a record in a full database will result in a 1 second OVER-WRITE warning message indicating that the oldest record will be deleted before storing the new data row.
P595: DSD Number of Warning Rows
Specifies the number of unused rows at which point a 1 second warning message will be displayed. For example, if the maximum number of rows is 1000 and the number of warning rows is 100, then a warning message will be displayed for every data row stored after the 900 th
record. The maximum number of warning rows is 999.
DSD F UNCTION S ELECTION M ENU
The various functions of the DSD database are manually accessible via a
Selection Menu. This menu is accessible after enabling DSD (P590).
Once enabled, pressing [ID] will display the first DSD menu selection.
Pressing [SELECT] / [MODE] will advance to the next menu selection.
Pressing [ENTER] will invoke the displayed menu selection routine. The display will revert to the weigh mode after completing a selected function.
Pressing [ID] or [ZERO] / [ >0< ] will exit the DSD menu.
10!2
kg
Gross
[ID]
Dsd Make
Row
[SELECT] / [MODE]
Dsd Print dbase
[SELECT] / [MODE]
Dsd Down-
Load
[SELECT] / [MODE]
Dsd View
Data
[SELECT] / [MODE]
Dsd Make
Row
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-18 Chapter 6
[ID]
10!2
Kg
Gross
MAKE ROW
Waits for motion delay (displays Mot’n Delay while in motion), then creates a new sequential row in the DSD database.
Pressing [CLR] will abort from the Mot’n Delay prompt without storing or printing data.
If a DSD custom transmit is specified, the transmission will occur immediately after the creation of a row in the DSD database.
The system then reverts to the gross weight display.
Creating DSD Database rows
The stored information will be based upon the current scale which is selected (i.e. for gross weight,…).
If the number of unused rows is less than the warning threshold, a warning will be displayed on the screen for one second.
If the database is full, the oldest record will be overwritten. A one second error message will be displayed on the screen.
Requests to create rows will be delayed in processing if another function
(make, print, download) is using the database. Printing or downloading will block row creation until the user decides whether to clear the database or not.
Clearing Data
Data rows can only be cleared after performing a PRINT or DOWNLOAD operation. The data will be sent out the defined DSD port. If the port is not setup or has been turned off by the %H macro command, then this operation will fail. Clearing rows will clear all stored DSD data, however it will not reset the ID# to be used for the next created row.
Printing or downloading will block row creation until the user decides whether or not to clear the database.
Performing a Default All (P65001), Database Reset (P65010) or an
Operational RAM test (P62001) will also result in all data rows being cleared. Performing a Default All will also reset the ID#.
PRINT DBASE
Prints the entire contents of the DSD database in row/column format.
Data is sent out the port specified as the DSD printer port in the setup mode.
ID# Scale# Gross Net Tare Gross Total Net Total #Accum Time Date
200 1 0.43 lb 0.43 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0 03:26:22pm 10/02/01
GSE Scale Systems
Legal-For-Trade 6-19
201 1 0.43 lb 0.43 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0 03:26:23pm 10/02/01
202 1 0.43 lb 0.43 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0 03:26:24pm 10/02/01
203 1 0.43 lb 0.43 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0 03:26:25pm 10/02/01
204 1 0.43 lb 0.33 lb 0.10p lb 100.44p lb 100.24p lb 1 03:32:19pm 10/02/01
204 1 0.43 lb 0.33 lb 0.10p lb 100.44p lb 100.24p lb 1 15:32:19 02/10/01
204 1 --- lb --- lb ---p lb ---p lb ---p lb 1 15:32:19 02/10/01
After printing, a Y/N prompt will query the operator to clear the database.
The system then reverts to the gross weight display.
Data Formatting
Time & date formatting look at P503 and P504 to determine whether to use 24hr or am/pm time, and US or international date.
Weight units are presented as the default calibration units specified at
P150.
Weights are by default formatted to a field width of 7, total weights at a width of 9. Values requiring more width expand as needed. If NTEP
(P440) is enabled, then P240 is used for assigning field widths. Values requiring more width are instead printed as dashes.
Preset data (manually entered tare, gross total and net total values) are identified with a ‘p’ immediately following the weight value.
DOWNLOAD DBASE
Transmits the entire contents of the DSD database in comma-delimited
ASCII text format. Data is sent out the port specified as the DSD PC port in the setup mode.
200,1,0.43 lb,0.43 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0,03:26:22pm,10/02/01
201,1,0.43 lb,0.43 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0,03:26:23pm,10/02/01
202,1,0.43 lb,0.43 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0,03:26:24pm,10/02/01
203,1,0.43 lb,0.43 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0.00 lb,0,03:26:25pm,10/02/01
204,1,0.43 lb,0.33 lb,0.10p lb,100.44p lb,100.24p lb,1,03:32:19pm,10/02/01
204,1,0.43 lb,0.33 lb,0.10p lb,100.44p lb,100.24p lb,1,15:32:19,02/10/01
204,1,--- lb,--- lb,---p lb,---p lb,---p lb,1,15:32:19,02/10/01
After downloading, a Y/N prompt will query the operator to clear the database.
The system then reverts to the gross weight display.
Data Formatting
Fields are compressed to use only as much width as is required. If NTEP is enabled, then the same limits are imposed as for printing.
The number of decimal places used (for weight values) is as setup for each scale.
Time & date formatting look at P503 and P504 to determine whether to use 24hr or am/pm time, and US or international date.
Weight units are presented as the default calibration units specified at
P150.
Preset data (manually entered tare, gross total and net total values) are identified with a ‘p’ immediately following the weight value.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-20 Chapter 6
VIEW DATA
Puts the indicator into a view mode for reviewing stored data on the display. If an entry is made prior to pressing [ENTER] , the indicator searches for the entered ID#. If found, the ID# is displayed, otherwise
NOT FOUND is displayed and the display reverts to the “view data” selection of the DSD menu.
•
If [ENTER] is pressed without an entry, the most recently created ID# is recalled and displayed.
•
Once an ID# is displayed, the arrow keys can be used to scroll through rows/columns of the DSD database.
•
The right/left arrows will scroll left/right to adjacent columns within the current row.
•
The up arrow will decrement the ID# for the currently displayed column.
•
The down arrow will increment the ID#.
•
While incrementing/decrementing, the current row’s ID# is displayed.
105 DSD
ID#
•
The ID# will ‘wrap’ to the beginning/end of the database if the last/first row is exceeded when pressing the up/down arrows.
•
Keying in an ID# and pressing [ID] will recall that ID#. If the ID# does not exist, NOT FOUND is displayed and the current ID# remains in effect.
•
Pressing [ID] will display the ID# of the current row for one second, then revert back to the previously displayed data.
•
Pressing [SELECT] / [MODE] exits the VIEW DATA mode and returns to the gross weight mode.
•
Pressing [PRINT] will print the DSD custom transmit for the data in the currently viewed row.
In the view mode, the prompting display will show the units of measure on the top line and the bottom line will show the letters below to identify the displayed data:
“ds Sc”
“ds G”
“ds N”
“ds T”
“ds GT”
“ds NT”
“ds Ac”
“ds Tm”
“ds Dt”
(scale#)
(gross)
(net)
(tare)
(gross total)
(net total)
(number of accumulations)
(time)
(date)
GSE Scale Systems
Legal-For-Trade 6-21
10280 kg ds T
Preset (manually entered) data will be identified by a ‘p’ in the mode description (i.e. ds p T, ds p GT, ds p NT, etc.).
10280 kg dspT
DSD C USTOM T RANSMIT
The defined DSD custom transmit only accepts data from the DSD parameters (P64.1 à P64.9). Other parameter information added to the custom transmit will result in an error message when trying to exit setup.
This transmit will occur after creating a database row.
DSD C OMMUNICATION P ORT
The usage of the DSD port selected at P591 can be temporarily overridden by usage of the %H macro command. If a DSD port is not specified, then no DSD transmits or receives will occur. If the port number is changed, then the new port will be used.
Nothing prevents other indicator transmissions from being sent over the
DSD port. No other processing of received data will occur on this port.
Note that if a comm port selected is programmed as receive disabled, selecting it does not turn the port on, no data will be received.
DSD M ACRO C OMMANDS
Several macro commands have been added to work with the DSD database. These commands are more fully explained in chapter 9.
%H MACRO
The %H macro command has been expanded to allow changing the DSD port selection. This change is temporary, and will be lost on power-up or if the setup mode is entered and saved.
Expanded Syntax: 591,<comm>%H
The DSD function temporarily overrides whatever other receive function was setup for use of the port (P205). When the DSD functionality is moved to another port, the previous behavior is restored.
Note that if a comm port is programmed as receive disabled at P205, then it will not be possible to use the %H macro command to turn the comm port on. No data will be received.
Use of this macro command to change the operation of a comm port that is in use by DSD does not take control away from DSD. If DSD is then moved to another port, this previous selection would then begin operation.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
6-22 Chapter 6
%f MACRO
The %f macro command is used to get the preset information for the current database row stored in P64. Requesting P64.5 (tare), P64.6
(gross total), or P64.7 (net total) is now supported.
%w MACRO
The %w macro command can be used to access DSD database rows.
The possible commands are:
I[id number]%w Retrieves the DSD database row with the specified id number.
N%w
L%w
Returns the number of existing data rows present in the DSD database (not the maximum number of rows).
Returns the lowest id number present in the database.
H%w Returns the highest id number present in the database.
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 7
O
PERATING
P
ARAMETERS
O V E R V I E W
Operating Parameters 7-2
Renaming Operating Parameters 7-7
Weight Parameters 7-8
Accumulation Parameters 7-10
Time & Date 7-12
Weight Averaging Parameters 7-13
Peak Weight Parameters 7-14
Rounded Weight Parameters 7-15
Rate Parameters 7-16
Counting Parameters 7-19
Multi-scale Parameters 7-21
Programmable Digital I/O Parameters (PDIO) 7-22
Setpoint Timers 7-25
Random Numbers 7-27
Variables 7-28
Independent Timers 7-34
Prompting Parameters 7-35
Diagnostic Weight Parameters 7-38
7-1
7-2 Chapter 7
GSE Scale Systems
O
PERATING
P
ARAMETERS
The 60 Series instruments use many system defined memory registers to store operational data. Most of these registers, or parameters, may be accessed from the weigh mode to monitor or change the scale’s operation.
The gross, net and tare registers are examples of operating parameters. In the setup mode, operating parameters can be used as conditions for setpoints, define analog outputs, define database columns, and serve countless functions when used in macros. Operating parameters are also important elements of communications. They may be formatted to transmit values from within a macro or a custom transmit table. Many parameters can receive values through direct serial communication, input interpreters or Modbus communication.
O PERATING P ARAMETER I DENTIFICATION
Most operating parameters are accessible directly from the weigh mode.
Whereas setup parameters are numbered P108 à P50001, operating parameters are numbered 0 à 99. To further distinguish between setup parameters and operating parameters, this manual identifies setup parameters with a preceding “P” (i.e. P108 = full scale capacity) and operating parameters with a trailing “P” (i.e. 11P = time & date).
Refer to Table 7-1 for a list of all 60 Series operating parameters. Note that some parameters, such as counting, are not available or usable without first configuring certain setup parameters. A few others cannot be displayed in the weigh mode and are intended only for macro operations and/or communication functions.
P
ARAMETER
I
NSTANCES
Many parameters require an instance to be specified when accessing their values. For example, we can refer to the gross weight (parameter 0).
However, if multiple scales are enabled each scale will have its own gross weight. An instance allows you to select or specify a particular scale,
Programmable Digital I/O channel, timer value, or variable.
Specifying An Instance
To reference a parameter instance, include the instance number immediately after the parameter number, separating each with a decimal point. For example:
0.1P
refers to the gross weight for scale #1
0.2P
refers to the gross weight for scale #2
0.3P
refers to the gross weight for scale #3
0.4P
refers to the gross weight for scale #4
Likewise,
76.200P
refers to the countdown timer for setpoint #200
80.10P
refers to variable #10
81.2P
refers to the elapsed ticks for independent timer #2
Operating Parameters 7-3
?
For weight parameters, instance
‘0’ refers to the weight of the scale currently selected.
Instance ‘0’
All weight parameters (i.e. gross, net, tare, etc.) can be specified with an instance of zero ‘0’. This instance refers to the “current” scale – the weight for the scale presently displayed. For example:
1.0P
refers to the net weight for the current scale
For single scale applications, the current scale will always be scale #1.
Therefore 1.0P
will always report the same net weight as 1.1P
. In multiple scale applications, the current scale may be scale #1, or scale #2. Thus if
[SCALE SELECT] was pressed to view the net weight of scale #2, then
1.0P
will report the same net weight as 1.2P
.
Using the current scale instance ‘0’ is useful when specifying weight parameters in a custom transmit table. This allows you to use a single custom transmit to print a ticket showing weights only for the currently selected scale. Other parameters such as time/date, APW and total of all scales, have only a ‘0’ instance. For these single-instance parameters, instance ‘0’ does not refer to the current scale. In fact, specifying an instance is generally not necessary. For example:
11P refers to the time/date parameter
Since there is only one time/date you do not need to specify an instance.
One exception is when formatting single-instance parameters in macros.
Here, the instance is a required argument in the parameter syntax. For example:
11.0.18561P
refers to the time/date formatted with a 4-digit year
Without the instance delimiter, the macro would attempt to interpret this parameter as 11.18561P, or time/date with an instance of 18561 and an error would occur.
A CCESSING O PERATING P ARAMETERS
All operating parameters are accessible from the weigh mode, except those listed as “not displayable” in Table 7-1 .
Table 7-1: Operating Parameters
O PERATING
P ARAMETER
P ARAMETER N AME
4
5
2
3
6
0
1
7
8
9
10
11
Gross
Net
Tare
Gross Total
Gross Total + Current Gross
Gross Total – Current Gross
Net Total
Net Total + Current Net
Net Total – Current Net
Number of Accumulations
Scale
Time & Date
D ISPLAYED N AME
(W EIGH M ODE )
Gross
Net
Tare
GrTOT
GrT+C
GrT-C
NtTOT
NtT+C
NtT-C
# Accum
(not displayable)
(shows time/date)
R ENAME
P ARAMETER
P600
P601
P602
P603
P604
P605
P606
P607
P608
P609
P610
P611
460
S ERIES
V ALID I NSTANCE
560
S ERIES
660
S ERIES
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0
0
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0
0
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0
0
C OMMENTS
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-4 Chapter 7
61
62
63
64
76
46
50
51
52
60
42
43
44
45
35
36
37
40
41
82
90
91
92
97
77
78
79
80
81
98
99
30
31
32
33
34
25
26
27
28
29
19
20
21
23
24
15
16
17
18
Average Gross
Average Net
Average Count
Peak Gross
Peak Net
Rounded (Displayed) Gross
Rounded (Displayed) Net
Rate
Free Fall 1
Future Gross 1
Future Net 1
Free Fall 2
Future Gross 2
Future Net 2
Quantity
Quantity Total
Quantity Total + Current Quantity
Quantity Total - Current Quantity
Average Piece Weight
Average Piece Weight * 1000
Percent Accuracy
Last Sample Size
Gross Total of All Scales
Net Total of All Scales
Tare Total of All Scales
Total of All Gross Totals
Total of All Net Totals
Quantity Total of All Scales
Total of All Quantity Totals
Programmable I/O Function
Programmable I/O Function
Programmable I/O Function
Extended Resolution Gross
Extended Resolution Net
Extended Resolution Tare
A/D Conversion Number
DSD Parameter
Setpoint Countdown Timer
Setpoint Delay Timer
Setpoint Status
Random Number
Variable
Timer Ticks
Timer Seconds
Macro Select
User Defined Weigh Mode Message
Get Display Data
Status
Current Displayed Weight/Count
Extended Gross
AvGrs
AvNet
AvgCt
PkGrs
PkNet
(not displayable)
(not displayable)
Rate
FreFl
FutGr
FutNt
FrFl2
FuGr2
FuNt2
Qty
QtTOT
NTAll
QuAll
QTAll
PIOA
PIOB
PIOC
XGros
XNet
XTare
#A/Dx
DSD
QtT+C
QtT-C
APW
APW*K
%Accy
Last Sampl
GrAll
NeAll
TrAll
GTAll
(not displayable)
(not displayable)
SPxxx
(not displayable)
V#xxx
Ticks
Sec.
(macro name)
Mode 91Msg
(not displayable)
(not displayable)
(not displayable)
Extnd
-
-
-
-
-
P646
P852
P853
P854
-
P635
P636
P637
P640
P641
P642
P643
P644
P645
-
-
-
P862
-
-
P9991
-
-
-
-
-
P625
P626
P627
P628
P629
P630
P631
P632
P633
P634
P615
P616
P617
P618
P619
P620
P621
P623
P624
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
N/A
1 – 16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 2
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 4
0 – 8
1 – 9
1 – 48
1 – 16
1 – 16
0
1 – 15
1 – 8
1 – 8
1 – 15 pg 7-36
0 or 10
0 – 8
1 – 48
1 – 48
0
1 – 100
1 – 8
1 – 8
1 – 100 pg 7-36
0 or 10
0 – 4
1 – 256
1 – 256
0
1 – 999
1 – 8
1 – 8
1 – 250 pg 7-36
0 or 10
0 – 2
0 – 2 0 – 4 0 – 8
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0
1 – 8
1 – 8
1 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
0 – 8
1 – 9
1 – 256
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Updated by the %+ macro command
Must specify Rate
Measurement
Period (RMP) at
P135 to utilize ratebased parameters
Must enable Count feature at P179 to access counting parameters
Must enable Count feature at P179
Dependent upon function at P851
See page 6-13
Allocate at P680
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Accessing Operating Parameters
)00 lb±²³
Gross
1 ó
)00
18 ó
5)10
82.2 ó
14#978 lb±²³
Net lb
PkGrs
˜
Sec.
?
Variables must be allocated at
P680 before they can be accessed.
Operating Parameters 7-5
D IRECT A CCESS
Operating parameters can be accessed directly from the weigh mode as shown in the example – Accessing Operating Parameters by keying in the desired parameter number, then pressing [SELECT] . For example:
1 [SELECT] selects the net mode
18 [SELECT] selects the peak gross mode
If an instance is required, include a decimal point and the instance after the parameter number. The instance number will be shown inverted in the upper-right corner of the display. For example:
82.2 [SELECT] selects the timer seconds for timer #2
Accessing Weight Parameters
It is not necessary to specify an instance when selecting a single-instance parameter or a weight parameter. Specifying an instance for a weight parameter is only necessary when more than one scale is enabled and you want to change the currently selected scale. For example, if the gross weight for scale #2 is currently displayed, you can key in 1 [SELECT] to view the net weight for scale #2. You could also have keyed in 1.2
[SELECT] (or even 1.0 [SELECT] ), but the instance is not necessary since scale #2 is already the current scale. To view the gross weight for scale #1, key in 0.1 [SELECT] . Note that it was not necessary to press
[SCALE SELECT] to switch from scale #2 to scale #1. Specifying an instance of ‘1’ selected the desired scale automatically.
A CCESSING V ARIABLES
Variables may be accessed in the same method as other parameters:
80.1 [SELECT] selects variable #1
80.20 [SELECT] selects variable #20
Variables may also be accessed using the [ID] key if it is not redefined at
P806:
1 [ID]
20 [ID] selects variable #1 selects variable #20
This method requires fewer keystrokes as only the instance number must be keyed in prior to pressing [ID] .
I NVALID I NSTANCE
The error message Invld Instn will be displayed whenever an invalid instance is specified. For example, if scale #3 is not enabled and you key in 0.3 [SELECT] to access the gross weight for scale #3, Invld Instn is briefly displayed indicating that the selection was not valid. The gross mode will be selected. However, the instance displayed will be the nearest previous valid instance.
If an invalid parameter is specified, Invld Instn is also displayed indicating that the selection was not valid. The parameter displayed will be the nearest previous valid parameter. For example, if the counting mode is disabled and you key in 37 [SELECT] to access the last sample size,
Invld Instn is briefly displayed indicating that the selection was not
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-6 Chapter 7
Example:
Editing the Mode Menu Parameters
300 ó
P30)
11 å
P30)
ó
P30!
0.0 å
P30!
ó
P30@
3.0 å
P30@
ó
P30#
4.0 å
P30#
ó
P30$
9.0 å
P30$
ú ã å å
MODE0
Gross
MODE0
Tm/Dt
MODE1
Net
MODE1
Gross
MODE2
Tare
MODE2
GrTOT
MODE3
None!
MODE3
GrT+C
MODE4
None!
MODE4
Accum
Exits the setup mode, saves changes and returns to the weigh mode showing time/date as the new powerup mode.
0*0!99
12:00
:00am
Press [SELECT] to toggle through the new Mode Menu parameters.
GSE Scale Systems valid. This is because the counting mode must be enabled to access 30P
à 37P as indicated in Table 7-1. The instance displayed will be the nearest previous valid instance, in this case 29P, future net #2. If an instance is specified for a parameter that does not require and instance, the message No Instn is displayed.
Displayable parameters 50P à 82P require an instance. Failure to specify one will result in the automatic selection of the first instance for the selected parameter.
M ODE M ENU A CCESS
A convenient way to access frequently used operating parameters is to assign them to the Mode Menu parameters at P300 à P309 of the setup mode. This allows you to toggle through up to ten different operating parameters in the weigh mode using only the [SELECT] key. The first parameter in the Mode Menu list will be the first parameter displayed at power-up or upon exiting the setup mode.
By default, the gross weight is assigned to P300, the net weight to P301 and the tare weight to P302. Thus, the instrument powers-up in the gross mode and pressing [SELECT] toggles the weigh mode to net, then to tare, and then back to gross.
E DITING THE M ODE M ENU S ELECTIONS
The following procedure describes how to edit the Mode Menu selections.
In this example, the default configuration is altered for an application performing gross weight accumulations. The time/date will be displayed at power-up. Pressing [SELECT] will toggle through gross, gross total, gross total + current gross, number of accumulations, then back to time/date.
To edit the Mode Menu selections:
1. Access the setup mode.
2. Key in 300 [SELECT] to access the first menu selection (mode 0).
3. Key in 11 [ENTER] to select the time/date parameter.
4. Press [SELECT] to access the next menu selection at P301 (mode 1).
5. Key in 0.0 [ENTER] to enter the gross parameter for the current scale.
6. Press [SELECT] to access the next menu selection at P302 (mode 2).
7. Key in 3.0 [ENTER] to enter the gross total parameter for the current scale.
8. Press [SELECT] to access the next menu selection at P303 (mode 3).
9. Key in 4.0 [ENTER] to select the gross total + current gross weight parameter for the current scale.
10. Press [SELECT] to access the next menu selection at P304 (mode 4).
11. Key in 9.0 [ENTER] to select the number of accumulations parameter for the current scale.
12. Save changes and exit the setup mode.
Refer to the Parameter Entry Parameters section more details on entering parameters in the setup mode.
i
To clear an existing parameter in the Mode Menu, access the desired Mode setup parameter and key in 99 [ENTER]. The display will then show None! for the parameter selection.
i
The %s and %i macro commands perform the same functions as pressing [SELECT] and [ID] respectively.
Operating Parameters 7-7
M ACRO A CCESS
Macros can access operating parameters by duplicating the keystrokes that would be required using the direct access method. For example:
1%s
1.0%s
1.2%s selects the net mode for the current scale selects the net mode for the current scale selects the net mode for scale #2
11%s selects time/date
80.1%s selects variable #1
1%i
%s selects variable #1 selects the next parameter in the Mode Menu
The following series of macro commands demonstrates how to briefly display the tare weight for scales 1 à 3, then return to the gross mode for scale #1.
2.1%s selects the tare mode for scale #1
%P
2.2%s
%P
2.3%s
%P
0.1%s pause (one second) selects the tare mode for scale #2 pause (one second) selects the tare mode for scale #3 pause (one second) selects the gross mode for scale #1
0) kg±²³
Bruto
R
ENAMING
O
PERATING
P
ARAMETERS
Operating parameters can be permanently renamed in the setup mode or with the %R Rename Mode macro command. A renamed parameter will display the new name every time it is accessed. This allows you to customize the standard display for international applications and provides additional prompting capability.
R ENAMING P ARAMETERS I N T HE S ETUP M ODE
Rather than displaying Gross , Net and Tare , you can permanently rename these parameters to become the Spanish names Bruto , Neto and Tara at P600, P601 and P602 respectively. Likewise, other operating parameters can be renamed in the setup mode at P600 à P646
(see Table 7-1). Note that the last two digits of the setup mode parameter correspond with the operating parameter number.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-8 Chapter 7
Example:
Renaming Operating Parameters
600 ó
P60) Gross
None!
Bruto
å
P60) Gross
Bruto
2!25
lb
Gross
To rename an Operating Parameter in the setup mode:
1. Access the setup mode.
2. Key in the desired parameter number, 600 à 646 as shown in Table
7-1, and press [SELECT] to access the “Rename” parameter.
3. Key in the new name and press [ENTER] . Alpha characters may be entered through the front panel as described in the Key In Value
Parameters section.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to rename additional parameters.
5. Exit the setup mode.
R ESTORING D EFAULT P ARAMETER N AMES
The default names for all operating parameters are restored after defaulting all setup parameters (see the Default Setup section of the
Information Parameters chapter). To restore the default name for individual parameters, access the desired “Rename” parameter as previously described and press [CLR] rather than entering a new name.
The prompt will show None!
, indicating that the parameter is no longer renamed.
R ENAMING P ARAMETERS WITH M ACROS
Operating parameters can be renamed with the %R Rename Mode macro command. This allows parameters to be renamed at any time without accessing the setup mode. The new name will remain in effect until changed again by another %R command. If the changes to the setup mode are saved when a new name is in effect, the new name will become permanent, retaining the name even after a power loss.
Using this method of renaming parameters, you could develop a macro routine that prompts the user to select a language at power-up, then renames parameters accordingly. Parameters could also be renamed to serve as prompts. For example, a 2-speed filling application could rename
Net to be Fast , then Slow , and finally Done!
at the appropriate times to indicate system status. Refer to the %R Rename Mode macro command for full details and examples.
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
The basic weight parameters are Gross, Net and Tare. A separate Gross,
Net and Tare register is maintained for each enabled scale. These values are recalculated after every A/D interrupt, generally 60 times per second.
G ROSS (M ODE 0)
The gross weight parameter represents the total live weight on the scale since the last time a zero reference was established by pressing [ZERO] or through zero tracking. The gross weight is calculated internally and its value cannot be changed by any other means.
GSE Scale Systems
Operating Parameters 7-9
2)00
!25
lb
Net lb
Tare i
The macro command 2.0P=0.0P%o is equivalent to performing an auto-tare without motion delay.
When displaying the gross weight, the internally calculated value is rounded to the nearest display division size. However, the gross weight stored in 0P remains the same as the internally calculated value, a value of greater precision than the displayed value. This is an important fact to consider when using the gross weight parameter in macros to accumulate gross weight values. It is likely that the result of several such accumulations will exceed the accumulation of the displayed values. If the accumulated gross weight values must agree with displayed values, use
20P , the rounded gross weight parameter (see Rounded Weight
Parameters on page 7-15).
N ET (M ODE 1)
The net weight parameter represents the difference between gross and tare:
NET = GROSS – TARE
The net weight can be used to determine the weight of product in a container if the tare weight of the container has been established. The net weight is also used for multiple ingredient filling applications where a new tare weight is established prior to each fill. Thus each ingredient can fill from a net weight of zero to the desired target net weight. The net weight is calculated internally and its value can only be changed indirectly by specifying a new tare weight.
Like the gross weight parameter, the displayed net weight is rounded to the nearest display division size while the value stored in 1P remains as the internally calculated net weight. When performing macro accumulations where the accumulated net weight must agree with displayed values, use 21P , the rounded net weight parameter (see
Rounded Weight Parameters on page 7-15).
T ARE (M ODE 2)
The tare weight parameter represents a deduction from gross weight made to allow for the weight of a container or other such weight not to be considered as part of the resulting net weight.
The tare value stored in 2P depends on P163 in the setup mode. If tare rounding is enabled at P163, the value stored in 2P will be the displayed
(rounded) tare weight. If tare rounding is disabled, the tare weight will be stored as a higher precision value. Storing negative tare weights is not possible if negative tare is disabled at P162. The current tare weight is retained during a power interruption if tare save is set to “Auto” at P661. If
NTEP is enabled at P440, tare rounding will be enabled and negative tare disabled regardless of the other settings.
The tare weight can be changed through the following methods:
•
Press [TARE] to perform an auto-tare.
•
Key in the tare weight and press [TARE] to perform a manual tare.
•
Assign a tare value using macros.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-10 Chapter 7
538&28 lb
GrTOT
30!02
lb
GrT+C
A
CCUMULATION
P
ARAMETERS
The accumulation parameters are primarily used when performing gross and net accumulations as described in the Accumulation section.
Separate accumulation parameters are maintained for each enabled scale.
Accumulation totals are reset to zero (0) during a power loss if P660 is set to “NoSav”.
G ROSS T OTAL (M ODE 3)
The gross total parameter maintains a total of gross weight accumulations.
The current gross weight is added to this total each time an accumulation is performed by pressing [ . ] [ENTER] in the gross, net, gross total or net total mode.
The gross total can be initialized to any value by accessing the gross total parameter, keying in the desired value and pressing [ENTER] . To clear the gross total, access the gross total parameter and press [CLR] .
Initializing or clearing the gross total in this manner will reset the number of accumulations parameter ( 9P ) to zero. Clearing the gross total in this manner also clears the net total ( 6P ).
G ROSS T OTAL + C URRENT G ROSS (M ODE 4)
The gross total + current gross parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the current gross total ( 3P ) plus the current gross weight
( 0P ). This parameter is commonly used in conjunction with the accumulation procedure for multiple-dump batching applications.
Consider the following scenario:
1. A 5000 lb capacity hopper is to be used to batch 200,000 lbs of material into a rail car. This would require the hopper to be filled and discharged 40 times.
2. A start-batch macro is programmed to zero the scale and clear the gross total ( 3P ). Doing so also clears the gross total + current gross parameter.
3. The start-batch macro then activates two setpoints:
4. The first setpoint is configured to be active “never” and deactive
“above” the hopper target weight of 5000 lb. This setpoint compares the gross weight to a variable that contains the hopper target value.
5. The second setpoint is configured to be active “never” and deactive above the batch target weight of 200,000 lbs. This setpoint compares the gross total + current gross parameter to a variable that contains the batch target value.
6. When the hopper target is reached, the first setpoint deactivates and invokes a macro programmed to perform a gross weight accumulation before opening the hopper gate. After the accumulation is performed, the display “locks” the gross total + current gross weight value. Thus when the hopper gate opens, the value of 4P will not begin to update until the weight in the hopper falls below the Return-to-Zero (RTZ) range specified at P122. This “locking” feature is a function of the
GSE Scale Systems
29*98 lb
GrT-C
419^21 lb
NtTOT
20!02
19*98 lb
NtT+C lb
NtT-C
10 #
Accum
Operating Parameters 7-11 gross total + current gross parameter and does not require additional setup or macro control.
7. Once the hopper empties, the first setpoint reactivates to begin filling again.
8. Steps 6 and 7 are repeated until the value of 4P reaches the 200,000 batch target. This deactivates the second setpoint which invokes another macro programmed to deactivate the first setpoint and complete the batch.
G ROSS T OTAL - C URRENT G ROSS (M ODE 5)
The gross total - current gross parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the current gross total ( 3P ) minus the current gross weight
( 0P ).
N ET T OTAL (M ODE 6)
The net total parameter maintains a total of net weight accumulations.
The current net weight is added to this total each time an accumulation is performed by pressing [ . ] [ENTER] in the gross, net, gross total or net total mode.
The net total can be initialized to any value by accessing the net total parameter, keying in the desired value and pressing [ENTER] . To clear the net total, access the net total parameter and press [CLR] . Initializing or clearing the net total in this manner will reset the number of accumulations parameter ( 9P ) to zero. Clearing the net total in this manner also clears the gross total ( 3P ).
N ET T OTAL + C URRENT N ET (M ODE 7)
The net total + current net parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the current net total ( 6P ) plus the current net weight ( 1P ).
N ET T OTAL - C URRENT N ET (M ODE 8)
The net total - current net parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the current net total ( 6P ) minus the current net weight ( 1P ).
N UMBER O F A CCUMULATIONS (M ODE 9)
The number of accumulations parameter represents the number of times an accumulation has been performed using the [ . ] [ENTER] method.
This value is reset to zero whenever the gross total ( 3P ) or net total ( 6P ) is cleared using the front keypad. It cannot be cleared or preset in any other way except through the use of macros.
S CALE N UMBER (M ODE 10)
The scale parameter is used only in custom transmits or as a database column to represent the currently selected scale number.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-12 Chapter 7
0*0!99
12:00
:00am
T
IME
& D
ATE
A battery backed time/date clock is standard on all 660 and 560 Series
Controllers and is optional on 460 Series Indicators. The clock module maintains the time/date even during power loss. When power is restored the time/date is read from the clock module and subsequently maintained by the firmware.
T IME & D ATE (M ODE 11)
The time & date parameter maintains the current time and date in 1 second intervals, storing them together as the cumulative number of seconds elapsed since midnight January 1, 1970. The number is stored in a 32-bit binary register (unsigned integer) allowing a maximum value of
4,294,967,295. This value translates to 6:28:15am on February 6, 2106.
When the scale is powered up, the time and date value is initially set at 0
(January 1, 1970, 12:00:00pm). The current time and date is read from the U12 clock chip on the main board and copied to the time & date parameter ( P11 ). Adjustments to the time and date can be entered manually or assigned through a macro. The date is manually entered as
MM.DD.YY (month.day.year) and then the time is entered as HH.MM.SS
(hours.minutes.seconds). These entries are converted to the number of seconds elapsed since midnight January 1, 1970 and then stored in 11P and the clock chip where it is incremented every second.
Although the time & date register can handle dates from three centuries
(19xx, 20xx and 21xx), there is a two-digit year entry limitation. A two-digit year entry of 70 or greater is interpreted as 19xx and a two-digit year entry of less than 70 is interpreted as 20xx. This results in a maximum starting date of 11:59:59 pm on December 31, 2069. To overcome this limitation, a short macro could be written to accept a four-digit entry and convert the time and date entry accordingly.
A 10 year lithium battery powers the U12 clock module. The module keeps track of the time and date independently; the instrument only reads the module’s time and date at power-up. After power-up, time and date is maintained by the indicator separately from the module. When a new time and date is entered into the unit, it is written to the clock module, thus the limitation of a two-digit entry for the year still applies.
The scale automatically adjusts for Leap Years. However, time changes for Daylight Savings are not accounted for. Once again a small macro routine could easily handle this adjustment.
I
MPORTING
T
IME
& D
ATE TO
M
ICROSOFT
® E
XCEL
Microsoft® Excel handles time and date similar to the method of the 60
Series instrument, but with two significant differences:
•
Excel treats a time & date value of zero (0) as January 01, 1900.
•
Excel represents date as the whole number of days since January 01,
1900 and represents the time as a fraction of a day.
For example, 12:00:00 pm, August 1, 1999 would be internally represented as:
GSE Scale Systems
1)00 lb
AvGrs
Operating Parameters 7-13
36373.50
days in Excel
933508800 seconds in the 60 Series instrument
Both the 60 Series and Excel can format their respective numbers many different ways to represent the time/date in a more readable manner.
However, importing the 60 Series time/date number to Excel will require a simple computation to convert it to the Excel format.
To import time & date to Excel:
1. Import the 60 Series format unchanged to a column in Excel. This column can be configured as a hidden column or included on a separate sheet if you do not want to view this column in the main spreadsheet.
2. The number of seconds reported by the 60 Series instrument must undergo two computations:
•
The number of days and fractions of a day must be determined.
933508800 seconds
÷
86400 seconds/day = 10804.5 days
•
The number of days between January 1, 1900 and January 1,
1970 must be added to the result of the first computation.
10804.5 days + 25569 days = 36373.5 days
Both computations can be performed in a single Excel column. For example, if the 60 Series value is imported to Excel column ‘D’, then column ‘E’ can be formatted with the following formula:
E1 = (D1 / 86400) + 25569
Column ‘E’ will now contain the correct Excel time/date value. Format this column to express the time/date as desired.
W
EIGHT
A
VERAGING
P
ARAMETERS
The averaging parameters are used to calculate the average gross or net weight over a period of time. This feature is useful in a variety of applications such as in-motion weighing (i.e. mono-rail scales, truck or rail scales, check-weighing, etc.), weighing hoppers or vessels with mixers or agitators, weighing live animals, or any other application that requires accurate weighing of an unstable object. The %+ Averaging macro command is used to start and stop the averaging routine.
A VERAGE G ROSS (M ODE 15)
The average gross parameter represents the average gross weight calculated through use of the %+ Averaging macro command. This command can be used to start, stop and resume averaging. A separate average gross parameter is maintained for each enabled scale.
Once averaging begins, 15P becomes an active weight parameter continuously recalculating the average filtered gross weight until averaging
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-14 Chapter 7
1)00 lb
AvNet
240
AvgCt
10#04 lb
PkGrs
Example:
Invoking a Macro Using Peak Gross
5099%s1%e Setpt 1
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sPEAK%e SPNam PEAK
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s0%e AcMac None!
5130%s1%e Deact Below
5131%s0.00%e DeDly 0.00
5132%s10%e DeMac 10
5133%s0%e DeMtn Ign'd
5134%s18.1%e DLPar PEAK
5150%s0.1%e CmPar Gross
MACRO #6 - START PRESS
%z zero scale
18.1P=0%o reset peak
1%A start press
MACRO #10 - PRINT PEAK
2%Q print peak is stopped. If the digital filter is set to 1 second or less at P116 (or by the
%k Digital Filter macro command), then the average weight is recalculated every 1/60 th
second). If the filter is set for 2, 4 or 8 seconds, then the average weight is recalculated every 2/60 th
, 4/60 th
or 8/60 th
seconds respectively.
The average gross parameter contains an accumulated weight value. The average gross weight is calculated when accessed by dividing the accumulated weight by the average count of 17P . Thus if a value is to be entered directly into 15P , the average count should first be assigned at
17P . When recalling a gross average value from a database, the average count column should precede the average gross column.
A VERAGE N ET (M ODE 16)
The average net parameter represents the average net weight calculated through use of the %+ Averaging macro command. The characteristics of the average net parameter are identical to that of the average gross ( 15P ).
A VERAGE C OUNT (M ODE 17)
The average count parameter represents the number of times the gross and net weight were accumulated when using the %+ Averaging macro command. Typically, the average count increments 60 times per second.
The accumulated weight stored internally in 15P and 16P is divided by the average count to calculate the average gross and net values.
P
EAK
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
The peak weight parameters are active weight parameters representing the peak gross and net weight. They continuously monitor the gross and net weight of each scale and record the current weight each time it exceeds the previously stored value. These parameters can be accessed at any time to determine the maximum weight applied since the last time the peak weight was cleared. They are often used in applications that measure an object’s compression or tensile strength.
P EAK G ROSS (M ODE 18)
The peak gross parameter represents the maximum gross weight applied since last cleared. To clear the current peak weight, access 18P and press [CLR] . The peak gross weight will be immediately updated with the current gross weight.
U SING P EAK G ROSS TO I NVOKE A M ACRO
The following routine demonstrates how to use the peak gross parameter to test and report an object’s compression strength:
1. A hydraulic press is used to compress a concrete core sample with increasing force until the sample breaks.
GSE Scale Systems
10#04 lb
PkNet
Operating Parameters 7-15
2. An operator presses [START] to activate the press. This action invokes macro #6 which first zeros the scale, clears 18P (both gross and peak gross are now at zero), then starts the press by the activation of setpoint #1.
3. The hydraulic press increases the force on the scale through the concrete block. As the gross weight increases, so does the peak gross weight. Both values remain identical as the force continues to increase.
4. When the concrete breaks, the gross weight immediately drops back to zero. The peak gross weight maintains the maximum gross weight recorded. At this time, the peak gross weight exceeds the gross weight and setpoint #1 deactivates, stopping the press.
5. The deactivation of setpoint #1 invokes macro #10 which sends custom transmit #2 to print the peak gross weight.
P EAK N ET (M ODE 19)
The peak net parameter represents the maximum net weight applied since last cleared. To clear the current peak weight, access 19P and press
[CLR] . The peak net weight will be immediately updated with the current net weight.
R
OUNDED
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
The rounded weight parameters represent the displayed gross and net weight for each enabled scale. These parameters are primarily used for performing macro calculations involving gross and net weights where the result of such calculations must agree with the displayed weights.
The rounded weight parameters cannot be displayed from the weigh mode or used in custom transmits. This would be redundant since the rounded gross and net weight is identical to the displayed or printed gross and net weight. However, the displayed gross and net weights are calculated to a higher precision value internally. Table 7-2 shows the relationship between the internal and rounded weight values. Notice that when the gross and net weights are added using 0.0P
or 1.0P
, the result may not agree with the displayed values. Use 20.0P
or 21.0P
to ensure the total will be correct.
Table 7-2: Internal Gross/Net Vs Rounded Gross/Net
I NTERNAL
G ROSS W T .
(0.0P)
11.0046
11.0032
11.0029
33.0107
D ISPLAYED
G ROSS W T .
(0.0P)
11.00
11.00
11.00
33.0107
R OUNDED
G ROSS W T .
(20.0P)
11.00
11.00
11.00
33.00
I NTERNAL
N ET W T .
(1.0P)
10.0046
10.0032
10.0029
30.0107
D ISPLAYED
N ET W T .
(1.0P)
10.00
10.00
10.00
30.0107
R OUNDED
N ET W T .
(21.0P)
10.00
10.00
10.00
30.00
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-16 Chapter 7
)00 lb/s
Rate
R OUNDED G ROSS (P ARAMETER 20)
The rounded gross parameter represents the displayed gross weight exactly as displayed, rounded internally to the nearest scale division. This parameter cannot be displayed and therefore cannot be selected as a mode of operation.
R OUNDED N ET (P ARAMETER 21)
The rounded net parameter represents the displayed net weight exactly as displayed, rounded internally to the nearest scale division. This parameter cannot be displayed and cannot be selected as a mode of operation.
R
ATE
P
ARAMETERS
The rate parameters are used to indicate the rate of weight change on the scale. Rate is often used to calculate and control a product’s flow rate in batching applications. Used in conjunction with the free-fall and future gross/net parameters, the rate parameters can be used to provide realtime adjustment to a target cutoff value in order to achieve accurate fill weights with varying flow rates.
R ATE (M ODE 23)
The rate parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the change in weight over a specified time period. A separate rate is maintained for each enabled scale. Before the rate feature can be used, it must first be enabled by specifying a rate measurement period at P135 of the setup mode. The rate value can either be positive indicating a gain-inweight, or negative indicating a loss-in-weight. Rate is displayed in the currently selected units per rate time unit (RTU).
R
ATE
M
EASUREMENT
P
ERIOD
(RMP)
The rate feature must be enabled at P135 for each scale before it can be used to calculate rate. This setup parameter defines the rate measurement period (RMP), in seconds, over which the average rate will be calculated. Valid RMP entries are 0 à 900 seconds. An RMP of zero
(0) disables the rate feature. The value is stored internally in 1/60 th
second intervals. The displayed value is rounded off to two decimal places, one decimal place for entries 100 seconds or greater.
A short RMP results in a rate calculation that responds quickly to a change in weight, whereas a larger RMP provides a more stable, accurate rate indication where the change in weight is gradual. For example, an RMP of
0.017 (stored as 0.02) seconds (1/60 th
second) ensures that a new rate value will be calculated with each new gross weight reported from the A/D converter. An RMP of 1.0 seconds will display the average of the last 60 rate calculations.
GSE Scale Systems
!00
—
FreFl
Operating Parameters 7-17
R ATE T IME U NIT (RTU)
The rate time unit (RTU) specifies the time unit for displaying the calculated rate. The RTU is specified at P136 as either seconds, minutes or hours.
R ESETTING THE A VERAGE R ATE
When a long RMP is used to indicate rate in an application such as a lossin-weight system, it may be necessary to clear the rate history at certain times. For example, consider a slowly discharging hopper scale with a 60 second RMP. When the hopper discharges to a low-limit value, it will need to be refilled. Refilling is usually a very quick process during which time the flow rate reverses as product is added to the hopper much faster than it is being discharged. Once the hopper is refilled, the rate again reverses as the system continues to discharge. With a 60 second RMP, the displayed rate still reflects the average of the previous 3600 rate calculations. Thus even though actual the rate is now slightly negative, the indicated rate value will likely be positive for the next minute until the rate history has moved beyond the time during which the hopper was filling.
The rate history can be cleared at any time using the %k Digital Filter macro command. The command R%k will instantly clear the rate history and begin recalculating the average rate value with the next A/D conversion.
F REE F ALL (M ODE 24)
The free fall parameter represents the number of seconds it takes for product in free fall to reach the scale. The free fall value is not calculated by the 60 Series instrument. It must be assigned manually or through a macro command. Once assigned, this value is used to calculate the weight of product in free fall based on the current flow rate. For example, if the current flow rate is 2.5 lb/sec and the free fall time is 2 seconds, then there would be 5 lbs of product in free fall. This free fall weight, recalculated with each A/D conversion, can then be used to predict what the weight will be 2 seconds in the future. This becomes the basis for the future gross and future net parameters.
C ALCULATING F REE F ALL
If the precise free fall time is known, it can be entered directly into 24P. In many cases this value can more accurately be determined using macros.
A learn cycle can be run whereby free fall is calculated as follows:
1. Product is allowed to fill to its target weight.
2. When the target weight is reached, a gate or valve is closed by the deactivation of the fill setpoint.
3. The setpoint deactivation invokes a macro which immediately copies the instantaneous rate to a variable, for example:
80.1P=23.1P%o
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-18 Chapter 7
2$03 lb
FutGr
2)03 lb
FutNt
4. Next, the overfill amount is determined after a motion delay by subtracting the target weight from the gross weight:
M1%,
80.3P=0.1P-80.2P%o
5. where 80.2P is the target weight and 80.3P is the overfill weight.
6. Finally, the free fall time is calculated as the overfill weight divided by the rate at the time the target was reached:
24.1P=80.3P/80.1P%o
F UTURE G ROSS (M ODE 25)
The future gross parameter is an active weight parameter that represents a predicted gross weight calculated by multiplying the current rate by the free fall time and adding the result to the current gross weight:
Future Gross (25P) = Rate (23P)
×
Free Fall (24P) + Gross (0P)
The future gross weight is recalculated with each A/D conversion. This parameter provides a very accurate means of determining the proper cutoff for filling applications as it can automatically adjust the cutoff value to account for variations in flow rate.
For example, suppose you want to fill a hopper to a target weight of 500 lbs. If the current flow rate is 5.0 lb/sec and the free fall time is 2 seconds, then there would be 10 lbs of product in free fall. The future gross weight then becomes the current gross weight plus 10 lbs. Thus when the gross weight reaches 490 lbs, the future gross weight will indicate 500 lbs. If we use the future gross weight as the basis for the fill valve setpoint, the valve will close when the future gross weight reaches 500 lbs. The gross weight is only 490 lbs at that time, but we know there will be 10 lbs of additional free falling product.
Now suppose that the flow rate changes to 10 lb/sec for the next fill cycle.
The free fall time remains constant at 2 seconds, so the free fall weight now becomes 20 lbs. Again, the fill valve does not close until the future gross weight reaches 500 lbs. However, this time the actual gross weight will be 480 lbs when the valve closes, thus accounting for the additional 20 lbs of free falling product.
F UTURE N ET (M ODE 26)
The future net parameter is an active weight parameter that represents a predicted net weight calculated by multiplying the current rate by the free fall time and adding the result to the current net weight:
Future Net (26P) = Rate (23P)
×
Free Fall (24P) + Net (1P)
The future net weight is otherwise identical to the characteristics of the future gross weight.
GSE Scale Systems
•
•
!00
—
FrFl2
2$03 lb
FuGr2
2$03 lb
FuNt2
Operating Parameters 7-19
F REE F ALL 2 (M ODE 27)
The free fall 2 parameter is identical to 24P except that it is used to calculate the future gross and future net weight for 28P and 29P respectively.
F UTURE G ROSS 2 (M ODE 28)
The future gross 2 parameter is identical to 25P except that it uses the free fall time of 27P to calculate its value. This provides a second future gross parameter for use in two-speed filling applications so both fast and slow fill cutoff values can take advantage of the rate feature. When using 28P to determine the slow fill cutoff, be sure to clear the rate history with the R%k command immediately after achieving the fast fill target.
F UTURE N ET 2 (M ODE 29)
The future net 2 parameter is identical to 28P except that it tracks the net weight rather than the gross weight.
1)
Qty
C
OUNTING
P
ARAMETERS
The counting parameters represent various information for use in the counting mode. These parameters are only accessible if the counting mode is enabled at P179 of the setup mode. Refer to the Counting section for complete details on the counting feature.
Q UANTITY (M ODE 30)
The quantity parameter is an active weight parameter that represents a number of pieces on the scale. A separate quantity is maintained for each enabled scale. The quantity is calculated by dividing the net weight by the average piece weight (APW):
Quantity (30P) = Net (1P)
÷
APW (34P)
The quantity can be established by two methods:
Performing a piece sample.
Assigning a value to the average piece weight parameter ( 34P ).
If an APW has not been established, the prompt Must Sampl will be displayed when attempting to access the quantity mode. Press [ENTER] to tare the scale and begin the sampling routine or enter the APW at 34P .
It is also possible to assign an APW through macros or by recalling an
APW from a database.
When the display shows a quantity greater than zero (0), you can change the quantity by keying in the correct value and pressing [ENTER] . The
APW will be recalculated accordingly and the newly entered quantity will be displayed.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-20 Chapter 7
100)
12501
7499
)02277
QtTOT
QtT+C
QtT-C lb
APW
2@7700 lb
APW*K
Q UANTITY T OTAL (M ODE 31)
The quantity total parameter maintains a total of quantity accumulations.
The current quantity is added to this total each time an accumulation is performed by pressing [ . ] [ENTER] in the quantity or quantity total mode.
The quantity total can be initialized to any value by accessing the quantity total parameter, keying in the desired value and pressing [ENTER] . To clear the quantity total, access the quantity total parameter and press
[CLR] . Initializing or clearing the quantity total in this manner will also clear the gross total ( 3P ) and net total ( 6P ) and reset the number of accumulations parameter ( 9P ) to zero. Note that clearing the gross total or net total in the same manner does not affect the quantity total.
Q UANTITY T OTAL + C URRENT Q UANTITY (M ODE
32)
The quantity total + current quantity parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the current quantity total ( 31P ) plus the current quantity ( 30P ). This parameter is commonly used in conjunction with the accumulation procedure for multiple-dump batching applications based on piece count.
Q UANTITY T OTAL - C URRENT Q UANTITY (M ODE
33)
The quantity total - current quantity parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the current quantity total ( 31P ) minus the current quantity ( 30P ).
A VERAGE P IECE W EIGHT (M ODE 34)
The average piece weight parameter (APW) represents the average weight of an individual piece as calculated during the sampling routine.
Only one APW is maintained for all enabled scales. The net weight of each scale is divided by the APW to determine the quantity ( 30P ):
Quantity (30P) = Net (1P)
÷
APW (34P)
An APW can be assigned through macros or by recalling an APW from a database. This allows the quantity to be calculated without having to resample. Note that the APW is cleared at power-up.
A VERAGE P IECE W EIGHT X 1000 (M ODE 35)
The average piece weight
×
1000 parameter (APW*K) represents the average weight of 1000 pieces as calculated during the sampling routine.
Only one APW*K is maintained for all enabled scales.
GSE Scale Systems
9(806
%Accy
10 Last
Sampl
Operating Parameters 7-21
P ERCENT A CCURACY (M ODE 36)
The percent accuracy parameter represents the minimum accuracy achieved during the last sample routine. Only one percent accuracy parameter is maintained for all enabled scales.
L AST S AMPLE S IZE (M ODE 37)
The last sample size parameter represents the number of pieces used during the last sample routine to determine the current APW. Only one last sample size parameter is maintained for all enabled scales.
4202) lb
GrAll
M
ULTI
-
SCALE
P
ARAMETERS
The multi-scale parameters automatically calculate the total of individual gross, net, tare, quantity, gross total, net total, and quantity total weight parameters for all enabled scales.
i
Most legal-for-trade applications will require that you display the same units and division size on all scales when displaying the gross total of all scales. Set P111 the same for all enabled scales. To toggle the units for all scales, reassign the [UNITS] key at P803 to invoke a macro.
Configure the macro to toggle the units for each scale with the %uUnits macro command.
G ROSS T OTAL O F A LL S CALES (M ODE 40)
The gross total of all scales parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the total gross weight of all enabled scales. The total weight is displayed in the current units and division size of the current scale. This parameter is commonly used with multiple-axle truck scales where the weight of individual axles as well as the total truck weight is required.
Gross Total of All Scales (40P) = 0.1P + 0.2P + 0.3P + 0.4P
2128) lb
NeAll
N ET T OTAL OF A LL S CALES (M ODE 41)
The net total of all scales parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the total net weight of all enabled scales. The total weight is displayed in the current units and division size of the current scale.
Net Total of All Scales (41P) = 1.1P + 1.2P + 1.3P + 1.4P
2074) lb
TrAll
T ARE T OTAL OF A LL S CALES (M ODE 42)
The tare total of all scales parameter represents the total net weight of all enabled scales. The total weight is displayed in the current units and division size of the current scale.
Tare Total of All Scales (42P) = 2.1P + 2.2P + 2.3P + 2.4P
4512)5 lb
GTAll
T OTAL OF A LL G ROSS T OTALS (M ODE 43)
The total of all gross totals parameter represents the total of all gross totals. The total weight is displayed in the current units and division size of the current scale. This parameter is used for accumulation applications to instantly determine the total gross accumulation of all scales.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-22 Chapter 7
4512)5 lb
NTAll
328
QuAll
80225
QTAll
T OTAL OF A LL N ET T OTALS (M ODE 44)
The total of all net totals parameter represents the total of all net totals.
The total weight is displayed in the current units and division size of the current scale.
Total of All Net Totals (44P) = 6.1P + 6.2P + 6.3P + 6.4P
Q UANTITY T OTAL OF A LL S CALES (M ODE 45)
The quantity total of all scales parameter is an active weight parameter that represents the total piece count of all enabled scales.
Quantity Total of All Scales (45P) = 30.1P + 30.2P + 30.3P + 30.4P
T OTAL OF A LL Q UANTITY T OTALS (M ODE 46)
The total of all quantity totals parameter represents the total of all quantity total parameters.
Total of All Quantity Totals (46P) = 31.1P + 31.2P + 31.3P + 31.4P
P
ROGRAMMABLE
D
IGITAL
I/O
P
ARAMETERS
(PDIO)
The programmable I/O parameters are used in conjunction with the eight
PDIO channels of the M660 main board J11 connector. These channels can be configured to perform a variety of input/output functions. The purpose of each I/O parameter depends upon the function of each PDIO channel defined at P851.
Table 7-3 illustrates the relationship between each PDIO function and their corresponding I/O parameters. Chapter 11, Programmable Digital I/O provides complete details on all PDIO functions.
GSE Scale Systems
Operating Parameters 7-23
PDIO F
Frequency Out
Setpoint
Frequency Input A
Frequency Input B
Phase Time
Delay Input
UNCTION
Delay Output
Quadrature Decode 2
Quadrature Decode 3
Frequency Debounce
Table 7-3: PDIO Parameter Functions
P URPOSE OF 50P (PDIO A)
Specifies output frequency.
-
Reports the input frequency.
Reports the input frequency.
Reports the phase time of the input frequency.
-
Specifies the width of the output pulse.
Reports the input pulse count.
Reports the absolute pulse count.
Reports the input frequency.
P URPOSE OF 51P (PDIO B)
Specifies output duty cycle.
-
-
Reports the input pulse count.
Reports the input pulse count.
-
Specifies the delay before sending the output pulse.
-
Reports the pulse count at the time of the last index pulse.
Reports the input pulse count.
P URPOSE OF 52P (PDIO C)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reports the pulse count relative to the index pulse.
Reports the average input frequency.
0
0
0
—
PIOA1
—
PIOB1
—
PIOC1
P DIO A (M ODE 50)
The purpose of the PDIO A parameter is determined by the function for each PDIO channel (see Table 7-3). When accessing 50P , be sure to specify an instance (1 à 8) to identify the desired channel.
P DIO B (M ODE 51)
The purpose of the PDIO B parameter is determined by the function for each PDIO channel (see Table 7-3). When accessing 51P , be sure to specify an instance (1 à 8) to identify the desired channel.
P DIO C (M ODE 52)
The purpose of the PDIO C parameter is determined by the function for each PDIO channel (see Table 7-3). When accessing 52P , be sure to specify an instance (1 à 8) to identify the desired channel.
E
XTENDED
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
The extended weight parameters allow you to print the gross, net or tare values using their full internal precision. The A/D conversion number provides a reference number used in calculating each weight reading.
These parameters can be used in a custom transmit or stored in a database. However, they are not available for the selectable modes at
P300 à P309 of the setup mode.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-24 Chapter 7
E XTENDED R ESOLUTION G ROSS (M ODE 60)
The extended resolution gross parameter represents the full precision value of displayed (rounded) gross weight.
E XTENDED R ESOLUTION N ET (M ODE 61)
The extended resolution net parameter represents the full precision value of displayed (rounded) net weight.
E XTENDED R ESOLUTION T ARE (M ODE 62)
The extended resolution tare parameter represents the full precision value of displayed (rounded) tare weight.
A/D C ONVERSION N UMBER (M ODE 63)
The A/D Conversion Number is the number of the last A/D conversion of a particular scale used in the calculation of the weight. A/D conversions are done every 60 th
of a second (16.66 millisecond). This parameter provides a way to determine the time between two calculated weights. This number starts at zero at power-up and upon exiting the setup mode. It rolls over at
4,294,967,295. The number will increment regardless of overload and underload errors and is independent of the filter setting at P116. Ensure that the operation to get P63 and the desired parameter are done together and cannot be interrupted or the A/D conversion number and desired parameter will not correspond. Thus the weight and the conversion number should be included in a single transmission or a ‘create row’ command for a database. The A/D conversion number is not a displayable parameter. This means that it cannot be displayed from weigh mode with the use of the select key (i.e. pressing 63 [SELECT] or pressing 63.[#] [SELECT] ).
S ETUP M ODES
Parameter 63 can be selected as a parameter for use with analog outputs
(P172 à P175), input interpreters (P222), database (P701 à P799), custom transmits (P1000), setpoints (P5114, P5115, P5134, P5135,
P5150), and as a parameter for Modbus (P6001 à P6247). When selecting this parameter #A/D is shown if the scale is not known yet.
When the scale is known (the instance) then #A/D$ is displayed where $ is the number of the scale.
A/D C
ONVERSION
N
UMBER
W
ITH
%
O
You can get the value of a scale’s A/D conversion number by using
=63.xP%o where x represents the number of the scale for which the current A/D conversion number is desired.
You can set the state of a scale’s A/D conversion number by using
63.xP=$%o where x represents the number of the scale for which the current A/D conversion number is desired and $ represents the number you wish to set the A/D conversion number to. Remember this exact
GSE Scale Systems
Operating Parameters 7-25 number may not be seen unless you read the A/D conversion number immediately after setting it.
U SING W ITH C USTOM T RANSMITS
The A/D conversion number parameter was created primarily for use with custom transmits (P1000). The same custom transmit must contain 63P and the desired parameters for which the corresponding A/D conversion number is desired. To send a continuous transmit at high rates (60 Hz maximum) the baud rate (P200) must be fast enough, the scale filter settings at P116 must be fast enough and the amount of data sent by the custom transmit must be limited. Finally, P980, TxRate only allows multiples of 0.1 second. To change the transmit rate to alternate multiples the I%Q macro must be used. It is important to realize that this rate will be reset to the value at P980 on power up and when exiting setup mode!
Example
To send a continuous transmit every 30 th
of a second out comm port 1, first set the filter at P116 for the scale you are interested in to 1.0 second.
Set P998 (Continuous Transmit) to “enabled” and configure the custom transmit table as desired (use 63P). After saving and exiting setup mode or after powering up, send a .033I%Q to override the interval at P980. It important to note that setpoints, programmable IO operations, macros, and use of other comm ports will affect the transmission rate.
DSD P
ARAMETERS
The Data Storage Device (DSD) parameters are associated only with the
DSD feature. DSD must be enabled at P590 and configured at P591 à
P595 in order to use these parameters.
DSD P ARAMETERS (P ARAMETERS 64.1 – 64.9)
Refer to the DSD database structure on page 6-14 for a complete description of DSD parameters.
S
ETPOINT
T
IMERS
The setpoint timer parameters are used to display or manipulate the 256 independent setpoint delay timers. These parameters are not displayable modes of operation, but can be used in custom transmit tables or macros to display or change timer values.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-26 Chapter 7
Example:
Using a Countdown Timer
989%s2%e%e CusTx 2
990%sMix Time%e TxNam Mix
Time
991%s0%e Send: Off
992%s4%e Port Comm4
993%s0%e CSMtn Ignrd
994%s0%e S1Mtn Ignrd
995%s0%e S2Mtn Ignrd
996%s0%e S3Mtn Ignrd
997%s0%e S4Mtn Ignrd
998%s1%e Cont. Enbld
999%s0%e LmtAc no
4999.2%s%c%e Transmit #2
.027%e <ESC>
.072%e position cursor
.076%e
%e76.2%e21016%e%e mm:ss
5099%s2%e Setpt 2
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sMixer%e SPNam Mixer
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s0%e AcMac None!
5130%s4%e Deact Alwys
5131%s90.00%e DeDly 90.00
5132%s0%e DeMac None!
5133%s0%e DeMtn Ign'd
MACRO #6 – START MIXER
2%A start mixer
S ETPOINT C OUNTDOWN T IMER (P ARAMETER 76)
The setpoint countdown timer parameter represents the number of seconds remaining in the activation or deactivation delay for a specified setpoint. This parameter stores the delay time as an integer value, thus it reports only a whole number of seconds. When an activation or deactivation delay starts, 76P begins with the total delay time value and decrements by one (1) each second. A value of zero (0) indicates no delay in progress.
Since 76P is stored as an integer, it may be formatted as an integer in custom transmit tables. This allows you to transmit the delay value using time formats such as hh:mm:ss . This is useful for displaying elapsed time values such as remaining mix time, etc. The example – Using a
Countdown Timer shows how to configure a simple countdown timer to display remaining mix time in mm:ss format in the bottom right corner of the 4X20 VF display. Setpoint #2 runs the mixer for 90 seconds and serves as the countdown timer using 76.2P to display the mix time. The
[START] key will start the mixer.
Additional time can be added to the remaining activation or deactivation time delay. For example, the macro command
76.2P+=60%o could be used to add an additional 60 seconds of mix time to a mixer controlled by setpoint #2.
S ETPOINT D ELAY T IMER (P ARAMETER 77)
The setpoint delay timer parameter represents the number of seconds remaining in the activation or deactivation delay for a specified setpoint.
This is similar to the countdown timer 76P except that the delay timer is stored as a floating point value. This means that you cannot specify time formats for 77P in custom transmit tables. However it does have the advantage of being specified in fractions of a second.
S ETPOINT S TATUS (P ARAMETER 78)
The setpoint status parameter provides access to individual setpoint status. For example, assigning 78.1P to P303 of the setup mode give easy access to the status of setpoint #1 via the [SELECT] key. This also give you the opportunity to change setpoint status as described in the setpoint chapter on page 10-3.
GSE Scale Systems
Operating Parameters 7-27 i
The 460 Series indicators will not generate a true (pseudo) random number without the optional time & date module installed. Without this module, the random number generator seed value will likely be the same each time the indicator is powered up.
R
ANDOM
N
UMBERS
The random number parameter will generate and display a true random number. This feature is useful in quality assurance applications to randomly select items for weight verification.
R ANDOM N UMBER (P ARAMETER 79)
The random number parameter generates a random number between
0.0000000 à 1.0000000 exclusive of the end points. A random number is produced by copying 79P to another operating parameter (usually a float type variable) or by copying 79P to the entry buffer:
80.1P=79P%o
79P%o
80.1P=79P*100%o
80.2P=80.1P+.5%o
80.1P=79P*100%o
80.2P=80.1P+1%o
80.1P=79P*90%o
80.2P=80.1P+10.5%o stores a random number in variable #1 (float) copies a random number to the entry buffer stores a random number from 0 à 100 in variable #2 (integer) stores a random number from 1 variable #2 (integer) stores a random number from 10 variable #2 (integer)
à 100 in
à 100 in
The random number parameter can be seeded to reproduce a series of values:
79P=x%o seeds the random number generator (x > 0)
Restart the random number generator at a random value after seeding it by assigning a value of zero (0):
79P=0%o restart generator at a random point
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-28 Chapter 7
?
Variables must be allocated at
P680 and then configured at P681
à P689 before they are available for use.
V ARIABLE T YPE
FLOATING POINT
(Float)
INTEGER
(Int)
UNSIGNED INTEGER
(U-Int)
STRING
(Strng)
V
ARIABLES
Variables, referred to hereafter as VARs, are user defined memory registers within the 60 Series instrument which store various types of data values. The stored values may be saved, recalled or changed at any time.
Up to 999 VARs may be dynamically allocated at P680 (memory permitting).
V ARIABLE T YPES
The 60 Series uses four types of variables as described in Table 7-4
The VAR type is defined in the setup mode at P686. Any VAR can be configured as any one of the four VAR types.
Table 7-4: Variable Types
D ESCRIPTION V ALID R ANGE
Resolution of 1 part in 16,777,216 A number with a decimal place. A float has an integer part to the left of the decimal, and a fractional part to the right of the decimal.
A positive or negative whole number.
A positive whole number.
An alpha-numeric value comprised of numbers and/or letters and/or other
ASCII characters.
-2,147,483,648
+2,147,483,647
0
+4,294,967,295
Number of characters limited by the size specified at P689 (maximum of 63 characters).
E XAMPLES
3.1415927
0.00356
-10.549
50000.0
12543
-32689
0
2356120
0
123456
123-A-2b
Test Run
$10.00
?
Variables can be accessed from the weigh mode via the [SELECT] key alone if included in the Mode
Menu at P300
à
P309.
A CCESSING V ARIABLES
Variables may be accessed in the same method as other parameters by specifying the parameter (80) and instance:
80.1 [SELECT] selects VAR #1
80.20 [SELECT] selects VAR #20
You can access variables using the [ID] key if it is not redefined at P806:
1 [ID]
20 [ID] selects VAR #1 selects VAR #20
This method requires fewer keystrokes as only the instance number must be keyed in prior to pressing [ID] .
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Entering Float Values
•
•
)00
1 é lb
Gross
• )
V#001
10.456 å
1)456
V#001
ô 10.456 å
-1)456
V#001
ã
)
V#001
ó
)00 lb
Gross
Example:
Scale Specific Float Values
(Division Size = 0.05 lb = 0.02 kg)
)00
10.43 å lb
V#001
1)45
1 å lb
V#001
!00
õ lb
V#001
)46
1 å kg
V#001
!00
õ kg
V#001
@20 lb
V#001
Operating Parameters 7-29
A SSIGNING V ALUES T O V ARIABLES
Variables may be values assigned manually through the front keypad, through serial communications, or through macro assignments. For additional information on macro assignments, refer to the following sections in Chapter 9, Macros :
%m Modify String
%o Math Assignment
%v Write Value to EEPROM
F LOATS
Floating point variables are used to store numeric values that may have an integer part to the left of the decimal, and a fractional part to the right of the decimal. Floating point values are stored with an internal resolution of
1 part in 16,777,216. Any value that exceeds this range may be rounded.
Thus floats are not recommended for very large values, such as part numbers, where the stored value must be retained exactly as entered.
Entering Float Values
To manually enter a value, access the desired variable as described in
Accessing Variables on page 7-5, key in the desired value and press
[ENTER] . Negative values may be entered by pressing [TARE] before beginning the entry. Press [CLR] to set the displayed float value to zero
(0).
Decimal Places
The number of decimal places used when displaying or transmitting a float value is determined by P687. Standard rounding techniques apply.
Scale Specific Floats
When a float type VAR is defined as a scale specific value, the entered value is accepted in the current weight units and rounded to the nearest scale division size. Pressing [UNITS] will convert the displayed and transmitted value for the new units. Internally, the float value is stored in terms of the default units selection at P150. This is important to note when assigning and calculating scale specific float values using the %o Math
Assignment macro command. All math operations will consider the float value in terms of the default units regardless of the current units selection.
Table 7-5: Rounding Float Values
P687
0 dp
1 dp
2 dp
3 dp
4 dp
E NTERED
10.456456
10.456456
10.456456
10.456456
10.456456
V ALUE D ISPLAYED V ALUE
10
10.5
10.46
10.456
10.4565
T RANSMITTED V ALUE
10
10.5
10.46
10.456
10.4565
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-30 Chapter 7
5 dp 10.456456
10.45
-10.456456
Auto 10.456456
10.450000
10
Scl#1 10.46 lb
10.4565
10.4500
-10.456
10.4565
10.45
10.
10.46 lb
4.745 kg
10.45646
10.45000
-10.45646
10.45646
10.45
10
10.46 lb
4.745 kg
Example:
Exponential Float Values
)
V#001
1200000 å
!2
Exp 6
V#001
.0000012 å
!2
Exp-6
V#001
Exponential Numbers
Floating point variables represent very small or large numbers in exponential form (scientific notation). Any value less than 0.00001 or larger than 999999, the limits of the 6-digit display, will be represented in exponential form. When transmitting values beyond this range, the full decimal value is sent rounded to an accuracy of one part in 16,777,216
Exponential notation does not apply to scale specific float values. If a scale specific float exceeds the displayable range, Code04 Num >Dsply is displayed.
Table 7-6: Exponential Representation
E NTERED V ALUE
999999
1000000
12345678
-12345678
.0001
.00001
.0000125
.00000125
-.00000125
D ISPLAYED V ALUE
999999.
1. Exp 6
1.23457 Exp 7
-1.2346 Exp 7
0.0001
1. Exp -5
0.00001
1.25 Exp –6
-1.25 Exp –6
T RANSMITTED V ALUE
999999
1000000
12345678
-12345678
0.0001
0.00001
0.0000123
0.0000012
-0.0000012
When using the %o Math Assignment macro command to copy an unformatted exponential value to the entry buffer, the value will appear in the entry buffer in exponential notation:
80.1P=12345678%o assigns the value 12345678 to VAR #1
80.1P%o
80.1.16384P%o copies 1.23457e+07 to the entry buffer copies 12345678 to the entry buffer
GSE Scale Systems
0
V#002
0*0!99
01:00
:00pm
1#0)00 Time
V#002
Operating Parameters 7-31
I NTEGERS
Integers are used to store positive and negative whole numbers ranging from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. Integers are typically used to increment and decrement values and store ID numbers. Integers can also be used to store time/date values, although unsigned integers are better suited for this purpose.
An integer may be formatted as a number, time, date or time & date value.
Select the desired format at P688. This selection will determine how the integer value is displayed and how it must be entered. Internally, the value remains stored as a number. If a float containing a fractional value is copied to an integer, the fractional portion is truncated, not rounded.
If a signed integer is assigned a value past its upper limit, the register will
“roll over” and begin again from the lower limit. For example, entering a value of +2,147,483,648 will yield a value of -2,147,483,648. An entered value of +2,147,483,649 yields a value of -2,147,483,647. The opposite holds true if a negative value is entered. Entering a value of -
2,147,483,649 will yield a value of +2,147,483,647. An entered value of -
2,147,483,650 yields a value of +2,147,483,646.
An integer value that less than -99999 or greater than 999999 will be displayed as Code04 Num >Dsply .
N UMBER F ORMAT
Select “Numbr” at P688 to format the integer as a signed whole number.
To manually enter a number value, access the desired variable as described in the Accessing Variables section on page 7-5, key in the desired value and press [ENTER] . Negative values may be entered by pressing [TARE] before beginning the entry. Press [CLR] to set the displayed integer value to zero (0).
T IME & D ATE F ORMAT
Select “TmDat” at P688 to format the integer as a time/date value.
Time/date values are entered in the same manner as date-only and timeonly formats, with the date value entered first.
For example, to enter a time/date of 1:00pm on August 1, 1999, key in:
8.1.99 [ENTER]
13.00 [ENTER]
Internally, this time value is stored as 933512400, the number of seconds since 12:00:00am on 01/01/99. See Time & Date (Mode 11) on page 7-12 for more information on how the 60 Series instruments handles time/date values.
T IME O NLY F ORMAT
Select “Time” at P688 to format the integer as a time value. Time values must be entered in one of the following formats: hh.mm.ss
hours.minutes.seconds – 24 hour format (seconds optional)
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-32 Chapter 7
0*0!99
Date
V#002
?
Use unsigned integers whenever dealing with time/date values.
hh:mm:ss hours:minutes:seconds – 24 hour format (seconds optional)
For example, to enter a time of 1:00pm, key in:
13.00.00 [ENTER]
Internally, this time value is stored as 46800, the number of seconds since
12:00:00am. See Time & Date (Mode 11) on page 7-12 for more information on how the 60 Series instruments handles time/date values.
Press [CLR] to set the displayed time value to 00.00.00
(12:00:00 am).
This also clears the internal integer value to zero (0).
D ATE O NLY F ORMAT
Select “Date” at P688 to format the integer as a date value. Date values must be entered in one of the following formats: mm.dd.yy
month.day.year – if P504 set for U.S.A style mm/dd/yy month.day.year – if P504 set for U.S.A style dd.mm.yy
day.month.year – if P504 set for Int’l style dd/mm/yy day.month.year – if P504 set for Int’l style
For example, to enter a date of August 1, 1999 in USA style, key in:
8.1.99 [ENTER]
Internally, this date value is stored as 933465600, the number of seconds since 12:00:00am on 01/01/1970. See Time & Date (Mode 11) on page 7-
12 for more information on how the 60 Series instruments handles time/date values.
Press [CLR] to set the displayed time value to 01.01.70
(January 1, 1970).
This also clears the internal integer value to zero (0).
U NSIGNED I NTEGERS
Unsigned integers are used to store positive whole numbers ranging from
0 to +4,294,967,295. Unsigned integers are typically used to store large
ID numbers and time/date values.
Aside from the fact that they allow only positive values up to twice the value of integers, unsigned integers are treated identical to integers in terms of formatting choices and methods of entry. Refer to the previous section on Integers for full details.
If an unsigned integer is assigned a value past its upper limit, the register will “roll over” and begin again from the lower limit. For example, entering a value of +4,294,967,296 will yield a value of zero (0). An entered value of +4,294,967,297 yields a value of 1. The opposite holds true if a negative value is entered. Entering a value of -1 will yield a value of
+4,294,967,295. An entered value of -2 yields a value of +4,294,967,294.
S TRINGS
Strings are the most versatile of the four variable types, storing up to 63 alpha-numeric characters each. When containing only numbers, string
GSE Scale Systems
12
Alpha
V#004
Oper.
ID# ?
Operating Parameters 7-33 variables can perform the same math functions as floats and integers.
Strings can be combined or used to combine strings and numbers. Refer to the %m macro command for full details about the various string functions.
The only configuration for string variables is defining the maximum number of characters at P689. Although you can allocate up to 63 characters for a single string, it is best to limit the maximum size to conserve memory, especially when using a string as a column in a database.
E NTERING S TRING V ALUES
To manually enter a value, access the desired variable as described in the
Accessing Variables section on page 7-5, key in the desired value and press [ENTER] . Numeric characters can be entered through the numeric keys on the front keypad. Alpha characters and other ASCII symbols can be entered via the cursor (arrow) keys on the front panel as described in the Key In Value Parameters section. Press [CLR] to clear all characters in the string.
In applications where alphanumeric entries will be common, the alpha keyboard option or the alphanumeric serial keyboard converter kit should be installed to simplify the entry process.
D ISPLAYING S TRING V ALUES
When displaying string variables, the 2X5 character section of the VFD is used to identify both the variable number and its value while the 7segment section remains blank. The top five character positions represent the first five characters of the stored value. The bottom five characters are used to display the variable name. If a string contains more than 5 characters, you can use the right and left cursor (arrow) keys to scroll forward and backward through all characters of the string.
N AMING V ARIABLES
Variables can be named at P682. This allows you to display useful prompts such as Enter Targt , P-Act Value
,
Fast Fill ,
Slow Fill
, or Oper. ID# ?
when selecting a variable as the current mode of operation. In most cases, the entire 2X5 character section of the VFD can be used to display a variable’s name. Exceptions to this are names for scale specific floats and strings where only the first five characters of the name will be displayed. Time/date type integers will not display a given name since the 2X5 character section is reserved for displaying the time value. Integers configured as time-only or date-only values will keep the Time or Date prompt on the upper 5 character section and display the given name on the lower 5 character section if the name is 5 characters or less. If the name exceeds 5 character, the name will occupy the entire 2X5 character section.
Regardless of how many characters can be displayed, all characters of a variable’s name will be transmitted when included in a custom transmit table. When naming variables, keep in mind how the name will appear on the display. Abbreviate names to 5 characters or less and include spaces where necessary to center text or to wrap text to the next line.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-34 Chapter 7
P68$02 VSave
Auto
P68%02 Vlock
Enbld
0
Ticks
)000 —
Sec.
S AVING V ALUES D URING P OWER L OSS
In order to save the value of a variable during a power loss, P684 should be configured as “Auto“ or “OnReq“. If set for “Auto“ save, the variable value is written to EEPROM every time it changes. If set for “OnReq“, the value is only written to EEPROM after issuing the %v Write Value To
EEprom macro command.
L OCKING V ARIABLES
“Locking” a variable prevents its value from being changed manually.
Variable locking can be enabled at P685. A locked VAR can be viewed to verify its value, however its value cannot be changed or cleared from the front keypad. It is still possible to change the value of a locked VAR through the use of various macro commands.
I
NDEPENDENT
T
IMERS
The 60 Series instruments have 8 independent timers that begin at zero
(0) upon power-up and increment by 1/747 second intervals continuously thereafter. These timers can be used in macros to calculate elapsed times or in setpoints to provide a precise time interval between events. Each timer can be displayed in terms of “ticks” or “seconds”.
T IMER T ICKS (M ODE 81)
The timer ticks parameter represents the number of 1/747 second intervals that have elapsed for the specified independent timer. This value increments 747 times each second. This value can be reset to zero (0) or preset to a specific value, but the timer cannot be paused or stopped by any means.
[CLR] resets displayed timer to 0
747 [ENTER] presets displayed timer to 747 (one second)
81.5P=0%o resets timer #5 via macro command
T IMER S ECONDS (M ODE 82)
The timer seconds parameter represents each of the 8 tick timers in terms of elapsed seconds. As with the timer ticks parameter, the timer seconds value can be reset to zero (0) or preset to a specific value in the same way. Doing so will also reset the timer tick parameter for the specified instance.
When the timer seconds parameter begins at zero (0), the elapsed time is displayed to 3 decimal places. When the value exceeds the displayable value of 999.999, the value is displayed to 2 decimal places. If the timer is allowed to continue, the decimal will shift again to 1 decimal place, and once more to display the value only as a whole number of seconds. When the value exceeds 999999, the display shows Code04 Num >Dsply .
GSE Scale Systems
Operating Parameters 7-35
P
ROMPTING
P
ARAMETERS
The prompting parameters allow you to display user defined messages anywhere on the 7-segment VF display (or the auto-update portion of all other displays) or retrieve displayed information. The Macro Select parameter adds the ability to invoke named macros through the select menu at P300 à P309.
M ACRO S ELECT (M ODE 90)
Macros that are menu enabled are accessible via P90. The instance of parameter 90 determines the macro number. Pressing 90.X [SELECT] in the weigh mode (where ‘X’ is a macro number) will bring up a display showing macro name (assigned at P9991) of the nearest menu enabled macro. The display is formatted with the numeric portion of the display blank. The 2x5 character portion of the display can have three different formats:
•
If the macro has a name that is longer than 5 characters then the first
10 characters of the name are shown.
•
If the name is 5 characters or less in length then the top line will show
Mname and the bottom line will show then name.
•
If the macro has no name then the top line shows Mac.# and the bottom line shows the number.
Pressing [ENTER] while viewing a macro name will invoke that macro. If an entry is made while viewing the macro name and then [ENTER] is pressed, then that entry will in the entry buffer when the macro starts.
Thus the macro should be written to handle that possibility.
S ETUP M ODE C ONFIGURATION
Parameter 90 can be selected as a parameter at P300-P309. Thus any macro may be added to the select menu, similar to the ID Macro Menu on the 660 (when P806 = Menu). While scrolling through the available parameters, the parameter name shown is McNam. After an instance is specified, the actual macro name will show in the lower portion of the character display or the macro number if the name is not programmed.
Only macros that are Menu enabled (P9993) are selectable. However, if the parameter and instance are specified at once as is often done in a setup file (i.e. 90.4%e), then any macro (up to the maximum possible macro) may be specified. But if the macro does not exist or is not menu enabled, then upon exiting the setup mode the warning Check Setup will appear. In this case, upon pressing a key the indicator will advance to the mode where the invalid parameter has been specified.
M
ACRO
C
OMMAND
%
O
You can only get the value of 90.xP; it cannot be set except at P9991. It will evaluate as the name of the macro if the macro exists, is menu enabled, and the name is not empty. If a name is not specified, the 90.xP
reference will evaluate as the number of the macro. Finally, if the macro does not exist or is not menu enabled, it will not be evaluated and thus it will be processed as the actual characters entered (i.e. 90.xP).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-36 Chapter 7
A RROW KEYS
When mode 90 is selected in the weigh mode, the arrow keys will operate as arrow keys to allow scrolling in of entries.
W EIGH M ODE M ESSAGE (M ODE 91)
When 91P is selected in the weigh mode, user defined text may be displayed. This allows a macro to define what will be on the display after a macro has ended. Also, this mode allows the user to specify text and/or non-standard formatting of numeric data on the numeric portion of the display.
The mode can be selected either by keying in 91 [SELECT] in the weigh mode or by assigning 91P to one of the P300 setup mode parameters and then cycling through the selectable modes using the [SELECT] key in the weigh mode. At P300, the instance specified is not significant.
A SSIGNING T EXT TO THE 2X5 P ROMPTING D ISPLAY
Text can be specified using references to P91. The parameter’s instances define the specific area of the display being referenced. For example:
P91.1P=HelloWorld%o would store "HelloWorld" as the text to be displayed on the 2X5 prompting portion of the display.
The instance specifies the character position where the text will be displayed. For example, an instance of ‘1’ indicates the top left position and ‘10’ indicates the lower right position.
Assigning data to any portion of the dot matrix area of the display only over-writes the data for the length of the text supplied. Any previous or subsequent text remains unchanged. For example, if after the above example the following were executed:
91.5P=NO%o
Then the display would show HellN Oorld , i.e. the “NO” overwrites only the specified positions.
If the data ends in P then the value of that parameter will be inserted. To get the characters to display then enclose any characters ending with P, q, or p in quotes. For example:
91.5P=0.0P%o prints the weight starting at character 5, while:
91.5P=”0.0P”% puts 0.0P starting at position 5.
A SSIGNING T EXT TO THE N UMERIC D ISPLAY
In order to write to the numeric portion of the display, the instance should be ’11’. For example,
91.11P=HELLO%o
GSE Scale Systems
Operating Parameters 7-37 would cause “HELLO” to appear on the seven-segment numeric display.
Data written to the numeric portion is always right justified and if less than the full display is specified, the remainder is blanked. For example,
91.11P=123%o would cause “ 123” to show up right justified on the display.
Note that the numeric display only holds 6 digits, not counting decimal points. Up to 6 digits with 6 interspersed decimal points can be displayed.
For example,
91.11P=1.2.3.4.5.6.%o would result in “1.2.3.4.5.6.” on the display.
However, since not all alpha characters can be represented in seven segments, certain alpha/symbol characters are allowed. If the supplied character is not possible in the specified case, then the other case will be used. If the character is not at all possible, then three horizontal lines are shown for that character. For example:
91.11P=aBcDef%o will result in “AbcdEF” on the display. However, K, M, Q, V, W, X, and Z are not possible, as well as most symbols.
If the characters to be displayed are in excess of the 6 character limit then the result will be truncated to the right of a decimal point if it exists otherwise “- - - - - -“ will be displayed instead. For example,
91.11P=1234.56789%o will result in “12345.56” on the display, while
91.11P=abcdefgh%o or
91.11P=1234567%o will result in “- - - - - -“ on the display.
Two consecutive decimal points will have a blank inserted between them.
For example:
91.11P=1...4%o will result in “ 1. . .4” on the display.
Any leading blanks not followed by a decimal will be stripped if the number is too big to be displayed.
If the data ends in P then the value of that parameter will be inserted. To get the characters to display then enclose any strings ending with P, q, or p in quotes. For example,
91.11P=0.0P%o displays a snapshot of the gross weight of the current scale, right justified, while
91.11P=“0.0P”% displays “ 0.0P” right justified. (The quote marks do not display or take any character positions!)
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-38 Chapter 7
GSE Scale Systems
A SSIGNING ‘L IVE ’ P ARAMETERS TO THE N UMERIC
D
ISPLAY
To allow displaying live operating parameters in the seven segment area at the same time as user supplied data is shown in the dot matrix area of the display, a weigh mode parameter (0P – 98P) can be displayed on the seven-segment portion of the display.
In order to cause a weigh mode parameter to be continuously updated on the numeric portion of the display, the instance specified for 90P must be
‘12’. For example,
91.12P=”0.0P”%o
The quotes are required, otherwise you will get only a static snapshot of the parameter. The following are equivalent:
91.12P=0.0P%o
91.11P=0.0P%o
!
Note the missing quotes! It is also important to realize that adding quotes has different effect for instances 11 & 12 of parameter 91.
G ET D ISPLAYED D ATA (M ODE 92)
Parameter 92 is used to return the string data from either the 2x5 character portion or the numeric portion of the display. This data is placed in the entry buffer.
92.0P%o place 2x5 character data in entry buffer
92.10P%o place numeric data in entry buffer
This parameter not directly accessible from the keypad, nor is it usable in input interpreters, or at p300 à 309. Data can only be retrieved to the entry buffer.
D
IAGNOSTIC
W
EIGHT
P
ARAMETERS
The diagnostic weight parameters are used to report information about the displayed weight parameters.
S TATUS (P ARAMETER 97)
The status parameter is used in custom transmits to indicate the status
(motion, stable, over/under load) of each scale. By default, the status characters transmitted are:
•
O = Overload/Underload
•
M = Motion
Operating Parameters 7-39
•
S = Stable
The transmitted status character(s) can be changed at P143 à P145 in the setup mode.
When transmitting 97P through a custom transmit, the field width is that of the largest string assigned at P143 à P147.
When transmitting 97P via Modbus, only the first character of the names defined at P143 à P147 is transmitted.
D ISPLAYED W EIGHT /C OUNT (P ARAMETER 98)
The current displayed weight/count parameter is used most commonly in custom transmit tables to provide and indication of the current gross, net, tare or quantity value, whichever is currently displayed. If a parameter other than gross, net, tare or quantity is selected as the current operating mode, 98P will begin reporting only the gross weight.
E XTENDED G ROSS (P ARAMETER 99)
The extended gross parameter is used to momentarily display the current gross weight at 10X the selected division size. This is useful when verifying calibration to determine how close the gross weight is to the next weight division.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
7-40 Chapter 7
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 8
C
OMMUNICATIONS
This chapter covers all aspects of the communications setup for all 60
Series instruments.
O V E R V I E W
Communication Connections 8-2
COMM Port Setup Parameters 8-4
Receive Operations 8-4
Custom Transmit 8-19
Transmitting display Data 8-33
Modbus
Communications 8-34
Checksum Protocol 8-41
Transmit The Current Scale Number (ASCII) 8-45
Miscellaneous Protocol (Binary To Text Conversion) 8-45
Transmit Network Address (ASCII) 8-46
Transmit Setpoint Status As A Binary Code 8-46
Printing Operations 8-47
Input Interpreter 8-48
Rs-485 Networking (Option) 8-60
8-1
8-2 Chapter 8
C
OMMUNICATION
C
ONNECTIONS
If communication cables are used, they should be routed into the controller through the rear panel strain relief nearest the communication port connector. These strain relief’s are designed to accommodate cables ranging in diameter from 0.187 inches to 0.312 in (4.75 mm to 7.92 mm).
Wires can range in size from 28 to 20 AWG. Insulation resistance should be rated at a minimum of 30 volts.
Use a cable with a braid or a foil shield and drain wire. A braided shield will perform better in high electrical noise environments. The capacitance rating of the cable should be low for long cable runs. The shield for the communications cable should be grounded to the closest available rear panel stud inside the controller. Keep the length of the shield between the stud and the end of the cable jacket to an absolute minimum and the length of unshielded wires to a minimum. This is important in order to reduce the effects of EMI, RFI, and ESD during controller operation.
COMM P ORT C ONNECTIONS (G ENERAL )
There are several different ways of communicating from the indicator to another device. Your application will dictate the required connections and the number of conductors. For more information, refer to Table 8-1 through
Table 8-2. These tables list several different communication methods and suggested connections.
COMM1 & COMM2 P ORT C ONNECTIONS
Communication ports 1 & 2 provide identical wiring possibilities for connecting RS-232 communications. Before wiring the port, determine the type of flow control to be used. Then refer to Table 8-1 for the proper connections. You must also configure P204 in the setup mode for the required flow control (see page 3-32).
Table 8-1: COMM1 & COMM2 Port Connections
C ONNECTION
TX1
RX1
GND
TX1
RX1
CTS
RTS
GND
TX1
CTS
GND
F UNCTION
Bi-directional with software handshake, or bi-directional with no handshake, or unidirectional with software handshake.
Bi-directional with hardware handshake or
“both” handshake.
Uni-directional with hardware handshake
(transmit only).
C ONNECTION
RX1
RTS
GND
TX1
GND
F UNCTION
Uni-directional with hardware handshake
(receive only).
Uni-directional with no handshake (transmit only).
RX1
GND
Uni-directional with no handshake (receive only).
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-3
COMM3 P ORT C ONNECTIONS (560/660 S ERIES )
Communication port 3 offers the same wiring possibilities as COMM1 &
COMM2 with the exception of the RTS output signal for hardware handshaking. COMM3 does not support the RTS signal. Thus hardware handshaking is limited to detecting the CTS input. This makes COMM3 the ideal choice for communicating with uni-directional devices such as printers the make use of the CTS signal for flow control.
COMM4 P ORT C ONNECTIONS (660 S ERIES )
Communication port 4 is a bi-directional RS-232 port that offers only
Xon/Xoff software handshaking. Refer to Table 8-2 for proper connections.
COMM4 provides two (2) +5VDC and two (2) digital ground connections.
These extra terminals are provided to allow connection of scanners and other digital devices that require an external power source.
i
The default baud rate and parity for COMM4 is different than the other ports (see Appendix D). The purpose for this is to accommodate the 4X20 VFD and/or the Alpha Keypad option without requiring a change to COMM4’s configuration. If you are connecting an alternate device, be sure to match protocols.
Table 8-2: COMM4 Port Connections
C ONNECTION
TX4
RX4
GND
TX4
GND
RX4
GND
F UNCTION
Bi-directional with software handshake, or bi-directional with no handshake, or uni-directional with software handshake.
Uni-directional with no handshake (transmit only).
Uni-directional with no handshake (receive only).
4X20 VFD C ONNECTION
The 4X20 VF display requires a TTL level communication signal. This is provided by the J7 header on the main board. Do not connect the 4X20
VFD to COMM4 on the J6 terminals!
When connecting the 4X20 VFD to J7, the COMM4 transmit terminal will not be available for connection to another device as J7 is considered to be
COMM4. Any transmissions sent out COMM4 will be received by the
4X20 VFD.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-4 Chapter 8
Figure: RS-232 Port (J6)
C OMMUNICATIONS C ABLES
1.
Strip back the jacket of the communications cable 7 inches (178 mm) for the J4 strain relief, and 8 inches (203 mm) for the J2 strain relief.
2.
Strip the insulation of each conductor back 0.25 in (6.35 mm).
3.
Twist the strands of each wire so no strands are loose. You can tin the wires so the strands will not come loose. Use a minimal amount of solder so that the wire will fit into the connector.
4.
Route the cables for any of the COMM ports through an available rear panel strain relief’s, J2 or J4. Loosen the strain relief and route the cable(s) through.
5.
Ground the cable shield to the stud nearest the strain reliefs.
6.
Determine the connections required for your application. (The RS-232 ports and respective functions are labeled on the main PC board. Also refer to Table 8-1 and Table 8-2.)
7.
Insert each wire into the proper connection on J6 of the main PC board (see figure – RS-232 Port ).
8.
Secure all of the wires together with a tie wrap near the J6 connector.
This will prevent wires from coming loose and into contact with other signals.
9.
Once the wires and shield are connected, pull any excess cable out of the controller through the strain relief to eliminate any slack between the shield termination and the strain relief.
10. Tighten the strain relief securely.
COMM P
ORT
S
ETUP
P
ARAMETERS
When transmitting data to or receiving data from another device, make sure the indicator’s protocol matches that of the device. The default communication protocol for all 60 Series instruments is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and Xon/Xoff handshaking. Setup parameters governing communication protocol begin at P199 à P204 (see page 3-32).
Additional parameters, P205 à P211, provide configuration for receive modes, transmission delays and buffer sizes (see page 3-32).
R
ECEIVE
O
PERATIONS
All 60 Series instruments are capable of executing commands received through any of the serial communication ports. This means you can use any external serial device (i.e. computer, scanner, another indicator, etc.) to perform macro operations, assign parameter values, request parameter values, simulate key presses, etc.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-5 i
Both software and hardware handshaking are asserted and deasserted at the same time, regardless of the flow control selected at P204 of the setup mode. Thus, when using software handshaking do not connect the
CTS/RTS signals.
R ECEIVE B UFFER
The receive buffer for each communication port can be programmed to a specified byte size at P208 in the setup mode. Received characters are stored in this buffer until the indicator has a chance to process the data.
Normally, data is processed quickly after it is received. One exception is during macro execution. Received data will continue to be buffered during macro execution until retrieved via macro command or upon termination of all macro execution.
If a port is configured for input interpreter or Modbus, received data is transferred to a temporary buffer separate from the receive buffer. There, characters are analyzed simultaneously with macro execution and are processed accordingly.
A SSERTING / D E ASSERTING H ANDSHAKING
Both software and hardware handshaking are asserted and de-asserted at the same time, regardless of the flow control selected at P204 in the setup mode. Thus, when using software handshaking do not connect the
CTS/RTS signals.
Handshaking is de-asserted when the receive buffer becomes 75% full based on the maximum buffer size specified at P208 in the setup mode.
Handshaking is re-asserted when number of bytes in the buffer drops to
50% of the buffer size.
For example, if you specify a receive buffer size of 4K bytes, the indicator will de-assert handshaking when the receive buffer is 3K bytes full, leaving
1K in reserve. Thus if the transmitting device’s transmit buffer is 1K or less, the indicator will be able to receive the additional data while handshaking is de-asserted without resulting in an over-run error (lost data). When the indicator’s receive buffer drops to 2K bytes full, handshaking will be re-asserted and data transfer will resume.
M ACRO L ANGUAGE
The macro language used by the controller is based on the percent (%) character. Any displayable character preceding a percent (%) is considered to be an argument for the macro command. Any character received immediately following a percent character is analyzed as a command. If a received command is invalid, the command is ignored and flushed from the entry buffer. In this case, any text preceding the invalid command will remain in the entry buffer awaiting a valid macro command.
Single-byte values greater than 127 are also treated as macro commands
(see Table 8-4).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-6 Chapter 8
S IMULATING F RONT P ANEL K EYS
Table 8-3 lists the RS-232 keypad macro commands that are used to simulate the front panel keys. These commands can be executed using the actual macro command syntax, or by receiving the single-byte ASCII equivalent.
Table 8-3: Serial Keypad Commands
D ESCRIPTION
[F1]
[F2] / [TARGET]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
[START]
[STOP]
[SETUP]
[SCALE SELECT]
[CLR]
[ENTER]
[ID]
[PRINT]
[SELECT]
[TARE]
[UNITS]
[CLR] + [SELECT] (macro abort)
[ZERO]
M ACRO
S YNTAX
%z
% `
%s
%t
%u
%c
%e
%i
%p
0x87
0xE0
0xE3
0xF5
0xE9
0xF0
0xF3
0xF4
0xF5
0xF8
0xFA
8 B IT
H EX
0x80
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
233
240
243
244
135
224
227
229
245
248
250
8 B IT
D ECIMAL
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
R EF
9-8
.
9-92
9-102
9-102
9-104
9-123
9-126
9-127
9-129
9-17
9-150
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-7
E XECUTING M ACRO C OMMANDS
Table 8-4 lists the RS-232 macro commands. These commands can be executed using the actual macro command syntax, or by receiving the single-byte ASCII equivalent.
Table 8-4: Serial Macro Commands
D ESCRIPTION
[F1] (invoke macro 1)
[F2] / [TARGET] (invoke macro 2)
[F3] (invoke macro 3)
[F4] (invoke macro 4)
[F5] (invoke macro 5)
[START] (invoke macro 6)
[STOP] (invoke macro 7)
[SETUP] (invoke macro 8)
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
M ACRO
S YNTAX
136
138
139
140
141
142
8 B IT
D ECIMAL
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
143
144
145
146
147
148
153
154
155
156
157
149
150
151
152
R EF .
9-8
0x89
0x8A
0x8B
0x8C
0x8D
0x8E
8 B IT
H EX
0x80
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
0x87
0x88
0x8F
0x90
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
0x99
0x9A
0x9B
0x9C
0x9D
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-8 Chapter 8
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
Backspace
Enable / Disable Comm Port
Select Comm Port
Current Scale
Send Text
%
Send Control Code
Record Received Serial Data
If Character Received
Clear Receive Buffer
Record A/D Data
Averaging
Motion Delay
Perform Scale Specific Function
-RESERVED-
If Macro Interrupted
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
Set Pause Time
Activate Setpoint
D ESCRIPTION
GSE Scale Systems
M
S
ACRO
YNTAX
%<space>
%!
%”
%#
%$
%3
%4
%5
%6
%7
%8
%-
%.
%/
%0
%1
%2
%)
%*
%+
%,
%%
%&
%’ n%(
%=
%>
%?
%@
%A
%9
%:
%;
%<
179
180
181
182
183
184
173
174
175
176
177
178
169
170
171
172
165
166
167
168
8 B IT
D ECIMAL
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
189
190
191
192
193
185
186
187
188
R EF .
9-40
9-41
9-44
9-45
9-45
9-4
9-35
9-36
9-37
9-31
9-32
9-33
9-34
9-46
9-47
9-48
0xB3
0xB4
0xB5
0xB6
0xB7
0xB8
0xAD
0xAE
0xAF
0xB0
0xB1
0xB2
0xA5
0xA6
0xA7
0xA8
0xA9
0xAA
0xAB
0xAC
8 B IT
H EX
0x9E
0x9F
0xA0
0xA1
0xA2
0xA3
0xA4
0xB9
0xBA
0xBB
0xBC
0xBD
0xBE
0xBF
0xC0
0xC1
Break Macro
Display Text (4X20 VFD / LCD)
Deactivate Setpoint
End If
If Setpoint Deactivated
Get Entry
Redefine Comm Port Function
Refresh Display
Jump to Tag
Get Entry (4X20 VFD / LCD)
Language Selection
Mode Selection
Else
If Setpoint Activated
Pause
Send Custom Transmit
Rename Mode
Sound Beeper
Tag Position
Transmit Buffer
-RESERVED-
Wait for Keypress
Request Display Data
If Yes
-RESERVED-
Save Entry Buffer
IF No Entry
Restore Entry Buffer
Call / Go To Macro
If Database Error
Scale Select
Target Accuracy
Perform Sample
Clear Entry Buffer
Display Control
Enter / Sample
D ESCRIPTION
Communications 8-9
215
216
217
218
219
220
209
210
211
212
213
214
205
206
207
208
201
202
203
204
8 B IT
D ECIMAL
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
225
226
227
228
229
221
222
223
224
9-85
9-86
9-87
9-87
9-88
9-88
9-89
9-91
9-92
9-93
9-94
9-94
9-97
9-102
R EF .
9-74
9-75
9-75
9-76
9-66
9-66
9-68
9-73
9-77
9-80
9-81
9-83
9-85
9-51
9-53
9-59
9-61
9-61
9-62
9-64
0xD7
0xD8
0xD9
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xD4
0xD5
0xD6
0xC9
0xCA
0xCB
0xCC
0xCD
0xCE
0xCF
0xD0
8 B IT
H EX
0xC2
0xC3
0xC4
0xC5
0xC6
0xC7
0xC8
0xDD
0xDE
0xDF
0xE0
0xE1
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
%W
%X
%Y
%Z
%[
%\
%Q
%R
%S
%T
%U
%V
%M
%N
%O
%P
%I
%J
%K
%L
M ACRO
S YNTAX
%B
%C
%D
%E
%F
%G
%H
%a
%b
%c
%d
%e
%]
%^
%_
%`
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-10 Chapter 8
If Parameter Preset
Sample / Macro Error
-RESERVED-
ID
If Key / Remote Key Held
Digital Filter
-RESERVED-
Modify String
Get Numeric Entry
Math Operation
Enable RS-485 Transmitter
A/D Interval
Select Mode
Tare
Units
Write Value to EEPROM
-RESERVED-
Macro Abort
Database Operation
Zero
Start Group
Or
End Group
-RESERVED-
-RESERVED-
D ESCRIPTION
%u
%v
%w
%x
%y
%z
%{
%|
%}
%~
%DEL
%q
%r
%s
%t
%m
%n
%o
%p
M ACRO
S YNTAX
%f
%g
%h
%i
%j
%k
%l
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
241
242
243
244
237
238
238
240
8 B IT
D ECIMAL
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
R EF .
9-103
9-104
9-104
9-105
9-106
9-17
9-131
9-150
9-152
9-152
9-152
9-108
9-111
9-113
9-123
9-123
9-124
9-126
9-127
9-129
9-130
0xF5
0xF6
0xF7
0xF8
0xF9
0xFA
0xFB
0xFC
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
0xED
0xEE
0xEF
0xF0
0xF1
0xF2
0xF3
0xF4
8 B IT
H EX
0xE6
0xE7
0xE8
0xE9
0xEA
0xEB
0xEC
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-11
C
USTOM
T
RANSMIT
A custom transmit is a sequence of characters, control codes and parameter values to be transmitted out a communication port to a peripheral device such as a printer, remote display, computer or another weight indicator. As the name suggests, each custom transmit may be configured to send data in virtually any format.
C USTOM T RANSMIT S ETUP P ARAMETERS
Memory permitting, each custom transmit can contain up to 5000 characters. Setup parameters P989 à P998 set the criteria for initiating each custom transmit (i.e. which comm port, motion delayed, continuous, etc.). Refer to page 3-43 for more details.
Custom transmit tables can be protected from being viewed, edited and downloaded in the setup mode through use of the limited access code
(see Limited Access on page 3-4). To protect individual custom transmit tables through limited access, enable limited access at P999.
The actual custom transmit table begins at P1000 à P4999.
D EFAULT C USTOM T RANSMIT
When an indicator is defaulted, custom transmit #1 will generate the following output out comm port 1:
0.00 lb Gross
0.00 lb Tare
0.00 lb Net
Each line in the default custom transmit is transmitted in the following format:
< weight > < space > < units > < space > < mode > < CR > < LF > where weight is an 8-digit value (including decimal), units is a 5-character units identifier (right spaces filled), and mode is a 5-character mode identifier (right spaces filled).
S ENDING A C USTOM T RANSMIT
There are three ways to initiate a custom transmit:
1.
Pressing the [PRINT] key will send a custom transmit out the port specified at P992 provided P991 is set for ‘on request’ or ‘prompt’.
Every custom transmit set for ‘on request’ will begin transmission when [PRINT] is pressed. Custom transmits will be sent sequentially in ascending order by transmit number.
If any custom transmits are set for ‘prompt’, pressing [PRINT] will first display the prompt “ Which Tx# ?
”. This gives you the opportunity to choose one of several transmits. For example, a vendor may supply components to ten different customers. The vendor can create ten
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-12 Chapter 8 custom transmits, each with a different name, address and phone number to be printed on the shipping label. The operator can then print the appropriate label by pressing [PRINT] to display the “ Which
Tx# ?
” prompt and then key in the desired transmit number and press
[ENTER] to print the label.
Note that only one ‘prompt’ transmit can be sent at a time. After a
‘prompt’ transmit is sent, any transmits set for ‘on request’ will also be sent.
2.
Custom transmits can be sent automatically on a continual basis by setting P989 to ‘continuous’. The time between each continuous transmit is defined at P980 (transmit rate). Continuous transmits are used to send data to devices such as scoreboards, remote displays and computers.
3.
A macro command can initiate a custom transmit. This is possible even if P991 is set to ‘off’. This allows custom transmits to be event driven such as having weight tickets printed automatically each time a new weight is applied.
D EFINING A N EW C USTOM T RANSMIT
To define a new custom transmit:
1.
Enter the setup mode and access P989.
2.
Key in the desired transmit number and press [ENTER] .
3.
If the transmit does not exist, “ Make? NewTx ” is displayed. Press
[ENTER] to confirm.
4.
Select P990 and enter a name for the custom transmit if desired. The name is only used for documentation purposes.
5.
Select P991 and select whether the transmit will be ‘off’, ‘on request’ or ‘prompt’.
6.
Select P992 and select which communication port the transmit should use.
7.
Select P993 – P994 and select whether the transmit should ‘ignore’ the motion of each scale or be ‘inhibited’ by it.
8.
If a custom transmit is to be ‘continuous’, enable P998.
9.
Select P1000 to access the custom transmit table.
C REATING A C USTOM T RANSMIT T ABLE
The custom transmit table begins at P1000 in the setup mode. It contains the information to be transmitted. When a custom transmit is first defined, the transmit table is empty. Text, parameters and control codes must be entered in the proper sequence to achieve the desired output. For example, suppose we wish to print the following ticket:
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-13
GSE Scale Systems
50.00 lb Gross
5.00 lb Tare
45.00 lb Net
This ticket begins with the text “GSE Scale Systems” on the first line, followed by one blank line, followed by three consecutive lines of parameter information. The custom transmit will be configured in the same sequence. The following sections on entering fixed text, control codes and parameters builds on this example.
E NTERING F IXED T EXT
Fixed text can be entered into any custom transmit at any position within the transmit table. This is useful for incorporating text headers and other text information that will never change.
GSE Scale Systems
50.00 lb Gross
5.00 lb Tare
45.00 lb Net
Using the example above, the fixed text header “GSE Scale Systems” is to appear on every printed ticket. Since this is the first element of the transmit table, begin entering the header text at P1000.
To enter text using the alpha keypad or serial port, simply key in the desired character(s) and press [ENTER] .
To enter text using the scrolling method proceed as follows:
1.
Press [
5
] to scroll through the character set.
2.
Once the desired character is displayed, press [
4
] to shift right to the next character position.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the entire name is displayed ending at step
1.
4.
Press [ENTER] to accept insert the entered text into the transmit table.
Note: Pressing [
6
] will scroll backwards through the character set.
Pressing [
3
] will shift left, or backspace.
Pressing [CLR] will delete an entry in process.
Note that the text appears in the custom transmit table exactly as entered.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-14 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
E NTERING C ONTROL C ODES
Control codes are generally considered to be non-displayable ASCII characters such as a carriage return < CR > or line feed < LF >. Since you cannot see these characters, control codes must be entered using their
ASCII value as shown below. Refer to the ASCII chart in Appendix B for a complete list of control codes.
Having entered the fixed text for the header line of the ticket in the previous example, we must next account for the blank line that follows and position the print ‘cursor’ at the beginning of the third line (the ‘cursor’ now resides at the end of ‘ Systems ’). Positioning the ‘cursor’ requires use of special non-displayable characters call control codes . Our example requires the use of two common control codes – carriage return <CR> and line feed <LF>.
A carriage return <CR> positions the ‘cursor’ to the left-most position of the current line.
A line feed <LF> moves the ‘cursor’ down one line without moving it left or right.
Therefore, to move the ‘cursor’ from the end of the first line to the beginning of the third line we must transmit a carriage return and two line feeds <CR><LF><LF>. Similarly, a <CR> and <LF> will be required after each subsequent line as illustrated below. Note the form feed <FF> at the end of the ticket. This is another control code which is used to advance the printer paper to the top of the next ticket.
GSE Scale Systems <CR><LF>
<LF>
50.00 lb Gross <CR><LF>
5.00 lb Tare <CR><LF>
45.00 lb Net <CR><LF>
<FF>
A control code must be entered into the custom transmit table using it’s three-digit ASCII value preceded by a decimal ‘.’. Reference an ASCII chart in Appendix B for these and other character values. For example, to enter the carriage return, key in
.013 [ENTER]
The control code appears in the transmit table as a single c c
character.
Enter the two line feed characters next:
.010 [ENTER]
.010 [ENTER]
The transmit table now shows the three control codes c c
c c
c c
.
Note that four lines in our example use the <CR><LF> combination. Since this is a very common combination of control codes, a single entry unique to GSE indicators was created to make entering these characters more convenient. Keying in
.256 [ENTER]
Communications 8-15 will enter the <CR><LF> combination.
Any other ASCII character, including printable characters, may be entered using this method. Referencing the ASCII chart in Appendix B, ‘GSE’ could have been entered as:
.071 [ENTER] G
.083 [ENTER] S
.069 [ENTER] E
C USTOM GSE C ONTROL C ODES
When communicating with the LCD or 4X20 VF displays, many of the standard ASCII control codes are used to perform specific functions or display custom characters. Additionally, many custom control codes were created to transmit other status information. Refer to Table 8-5 for a complete list of these codes. All custom control codes are entered in the same manner as standard control codes using the three-digit ASCII value preceded by a decimal ‘.’.
Table 8-5: Custom GSE Control Codes
D ECIMAL V ALUE
(C ONTROL C ODE )
D ESCRIPTION
LCD Control Codes (Character Set)
000 à 181 Transmit standard LCD characters (Comm Port 5; refer to LCD character set)
800 à 866 Transmit custom LCD characters (Comm Port 5 only; refer to LCD character set)
4X20 VFD Control Codes (Custom Display Commands)
014
017
018
020
021
008
009
010
012
013
024
025
027, 067
027, 072
027, 073
027, 076
027, 084
Move cursor left one space
Move cursor right one space
Move cursor down one row
Move cursor to top left corner (home)
Move cursor to beginning of line
Clear entire display
Scroll mode OFF
Scroll mode ON
Cursor OFF
Cursor ON
Set INTERNATIONAL character set
Set KATAKANA character set
Define custom character
Position cursor at specified location
Reset display default values
Set display intensity
Set cursor blink speed
Backspace
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Shift Out
Device Control 1
Device Control 2
Device Control 4
Negative Acknowledge
Cancel
End of Medium
Escape + C
Escape + H
Escape + I
Escape + L
Escape + T
4X20 VFD Control Codes (Character Set)
032 à 213 Transmit standard VFD characters (Comm Port 5; refer to LCD character set)
Combination ASCII Control Codes
<BS>
<HT>
<LF>
<FF>
<CR>
<SO>
<DC1>
<DC2>
<DC4>
<NAK>
<CAN>
<EM>
<ESC> + ‘C’
<ESC> + ‘H’
<ESC> + ‘I’
<ESC> + ‘L’
<ESC> + ‘T’
256 Insert both carriage return and line feed <CR> <LF>
Checksum Control Codes
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
Stop checksum calculation (do not transmit)
Start CCITT checksum calculation
Start SDLC/HDLC checksum calculation
Start CRC-16 checksum calculation (initial checksum value = 0000)
Start CRC-12 checksum calculation
Start LRCC-16 checksum calculation
Start LRCC-8 checksum calculation
Start XMODEM checksum calculation
Start SUM-16 checksum calculation
Start SUM-8 checksum calculation
R EFERENCE
C-1
13-60
C-1
8-22
8-41
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-16 Chapter 8
D ECIMAL V ALUE
(C ONTROL C ODE )
D ESCRIPTION
310
311
312
Transmit checksum (LSB first)
Transmit checksum (MSB first)
Start CRC-16 checksum calculation (initial checksum value = FFFF)
Scale# Control Code
350 Transmit current scale number (1
à
8)
Scale Status Control Code
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
Transmit current range of current scale (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 1 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high rang; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 2 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 3 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 4 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 5 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 6 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 7 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Transmit current range of scale 8 (1=low range; 2=medium range; 3=high range; 0=unavailable)
Binary-to-Text Conversion Control Codes
400
401
402
End binary-to-text conversion
Start binary-to-text conversion
Transmit network address (P251) as a single ASCII character
Setpoint Status Control Codes
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 1 à 8)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 9 à 16)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 17 à 24)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 25 à 32)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 33 à 40)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 41 à 48)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 49 à 56)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 57 à 64)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 65 à 72)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 73 à 80)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 81
à
88)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 89 à 96)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 97 à 104)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 105 à 112)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 113 à 120)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 121 à 128)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 129 à 136)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 137 à 144)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 145
à
152)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 153 à 160)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 161 à 168)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 169 à 176)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 177 à 184)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 185
à
192)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 193 à 200)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 201 à 208)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 209 à 216)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 217 à 224)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 225 à 232)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 233 à 240)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 241 à 248)
Transmit setpoint status byte (SP# 249
à
256)
Units Control Codes (The following units codes will transmit “Disbl” for disabled scales)
600
601
602
603
604
610
611
612
613
614
Transmit current units (minimum width) of the currently selected scale
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of the currently selected scale
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of the currently selected scale
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of the currently selected scale
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of the currently selected scale
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #1
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #1
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #1
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #1
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #1
R EFERENCE
8-45
8-45
8-46
GSE Scale Systems
D ECIMAL V ALUE
(C ONTROL C ODE )
D ESCRIPTION
620
621
622
623
624
630
631
632
633
634
640
641
642
643
644
650
651
652
653
654
660
661
672
673
674
680
681
682
683
684
690
662
663
664
670
671
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #2
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #2
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #2
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #2
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #2
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #3
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #3
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #3
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #3
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #3
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #4
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #4
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #4
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #4
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #4
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #5
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #5
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #5
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #5
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #5
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #6
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #6
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #6
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #6
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #6
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #7
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #7
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #7
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #7
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #7
Transmit current units (minimum width) of scale #8
Transmit units #1 (minimum width) of scale #8
Transmit units #2 (minimum width) of scale #8
Transmit units #3 (minimum width) of scale #8
Transmit units #4 (minimum width) of scale #8
Transmit default units specified at P150 (minimum width)
LCD Control Codes
701 à 740 Position cursor at column 1 à 40 respectively
741
742
743
Select normal text (black on white)
Select inverse text (white on black)
Clear to end of row
744
751 à 758
761
762
764
771 à 786
Clear to end of display
Position cursor at row 1
Select small font size
Select medium font size
Select large font size
à 8 respectively
Position cursor at row 1 à 16 respectively
LCD Custom Characters
800 à 866 Transmit custom LCD characters (Comm Port 5 only; refer to LCD character set)
Communications 8-17
R EFERENCE
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-18 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
E NTERING P ARAMETER D ATA
Operating parameters may be entered in a custom transmit table.
Parameters may be formatted to include the parameter’s value, units (if applicable) and name. See Table 7-1 on page 7-3 for a complete list of operating parameters.
To enter a parameter into the transmit table:
1.
Press [ENTER]
2.
The display prompts Pick Parm: , Parm= Gross .
3.
Select the desired parameter by:
Pressing [
5
] or [
6
] to scroll through the parameter list, or
Keying in the parameter number and instance if applicable ( you will be prompted Pick Inst : by the indicator if an instance is required).
4.
The display prompts Set Formt , Formt 00000 .
5.
Key in the desired format and press [ENTER] (see Parameter Format
Codes below).
6.
The display confirms the entered format.
7.
Press [ENTER] to accept the parameter configuration.
8.
The formatted parameter is entered into the transmit table as a single
P
A
character.
For example, the third line of the ticket in the previous example
50.00 lb Gross contains the gross weight value (50.00), the weigh units (lb) and the parameter name (Gross).
To enter this parameter into the transmit table:
1.
Press [ENTER]
2.
The display prompts Pick Parm: , Parm= Gross .
3.
Key in the gross weight parameter for scale #1, 0.1
, and press
[ENTER] .
4.
The display prompts Set Formt , Formt 00000 .
5.
Press 0 [ENTER] .
6.
The display confirms the entered format.
7.
Press [ENTER] to accept the parameter configuration.
To complete the example, enter a <CR><LF> after the gross weight parameter and repeat steps 1 – 7 substituting the tare and net parameter numbers at step 3. Remember the <CR><LF> control codes after each parameter. Also include the <FF> character at the end.
Communications 8-19
P ARAMETER F ORMAT C ODES
A format code defines how a parameter value is to be transmitted. For example, a customer may prefer to have the parameter names Gross,
Tare and Net appear to the left of the weight values instead of the to the right. Perhaps the weight values should be left-padded with zeros instead of spaces. A time value may be printed in 12 or 24 hour format, with or without the date. Do you want to include seconds? Include the name of the day? These and many more variations are possible using format codes. Refer to Table 8-6 through Table 8-13 for a list of available formats.
Each type of parameter (floats, integers and strings) has it’s own format code selections. Keep this in mind when selecting format codes for weight parameters, time & date parameters, variables, etc. Refer to the appropriate format table.
Establishing the desired format code is a simple matter of addition. First decide how you want the data to appear, then add the various format codes that will generate the desired output. For example, suppose you want the gross weight to appear as follows:
Gross +00050.00 lb
The criteria would be parameter name first, weight padded with left zeros, print a plus sign, and print current units. Since the gross weight is a floattype parameter, we must reference Table 8-9 for the appropriate format codes. Looking down the “Add Value” column, begin adding the numbers that will result in the desired format:
A DD V ALUE D ESCRIPTION
32768 Print Name First
64 Plus Sign for Positive Data
16 Pad With Zeros
32848 FORMAT CODE
N AVIGATING A C USTOM T RANSMIT T ABLE
If we could examine the entire transmit table from our example, it would appear as:
GSE Scale Systems c c
c c
c c
P
A
c c
c c
P
A
c c
c c
P
A c c
c c
c c
Of course the display will only show five characters of the transmit table at once. Using the [
3
] and [
4
] keys you can scroll backward and forward through the transmit table. Text characters are easy to identify as they appear exactly as entered. However the c c and
P
A
characters can make the custom transmit data appear rather cryptic. We know that c c represents a control code, but which one? Likewise, P
A
represents an unidentified parameter of unknown format.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-20 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
P101* Tx 1 tems
?
To determine what these characters represent, press [
6
] to access the expanded display mode.
P101*
<CR>
^M=13
The display now shows the details of the rightmost display character.
Using the [
3
] and [
4
] keys you can now scroll backward and forward through the transmit table in the expanded mode, examining details of each character in sequence. Text characters and control codes are shown with their corresponding ASCII value. Press [
6
] again to return to the normal display mode.
When viewing parameters in the expanded mode, parameter names can be displayed with format codes.
P102!
Tx 1 s???
‚
To determine what parameter is represented by the P
A
character, press
[
6
] to access the expanded display mode.
P102!
00000
Gross
To view the parameter number and instance of the expanded parameter, press [
6
] a second time.
P102!
00000
0 1
The first digit (0) represents the parameter number (in this case Gross) and the second number identifies the instance (scale #1). Using the [
3
] and [
4
] keys you can scroll backward and forward through the transmit table in the expanded mode, examining details of each parameter in sequence. Text characters and control codes are shown with their corresponding ASCII value.
Communications 8-21
Press [
6
] a third time to return to the normal display mode.
The parameter number appearing in the large digits represents the position of the rightmost displayed character.
P102!
Tx 1 s???
‚
This information is helpful when attempting to access the middle of a large transmit table. If you wish to access to 500 th
element of a table, rather than scrolling to that position you can simply key in 1500 [SELECT] . To immediately access the end of a custom transmit table, key in 4999
[SELECT] (the maximum entry position).
E DITING A C USTOM T RANSMIT T ABLE
Information may be deleted from or added to an existing custom transmit table. Pressing [CLR] will delete the rightmost displayed character. To delete the entire custom transmit, access the end of the table and press
[CLR] [ENTER] . When adding elements, characters are inserted between the two rightmost characters.
If a parameter’s format code must be changed, you must first delete the parameter, then re-enter it using the desired format code.
Table 8-6: INT/U-INT Parameters with Numeric Value Output Format Codes
G ROUP
Add Value
C HOICES
Description
Name
Standard Time/Date
2-Digit / 4-Digit Year:
Omit Date:
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
* 2048 Standard Time/Date
128 4-digit year (YYYY).
0 2-digit year (YY).
64 Do not include the date.
0 Include the date in the output..
32 Include the name of the day.
Name of Day of Week:
Date Format
Text Date:
Omit Time:
0 Do not include the name of the day.
16 Use international date format.
0 Use U.S.A. format for date.
8 Use text format for date.
0 Use numeric format for date.
4 Do not include the time.
0 Include the time in the output..
2 Use military time (0 - 23 hours).
24 Hour Clock
Seconds:
0 Use 12 hour clock with am/pm.
1 Include seconds with time.
*You must add this value for this table to take effect.
0 Do not include seconds with time.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-22 Chapter 8
Table 8-7: INT/U-INT Parameters with Extended Time Date Output Format Codes
G ROUP
Name
Type
Separator
Julian Date
(day of the year)
Seconds since midnight:
Hours Digits:
Minutes Digits:
Seconds Digits:
Date Codes:
Add Value
C HOICES
Description
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
* 4096 Extended Time/Date Codes
1792 Separate numbers with comma (,).
1536 Separate numbers with period (.).
1280 Separate numbers with backslash (\).
1024 Separate numbers with space ( ).
768 Separate numbers with slash (/).
512 Separate numbers with colon (:).
256 Separate numbers with dash (-).
0 Do not separate numbers.
128 Include Julian date.
0 Do not include Julian date.
64 Include the seconds since midnight.
0 Do not include the seconds since midnight.
32 Include hours digits.
0 Do not include hours digits.
16 Include minutes digits.
0 Do not include minutes digits.
8 Include seconds digits.
0 Do not include seconds digits.
7 WWYY (week and year)
6 YYWW (year and week)
5 DDMMYY (day, month, year)
4 DDYYMM (day, year, month)
3 YYDDMM (year, day, month)
2 YYMMDD (year, month, day)
1 MMDDYY (month, day, year)
Table 8-8: INT/U-INT Parameters with Standard Time Date Output Format Codes
G ROUP C HOICES
Add Value Description
Name
Plus Sign
Justification: Left/Right
Zero/Space Fill
Width
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
64 Print plus sign if positive data.
0 Don't print '+'.
32 Left Justify.
0 Right Justify.
16 Pad with zeroes.
0 Pad with spaces.
2 ... 15 Specifies the minimum width.
1 Print with minimum width.
0 Use print width specified by P240.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-23
Table 8-9: Float Parameters Format Codes
G ROUP
Name
Binary
Convert to Whole number.
Which Units:
Print Units
Print DP Always
Plus Sign
Justification: Left/Right
Zero/Space Fill
Width
Add Value
C HOICES
Description
49152 * Print Name Only
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
Refer to Table 8-12
4096 Convert data to whole number.
0 Print data normal.
2560 Default Units (per P150)
2048 Fourth Units (per P134)
1536 Third Units (per P133)
1024 Second Units (per P132)
512 First Units (per P131)
0 Current Units (as currently displayed)
256 Don't Print Units
0 Print Units Name
128 Always print a decimal point.
0 No decimal point if no fractional portion.
64 Print plus sign if positive data.
0 Don't print '+'.
32 Left Justify.
0 Right Justify.
16 Pad with zeroes.
0 Pad with spaces.
2 ... 15 Specifies minimum width
1 Print with minimum width
0 Use print width specified by P240.
Table 8-10: String Type Parameter Format Codes
G ROUP
Name
Justification: Left/Right
Width
Add Value
C HOICES
Description
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
128 Left Justify.
0 Right Justify.
2 ... 127 Value specifies the minimum width to output.
1 Output with minimum possible width.
0 Use print width specified by P240.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-24 Chapter 8
Table 8-11: Parameter Name Output Format Codes
G ROUP
Add Value
C HOICES
Description
Name
Justification: Left/Right
Width
* 49152 Print Name Only
128 Left Justify.
0 Right Justify.
2 ... 127 Value specifies the minimum width to output.
1 Output with minimum possible width.
*You must add this value for this table to take effect.
0 Use print width specified by P240.
Table 8-12: Format Codes for Binary Output of Float Type Parameter's Value
G ROUP
Add Value
C HOICES
Description
Name
Binary
Convert to Whole Number.
Which Units:
Send as comma delimited ASCII decimal values
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
* 8192 Print binary data
4096 Convert data to whole number.
0 Keep as fractional value.
2560 Default Units (per P150)
2048 Fourth Units (per P134)
1536 Third Units (per P133)
1024 Second Units (per P132)
512 First Units (per P131)
0 Current Units (as currently displayed)
4 Output each byte as ASCII decimal value with commas (,) between
0 Send binary data.
Output Type: 3 Output 4 byte float value.
2 Output 4 byte integer value.
1 Output 2 byte integer value.
0 Output 1 byte integer value.
*You must add this value for this table to take effect.
Table 8-13: Format Codes for Binary Output of INT/U-INT Type Parameter’s Values
G ROUP C HOICES
Add Value Description
Name
Binary
Send as comma delimited ASCII decimal values
32768 Print Name First
16384 Omit Name
0 Print Name Last
* 8192 Print binary data
4 Output each byte as ASCII decimal value with commas (,) between
Output Type:
0 Send binary data.
3 Output 4 byte float value.
2 Output 4 byte integer value.
1 Output 2 byte integer value.
0 Output 1 byte integer value.
*You must add this value for this table to take effect.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-25
T
RANSMITTING DISPLAY
D
ATA
A series of single byte ASCII commands allow a remote device to request the indicator to send its displayed information. This can be very useful in setting up communications with a remote indicator via a modem connection. The commands are not available for use within a macro since they would require the entry of control codes within macro setup. They must be sent to the indicator as a single byte code. A separate code identifies each comm port as listed in Table 8-14.
Table 8-14: Communication Port ASCII Commands
P ORT
COMM1
COMM2
COMM3
COMM4
D ECIMAL CODE
<149>
<150>
<151>
<152>
H EX C ODE
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
When one of these four codes is received on a Comm port that is set for
Receive Standard (P205, choice 1), the 650 will transmit the currently displayed information out of the specified port in a fixed width format.
The data is sent in normal order as follows: (numeric display, top line auxiliary display, bottom line auxiliary display) followed by <CR> <LF> only. These commands cannot be included in a macro because they are
%<CC> (i.e. control codes). They may be sent to the indicator (if 8 data bits is enabled) as stated in the table above.
Transmitted data format is:
-1.2345 lb Gross<CR><LF>
| | | |
0 15 21 26 i.e. The numeric data is sent first and right padded with spaces to allow the top line data to appear in the 15th position. Another space is sent after the 5 top line characters, then the bottom line is sent, followed by a <CR>
<LF>. This is quite valuable for modem connections to a 60 Series instrument in the field for troubleshooting purposes.
M
ODBUS
C
OMMUNICATIONS
Modbus
is a serial communications protocol supported by a variety of
PLCs and other industrial equipment. It is an asynchronous serial protocol that does not specify the baud rate, or parity bit. It does specify 7 data bits and either one stop bit with parity or two stop bits without parity. It is a master-slave protocol where the master device initiates communications with the slave and the slave responds accordingly. Modbus may be used with either RS-232 or RS-485 at the physical layer.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-26 Chapter 8
The transfer of numeric and alpha data via Modbus is based upon each data item having a register address within the slave. The master then specifies the address of the data item to sent to or received from the slave and the slave accepts the received data or sends the specified data in a format that is intended to be independent of data type.
Modbus should not be confused with Modbus Plus which is a proprietary protocol owned by Modicon, Inc.
S UPPORTED M ODBUS C OMMANDS
Following are brief descriptions of the Modbus commands supported by 60
Series instruments. They are listed with the Modbus function code followed by the function name.
R EAD C OIL S TATUS /R EAD I NPUT S TATUS
Since the 60 Series instruments do not use separate numbering for input and output setpoints (coils) both of these commands will read the status of the specified setpoint number, regardless of type.
R EAD H OLDING R EGISTERS
This command contains addresses offset from address 40001. A programmable translation table in the 60 Series instrument is used to translate register addresses to parameter numbers and instances. Each row of the translation table contains three elements:
Parameter Number
Instance
Translation Type
F ORCE M ULTIPLE C OILS
Allows a several sequential setpoint output states to be specified.
P
RESET
M
ULTIPLE
R
EGISTERS
Allows multiple parameters within the indicator to be given new data.
S ETUP P ARAMETERS
E NABLING M ODBUS
P205 " RecvX " now has another choice, "Modbs". This selection specifies that all communications (both transmit and receive) on the current serial port are Modbus format.
While Modbus is specified for a given COMM port, then that port cannot be used to send data native 60 Series commands to the indicator. Also, any attempt to send data out a Modbus Comm port (using the will result in the
"NoTxX Allow" message being displayed briefly.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-27
At this time, the indicator can only act as a slave on the Modbus ( network.
Operation of the 60 Series instrument as a master may be considered sometime in the future if there is deemed to be significant demand for this capability.
S
PECIFYING
M
ODBUS
A
DDRESS
P209 " MbAdX ": This parameter is used to specify the Modbus address which is recognized by the indicator on the current serial port, as specified by the 'X'. If P205 is not set for "Modbs" then P209 is not accessible. Enter a value between 1 and 247, or press [ENTER] alone to increment the address by one until the desired address is displayed.
M ODBUS “I NPUT ” S ETPOINTS
When a Modbus command is used to turn on or off an input setpoint above
#128, the setpoint's current state is not tested or affected. Therefore, if the setpoint invoked a macro when it turned on, it would still invoke the macro even if the setpoint should have already been on.
The input type setpoints will not work correctly for setpoints 129-144 due to the way PDIO input setpoints are handled. Recommend only using setpoint inputs above 144 if invoking macros via Modbus.
In other words, a macro may be invoked via a Modbus command via the following method: Choose a setpoint above 144 and set it up as an input type that invokes the desired macro upon activation and/or deactivation.
When a Modbus command is received to activate or deactivate that setpoint, the macro will be invoked.
M ODBUS P ROTOCOL (RTU M ODE )
RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) messaging framing is used on a Modbus network in place of ASCII message framing. With this method of framing, each 8-bit byte in the message contains two 4-bit hexadecimal characters.
The main advantage of this mode over ASCII is that there is greater character density allowing better data throughput for the same baud rate.
Note: The following information pertains to setting up the 60 Series for
Modbus networks with RTU framing. The following examples are 60
Series setups for slave operation on a Modbus network with RTU framing.
To make use of this protocol with the 60 Series requires existing knowledge of the Modbus protocol. For any further information on Modbus
Protocol and ASCII & RTU framing, refer to the following document.
Modicon
, Modbus Protocol Reference Guide, PI-MBUS Rev. G
Notes on Using MODBUS RTU on 60 Series instruments :
Works only on comm port 1
8 data bits are forced regardless of P201.1
Flow control is forced to none regardless of P204.1 (also forced now for
ASCII mode)
Setup mode:
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-28 Chapter 8
Set Modbus receive type
Set Modbus address
Set Modbus mode to RTU instead of ASCII (new parameter P210)
Sending device must transmit 1-byte binary address, 1-byte binary function code, n binary message bytes, low byte of crc-16 (initial value
0xffff) of all preceding bytes, high byte of crc-16 of all preceding bytes.
Master device cannot intersperse delays of more than 1.5 character times into a message to a slave device.
M ODBUS A DDRESS T RANSLATION T ABLE
P6001: "Modbus" is used to specify which of the 60 Series parameters are mapped to which Modbus address. Since Modbus handles the transferring of data by referencing the data's address, it is necessary to specify which parameters are assigned to which Modbus address.
The parameter assigned to the first Modbus address (address 40001) is specified at P6001 of the setup mode. The subsequent parameters specified at P6002, P6003, etc.… are then assigned the next available
Modbus address, which is dependent upon the number of registers required for the preceding parameters.
To specify a parameter, three items are required:
Parameter Number
Instance
Translation Type
S PECIFYING A P ARAMETER
The parameter selection process is very similar to other setup modes requiring a parameter selection.
Press [ENTER] to access the standard parameter selection menu. Then use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the menu to find the desired parameter, then press [ENTER] . Again, use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the menu to find the desired instance of the specified parameter, and press [ENTER] again. Then key in a format code
(from the appropriate table below) and press [ENTER] , or press the up and down arrow keys to cycle through your choices. Then press [ENTER] to save your choice.
Alternatively, simply key in the parameter number, a decimal point and then the instance number followed by [ENTER] to specify the parameter.
Then choose the format code as described above.
New parameter entries are inserted in front of the displayed entry. In effect, you cannot write over a parameter, but you can insert a new one and delete an old one. If you make an entry in the middle of a list the entry you were viewing and all the subsequent entries are pushed down to make room for the new entry.
The relevant formatting codes are dependent upon the parameter's data type.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-29
String type parameters do not require format codes. The displayed information for format type is "StrXX" where XX indicates the length of the string.
D
ELETING A
P
ARAMETER
To remove a parameter from the list, press [CLR] while viewing the parameter to be deleted. To delete all of the parameters, press [CLR] at the end of the table, while viewing " End ".
V IEWING THE M ODBUS A DDRESS T RANSLATION T ABLE
The dot matrix display can be toggled between a few different viewing modes. Pressing the [F4] key toggles between the following two modes:
"Modbs" Top Line
"Name " Bottom line (name or number and instance) and
"40XXX" (The effective Modbus address of the parameter)
"Type " (One of the types shown in Table 8-15 and Table 8-16.)
Table 8-15: Integer (Signed or Unsigned) Translation Types
C ODE
0
1
D ESCRIPTION
16 bit integer
32 bit integer
N O . OF
R EGISTERS
1
2
D ISPLAYED
T YPE
Int16
Int32
Table 8-16: Float Translation Types
C ODE D ESCRIPTION
0
N O . OF
R EGISTERS
1
1
2
Float to Fixed
Point 16 bit
Float to Fixed
Point 32 bit
IEEE floating point
2
2
D ISPLAYED
T YPE
Int16
Int32
FltIE
When the first viewing mode is selected, pressing [F2] will toggle between showing the name of the parameter or the number (first two digits) and instance (next three digits)
To step through the translation table, press [SELECT] to view subsequent parameters. Then press [F2] or [F4] to toggle between the different viewing modes. When you reach the end of the Modbus translation table, the display will read " End ".
If the Modbus Address Translation Table has not been programmed then
P6001 will show "None".
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-30 Chapter 8 i
It is possible to invoke a 60 Series macro via a Modbus command.
Normally, setpoints which are set up to invoke macros will only invoke those macros when the setpoints change state due to their setup conditions being met or due to a timer expiring. The macros will not be invoked when the setpoints are activated on command. However, if one of the upper setpoints (setpoints 129 through 256) is set to be an 'Input' type, then if that setpoint is activated via Modbus command, the macro associated with that state change of the setpoint will be invoked.
i
Setpoint 12 is requested as #11, which in hexadecimal is 0B. 42 -12
= 30, 30 + 1 = 31 (you must add 1 to include both the first and last setpoints) 31 = 1F in hex. Address
23 = 17 hex.
O THER S ETUP P ARAMETERS
The normal communication protocol parameters must be programmed so that the devices communicating have the same settings as each other.
These parameters include:
Parameter Name
Parameter Number
Available Choices (per Modbus Specification)
Baud Rate (P200)
Data bits P201 (always 7 data bits)
Parity P202 (none, odd, or even)
Stop bits P203 (2 stop bits if no parity, 1 stop bit otherwise)
Flow Control P204 (None)
Transmit Buffer Size P207
For ASCII mode Modbus transmissions, the size of the transmit and receive buffers is not critical. However for most efficient operation, the transmit buffer size should be set as large as the longest anticipated transmission.
Receive Buffer Size P208 (Same as transmit buffer)
RS-485 Multi-Drop P250
Enabling P250 and installing the Network Option Board allows a number of Modbus devices to be networked together on the same pair of lines. This option is available only for COM1. When Modbus is enabled, access to P251 is not allowed since P251 has no effect.
Setpoint Assignments
When assigning the 60 Series setpoints to specific devices, it is advantageous to group all of the setpoints that will be accessed via the
Modbus interface together. This is not essential, but it will reduce the number of commands required to read and/or write several setpoints.
M ODBUS P ACKET F ORMATS
Following are byte by byte descriptions of the data transferred for each of the supported Modbus commands.
M
ODBUS
P
ACKET
F
ORMAT
D
ETAILS
01 Read Coil Status/02 Read Input Status
Since the indicator does not use separate numbering for input and output setpoints (coils) both of these commands will read the status of the specified setpoint number, regardless of type.
The master sends a packet containing the first setpoint number to read
(start address, high and low byte) and the number of setpoints to read.
However the setpoint numbers are offset by one, thus setpoint #1 is referenced as setpoint 0 in the Modbus packet. Following is an example of
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-31 a request to read setpoints 12 through 42 from an indicator whose Modbus address (P209) is set to 23. Refer to Table 8-17
Table 8-17: Query Packet Sent from Master to Slave
F UNCTION C ODES 1 & 2: R EAD C OIL /I NPUT S TATUS
Field Name
Header
Slave Address
Function Code
Start Address
(High Byte)
Start Address
(Low Byte)
Number of Setpoints
(High Byte)
Number of Setpoints
(Low Byte)
LRC
(Error Checking)
Hex
Value
3A
17
01
00
0B
00
1F
B6
ASCII
Character
1
: (colon)
1
0
0
0
0
1
B
ASCII
Character
2 none
7
1
0
B
0
F
6
The slave's resulting response packet contains data indicating the state of each of the requested setpoints. The status of each setpoint is represented by a single bit, with an activated setpoint being a '1', and a deactivated setpoint being a '0'. A sample response packet to the preceding query packet would appear as in Table 8-18.
Table 8-18: Response Packet Sent from Slave to Master
F UNCTION C ODES 1 & 2: R EAD C OIL /I NPUT S TATUS
Field Name
Header
Slave Address
Function Code
Byte Count
Data (Coils 19 - 12)
Data (Coils 27 - 20)
Data (Coils 35 - 28)
Data (Coils 43 - 36)
Data (Coils 51 - 44)
LRC
(Error Checking)
Hex
Value
3A
17
01
05
2A
10
C4
7D
1F
B6
ASCII
Character
1
: (colon)
7
1
B
1
C
0
2
1
0
ASCII
Character
2 none
7
1
0
4
5
A
D
F
6
The individual setpoint states specified by the example response above are detailed below. A state of '1' indicates a bit value of 1 which corresponds to an activated setpoint. Refer to Table 8-18.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-32 Chapter 8
Table 8-19: Setpoint States Specified by the Example Above
Bit# 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Hex
Value
Setpt# 1
9
State 0
1
8
0
1
7
1
1
6
0
1
5
1
1
4
0
1
3
1
1
2
0 2A
Setpt# 2
7
State 0
2
7
0
2
5
0
2
4
1
2
3
0
2
2
0
2
1
0
2
0
0 10
Setpt# 3
5
State 1
3
4
1
3
3
0
3
2
0
3
1
0
3
0
1
2
9
0
2
8
0 C4
Setpt# 4
3
State 0
4
2
1
4
1
1
4
0
1
3
9
1
3
8
1
3
7
0
3
6
1 7D
Setpt# 5
1
State
5
0
4
9
4
8
4
7
4
6
4
5
4
4
1F i
Hexadecimal Values Definition—
Hexadecimal is a base 16 numbering system. That means that each digit has sixteen possible values which are known as zero through fifteen in the decimal numbering system. The characters A through F are used to represent the value 10 through
15 respectively.
03 Read Holding Registers
This command contains addresses offset from address 40001. A programmable translation table in the 60 Series instruments is used to translate register addresses to parameter numbers and instances. Each row of the translation table contains three elements:
Parameter Number
Instance
Translation Type
05 Force Single Coil
Allows a single setpoint output state to be specified.
06 Preset Single Register
Allows a single parameter within the indicator to be given new data.
15 Force Multiple Coils
Allows a several sequential setpoint output states to be specified.
16 Preset Multiple Registers
Allows multiple parameters within the indicator to be given new data.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-33
C
HECKSUM
P
ROTOCOL
One of the most effective and popular error-detection methods is the cyclic redundancy check (CRC). The CRC method is used in virtually every field where transmitting serial data is involved. The CRC is basically an error detection mechanism. The CRC follows three basic rules in order to insure the data that has been transmitted has been received properly.
1.
Along with the message, provide the device receiving the data with some means of knowing it received it correctly.
2.
The receiving device should send a return message, acknowledging receipt or asking for retry.
3.
Continue to send the message until it gets to its destination.
In Europe, if a printer is not located adjacent to the controller then the transmission must include a checksum and a mechanism to re-attempt a transmission in case of errors in order to be PTB approved. A CRC would suffice in this application.
Several different styles of checksums can be calculated by the controller to help insure the integrity of the transmitted data. One of these checksum calculation methods matches that used by Epson printers in a protocol commonly used in Europe. Together with capabilities of the input interpreter (P205), the indicator can be used with these Epson printers, insuring correct data transfer by re-sending the transmission if the required acknowledge is not received.
A data checksum calculation consists of three commands:
1.
Initialize and begin calculating a specific type of checksum starting with the next transmitted character.
2.
Stop calculating the checksum (optional). Required only when the checksum is not to be transmitted until after some additional characters are transmitted.
3.
Transmit the checksum. Since most supported checksums are twobyte, there are two commands, one for most significant byte (msb) first and one for least significant byte (lsb) first. Both bytes will be transmitted in succession. For single byte checksums, either command can be issued.
Several codes have been defined which allow these commands to be embedded at the proper locations in a custom transmit or to be done at a particular time within a macro. Similar to the way a carriage return/line feed combination can be programmed into a custom transmit setup by entering .256, the codes for the checksums can be entered as shown in
Table 8-20.
To allow one these checksum commands to be issued directly from a macro, use the appropriate code listed above along with the “send control code” command, “%&.” For example, use 306%& to begin a LRCC-8 checksum.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-34 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
.301
.302
.303
.304
.305
.306
.307
Table 8-20: Checksum Format Codes
F UNCTION C HECKSUM
C ODE
.300
.308
.309
.310
.311
.312
.313
D ESCRIPTION stop Stop calculating the checksum but do not transmit yet.
CCITT International standard CRC
SDLC/HDLC CRC used by IBM
CRC-16
CRC-12
Most commonly used CRC in the United States
Used when bytes are 6 bits
LRCC-16
LRCC-8
XMODEM
16 bit CRC
8 bit CRC, used by Epson
Registers are shifted left, opposite CCITT method which shifts right. Used with transmissions up to 9,600 baud.
2 byte additive checksum
1 byte additive checksum
Transmit checksum sending LSB first
Sum 16
Sum-8
Send
Checksum
Send
Checksum
Alternate
CRC-16
Inverse
LRCC-8
Transmit checksum sending MSB first
CRC used by GE FANUC
Binary inverse (binary negated) of the LRCC-8 checksum code 306.
The following polynomial equations are used in calculating the checksums for the specified checksum format codes in.
CCITT
G(x) = x
16
x
12
+ x
5
+1
Feedback = 8408h
Initial checksum value = 0000
SDLC
G(x) = x
16
x
12
+ x
5
+1
Feedback = 8408h
Initial checksum value = FFFF
CRC-16
G(x) = x
16
x
15
+ x
2
+1
Feedback = A001h
Initial checksum value = 0000
CRC-12
Communications 8-35
G(x) = x
12
+ x
11
+ x
3
+ x
2
+ x + 1
Feedback = F01h
Initial checksum value = 0000 i
This feature only allows the transmission of checksums, not the receipt of checksum data.
LRCC-16
G(x) = x
16
+1
Feedback = 8000h
Initial checksum value = 0000
LRCC-8
G(x) = x
8
+1
Feedback = 80h
Initial checksum value = 0000
XMODEM
G(x) = x
16
x
12
+ x
5
+1
Feedback = 1021h
Initial checksum value = 0000
Alternative CRC-16
G(x) = x
16
x
15
+ x
2
+1
Feedback = A001h
Initial checksum value = FFFF
Sum-16
Additive checksum
Initial checksum value = 0000
Sum-8
Additive checksum
Initial checksum value = 0000
Refer to the Printer Interface Example section below for an example of how to interface an Epson printer with the 60 Series instrument using checksums.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-36 Chapter 8
P RINTER I NTERFACE E XAMPLE
Printer Interface Example
100%s23640%i%e Access Setup Modes,
Allowing Changes
65010%s1%e%e
108%s1%e
109%s2%e
205%s2%e
218%s.000%e
219%s1%e%e
221%s0%e
223%s%c%e
.006%e
224%s3%e
219%s2%e%e
221%s0%e
223%s%c%e
.021%e
224%s4%e
9990%s1%e%e
10001%s
80.1P=0%%o%e
9990%s2%e%e
9991%s
PrintBlock%e
80.1P==0%o%e
1%%”%e
Ap1%%)%e
80.1P=1%%o%e
5%%&%e
%%N%e
Can’tSend!%
%P%e
%%E%e
P65010. dbase Reset
P101.01 Scl 1 Scale
P109.02 Scl 1 Enbld
P205.02 Recv1 Intrp
P218.00 RxTrm <NUL>
P219.00 RxIn#1
P221.00 RxTyp Char
P223. RxFmt
<ACK>^F=06
P224.03 RxMac 3
P219.00 RxIn#2
P221.00 RxTyp Char
P223. RxFmt
<NAK>^U=21
P224.03 RxMac 4 macro#1 copy register macro#2
10001%s
0001 compare
0005 select port
0007 flush keys
0009 copy register
0014 send code
0016 if not
0017 pause
0028 end if
While there are numerous ways of accomplishing various tasks with the 60
Series instrument. One possible method follows below. This implementation uses Macro 1, 2, 3 ,4, Custom Transmit 1, and Var#80.1.
Macro 2 is named Print Block so that it can be started from the [F2] key.
Macro 1 which is invoked by setpoint 1 upon controller power-up or after exiting setup mode clears Var#80.1. Var#1 is used to keep track of the state of the interface.
1.
When macro 2 is executed, it checks Var#80.1 to determine if a print is in progress. If no print is in progress, <ENQ> is sent out COMM port
#1 to indicate the beginning of a transmission and Var#1 is incremented to 1 to prevent other transmissions. If a print is in progress, the message “Can’t Send” is displayed if macro 2 is invoked.
2.
The input interpreter #1 is set to execute macro 3 when a <ACK>is received. Macro 3 checks if Var#80.1. If it is, custom transmit 1 is sent and Var#1 is set to 2.
3.
After the transmission is sent, the printer will respond with either an
<ACK> or a <NAK>. If <ACK> is received at this point (Var#80.1 not
=1) then macro 3 changes Var#1 back to 0. This means another transmission could be initiated.
If <AK> is received, the input interpreter #2 will cause macro 4 to run. This macro will send an <ACK> to the printer and set Var#80.1 to 1. Then step
2 is repeated.
Custom transmit 1 describes the format of a custom transmit using CRCs.
The file, (LRCC8.SET) contains this implementation.
T
N
RANSMIT
UMBER
T
HE
C
(ASCII)
URRENT
S
CALE
9990%s3%e%e
10001%s
1%%Q%e macro#3
80.1P==1%%o%e 0001 compare
80.1P=2%%o%e 0006 copy register
0011 custom transmit
%%N%e
80.1P=0%%o%e
%%E%e
0013 if not
0014 copy register
0019 end if
Table 8-21 shows the format code for transmitting the current scale number as a single ASCII character.
Table 8-21: Transmit Current Scale Number Format Code
F ORMAT
C ODE
.350
F UNCTION D ESCRIPTION
9990%s4%e%e
10001%s macro#4
80.1P==2%%o%e 0001 compare
1%%”%e 0006 select port
80.1P=1%%o%e
6%%&%e
0008 copy register
0013 send code
Transmit current scale #
This format will Transmit the current scale number as a single ASCII character
1
2
Examples
Scale # Decimal Value/ASCII character
49 = 1
50 = 2
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-37
3
4
51 = 3
52 = 4
M
ISCELLANEOUS
P
ROTOCOL
(B
INARY
T
O
T
EXT
C
ONVERSION
)
The following example shows how to set up a Custom Transmit for binary to text communication. Refer to Table 8-22.
Format code 401 begins the conversion of a one byte binary character into two HEX text characters. Format code 400 ends the conversion back to a single byte binary character.
Table 8-22: Binary to Text Format Codes
F ORMAT
C ODE
.400
.401
F UNCTION
Stop
Begin
D ESCRIPTION
End binary to text conversion.
Start binary to text conversion
T
RANSMIT
N
ETWORK
A
DDRESS
(ASCII)
Table 8-23 shows the format code for transmitting the address of the indicator.
Table 8-23: Transmit Network Address in ASCII
F ORMAT
C ODE
.402
F UNCTION D ESCRIPTION
Transmit network address
The network address selected at P251 is transmitted as a single ASCII character.
The indicator’s address is selected at parameter P251. Address selections are (4 through 250). This format code will transmit the address as a single
ASCII character.
Examples
ADDRESS Decimal Value/ASCII character
4 4 = <EOT>
13
49
13 = <CR>
49 = 1
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-38 Chapter 8
T
RANSMIT
S
ETPOINT
S
TATUS
A
S
A
B
INARY
C
ODE
These format codes allow for the ability to transmit the current status of setpoints as a binary code (one bit per setpoint). The least significant bit is the lower setpoint number. To send these codes key in “.5xx (per Table
8-5) into the custom transmit setup or execute the macro “5xx%&”.
Example #1
502%& will send setpoint 9-16 status if 9, 11, 12 & 15 are on bit position number: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 setpoint #: 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 bit value: 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 hex equivalent: 0x4D
Thus the character 0x4D would be transmitted for this example.
Example #2
To send Example #1 as displayable characters.
Setup as a custom transmit:
.401%e Begin binary to text conversion
.502%e Send setpoint 9-16 status
.400%e End binary to text conversion
Setup to send using a macro:
401,502,400%&
The resulting transmission would be two bytes:
“4”, “D” which in hexadecimal equals: 0x34, 0x44
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-39
P
RINTING
O
PERATIONS
Depending upon how the transmission parameters have been set up, the following information can be printed when you press [PRINT] :
Stored data and other information that was entered into a Custom
Transmit Setup
Refer to Creating a Custom Transmit Table on page 8-21.
A default Custom Transmit Setup is programmed into your controller at the factory. In the following example, the font size of the text is a function of the printer capabilities.
STR#1
9876.54 lbs Gross Weight
9864.20 lbs Net Weight
12.34 lbs Tare Weight
There are 250 Custom Transmits that can be set up in the controller. To print a Custom Transmit setup, press [n] [PRINT] where “n” represents 1 through 250, and:
1 = Custom Transmit 1
2 = Custom Transmit 2
3 = Custom Transmit 3
250 = Custom Transmit 250
Most printing transmissions are begun by pressing the [PRINT] key.
However, the Continuous Print can be programmed with a setpoint and a macro printing the programmed data each time the display is updated.
This feature is particularly useful when the controller is connected to a remote display or interfacing with a computer that is monitoring the process.
If the receiving device (printer, display or computer) goes offline, is powered down, or cannot receive the data being sent for any other reason, the message Tx On Hold will appear for a few seconds.
Press [CLR] to abort the transmission. If this situation occurs while the
Continuous Print feature is being used, the continuous transmission is suspended, but it can be resumed by pressing the [PRINT] key.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-40 Chapter 8
I
NPUT
I
NTERPRETER
The Input Interpreter, when enabled, operates on data received through the serial port on the 60 Series instrument. It enables the controller to be programmed to perform complex custom applications, as well as recognize specific commands that may be unique to other indicators. This option enables any GSE 60 Series instrument to emulate commands from weigh indicators manufactured by other companies.
The Input Interpreter consists of 250 input specifications (250 for each port). Each specification operates independently and can be Line type,
Character type, or left unused. When the received data matches one of the specifications, a macro can be initiated.
A Character type input specification will match a single received character.
Although the specification may be several characters long, only the first character is compared. When a match occurs, all preceding data is cleared, and if a macro number is programmed, it is invoked.
With Line type input specifications, the received data is held in a buffer until a terminating character is received. This terminating character is programmable, but the default is a decimal 10, which is an ASCII
LINEFEED. All Line type input specifications use the same terminating character.
When the terminating character is received, the data in the buffer is compared against the Line type input specifications. If a match is found and a macro number is programmed, it is invoked. Whether or not a match is found, the buffer will be cleared of all data up to and including the terminating character.
Line specifications can contain text, control codes, and parameters. If there are no parameters, the received data is simply compared against the specification, and they must be identical to be considered a match.
If parameters exist in the line specification, characters from the received data will be stored into that parameter. Characters before the parameter in the line specification must match characters in the received data. A match occurs when data has been stored into all parameters in the line specification. Input specification format lines can be up to 255 characters long. However, the input buffer for the input interpreter accepts no more than 85 characters, which is the maximum number of characters that can be interpreted. When this buffer fills up, it is cleared.
Table 8-24 describes the Input Interpreter setup parameters.
GSE Scale Systems
Table 8-24: Input Interpreter Setup Parameters
P ARAMETER S ELECTIONS D ESCRIPTION
199 PortX
2
3
0
1
4
None
COM1 port selected
COM2 port selected
COM3 port selected
COM4 port selected
205 Recv# 2 Interpreter Enable
218 RxTrm 0 through 255 Line Type Termination
Character
219 RxIn# 1 through 250 Specify the interpretation number for the COMM port specified at P199.
220 RxNam XXXXXX
221 RxTyp 0
1
Key in more descriptive name for the specified interpretation.
Character Type
Line Type
222 Rx X Key in Text, Parms, Format Line control codes for the line type interpretation number specified at P219.
223 RxChr 0 through 255 Select the character interpretation for the interpretation number specified at P219.
224 RxMac 1 through 250 Macro Number
0 No Macro
Communications 8-41
S ETUP
The Input Interpreter is an advanced software feature. that must be set up properly in order to function properly. Setup data for the Input Interpreter is stored in electronically-erasable, programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM) along with all the other scale setup information.
G ENERAL S ETUP AND COMM P ORT S ELECTION
The Input Interpreter can be enabled or disabled for at parameter P219
(selections may be different for each COMM port). All remaining input interpreter setup parameters are always retained regardless how this parameter is set up.
The instance or interpretation for a specified port is specified at Parameter
P219 (selections are 1 through 250). Parameter P199 specifies which
COMM port the interpretation is associated with. When an interpretation is specified at P219, all received serial data is captured and used by the input interpreter. When P219 is disabled or no interpretations specified, all serial data is received and used by the controller command processor.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-42 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
The interpretation input specification terminating character is programmed at Parameter 218. For values 0 through 99, the value is displayed on the numeric display, while the ASCII interpretation of it is shown on the lower line of the dot matrix display. For values greater than 99, only the value is displayed on the lower line of the character display.
For each of the 250/COMM port input specifications, two parameters must be set-up:
Type
Format line
T ERMINATION C HARACTER
How you handle your terminating character is very important. Suppose you want the controller to execute a macro when it receives the word “START” through the serial port. You set up the input specification #1 to be line type, the format line to “START” and the macro number to 0. The terminating character is set to 13, which is a carriage return.
This setup will work fine if what is sent to the scale is “START” followed by a carriage return. But if a line feed is sent following the carriage return, this will only work the first time, because the line feed will remain in the buffer and be taken as the first character of the next transmission.
There are two ways around this. First, if you know the transmissions will always include a line feed, set the terminating character to 10 (line feed) and insert the carriage return at the end of the format line.
Alternately, you can set up another input specification to be character type, with a line feed as the format line, and no macro. This way, the linefeed will simply clear the buffer, which was already done by the carriage return, so in effect the line feed is ignored. This will allow all line type input specifications to handle transmissions with or without a line feed.
I NPUT S PECIFICATION T YPE
The input specification type is programmed at parameter P221. Selections for the type are:
0 - Char (character)
1 - Line (line)
To scroll through the selections, press [ENTER] .
To make a selection, key in the selection and press [ENTER] .
When one of the selections is specified over another, certain parameters specific to that selection will be available in the following parameters.
I NPUT S PECIFICATION F ORMAT L INE
The format line is programmed at Parameter 222. The format line is displayed on the lower line of the character display, and the edit position is the last character on the right. The numeric display shows how the edit position is offset from the first character of the format line. A solid box character indicates the end of the format line, a lowercase P
A
indicates a
Communications 8-43 parameter, and a lowercase
C
C
indicates a control code. Here the following keys perform special functions:
[F3 ƒ ] Moves the edit position left.
[F5 „ ]
[F4 ‚ ]
[F1 ‚ ]
Moves the edit position right.
Expands character at edit position.
Enters Alphanumeric entry mode.
[ENTER] With no entry, enters the parameter select mode.
Following an entry, inserts entry into format line at edit position.
[CLR] With edit position at the end of the format line will ask if you want to delete the entire line by prompting “ Clear All?
”; press [ENTER] for “yes,” any other key for “no.” Otherwise, it deletes the character at the edit position
In the Alphanumeric entry mode, [F1
•
] and [F4
‚
] are used to scroll up and down through the ASCII character set. [F3 ƒ ] acts as a backspace, removing the character at the edit position and moving the edit position to the left by one character. The [F5 „ ] key moves the edit position one character to the right and places an “A” there.
In the parameter select mode, [F1 • ] and [F4 ‚ ] are used to scroll up and down through the available parameters. The parameter number is displayed in the last two digits of the numeric display. If you know the parameter number, you can enter it directly. When the name of the parameter you want is displayed, pressing [ENTER] will insert it into the format line at the edit position.
Control codes are inserted by entering “.XXX” when XXX is the decimal code for the control code. For example, keying in [
•
] 013 [ENTER] inserts a carriage return at the edit position.
Use caution when entering a “%” in the format line. In order to match a “%” in the received data, the format line must contain two percent signs, or
“%%.” To enter two percent signs in the setup mode requires that four percent signs be sent to the scale. A single percent sign has a special meaning for the input interpreter, which is described in the For
Programmers Only section in this Chapter.
I NPUT S PECIFICATION M ACRO N UMBER
The macro number is programmed at Parameter P224. Here you select the number of the macro you want to initiate when a match is found. The choices are 1 through 250 (macro number), 0 = none. Key in the number of your selection and press [ENTER] to select a specific selection, or press [ENTER] by itself to scroll through the selections.
C LEAR I NTERPRETER
Specify the interpretation number in question at P219. Press [n] [ENTER] to review a specific interpreter (n = 1 through 250). Press [CLR] to delete an interpreter specification. A prompt will read “ Clear One?
”. Press
[ENTER] to verify clear. To clear all key in [999] [ENTER] at this prompt.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-44 Chapter 8
O PERATION
A few aspects of the Input Interpreter deserve to be highlighted. Failure to fully understand these concepts can result in unacceptable operation of the Input Interpreter.
M ULTIPLE P ARAMETERS
Any Line type input specification can contain several parameters. Suppose you want the scale to receive and interpret the following transmission:
T1.234,PWT.05<CR>
The objective is to store “1.234” into the TARE register, “.05” as the
PIECE-WEIGHT, and execute a macro when done. This can be accomplished by setting up an input specification as line type, with a format line of “T<pa=TARE>,PWT<pa=APW>,” macro number set to 0, and the terminating character set to 13 (carriage return). Here <pa=TARE> means to insert the parameter TARE at that point in the format line.
If we receive an incomplete transmission, for example T1.234,PW<cr>, the data “1.234” will be stored in the TARE register. However, nothing will be stored in the PIECE-WEIGHT register. The macro will not be executed, because a match occurs only when data is stored into all the parameters in the format line.
In some applications, you may not want the value in the parameters to change unless a match has occurred. This can be accomplished by setting up the input specification to store the data into a unused variable (VAR), and have the macro copy the value into the desired parameter (TARE,
QUANTITY, and so on) using the “%o” macro command.
T RAILING D ATA
In an input specification with at least one parameter, any data that follows the data of the last parameter but precedes the terminating character is ignored. For example: a format line of “T<pa=TARE>” will match received data of “T1.234” and “T1.234 hello there.”
To prevent this, “%5s” can be appended to the end of the format line, as in
“T<pa=TARE>%5s.” This tells the input interpreter to store up to five characters of trailing data in a dummy parameter. If the received data contains trailing data, data will be stored into two parameters, TARE and the dummy. Since the format line contains only one parameter, a match has not occurred, and the macro is not executed.
M ULTIPLE M ATCHES
The input specifications are checked in order from 1 to 250. If the received data could match more than one input specification, the first one checked that generates a match has priority. Once a match occurs, the comparison stops. The other input specifications are not checked.
GSE Scale Systems
Communications 8-45
D ISABLING THE I NPUT I NTERPRETER
When enabled, the input interpreter software intercepts all received data, except for the following circumstances:
Input interpreter is disabled in the setup mode, parameter 100 and above.
To download a new setup to the scale while the input interpreter is enabled, you must enter the setup mode manually by entering 100
[SELECT] 23640 [ID] [ENTER] from the scale keypad.
The macro commands %G, %W and %Y suspend the input interpreter while waiting for operator input.
The input interpreter is suspended during database unloads.
Under these conditions, received data is accepted directly into the command/entry buffer of the scale.
U SING A S TRING AS A P ARAMETER
When STRs are used as parameters, spaces in the received data are treated differently than other characters. Leading spaces in the received data are ignored. The first non-space character is the first character stored in the String. Data will continue to be stored into the String until the next space, the end of the received data, or the maximum size of the String is reached.
A DVANCED C ONCEPTS
As you were reading the Trailing Data section you probably thought, “That
%5s looks like a format string from a C language printf or scanf function!”
You are right! A derivative of scanf is the heart of the line type input interpreter specification with parameters. This knowledge can be useful, as outlined below.
Three components are used by the input interpreter: the input string, the format string, and a parameter address list. The input string consists of the data up to but not including the terminating character.
The format string is derived from the format line which is input in the setup mode and stored in the EEPROM. At power-up or when exiting the setup mode (when the display reads “Doing Setup”) the format line is scanned and all parameters are replaced by format codes appropriate to their type.
The address list is also built so that scanf will know where to store the data for each parameter. One additional address is added to the end of the list, that of the dummy parameter for the trailing data previously discussed.
The format code for most parameters is “%f,” for floating point data. The strings whose length is programmable through the setup mode, so their format code is “ %Xs ,” where “X” is the programmed length, (for example,
“ %20s ” for a string length of 20). The time/date parameters, are unsigned long type data, so their format code is “ %lu .”
It is possible to override these format codes by inserting a “%” immediately before the parameter in the format line. Then you can enter your own format code ahead of the “%.” If you have multiple parameters you have to insert your format codes ahead of the first overridden parameter’s format code.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-46 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
This can be useful for parsing fixed-width data that contains no delimiters, because the maximum field width can be specified. For example,
“%5f%6f%<pa=VAR1>%<pa=VAR2>“ will store the first 5 characters of data in floating point format into VAR1, and the next six characters in floating point format into VAR2.
An interesting but not very useful application is to override the format for an unsigned long parameter with “ %lx .” This will interpret the incoming data as hex! “ %lo ” will interpret it in octal!
Back to more worthwhile things now, an asterisk immediately following the percent sign will cause a field to be scanned but not stored. So if you know that there is a floating number in the incoming data that you want to ignore, use “ %*f ” to skip over it, or to skip a single character use “ %*c .”
This is not meant to be a tutorial on the uses of the scan function. Many resource books available go into much further depth. We have tried to suggest some possible ways of using its characteristics to good advantage.
I NPUT I NTERPRETER E XAMPLES
The following input interpreter example shows how the indicator can be programmed to receive a tare followed by a units identifier. A macro, which tests the transmitted units name and adjusts the data before storing it away as the new tare value, is invoked. Refer to the next several pages for input interpreter examples.
Example 1: Units identifier
File Name: TAREINP.SET
100%s23640%i%e Access Setup Modes, Allowing Changes
681%s1%e VAR instance 1
682%sTare units%e P682.-- NAME1 Tare units
686%s12%e P686.-- STR size=12
9990%s1%e
10001%s%c%e
P9990 macro (instance 1)
P10001 Macro table
80.1P==lb%%o%e compare
80.1P=2P%%o%e copy register
GOTlbtare!%%P%e pause
%%N%e if not
80.1P==kg%%o%e compare
80.1P*=0.4535925%%o%e multiply
80.1P=2P%%o%e copy register
Communications 8-47
GOTkgtare!%%P%e pause
%%N%e if not not Tared%%P%e pause
%%E%e end if
220%s1%e
221%s10%e
P220.01 RxInp Enbld
P221.10 RxTrm <LF>
230%s1%e
231%s2%e
232%s%c%e
%e80.1%e%e
P230.01 (instance 1)
P231.02 RxTyp Line
P232.04 RxFmt
Var#1
%e
%e80.1%e%e
.013%e
VAR#1:
<CR> ^M=13
233%s1%e
230%s2%e
P33.01 RxMac 1
P230.02 (instance 2)
232%s%c%e
.026%e
P232.01 RxFmt
<SUB>^Z=26
233%s0%e
%z
P233.0 RxMac none
Exit Setup Mode
Below are two lines of sample data transmissions which would be converted to lb and stored as tare weights when received by a 60 Series instrument with the setup specified above:
50kg
50 kg
The next two lines of sample data transmissions would be stored as tare weights without any units adjustments.
100lb
100 lb
The following four lines of sample data transmissions would not be stored as tare weights.
50xx
50 xx
50 xxsd
100 lbd
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-48 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
Example 2: Process AIAG Barcodes
Another potentially useful application for the GSE Input Interpreter is to process scanned in AIAG barcodes. For those not familiar with the AIAG standard, the following provides a brief primer on the subject.
AIAG
Identifier
Automotive Industry Action Group
The first character(s) of the bar-coded data which indicates the type of data in that barcode.
Type
Usage
AIAG uses Code 3 of 9.
This barcode is typically required to be used by suppliers on shipments to the automotive manufacturers.
The following are a few of the most commonly used identifiers:
P Part No.
Q Quantity
S Serial No.
V Vendor No.
The setup file below shows how the indicator may be setup to properly store away data scanned from AIAG barcodes.
File Name: AIAGINP.SET
100%s23640%i%e Access Setup Modes, Allowing Changes
681%s1%e VAR instance 1
682%sVndr:%e P682.-- NAME1 Vndr units
686%s12%e P686.-- STR size=12
681%s2%e
682%sP/N:%e
VAR instance 2
P682.-- NAME1 P/N
686%s10%e P686.-- STR size=10
681%s3%e
682%sS/N:%e
VAR instance 3
P682.-- NAME1 S/N:
686%s10%e P686.-- STR size=10
681%s4%e
682%sQ:%e
VAR instance 4
P682.-- NAME Q
Communications 8-49
686%s12%e P686.--
9990%s1%e P9990 macro 1
10000%s%c%e P10000 Macro table
Vend#saved%%P%e pause
9990%s2%e
10000%s%c%e
P9990 macro 2
P10000 Macro table
Qty saved%%P%e pause
9990%s3%e
10000%s%c%e
P9990 macro 3
P10000 Macro table
Part#saved%%P%e pause
9990%s4%e P9990 macro 4
10000%s%c%e P10000 Macro table
S/N saved%%P%e pause
220%s1%e
221%s10%e
230%s1%e
231%s2%e
232%s%c%e
V%e
P220.01 RxInp Enbld COMM 1
P221.10 RxTrm <LF>
P230.01 (instance 1)
P231.02 RxTyp Line
P232.04 RxFmt
%e80.1%e%e
.013%e
Vndr:
<CR> ^M=13
233%s1%e P912.00 RxMac 1
221%s10%e
230%s2%e
231%s2%e
232%s%c%e
Q%e
%e80.4%e%e
P221.10 RxTrm <LF>
P230.01 (instance 2)
P231.02 RxTyp Line
P232.04 RxFmt
INT (integer 4)
.013%e
233%s2%e
<CR> ^M=13
P233.02 RxMac 2
221%s10%e P221.10 RxTrm <LF>
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-50 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
230%s3%e
231%s2%e
232%s%c%e
P230.01 (instance 3)
P231.02 RxTyp Line
P232.03 RxFmt
P%e
%e80.2%e%e
.013%e
P/N:
<CR> ^M=13
233%s3%e P233.02 RxMac 3
221%s10%e
230%s4%e
231%s2%e
232%s%c%e
P221.10 RxTrm <LF>
P230.01 (instance 4)
P231.02 RxTyp Line
P232.03 RxFmt
S%e
%e80.3%e%e
.013%e
S/N:
<CR> ^M=13
233%s4%e
%z
P233.04 RxMac 4
Exit Setup Mode
Several transmissions were tested with a 660 that has the above setup. These are shown below along with their respective results.
R ESULT T RANSMITTED OR B AR -
CODED D ATA
Q123
Q 234
Q 345hello
Q321 987
P10-40-5503
P 09-30-0238
P200550-00000
MPNOT STORED
MP NOT STORED
S112233
S112-233
Stores “123” into STR 4.
Stores “234” into STR 4 (leading space ignored).
Stores “345” into STR 4 (hello is stripped off since STR 4 is a numeric field).
Stores “321” in STR 4 (“ 987” is lost due to space).
Stores “10-40-5503” into STR 2.
Stores “09-30-0238” in STR 2 (does not store leading space!).
Stores “200550-000” in STR 2 (loses last two
“0”s since STR size is only 10!
Nothing stored! “M” not defined, “P” not first.
Nothing stored! “M” not defined, “P” not first.
Stores “112233” into STR 3.
Stores “112-233” into STR 3.
Communications 8-51
S112-233x
S112,233x
VCRYSTAL SEMI
VCRYSTALSEMI
V987654
V 987 654
V“GSE INC.”
Stores “112-233x” into STR 3.
Stores “112,233x” into STR 3.
Stores “CRYSTAL” into STR 1 (the “ SEMI” is lost due to the space).
Stores “CRYSTALSEMI” into STR 1.
Stores “987654” into STR 1.
Stores “987” into STR 1 (the leading space is stripped and the space in the middle caused the
“654” to not be stored).
Stores “"GSE" into STR 1 (strips off trailing
"INC."” due to space).
Example 3: Input Interpreter with Spaces in Input
This example shows the method that will allow the input interpreter to include spaces in the scanned in data. The following excerpt is from a 660 setup file:
220%s1%e P220.01 RxInp Enbld
221%s10%e P221.10 RxTrm <LF>
231%s2%e P231.02 RxTyp Line
232%s%c%e P232.08 RxFmt
T%%[^%e
.013%e <CR> ^M=13
]%%%e
%e80.1%e%e VAR #1:
233%s1%e P233.1 RxMac 1
The input specification shown tells the controller to take every character except the <LF> character. The “T” at the beginning of the specification should be set to the appropriate identifier for your specific application and the number 49 following the percent character should be set to match the size of the STR specified for that input, for example, the same value as
P686 if the parameter is VAR 1.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-52 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
R
S
-485 N
ETWORKING
(O
PTION
)
The 60 Series instruments support address recognition. This allows a further degree of multi-drop communications implementation. This feature is supported by software . It is recommended that additional hardware , such as a 485 transceiver device, be added.
This section describes the setup, operation of the GSE RS-485 network option, GSE part number 24660B-401A0.
S ETUP
P250 must be enabled to access P251. P250 by itself only causes the
RTS of COM1 to become a driver enable for the network option. Changing the P251 address to a non-zero value enables the network address recognition receive feature. The valid values for P251 are from 4 to 254.
The controller attempts to send data as a complete packet. This is accomplished by not enabling the transmitter until the transmission is complete or until the transmit buffer becomes full. Transmission completion is defined by the end of a Custom Transmit or by using the
“%q” command to transmit with the “%$” and “%&” macro commands.
Therefore, it is desirable to set the size of the transmit buffer large enough to hold a complete transmission (refer to P207.1).
When P251 is enabled, the controller ignores all data until an <STX> character (for example, <^B>) is followed immediately by a character that matches P251 or the NULL character (for example, an address of 0,
<^@>). When that happens, all subsequent data is processed exactly as if networking were disabled except that when the <ETX> character (for example, <^C>) is received, the receive routine of the controller resets to look for the <STX> character again.
The data packet format recognized by the controller is defined as follows:
<STX> <ADDRESS> <DATA> <DATA> <DATA> <DATA> <DATA> ...
<ETX>
The address is a single byte. There are 250 possible addresses (4 through
254). The address should not be an <STX> or an <ETX>.
The indicator’s address character (defined by P251) can be transmitted using code 402. For example, enter “ .402 [ENTER] ” in a Custom Transmit setup or execute “ 402 %& ” in a macro.
The <DATA> can be any information recognized by the controller, including direct commands -- such as a %p (Print). This would direct the addressed unit to send its Custom Transmit over the network.
The networking feature does not affect transmitted data. Therefore, to send data to another indicator or another device operating on the same protocol, you would need to program your Custom Transmit with an
<STX> followed by the address of the device you want to transmit to, followed by the data you want to send, followed by an ETX. Of course, the same transmission can be accomplished with the macro transmit commands.
Filling strings, setting target variables, updating databases, and so on, are all possible scenarios.
Communications 8-53 i
MODBUS
protocol supports RS-
485 electrical standard for the 60
Series instruments. Refer to
MODBUS
Communications on page 1-25 for more information.
Example: Macro Data Packet Setup
1%”Select COMM 1 (485 port)
2,402%& <STX> <ADDRESS>
Hello 650%$ <DATA>
3%& <ETX>
%q Send data packet (send buffer)
O PERATION
When a character is received, it is compared to the start of block character, <STX>. If it is the start character, then the very next character is compared to the address as defined by setup parameter P251. If it matches or if the transmitted address is 0, the controller processes all of the subsequent data until the end of block character, <ETX>, is received.
If the received address character is not 0 and it does not match P251, then all of the subsequent data is ignored until the next start of packet character is received.
N ETWORK P ROTOCOL
Each COMM port on the indicator can be set up with a unique protocol.
The COM1 port is set aside for use with the network board once the option is installed. The protocol settings for the network board are the same as the settings for COM1 . These settings are found starting at parameter
P200.
All devices connected to the network must have matching protocol settings.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
8-54 Chapter 8
GSE Scale Systems
C h a p t t e r r 9
M
ACROS
Chapter 9 covers macros setup, execution and a complete list of macro commands.
Throughout this chapter, various references are made to the maximum allowable number of macros, databases, communication ports, etc. These references reflect the maximum value allowed for the 660 Series controllers. The maximum values for other models may be limited as noted in the specifications section of Appendix A.
O V E R V I E W
Macro Setup Parameters 9-2
Invoking Macros 9-8
Macro Execution 9-11
Macro Language 9-18
Boolean Logic 9-152
Pointers 9-160
Interrupt Macros 9-161
Macro Debug 9-163
9-1
9-2 Chapter 9 i
Pressing [ID] while viewing P9991
à P9994 will display the macro number for one second.
P999)6 Mac.#
6
P999!
MName
None!
M
ACRO
S
ETUP
One of the most powerful operating features of the 60 Series instruments is the macro programming language. A macro is a programmable routine used to automate a process. A simple macro might consist of a single command to zero a scale upon receiving a remote key input. Complex process control applications are also possible using the vast macro command set to program multiple event-driven macro routines.
Macros are dynamically allocated at P9990. Each macro can contain up to 9998 instruction characters providing adequate memory has been installed. Macro instructions are entered as text characters into the macro table at P10001 à P19999 for the specified macro.
M ACRO S ETUP P ARAMETERS
Macro setup parameters are multiple instance parameters. This means that the same parameter numbers apply to all macros.
A CCESSING M ACRO S ETUP P ARAMETERS
An instance number must be given to identify a macro parameter before it can be accessed. The instance number can be specified at P9990 before selecting other macro parameters. For example,
9990 [SELECT] 6 [ENTER] selects the macro instance parameter and identifies macro 6 as the current macro for the following macro setup parameters P9991 à P19999.
If macro 6 did not exist, Make? NewMC would be displayed prompting you to create a new macro (see Creating a New Macro on page 9-4).
A more direct method of accessing macro setup parameters is to key in both the parameter number and instance at the same time. For example,
9991.6 [SELECT] will provide direct access P9991 (macro name) for macro 6. Refer to the
Navigating Setup Parameters section on page 3-6 for complete details on how to access multiple instance parameters.
M ACRO I NSTANCE S ELECTION
The macro instance selection parameter is used to assign new macros and to access existing ones. Key in the macro number to create or access and press [ENTER] . See page 9-4 for information on creating new macros.
P9991 – M ACRO N AME
The macro name parameter is used to assign or identify the name of the currently selected macro. Assigning a macro name is not required, however the name can prove useful for documentation purposes.
A macro name can be up to 79 characters long. When accessing P9991, only the first five characters of the name are displayed. Use the right and left cursor arrows on the front panel keypad to scroll forward and backward
GSE Scale Systems
P999@0
P999@1
Invok
Std
Invok
Immed
P999#0 Menu
Disbl
P999$0 LmtAc
no
P1000!
Mc 6
††††‡
Macros 9-3 through the entire name. To enter a macro name at P9991, simply key in the name and press [ENTER] . Alpha characters may be entered through the front panel as described in the Key-In Value Parameters beginning on page 3-8. The previous name will be replaced with the entered name. A macro name can be deleted by pressing [CLR] .
P9992 – M
ACRO
P
RIORITY
The macro priority parameter determines whether a macro can only be invoked by standard methods, or executed immediately when invoked by a setpoint or input interpreter.
Invoke Standard
Set P9992 to “Std” to allow a macro to be invoked in a sequential manner.
If another macro is running, the invoked macro will be acknowledged and placed on the macro stack to be executed in the order it was invoked.
Invoke Immediate
Set P9992 to “Immed” to allow a macro to be executed immediately when invoked by a setpoint or input interpreter. If another macro is running, its execution will be interrupted so the invoked macro can execute immediately. The interrupted macro can resume operation after the interrupt macro completes execution. Refer to the Interrupt Macros section beginning on page 9-161 for complete details on interrupt macros.
P9993 – M ACRO M ENU
The macro menu parameter is used to enable the macro to be invoked via the [ID] key. P806 must be configured for “Menu”. Refer to the Front
Panel Keypress section on page 9-8 for complete details on macro menu operation.
P9994 – L IMITED A CCESS
The limited access parameter is used to protect against unauthorized access to a macro. If set for “yes”, it will not be possible to view, edit or download the macro when the setup mode is accessed using the limited access code assigned at P402. Refer to Accessing The Parameter Setup
Mode beginning on page 3-3 for complete details on the limited access code.
P10001
à
P19999 – M
ACRO
T
ABLE
The macro table is a block of 9999 parameter locations used to store macro instructions. Each parameter of the macro table represents one macro character. For example, the first character entered in a macro is stored at P10001. The next character is stored at P10002, and so on. If
52 characters were entered in the macro table, P10052 would contain the last character entered. The last parameter of a macro table is the “end-oftable” character which is represented by a solid block character ‡ . Refer to Creating a New Macro on page 9-4 and Editing Macros on page 9-5 for complete details on creating and editing macro tables.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-4 Chapter 9
?
When using a serial device to enter macro commands, you must type the % character twice consecutively (%%) to enter it in a macro table or any other setup parameter.
i
% SHORTCUT
When using the front panel keypad to enter macro characters, press [ . ] then [ ‚ ] nine times to quickly access the % character.
U SING T HE M ACRO % C HARACTER
The percent character ( % ) is common to all macro commands, always preceding the macro command character. Whenever the % character is encountered during macro execution, the next character is examined to determine what function is to be performed. For example,
%S is the macro command that sounds the beeper. When the % character is encountered, the next character S is analyzed and the beeper function is performed. It is important to realize that most macro commands can be executed from any mode, including the setup mode! This is often a source of confusion with beginning programmers, especially when using a serial device such as a computer keyboard to enter macro commands into a macro table. To better understand the concept of the % character, consider the following:
Executing a Macro Command
Suppose you have just created a new macro number and have selected
P10001 to begin entering macro commands using a computer keyboard connected through one of the comm ports. You are about to execute the
%S macro command as previously described. As you type the % character to begin the entry, notice that nothing appears on the display!
Remember, most macro commands can be executed in the setup mode.
Having received a % character, the indicator is now waiting for the next character to determine what macro function, if any, to perform. Thus when you type S to complete the entry, the beeper function is performed immediately. Since the macro command was processed, nothing was entered into the macro table.
Entering a Macro Command
Using a serial device to enter a % character into a macro table or any other setup parameter is accomplished by transmitting two consecutive % characters ( %% ). Considering the same %S example above, press % to begin the entry. As before, nothing appears on the display. Type % again. This time the % character appears in the entry buffer. Press S , then [ENTER] to save the command in the macro table.
C REATING A N EW M ACRO
Each new macro must be assigned at P9990 and configured as described in the following procedure. New macros can be assigned in any order beginning with any available macro number 1 à 250.
To create a new macro:
1. From the setup mode, key in 9990 [SELECT] to access the macro instance selection parameter.
2. Key in the macro number to create and press [ENTER] .
3. Press [ENTER] again at the Make? NewMc prompt to confirm the entry. P9990 now shows the new macro number.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Creating a New Macro
9990 ó
P999)0
6 å
P999)0
å
P999)6
ó
P999!
Start Batch
å
Mac.#
None!
Make?
NewMc
Mac.#
6
Mname
None!
P999!
ó
P999@0
ó
Mname
Start
Invok
Std
P999#0
ó
P999$0
ó
Menu
Disbl
LmtAc
no
P1000!
1%A
å
Mc 6
††††‡
P1000$ Mc 6
†1%A‡
„
= scroll forward è
‚
= scroll backward ç
Macros 9-5
4. Press [SELECT] to advance to the macro name parameter at P9991.
If desired, key in the macro name and press [ENTER] . Alpha characters may be entered through the front panel as described in the
Key-In Value Parameters section.
5. Press [SELECT] to advance to the macro priority parameter at P9992.
Choose either Std or Immed by pressing [ENTER] to toggle between the two choices.
6. Press [SELECT] to advance to the macro menu parameter at P9993.
Choose Enbld or Disbl by pressing [ENTER] to toggle between the two choices.
7. Press [SELECT] to advance to the limited access parameter at
P9994. Choose yes or no by pressing [ENTER] to toggle between the two choices.
8. Press [SELECT] to advance to the macro table at P10001. Begin entering the macro characters. Alpha characters may be entered through the front panel as described in the Key-In Value Parameters section. As you key in characters, they are placed in the entry buffer until you press [ENTER] to save them in the macro table. Up to 79 characters can be held in the entry buffer before you must press
[ENTER] , however it is good practice to press [ENTER] after each macro command to avoid time consuming mistakes. Note that the parameter number automatically advances once per entered character.
9. Save the macro configuration by exiting the setup mode as described in the Exiting The Parameter Setup Mode section. Macros are saved to EEPROM or instead to the database setup RAM if allocated at
P60040.
!
If you exit the setup mode without entering any characters in a macro table, the configuration for that macro will be lost when changes are saved. The macro will no longer exist!
E DITING M ACROS
Characters may be added to or deleted from any point in a macro table.
N AVIGATING A M ACRO T ABLE
A macro table begins at P10001 and ends at the end-of-table character.
Each character in the macro table, including the end-of-table character, represents one unique parameter location within the table. Thus, it is possible to directly access any point in a macro table by selecting the appropriate parameter. For example,
10052.2 [SELECT] will access the 52 nd
character in macro table #2. For larger macros it is helpful to obtain a copy of the macro download to identify the exact location of a macro command within a table (see Downloading Individual
Macros on page 9-166).
The right and left arrow keys on the front panel keypad can also be used to scroll the characters of the macro table forward and backward across
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-6 Chapter 9
Example:
Inserting Characters in a Macro Table
19999.6 ó
P1000$ Mc 6
†1%A‡
‚‚
P1000@
0 å
Mc 6
†††1%
P1000#
„„
P1000%
Mc 6
††10%
Mc 6
10%A‡ the 5-character macro window. When scrolling past the beginning or end or the macro table, the display “wraps” to the opposite end of the table.
I NSERTING C HARACTERS IN A M ACRO T ABLE
Example – Inserting Characters in a Macro Table demonstrates how to insert a character into an existing macro table. Before inserting characters in a macro table, you must first access the macro table parameter that represents the desired insertion point. Insertion will always occur between the last two characters of the 2X5 matrix display. Access the insertion point by keying in the macro table parameter number (if known) and pressing [SELECT] . You can also use the right and left cursor arrows on the front panel keypad to scroll forward and backward through the macro table to the desired location.
P1000@
Insertion Point
Mc 6
†††1%
Insert characters by keying them in and pressing [ENTER] . Alpha characters may be entered through the front panel as described in the
Key-In Value Parameters section.
i
Selecting P19999 as shown in the example – Inserting Characters in a Macro Table will always access the end-of-table parameter directly, regardless of the macro size.
D ELETING C HARACTERS IN A M ACRO T ABLE
Before deleting characters in a macro table, you must access the macro table character that represents the desired deletion point. The last character of the 2X5 matrix display will be cleared each time [CLR] is pressed.
P1000@
Mc 6
†††1%
Deletion Point
D ELETING M ACROS
Macros can be deleted collectively or individually. Deleting macros collectively is usually performed just prior to uploading macros of a new setup file. This ensures that no macros from the previous setup will remain after the new setup is loaded. Deleting macros individually is done for several reasons. Delete an unused macro to conserve memory. Also, before uploading a single macro that already exists, the existing macro table must first be cleared. Failure to clear the macro will result in the new macro being appended to the existing one rather than replacing it.
GSE Scale Systems
?
?
Delete unused macros to conserve memory and prevent unexpected macro execution.
?
Delete all macros before uploading a new setup file.
Clear an existing macro table before uploading a new one.
Macros 9-7
To delete all macros:
1. From the setup mode, key in 9990 [SELECT] to access the macro instance selection parameter. The display shows the first assigned macro number.
2. Press [CLR] . The display prompts Clear One?
.
3. Key in 999 [ENTER] . The display shows Mac.# None!
indicating that all macros have been deleted.
- or -
Press [CLR] to cancel deletion.
i
When uploading macros in a text file, add the following line prior to the first macro to ensure all existing macros are cleared first.
9990%s%c999%e Clear all existing setups
To delete individual macros:
1. From the setup mode, key in 9990 [SELECT] to access the macro instance selection parameter. The display shows the first assigned macro number.
2. Press [CLR] . The display prompts Clear One?
.
3. Press [ENTER] to delete the macro.
- or -
Press [CLR] to cancel deletion.
To clear a macro table:
1. From the setup mode, key in 19999.X [SELECT] (where X = macro number) to access the end-of-table parameter. The display shows
‡ in the last character position.
2. Press [CLR] . The display prompts Clear All?
.
3. Press [ENTER] to clear the macro table.
- or -
Press [CLR] to cancel deletion.
i
When uploading a macro in a text file, add the following line prior to the first instruction of the macro to ensure the table is cleared.
Change the macro number (6) as necessary.
19999.6%s%c%e Clear macro table #6
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-8 Chapter 9
I
NVOKING
M
ACROS
The following sources can be used to invoke macro execution:
•
Front Panel Keypress
•
Remote Key (460 Series)
•
Macro Menu
•
Setpoint Activation or Deactivation
•
Input Interpreter
•
Serial Data
•
Another Macro
Example:
Redefining a Key to Invoke a Macro
801%s10%e Zero Mc 10
MACRO #10 – ZERO SCALE
EnterCode?%G get code entry
==23640%o if entry = 23640
%z zero
%E end if
F RONT P ANEL K EYPRESS
Any key on the front panel keypad can be used to invoke a macro. The function keys, along with [START] , [STOP] and [SETUP] , are predefined to invoke specific macros. Other keys can be redefined at P800 à P820 to invoke a specified macro rather than perform its original function. This allows you to completely customize the keypad for any application. The example – Redefining a Key to Invoke a Macro demonstrates how to redefine the [ZERO] key to invoke a macro which will require the operator to enter a password before the scale will perform the zero function.
Table 9-1: Front Panel Keypad Macro Assignments
460 Keys 465 Keys
560 Series
Keys
660 S ERIES
K EYS
-
-
-
-
F1
TARGET
-
-
F1 / START
F2 / STOP
-
-
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Remote Key 1 Remote Key 1 Remote Key 1 START
Remote Key 2 Remote Key 2 Remote Key 2 STOP
SETUP
SELECT
ZERO
TARE
UNITS
SELECT
ZERO
TARE
UNITS
SELECT
ZERO
TARE
UNITS
SELECT
ZERO
TARE
UNITS
SCALE SEL.
-
CLEAR
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Any Key
SCALE SEL.
ID
3
4
5
1
2
.
0
ENTER
CLEAR
6
7
8
9
Any Key
SCALE SEL.
F3 / ID
3
4
5
1
2
.
0
ENTER
CLEAR
6
7
8
9
Any Key
6
7
8
9
Any Key
SCALE SEL.
ID
3
4
5
1
2
.
0
ENTER
CLEAR
ASCII
V ALUE
P REDEFINED
M ACRO #
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
224
240
233
49
50
51
52
53
229
227
46
48
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
243
250
244
245
54
55
56
57
-
M ACRO
A SSIGNMENT
P ARAMETER
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
800
801
802
803
816
817
818
819
820
E QUIVALENT
M ACRO
C OMMAND
%`
%p
%i
-
-
-
-
-
%e
%c
-
-
1%^
2%^
3%^
4%^
5%^
6%^
7%^
8%^
%s
%z
%t
%u
-
-
-
-
-
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-9
Example
Using the Macro Menu – Sample Setup
806%s1%e IDUse Menu
9990%s11%e%e Mac.#11
9991%sSTARTFILL%e MName
9993%s1%e Menu Enbld
19999.11%s%c%e Macro #11
%%c%e clear
1%%A%e start fill
9990%s12%e%e Mac.#12
9991%sTargtWght?%e MName
9993%s1%e Menu Enbld
19999.12%s%c%e Macro #12
%%\%e if no entry
1%%i%e select VAR#1
TargtWght?%%G%e get entry
%%E%e end if
=80.1P%%o%e save entry
1%%s%e net mode
9990%s13%e%e Mac.#13
9991%sFree Fall?%e MName
9993%s1%e Menu Enbld
19999.13%s%c%e Macro #13
%%\%e if no entry
2%%i%e select VAR#2
Free Fall?%%G%e get entry
%%E%e end if
=80.2P%%o%e save entry
1%%s%e net mode i
The 460 Series indicators will process each keypress in a mode dependent manner. For example, the [TARE / ENTER] key for the 460 will interpret the key either as a [TARE] key or an
[ENTER] key depending on the current mode of operation (i.e.
performing an auto-tare versus entering a numeric prompt).
M ACRO M ENU
The macro menu provides a means of invoking any named macro from the front panel keypad. The following setup is required to use the macro menu:
•
The [ID] key must be set for Menu at P806.
•
Macros to appear in the menu must be set for Menu Enbld at
P9993.
•
A macro name must be assigned at P9991. The first 10 characters of the macro name will be displayed when the macro is selected in the menu.
)0
é lb±²³
Net
START
FILL
Targt
Wght?
ó
Free
Fall?
2.5å
)0
é lb±²³
Net
START
FILL
å
Filling Routine Begins
To invoke a macro from the macro menu:
1. Press [ID] to display the first named macro.
2. Press [ENTER] to execute the displayed macro.
- or -
Press [SELECT] to display the next macro in the menu.
- or -
Press [ID] or [ZERO] to exit the menu without invoking a macro.
!
When in the macro menu mode, the keypad cannot be used to invoke macros by any means other than the macro menu. Most keys are disabled in this mode.
Combining Entry Prompts with the Macro Menu
Since a macro’s name is used as the macro menu prompt, you may consider naming the macro as an entry prompt. Example - Using the
Macro Menu shows a scenario where the macro menu invokes a macro that will start a filling operation. Two other macros were included in the menu to prompt an operator for a target or free fall weight. Prompting for an entry directly from the menu name is possible due to the fact that any characters in the entry buffer at the time [ENTER] is pressed will be passed on to the invoked macro.
In this scenario, macro 10 starts the fill operation by activating setpoint #1 to open the fill valve. Note the %c (clear) command at the beginning of this macro. This is done as a precaution to clear the entry buffer in the event an operator had pressed some keys before starting the fill operation.
For example, if the operator had pressed 3 [ENTER] at the START
FILL menu prompt, then the ‘ 3 ’ would have been passed from the entry buffer to the macro resulting in the macro executing the instruction 31%A rather than 1%A as intended.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-10 Chapter 9
Example:
Invoking a Macro at Power-Up
5099%s2%e Setpt 2
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sPower-Up%e SPNam Power-Up
5110%s4%e Activ Alwys
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s250%e AcMac 250
5113%s0%e AcMtn Ign'd
5130%s5%e Deact Never
5131%s0.00%e DeDly 0.00
5132%s0%e DeMac None!
In the case of the prompts for macro 11 and 12, operator entry is expected. The entry is passed from the entry buffer to the macro where it is stored in a variable. If the operator neglected to make an entry before pressing [ENTER] , these macros re-prompt the operator to do so.
S ETPOINT A CTIVATION / D EACTIVATION
Any of the 256 setpoints, whether inputs or outputs, can be configured to invoke any macro upon activation and/or deactivation. This is perhaps the most versatile of all methods used to invoke macros, providing true process control capability. Chapter 9 provides complete details on setpoint configuration.
U SING A S ETPOINT TO I NVOKE A M ACRO AT P OWER -UP
A setpoint can be used to automatically invoke a macro at power-up. This
“power-up” macro can then be used to perform a variety of operations such as displaying an operating menu on the 4X20 VFD, initializing variables, identifying a power failure, etc. As shown in Example - Invoking a Macro at Power-Up , a power-up setpoint is configured to be active always and deactive never. This causes the setpoint to become active immediately upon power-up thus invoking the power-up macro. Since the setpoint is never deactivated, it will never change states until a power interruption or upon entering the setup mode.
I NPUT I NTERPRETER
The input interpreter can be used to invoke a macro when a specified character or group of characters is received through a communication port.
Refer to the Input Interpreter section for complete details on the input interpreter.
S ERIAL D ATA
A macro will be invoked if the %^ Call \ Go To Macro command is received and processed by one of the communication ports. For example, transmitting the macro command 100%^ to the indicator will result in macro 100 being invoked.
The %H Redefine Comm Port Function macro command can also be used to invoke a macro with each character received on the specified port.
O THER M ACROS
Macros can invoke other macros with the %^ Call \ Go To Macro command or with a variation of the %J Jump to Tag macro command.
GSE Scale Systems
MACRO
STACK
200
199
198
á
INVOKED
MACRO#
á
2
1
4
3
102
101
EXECUTE 6
Figure: Macro Stack
Macros 9-11
M
ACRO
E
XECUTION
Macros instructions are executed sequentially within a macro, beginning with the first instruction and continuing until it reaches a stopping point, such as the end of the macro or a break command. Branching within a macro or from one macro to another is made possible with the use of
Boolean logic commands, macro go-to or call commands and jump & tag commands.
Only one macro can execute at a time. Requests to invoke additional macros during the execution of another are pushed onto the macro stack to be executed in turn. It is possible to interrupt a macro to immediately execute another. It is also possible to abort or suspend macro execution via the front panel keypad.
The speed at which macro commands are executed depends on:
•
Enabled Scales
•
Enabled Setpoints
•
Custom Transmits
•
Enabled Analog Outputs
•
A/D Interval
In general, the more non-macro functions the scale must perform, the less often the processor can execute macro commands. For example, the processor receives 60 A/D interrupts each second during which time it must update all active weight parameters. Macro commands are executed between these interrupts. If a second scale is added, approximately 60 more A/D interrupts occur each second. A continuous custom transmit will require yet more processor resources. The time it takes to process these additional functions results is less time to execute macro commands.
Even with numerous demands on the processor resources, macro execution speed will be adequate for most applications. Execution speed can be significantly increased by reducing the A/D interrupt interval (at the expense of weight conversions) with the %r A/D Interval macro command.
M ACRO S TACK
A macro will be executed immediately when invoked unless another macro is in process. If so, the invoked macro will be pushed to the top of the macro stack . Macros on the macro stack are executed in a first-in, first-out basis.
The figure – Macro Stack illustrates the macro stack concept. Here there are 2 macros on the macro stack, macros 101 and 102. These macros were invoked, but cannot run because macro 6 is presently executing. If another macro is invoked while macro 6 is still running, it will be pushed onto the 3 rd
position of the macro stack. When macro 6 ends, macro 101 will execute and macro 102 will move down to the 1 st
position on the stack.
Any other macros on the stack will also move down one position.
Up to 200 macros can be stacked in this manner. If the macro stack limit is exceeded, a macro stack error results. The display will show Code81
Macro Stack and all macro execution stops. This situation can occur
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-12 Chapter 9 i
Use the macro debug download to analyze macro stack activity.
Example:
Using the Entry Buffer to Perform a
Manual Tare Entry
1@5
2.5
1@5
ô
1)0 lb
Gross
>
2.5
lb
Net if macros are continually invoked faster than they can execute. Avoid using program loops or long entry sequences when other macros are being invoked. If this is not practical, consider using interrupt macros (see the Interrupt Macros section beginning on page 9-161) to help prioritize macro execution. Other macro tools such as the %B Break Macro command can also help manage the macro stack. You can analyze macro stack activity by performing a macro debug download (see the Macro
Debug section beginning on page 9-163).
C ALLING M ACROS
If one macro calls another, the called macro is executed and the calling macro is pushed onto the bottom of the macro stack. Any other macros on the stack will move up one position. Thus the calling macro will resume execution immediately after the called macro ends.
E NTRY B UFFER
The entry buffer is perhaps the most versatile tool in macro programming.
A thorough understanding of the entry buffer concept will not only help you write more efficient programs, it will also help you to avoid many unforeseen problems encountered by novice programmers.
In simple terms, the entry buffer can be defined as a temporary data register used to store operator input before it is used as part of another function. Characters in the entry buffer appear in the 2X5 display matrix as shown below. Here, the number 100.35
was keyed into the entry buffer.
)00
Entry Buffer
> 1
00.35
Notice how the 2X5 display matrix identifies characters in the entry buffer with the > symbol in the upper left corner.
M ANUAL E NTRIES
The entry buffer can hold up to 79 characters before it must either be cleared or used as part of another function. For example, if you perform a manual tare by keying in 2.5 [TARE] , the number 2.5
appears in the entry buffer where it remains until the [TARE] key is pressed. The number becomes part of the tare function and is assigned as a manual tare entry
(see example – Using the Entry Buffer to Perform a Manual Tare Entry ).
The following are examples of other functions that can use the entry buffer:
1 [UNITS] select units #1 (kg)
5 [PRINT] send custom transmit #5
3 [SCALE SELECT] select scale #3
2.2 [SELECT] select tare parameter for scale #2
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-13
10 [ID]
50 [ENTER]
[CLR] access VAR #10 set parameter value = 50 clear the entry buffer
Example:
Using the Entry Buffer to Begin a Macro
MACRO #6 - START
%A start auger
5
)0
…
>
5
Setpoint #5 is activated (5%A)
M ACRO E NTRIES
Macros can use characters in the entry buffer in the same manner as the keypad functions. Example – Using the Entry Buffer to Begin a Macro demonstrates how a number in the entry buffer can be used to activate any setpoint when macro 6 is invoked. Macro 6 consists of only the %A activate setpoint command which will not activate a setpoint unless a setpoint number is specified. Thus if the operator presses only the
[START] key, nothing will happen. However, if the operator keys in the desired setpoint number, this number will be used to begin the macro and the macro now becomes 5%A .
!
Any characters in the entry buffer at the time a macro is invoked will result in these characters being used by the macro. For example, if the [STOP] key is programmed to deactivate all setpoints with the *%D command and the operator keys in 10
[STOP] , the macro will execute as 10*%D . This is not a valid command and the macro will not execute properly. In these situations, be sure to clear the entry buffer with the %c or %[ macro command at the beginning of the macro.
Batch#
(VAR#1)
10
11
12
13
14
Name
(VAR#2)
40# Salt
80# Salt
Sand
Cement
Soil
Target
(VAR#3)
40
Valve#
(VAR#4)
1
80
50
50
25
2
3
4
5
Figure: Sample Database
M ACRO E XECUTION
The most versatile use of the entry buffer is during macro execution.
Values and strings can be manipulated in much the same way a word processor allows you to copy and paste text. Refer to the macro Entry
Buffer commands for complete details on entry buffer-related commands.
When a macro is running, it is not possible to put characters in the entry buffer except through the macro itself. Characters put in the entry buffer during macro execution are not shown on the 2X5 matrix display as with the manual entries. A single keypress or characters received on the comm ports will be buffered until all macros on the macro stack have ended. Buffered characters will then appear in the entry buffer in the order received.
Copying Values to the Entry Buffer
If a macro copies a value into the entry buffer, the copied information is temporarily inserted into the macro code and is used by the following macro command. For example, consider the following routine which copies the current time & date in text format to string variable #1:
11.0.18561P%o copy formatted time/date to entry buffer
=80.1P%o copy entry buffer to VAR#1
When this code is executed, the first line copies the time/date in text format to the entry buffer, thus inserting it before the assignment on the second line. Effectively, this code will execute as follows:
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-14 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
11.0.18561P%o
12:00:01 am 08/01/1999=80.1P%o
A more powerful use of this technique is illustrated in the following example. Here, the operator is prompted for a batch number that is subsequently recalled from the database shown in Figure 9-2. This updates variable #2, #3 and #4 with the corresponding name, target and valve number. The batch name is then displayed on the 4X20 VFD and the corresponding valve is activated.
EnterBatch%G prompt for entry
=80.1P%o copy entry to VAR#1
1,1%y
80.2P%o
P4,1c%C
80.4P%o
%A recall batch# copy batch name to entry buffer copy entry buffer to 4X20 VFD copy valve# to entry buffer activate valve#
Assuming the operator entries a batch number of 12, this code will execute as:
EnterBatch%G
=80.1P%o
1,1%y
80.2P%o
SandP4,1c%C
80.4P%o
3%A
As you can see, the entry buffer allows this same routine to display any batch name and activate any valve number.
Saving and Restoring the Entry Buffer
Contents of the entry buffer can be saved in a temporary register, much like saving text to the clipboard in a word processor. This data can then be restored (pasted) into the executing macro code. This is an extremely useful technique made possible by the %[ Save Entry Buffer and %]
Restore Entry Buffer macro commands.
11.0.18496P%o copy formatted time to entry buffer
%[ save entry buffer (copy to clipboard)
12:00 am
Time %]P4,1%C display time on 4X20 VFD (paste clipboard)
12:00 am
Time %]%$ send time out comm port (paste clipboard)
12:00 am
Macros 9-15
Example:
Saving and Restoring an Entry During
Macro Execution
5099%s210%e Setpt 210
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sTRANSMIT%e SPNam TRANSMIT
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s250%e AcMac 250
5130%s4%e Deact Alwys
5131%s10.00%e DeDly 10.00
5132%s210%e DeMac 210
5133%s0%e DeMtn Ignrd
MACRO #210 – TRANSMIT DATA
%[ save entry
80.6P+=1%o increment VAR#6
3%Q send data
210%A re-start timer
%] restore entry
In the example above, the %[ macro command transfers the time from the entry buffer to the temporary register (clipboard). This data is then be pasted into the following macro commands with the %] macro command which displays and transmits the time value. Notice that data stored in the temporary register can be pasted more than once. Contents of the temporary register will not change unless updated by another %[ command. If there is no data in the entry buffer when a %[ command is encountered, the temporary register (clipboard) is cleared.
Another important use of the save and restore entry buffer commands is maintaining an operator entry while at the same time allowing a macro to be invoked asynchronously. For example, suppose an operator is keying in a manual tare weight when the macro of Example – Saving and
Restoring an Entry During Macro Execution is invoked before the [TARE] key is pressed. As the example shows, the entry will be stored in the temporary register before proceeding with the following macro commands.
When the macro ends, the entry is restored to the entry buffer making the process completely transparent to the operator! Had the save and restore commands been omitted, the entry would have become part of the invoked macro resulting in a macro execution error and a lost tare entry.
A string variable can be used as a substitution for the save and restore commands as used in Example – Saving and Restoring an Entry During
Macro Execution.
=80.10P%o copy entry buffer to VAR#10
80.6P+=1%o
3%Q
210%A
80.10P%o increment send data re-start timer copy VAR#10 to entry buffer
This method allows you to use the %[ and %] commands for other macro functions while still maintaining an operator entry in a variable.
Example:
Using Macros to Access the Setup Mode
MACRO #1 – ACCESS CALIBRATE MODE
100%s54321%i%e access Quick CAL
MACRO #8 – ACCESS SETUP MODE
100%s23640%i%e access setup
MACRO #2 – CHANGE CUSTOM UNIT
0%O if jumper = YES
UNIT NAME?%G get entry
=80.1P%o save entry
CONV.FACTR%G get entry
=80.2P%o save entry
100%s23640%i%e access setup
151.1%s80.1P%o%e assign unit name
152.1%s80.2P%o%e assign factor
%z%c%e%e exit setup
%E end if
U SING M ACROS I N T HE S ETUP M ODE
A macro can be used to enter the setup mode and will continue to execute thereafter, even after exiting the setup mode, until it ends. This technique can be used in many ways as shown in the example – Using Macros to
Access the Setup Mode . Here, macro #1 provides a single [F1] keystroke to invoke the calibration mode. The [SETUP] key will access the setup mode via macro #8 without having to key in the access code. Macro #2 will also access the setup mode, but only if the program jumper (E4) is in the ‘YES’ position. It will then proceed to change the name and conversion factor of custom unit #1 as entered in VAR#1 and VAR#2 respectively, thus providing an easy method for changing between any number of custom units.
!
Once macro execution stops, it is not possible to invoke another macro from within the setup mode. Thus if a macro error occurs causing the macro to abort, you will have to exit the setup mode manually. Also remember that setpoints and weight conversions are not monitored in the setup mode. Do not attempt to check the status of setpoints or weight values while in the setup mode.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-16 Chapter 9
Example:
Accessing the Macro Abort Menu
ã + ó
)0
ó
Abort
Mac??
)0
ó
)0
ó
)0
Sspnd
Mac??
Disbl
Mac??
Resum
Mac??
Macro #8 in the previous example could be changed to %s23640%i%e allowing you to key in any parameter number to access directly. For example,
200.1 [SETUP] would automatically access P200.1 (comm1 baud rate).
M ACRO A BORT
In certain situations it may be necessary to stop the execution of a macro.
This feature is primarily used during program development as a debug tool, allowing you to break an endless loop or perhaps abort a long entry or computation routine. A macro can be aborted via the front key panel or through serial communications.
T HE M ACRO A BORT M ENU
Pressing [CLR] + [SELECT] during macro execution will stop the current macro. (Press [ZERO] + [TARE] + [SELECT] to abort a macro on a 460.)
If P9981 is set for Abort Immed , the current macro is stopped and the macro stack is cleared. If P9981 is set for Abort Menu , the current macro is temporarily suspended pending a selection from the Macro Abort
Menu shown in Example – Accessing the Macro Abort Menu . Press
[SELECT] to scroll through the abort menu. Press [ENTER] to choose the displayed abort option. The four options are as follows:
• Abort Mac??
(Abort Macro)
Stops execution of the current macro and clears the macro stack. This selection will only appear if a macro was running when the abort command was issued.
• Sspnd Mac??
(Suspend Macros)
Suspends execution of the current macro and inhibits execution of other macros on the stack. A macro invoked when macros are suspended will be pushed onto the macro stack. Macro execution will not resume until Resum Mac??
is selected from the Macro Abort
Menu.
•
Disbl Mac??
(Disable Macros)
Disables execution of all macros. The macro stack is cleared. Any request to invoke a macro is ignored. Macro execution will not resume until Resum Mac??
is selected from the Macro Abort Menu.
•
Resum Mac??
(Resume Macros)
Resumes normal execution of all macros on the macro stack and allows new macros to be invoked and executed. This is the only way to resume normal operation after previously suspending or disabling macros.
?
Macros will remain suspended or disabled indefinitely until Resum
Mac??
is selected from the Macro Abort Menu. Macro execution will not resume automatically upon exiting the setup mode. The message Macro Suspd will be displayed briefly upon exiting the setup mode to remind you that macro execution is inhibited.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-17 i
The serial macro abort command will only work for comm ports set for
“standard” receive at P205 or enabled for standard receive via the %H command.
A BORTING M ACROS V IA S ERIAL C OMMAND
A macro will be aborted if the single decimal byte 248 is received on any of the enabled communication ports during macro execution. If P9981 is set for Abort Menu , the Macro Abort Menu is invoked. Characters in the communication port receive buffer are retained.
T HE A BORT M ACRO
When a macro is aborted, you can specify an “Abort Macro” at P9980.
The Abort Macro is executed immediately after aborting the current macro.
If a macro is disabled, the Abort Macro will not execute until macros are resumed. Suspending macros will not invoke the Abort Macro.
D ISABLING M ACROS A T P OWER UP
Macros can be disabled at power-up by pressing and holding the [CLR] key when applying power. Continue to hold the [CLR] key until the display shows Macro Disbl . At this point all macro execution will be inhibited and the keypad will assume standard operation. The beeper volume will be set to maximum. This allows you to troubleshoot problems that occur immediately upon power-up that would otherwise prevent you from accessing the setup mode. When disabling macros by this method, it is only possible to resume macro execution by exiting the setup mode or cycling power.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-18 Chapter 9
M
ACRO
L
ANGUAGE
The 60 Series macro language is a full-featured, straightforward programming language tailored specifically for weight-based process control. This section categorizes the entire macro command set with reference to individual macro command syntax.
M ACRO C OMMANDS
Macro commands are listed in the following general categories. Some commands may apply to more than one category
Assignment Commands
Branching Commands
Communication Commands
Comparison Commands
Database Commands
Diagnostic Commands
Display Commands
Entry Buffer Commands
Keyboard Commands
Operator Interface Commands
Scale Performance Commands
Setpoint Commands
A SSIGNMENT C OMMANDS
Assignment commands write new values to data registers.
M ACRO C OMMAND
%o
%o
%m
%v
D ESCRIPTION
Math Assignment
String Concatenation
Modify String
Write to Non-Volatile Memory
P AGE
9-112
9-121
9-107
9-130
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-19
B RANCHING C OMMANDS
Branching commands, generally used in conjunction with comparison commands, redirect macro execution to non-sequential program locations.
M ACRO C OMMAND
%^
%B
%T
%J
%{
%}
%N
%E
D ESCRIPTION
Call/Goto Macro
Break Macro
Tag Position
Jump to Tag
Start Group
End Group
Else (If Not)
End If
P AGE
9-89
9-50
9-83
9-66
9-152
9-152
9-75
9-61
%’
%U
%q
%Q
%X
C
OMMUNICATION
C
OMMANDS
Communication commands control keypad and comm port operation.
M ACRO C OMMAND
%!
%H
%”
%$
%&
D ESCRIPTION
Enable/Disable Comm Port
Redefine Comm Port Function
Select Comm Port
Send Text
Send Control Code
P AGE
9-31
9-63
9-32
9-34
9-34
%( If Character Received 9-37
%) Clear Receive Buffer 9-40
Record Received Serial Data
If Transmit Buffer Empty
Enable RS-485 Transmitter
Send Custom Transmit
Request Display Data
9-35
9-84
9-123
9-77
9-86
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-20 Chapter 9
%B
%/
%g
%_
%g
%a
%f
%j
%o
%S
C OMPARISON C OMMANDS
Comparison commands are used to evaluate a condition. Branching commands are then used to redirect macro execution depending on whether the condition was true or false.
%E
%\
%Y
%#
%u
%M
%Q
%U
M ACRO C OMMAND
%{
%}
%|
%N
%(
%m
%O
%F
D ESCRIPTION
Start Group
End Group
Or
Else (if not)
End If
If No Entry
If Yes (Enter)
If Current Scale
If Current Units
If Current Mode
If Custom Transmit Continuous
If Transmit Buffer Empty
If Character Received
If Character in String
If Setpoint Activated / Queued for
Activation
If Setpoint Deactivated / Queued for
Deactivation
If Macro on Stack
If Macro Interrupted
If Macro Error
If Database Error
If Sample Error
If Accuracy Achieved
If Parameter Preset
If Keypress/Remote Key Held
If Math Comparison
If Beeper Program Running
P AGE
9-152
9-152
9-152
9-75
9-61
9-88
9-87
9-34
9-128
9-74
9-78
9-85
9-37
9-109
9-75
9-61
9-52
9-45
9-104
9-90
9-104
9-93
9-102
9-105
9-119
9-82
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-21
12%y
13%y
14%y
15%y
16%y
17%y
18%y
19%y
%_
%w
D ATABASE C OMMANDS
Database commands are used exclusively with the database option.
7%y
8%y
9%y
10%y
11%y
M ACRO C OMMAND
1%y
2%y
3%y
4%y
5%y
6%y
D ESCRIPTION
Recall Row
Update Row
Make Row
Print Database
First/Last Row
Next/Previous Row & Get/Recall Row
Number
Next Match
Delete Row
Clear Column
Clear Database
Set Database
P AGE
9-131
9-132
9-133
9-133
9-134
9-135
9-137
9-138
9-138
9-139
9-140
Set Column
Download Database
Print Row
Print Errors
Upload New
Upload Update
Sort Database
Database Auto-Test
If Database Error
DSD Database Functions
9-140
9-141
9-143
9-144
9-145
9-146
9-147
9-148
9-90
9-149
D IAGNOSTIC C OMMANDS
Diagnostic commands are used primarily for debugging system operation.
M ACRO C OMMAND
%*
R%`
%’
%B
E%g
%X
19%y
D ESCRIPTION
Record A/D Data
Reset A/D
Record Received Serial Data
Macro Debug Trace Buffer
If Macro Error Occurred
Request Display Data
Database Auto-Test
P AGE
9-40
9-92
9-35
9-50
9-104
9-86
9-148
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-22 Chapter 9
D ISPLAY C OMMANDS
Display commands provide direct control of displayed information.
M ACRO C OMMAND
%d
%C
%C
%C
%I
%R
%u
%s
D ESCRIPTION
Display Control
Display Text on 4X20 VFD
Display Text on 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
Draw Box/Line on 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
Refresh Display
Rename Mode
Rename Units
Select Mode
P AGE
9-95
9-52
9-55
9-57
9-65
9-80
9-128
9-126
E
NTRY
B
UFFER
C
OMMANDS
Entry buffer commands copy data to the entry buffer. Data copied to the entry buffer may then be saved or used immediately to check a condition or to serve as part of another macro command.
%M
%m
%m
%o
%\
%#
%k
%L
M ACRO C OMMAND
%c
%[
%]
%U
?%a
?%g
D ESCRIPTION
Clear Entry Buffer
Save Entry Buffer
Restore Entry Buffer
If No Entry
Get Current Scale
Get Current Filter
Get Current Language
Get Current Mode
Get String Length
Get Character Position in String
Get Value
Get Number of Characters in Transmit
Buffer
Get Target Accuracy
Get Sample Error
9-85
9-94
9-104
P AGE
9-94
9-87
9-88
9-88
9-33
9-106
9-73
9-74
9-108
9-109
9-112
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-23
K EYBOARD C OMMANDS
Keyboard commands emulate front panel key functions.
%s
%t
%u
%z
1%^
2%^
3%^
4%^
M ACRO C OMMAND
%`
%c
%e
%i
%p
Scale Select
Clear
Enter / Sample
D ESCRIPTION
ID
Select
Tare
Units
Zero
F1 Key
F2 Key
F3 Key
F4 Key
5%^
6%^
7%^
8%^
F5 Key
Start Key
Stop Key
Setup Key
O PERATOR I NTERFACE C OMMANDS
Operator interface commands get user input or provide user feedback.
M ACRO C OMMAND D ESCRIPTION P AGE
%K
%K
%P
%S
%W
%[
%]
%\
%G
%n
%X
%Y
Save Entry Buffer
Restore Entry Buffer
If No Entry
Get Entry
Get Numeric Entry
Get Entry From 4X20 VFD
Get Entry From 8X40 and 16X40
Pause
Sound Beeper
Wait For Keypress
Request Display Data
If Yes (Enter)
9-67
9-71
9-76
9-81
9-85
9-87
9-88
9-88
9-62
9-111
9-86
9-87
9-126
9-127
9-129
9-149
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-8
P AGE
9-92
9-94
9-98
9-104
9-123
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-8
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-24 Chapter 9
S CALE P ERFORMANCE C OMMANDS
Scale performance commands are used to change or indicate the status of various system properties.
%L
%M
%\
%a
%b
%g
%-
%#
%+
%f
%k
M ACRO C OMMAND
%r
%@
%P
%,
%s
D ESCRIPTION
Set A/D Interval
Set Pause Time
Pause
Motion Delay
Select Mode
Perform Scale Specific Function
Get Current Scale
Averaging
If Parameter Preset
Digital Filter
Language Selection
Mode Selection
If Macro Interrupt
Target Accuracy
Perform Sample
Sample / Macro Error
P AGE
9-124
9-47
9-76
9-44
9-126
9-45
9-33
9-43
9-102
9-105
9-72
9-74
9-45
9-93
9-94
9-103
S ETPOINT C OMMANDS
Setpoint commands are used to change or indicate the status of individual setpoints.
M ACRO C OMMAND
%A
%D
%O
%F
D ESCRIPTION
Activate Setpoint
Deactivate Setpoint
If Setpoint Activated/Queued for
Activation
If Setpoint Deactivated/Queued for
Deactivation
P AGE
9-48
9-58
9-75
9-61
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-25
C OMPLETE M ACRO C OMMAND
This section details all macro commands sequentially by equivalent ASCII value.
< required > Required syntax arguments are enclosed in angle brackets.
[ optional ] Optional syntax arguments are enclosed in square brackets.
< A | B > Syntax arguments separated by a vertical bar require one selection, as in ‘ A ’ or ‘ B ’.
%!
E NABLE /D ISABLE C OMM P ORT
Syntax Enable/Disable Comm Port Receive
[ ] [ comm ] %!
Enable/Disable Comm Port Transmit
[ - ] T [ comm ] %!
-
Arguments comm
Notes
See Also
Disable receive/transmit.
Communication port (0 à 4; port 0 = front panel keypad).
Omit comm to specify all ports.
%U Transmit Buffer
%) Clear Receive Buffer
%H Redefine Comm Port Function
Example:
Enabling Only Comm Port 2
-%! disable all ports
2%! enable port 2
Enter ID#?%G get entry (from comm2)
=80.4P%o store entry
A%) clear all receive buffers
%! enable all ports
Enable/Disable Comm Port Receive
[ ] [ comm ] %!
Disabling the comm port receive inhibits the processing of received serial data. This is useful when it is necessary to ensure that received data can only be processed from one source. Incoming data on disabled ports will continue to be buffered and will be processed when the comm port receive is re-enabled. When the receive buffer becomes full, handshaking (if specified at P204) is asserted informing the connected device to temporarily stop transmitting. Disabling port 0 will disable the front panel keypad. Only the first keypress will be buffered while the keypad is disabled. A buffered keypress will perform its function when the keypad is re-enabled. If received data is to be completely ignored while a port is disabled, clear the buffer with the %) command before re-enabling the port.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-26 Chapter 9
%!
0%!
1%!
-%!
Enables all ports 0 à 4 to process received data.
Enables the front panel keypad.
Enables comm port 1 to process received data.
Disables all ports 0 à 4 for processing received data.
-0%!
Disables the front panel keypad.
-1%!
Disables comm port 1 for processing received data.
!
Use caution when disabling the keypad with the 0%!
command.
Since the keypad will be disabled, it will not be possible to invoke a macro from the keypad to re-enable it! Make provisions to re-enable the keypad by some other means.
Enable/Disable Comm Port Transmit
[ - ] T [ comm ] %!
Disabling the comm port transmit inhibits new data from being transmitted out a specified comm port. Any data already in the transmit buffer will still be transmitted. Subsequent transmission requests will be ignored and transmit data will not be buffered.
T%!
Enables all ports 1 à 4 to transmit data.
T1%!
-T%!
-T1%!
Enables comm port 1 to transmit data.
Disables all ports 1 à 4 for transmitting data.
Disables comm port 1 for transmitting data.
%” S ELECT C OMM P ORT
Syntax Select Comm Port
< comm > %”
Arguments
Comm Communication port (1 à 4).
See Also %$ Send Text
$& Send Control Code
%U Transmit Buffer
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Selecting A Comm Port
Enter ID# ?%G get entry
=80.5P%o save entry
1%” select comm1
Operator# %$ send text
80.5P%o%$ send VAR#5
13,10%& send <CR><LF>
2%” select comm2
Operator# %$ send text
80.5P%o%$ send VAR#5
Macros 9-27
Select Comm Port
Used in conjunction with the %$ and %& macro commands to specify which port macro text and control codes will be transmitted from. The port specified by the %” command will remain in effect until changed by another %” command. Comm port 1 is automatically selected upon power-up.
Example:
Restoring the Last Selected Scale
Number at Power-Up
80.8P=_%#%o save scale number
MACRO #250 – POWER-UP
80.8P%o get scale number
%` select scale
%# C URRENT S CALE
Syntax Get Current Scale
[ character ] %#
If Current Scale
< scale# > %#
Arguments scale# character
Scale number (1 à 8).
Any character except 1 à 8.
Get Current Scale
[ character ] %#
Copies the current scale number to the entry buffer. When used with the optional character argument, the preceding character is replaced by the current scale number.
%# Copies the current scale number to the entry buffer.
_%# Replaces the preceding character ‘_’ with the current scale number. Any character other than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 could be used as the preceding character.
Using the character argument is especially useful for recording the current scale number and for using the current scale number as an index within other macro commands.
80.8P=_%#%o
80._%#=0.0P%o
80.2_%#=1.0P%o
1,_%#%y
Copy the current scale number to VAR#8
Stores the gross weight of the current scale in variable 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8, as determined by the current scale number.
Stores the net weight of the current scale in variable 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27 or 28.
Recall a row from database 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or
8, as determined by the current scale number.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-28 Chapter 9
3,1_%#%y
%#%Q
1._%#%Q
Make a row in database 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17 or 18.
Send custom transmit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8, as determined by the current scale number.
Send custom transmit #1 out port 1, 2, 3 or 4 as determined by the current scale number.
Example:
Branching Based on the Current Scale
1%# if scale = 1…
101%^ go to macro 101
%N else
2%# if scale = 2…
102%^ go to macro 102
%E end if
If Current Scale
< scale# > %#
Determines if the specified scale# argument is the current scale number.
1%#
2%#
3%#
4%#
Determine if the current scale is scale #1.
Determine if the current scale is scale #2.
Determine if the current scale is scale #3.
Determine if the current scale is scale #4.
%$ S
END
T
EXT
Syntax Send Text
[ text ] %$
Arguments text Text to be transmitted out selected port.
Notes Omit text to send only characters in the entry buffer.
See Also %” Select Comm Port
%& Send Control Code
Send Text
Transmits up to 79 alphanumeric characters out the comm port last specified by the %” command.
%$ Sends the contents of the entry buffer out the selected port
Station#1%$
80.1P%o%$
Sends the text ‘Station#1’ out the selected port.
Sends the contents of VAR#1 out the selected port.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-29
%& S END C ONTROL C ODE
Syntax Send Control Code
[ control code , ] < control code > %&
Arguments control code ASCII character to be transmitted out selected port (0 à
255).
See Also %” Select Comm Port
%$ Send Text
Send Control Code
Transmits a single byte ASCII character out the comm port last specified by the %” command. This command is often used in conjunction with the
%$ command to send printer commands such as a carriage return, line feed, or form feed. Refer to the ASCII Chart on page B-17 for a list of control codes and text characters. Use the ASCII decimal value when specifying each control code .
12%& Sends <FF> form feed character out the selected port.
13,10%&
73,68,35%&
Sends a <CR> carriage return and <LF> line feed character out the selected port.
Sends the text ‘ID#’ out the selected port.
i
Passing a value of 256 will generate two control codes, <CR> and
<LF> in that order.
%’ R ECORD R ECEIVED S ERIAL D ATA
Syntax Display Available Data Collection Memory
%’
Free Data Collection Memory
F%’
Start Data Collection
S%’
End Data Collection
E < comm r
> %’
Resume Data Collection
R < comm r
> %’
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-30 Chapter 9
Print Collected Data
P < comm r
> < A | B > < comm t
> %’
Arguments
A
B comm comm r t
Print format ‘A’ – print data as Hex characters only.
Print format ‘B’ – print data as both Hex and decimal characters with time stamp and port number.
Communication port (1 à 4; * = all ports) for receiving data.
Communication port (1 à 4) for transmitting (printing) collected data.
Example :
Recorded Serial Data Print Format ‘A’
54
45
53
54
25
50
Example:
Recorded Serial Data Print Format ‘B’
12016.463: 0x54 84 T [2]
12016.463: 0x45 69 E [2]
12016.465: 0x53 83 S [2]
12016.466: 0x54 84 T [2]
12016.467: 0x25 37 % [2]
12016.469: 0x50 80 P [2]
Record Received Serial Data
Serves as a diagnostic tool that collects serial data from all comm ports and stores the received data in the database RAM for analysis. This is especially useful for troubleshooting input interpreter problems. All but 4K of the remaining database RAM will be allocated for data collection (no
RAM will be allocated for the 460 Series). There must be at least 526 bytes available (50 rows of data). It takes 10 bytes of storage for every character received. A 4K data base can hold 400 characters and a 256K database about 258,000 characters. To display data from only one port, use multiple E%’ commands to turn off each unwanted comm port
Data is displayed in rows starting with the oldest data first. The oldest data is written after the buffer is filled. In this way the most recent bytes are retained.
!
This feature remains enabled, even when the indicator is powered down, until explicitly disabled with the F%’ command.
Collected serial data can be represented in two different print formats:
Format ‘A’ sends each character as the ASCII Hex value followed by a carriage return <CR> (see example – Print Format ‘A’ ).
Format ‘B’ sends a time stamp, the ASCII Hex value, the ASCII decimal value, the ASCII character and the comm port number followed by a carriage return <CR> (see example – Print Format ‘B’ ).
S%’
%’
Allocates all but 4K (0K for 460 Series) of remaining database memory and starts collecting data on all ports.
Displays (for one second) the number of rows of serial data that can be stored. Data is stored 1 byte per row.
E2%’
R2%’
E*%’
R*%’
Ends (suspends) data collection on comm 2.
Resumes data collection on comm 2.
Ends (suspends) data collection on all comm ports.
Resumes data collection on all comm ports.
GSE Scale Systems
P2A1%’
P*B1%’
F%’
Macros 9-31
Prints data collected on comm 2 out comm 1 using print format ‘A’.
Prints data collected on all comm ports out comm 1 using print format ‘B’.
Ends data collection on all comm ports and frees the database memory previously allocated for serial data collection.
%( I F C HARACTER R ECEIVED
Syntax Get Character from Any Port
[ text ] G%(
Get Character from Specified Port
[ text ] P < comm > g%(
Get Decimal Value at Interpreter Port
P < comm > < d | h > %(
If Any Character at Port
[ ! ] [ P comm ] %(
If Specified Character at Port
[ ! ] < byte
1
> [ , byte
2
] [ P comm ] [C]
%(
!
Arguments
C d h text comm byte
1 byte
2
Notes
Reverses an if condition – if character NOT received.
Clears character from receive buffer if found.
Puts the decimal value (0 à 255) of the next character in the input interpreter’s receive buffer into the entry buffer.
Puts the decimal value (0 à 15) of the next character in the input interpreter’s receive buffer into the entry buffer.
The character is assumed to be a Hex character.
Alphanumeric text to which a received character will be appended.
Communication port (0 à 4; port 0 = front panel keypad).
ASCII character (0 à 255) to evaluate at selected port.
ASCII character (0 à 255) used to specify a range of characters, beginning with byte
1
, to evaluate at selected port.
Omit comm to test for character on all ports.
Receive buffers are tested in order of port 1, 2, 3, 4, followed by the front panel keypad (port 0).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-32 Chapter 9 i
Ports disabled by the %!
command are not tested by the
G%( command.
See Also
When comm is specified, the port is tested regardless of whether that port has been disabled by the %! command.
When comm is omitted, ports disabled by the %!
command are not tested.
Tested characters remain in the receive buffer until cleared.
%) Clear Receive Buffer
%H Redefine Comm Port Function
Get Character From Any Port
[ text ] G%(
Copies the next character in the receive buffer of any enabled receive port to the entry buffer. Ports are tested in order of priority from 1 to 4. If text precedes the G%( command, it is copied to the entry buffer where the next character is appended to the text. The example - Using the %( Command to
Get an Entry shows how to use this command in conjunction with the %H command to “build” an operator entry without suspending macro execution as with the %G or %K commands.
Get Character From Specified Port
P < comm > g%(
Copies the next character in the receive buffer of the specified comm port to the entry buffer.
P1g%( Copies the next character from comm port 1 receive buffer to the entry buffer.
ScaleP2g%( Copies “Scale” to the entry buffer and appends the next character from comm port 2 receive buffer.
%]P3g%( Restores the entry buffer and appends the next character from comm port 3 receive buffer.
Get Decimal Value at Interpreter Port
P < comm > < d | h > %(
Copies characters within an input interpreter’s buffer to the entry buffer.
Characters can be copied as ASCII Hex or decimal values. This is a useful diagnostic tool for examining the contents of an input interpreter’s buffer in the event an expected interpreter match does not occur. It is also possible to use this feature to develop checksum algorithms on received data.
P1d%( Copies the decimal value of the next character in comm port
1 interpreter buffer to the entry buffer. Possible decimal values are 0 à 255.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-33
Example:
Using the %( Command to Get an
Entry
This routine operates similar to the %G or %K
“get entry” function except that macro execution is not suspended pending the completion of the entry. Thus other macros can be invoked with an entry in progress.
String VAR#3 is used to build an entry. Only when the entry is complete is the entry value copied to the destination VAR#1. This routine could be easily modified to use VAR#1 as a pointer (80.1p=80.3P%o) thus allowing macro
100 to be used for multiple entries.
===================================
681%s1%e VAR #1
682%sTarget%e VName Target
684%s0%e VSave NoSav
685%s0%e VLock Disbl
686%s0%e VType Float
687%s6%e FStyl Auto
681%s3%e VAR #3
682%sEntry%e VName Entry
684%s0%e VSave NoSav
685%s0%e VLock Disbl
686%s3%e VType Strng
689%s6%e Ssize 6
MACRO #1 – ENTRY PROMPT
80.3P=""%o clear entry
Enter TargetP3,1A%C
P4,1%C set cursor
4%" select comm 4
21%& blink cursor
0,100%H invoke macro 100
MACRO #100 – BUILD ENTRY
46,57P0%( if [.] – [9] pressed…
%{
N3%m<6%o if length < 6…
G%( get keypress
\=80.3P%o append entry
80.3P%o display entry
P4,1%C set cursor
21%& blink cursor
%N else
%) clear keypress
%E end if
%}
%N else
----------------------------
229P0C%( if [ENTER] pressed…
%{
N3%m>0%o if length > 0…
80.1P=80.3P%o save entry
%E end if
P3,1A%C clear rows 3-4
0,0%H keypad normal
%}
%N else
--------------------------------
227P0%( if [CLR] pressed…
80.3P=""%o clear entry
P4,1c%C clear row 4
P4,1%C set cursor
21%& blink cursor
%N else
--------------------------------
%) clear keypress
%E end if
P2h%( Copies the decimal value of the next character in comm port
2 interpreter buffer to the entry buffer. Assuming the received character is a Hex value (i.e. 0 à 9 or A à .F), the output value will be the equivalent decimal value 0 à 15.
If Any Character at Port
[ ! ] [ P
!%(
P1%(
P2%(
!P3%(
P0%(
P13%( comm ] %(
Determines if a character is available at the specified comm port(s).
%( Determines if any character is available at any comm port.
Determines if no characters are available at any comm port.
Determines if any character is available at comm port 1.
Determines if any character is available at comm port 2.
Determines if no characters are available at comm port 3.
Determines if a key was pressed on the front panel keypad.
Determines if any character is available at comm port 1 or 3.
If Specified Character at Port
[ ! ] < byte
1
> [ , byte
2
] [ P comm ] [C] %(
Determines if a specific character is available at the specified comm port(s). It is also possible to determine if a received character falls within a specified range. This is useful for validating characters for numeric-only or alpha-only entries as shown in the previous example.
65%(
65,90%(
!97,122%(
48,57P1%(
Determines if the character ‘A’ is available at any comm port.
Determines if a character within the range ‘A’ à ‘Z’ is available at any comm port.
Determines if a character within the range ‘a’ à ‘z’ is not available at any comm port.
Determines if a character within the range ‘0’ à ‘9’ is available at comm port 1.
133P0%(
134P0C%(
Determines if the [START] key was pressed.
Determines if the [STOP] key was pressed. The keypress is removed from the keypad buffer.
46P014C%( Determines if a decimal ‘.’ character was received via the front panel keypad or comm ports 1 or 4. The character is removed from the keypad or comm port buffer.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-34 Chapter 9
!
Checking for characters on comm ports does not remove characters from the receive buffers. This is especially important to note when using this feature in conjunction with the %H command. In this case, failure to clear the receive buffer will result in a macro being continuously invoked in an endless loop.
%) C LEAR R ECEIVE B UFFER
Syntax Clear Receive Buffer
[A] [ comm ] %)
Arguments
A comm
Notes
See Also
Clears all characters in specified receive buffer.
Communication port (0 à 4; port 0 = front panel keypad).
Omit comm to specify all ports.
Multiple ports may be specified for comm .
%( If Character Received
%H Redefine Comm Port Function
Clear Receive Buffer
Clears one or all characters from the specified comm port(s). This is usually done in conjunction with the %) command to clear a character after determining whether or not it exists as the next character in the receive buffer.
%)
A%)
Clears the next character from any comm port.
Clears all characters from all comm ports.
Also clears the input interpreter buffer.
1%)
24%)
A13%)
Clears the next character from comm port 1.
Clears the next character from comm port 2 and 4.
Clears all characters from comm ports 1 and 3.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-35
6
5
4
3
8
7
2
1
0
- 1
%* R ECORD A/D D ATA
Syntax Display Allocated Data Collection Memory
%*
Free Data Collection Memory
F%*
Start Data Collection
S < scale# > [ : seconds ] %*
End Data Collection
E%*
Resume Data Collection
R%*
Print Collected Data
P < comm > %*
Specify Parameter for Data Collection
C < column > = < parm > . < instance > %*
Example:
Recorded A/D Data Print Format
466,,,,Scale #1
1,,,, 09/25/99 @ 22:23:06: 50
2, -6148, 0.00, 0.00
3, -6148, 0.00, 0.00
4, -6147, 0.00, 0.00
5, -6149, 0.00, 0.00
6, -6149, 0.00, 0.00
7, -6148, 0.00, 0.00
8, -6148, 0.00, 0.00
9, -6147, 0.00, 0.00
10, -6153, 0.00, 0.00
â â â â
456, 40819, 9.39, 0.00
457, 40821, 9.39, 0.00
458, 40819, 9.39, 0.00
459, 40823, 9.39, 0.00
460, 40823, 9.39, 0.00
461, 40820, 9.39, 0.00
462, 40820, 9.39, 0.00
463, 40820, 9.39, 0.00
464, 40818, 9.39, 0.00
465,,,, 09/25/99 @ 22:23:14: 33
466,,,, 09/25/99 @ 22:23:20: 13
Arguments scale# seconds comm column parm instance
Notes
Scale number (1 à 8).
A/D data recording buffer size in terms of seconds.
Communication port (1 à 4).
Column (1 or 2) to redefine as alternate parameter.
Operating parameter (must be a float-type parameter).
Valid parameter instance.
Omit seconds to allocate all remaining database RAM.
Gross Weight
1/60 th sec
Figure: Data Graph
2336 1
Record A/D Data
Serves as a diagnostic tool that collects A/D and parameter values in the database RAM for analysis. Recorded data can then be transmitted to a
PC and imported into a spreadsheet. Here the data can be graphed and analyzed to determine various characteristics of the weighing system such as vibrations, mechanical influences, event timing, rate of flow, etc. (see figure - Data Graph).
All but 4K of the remaining database RAM will be allocated for data collection. Data is collected in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis collection (no
RAM will be allocated for the 460 Series). Thus when data collection begins it will continue indefinitely, maintaining the most recent information.
The amount of data that can be stored is determined by the amount of available database RAM. A 4K database can store 333 rows while a 256K database can store over 20,000 rows of data. Since the A/D update rate is
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-36 Chapter 9 updated at 60 times per second 4K of database translates to 5.5 seconds of data, while 256K of database translates to almost 6 minutes of data respectively. A 2-Meg database can record over 45 minutes of data!
Collected A/D data can be transmitted out any comm port. Data is sent in a fixed width, comma delimited format as shown in example – Recorded
A/D Data Print Format . The first column is a sequential record number, followed by the raw A/D value, followed by two selectable parameter columns. By default, these columns represent the filtered gross weight
(parm 0.0) and the rate (parm 23.0) on the current scale. (See parms 135
& 136 for more information on rate). They can be changed to any float type parameter. The data includes a header row with the number of data samples taken and the scale number on which this data was acquired.
The first row is a time stamp at which the data collection was started or resumed. If data collection has been left running so that the buffer has filled then this will contain data. Data is printed in oldest first order (i.e.
lowest row number = oldest data). The last row will contain a time stamp showing the time it was printed. If data collection has been stopped, the last non-data entry will contain the time stamp at which data collection was stopped. Data collection stops when requested by the user or after setup mode is entered (which includes displaying of any information parameter such as the amount of NV ram available). Repeatedly printing data after data collection is stopped will add another time stamp to the end of the list.
i
It is only possible to redefine the selectable collection columns after allocating database memory using the S%* command.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-37 i
It is only possible to redefine the selectable collection columns after allocating database memory using the S%* command.
This feature remains enabled, even when the indicator is powered down, until explicitly disabled with the F%* command.
S1%*
S13%*
S2:120%*
%*
C1=1.0%*
Allocates all but 4K (0K for the 460 Series) of remaining database memory and starts collecting data for scale 1.
Allocates all but 4K (0K for the 460 Series) of remaining database memory and starts collecting data for scales 1 and 3.
Allocates enough database memory to buffer 120 seconds of data and starts collecting data for scale 2.
Displays (for one second) the number of data rows that can be stored for each scale.
Redefines the first selectable collection column (3) to record the net weight.
C2=50.3%*
E%*
R%*
P1%*
F%*
Redefines the second selectable collection column (4) to record a frequency input on PDIO channel 3.
Ends (suspends) data collection for all scales.
Resumes data collection for all for scales.
Prints data collected out comm 1.
Ends data collection for all scales and frees the database memory previously allocated for A/D data collection.
%+ A
VERAGING
Syntax Start Averaging
S < scale# > %+
End Averaging
E < scale# > %+
Resume Averaging
R < scale# > %+
Arguments scale#
Notes
See Also
Scale number (1 à 8).
Multiple scales may be specified.
Weight Averaging Parameters
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-38 Chapter 9
Averaging
Averages the gross or net weight over a specified period of time. The averaging is performed at a rate of up to 60 times per second and can continue indefinitely once started by the S%+ command. This feature is ideal for in-motion weighing systems such as high-speed check-weighing, in-motion truck scales or live animal weighing.
S1%+ Starts averaging for scale 1.
S123%+
E2%+
R2%+
Starts averaging for scales 1, 2 and 3.
Ends (suspends) averaging for scale 2.
Resumes averaging for scale 2.
Once averaging begins, 15P and 16P become active weight parameters continuously recalculating the average filtered gross and net weight until averaging is stopped. If the digital filter is set to 1 second or less at P116
(or by the %K Digital Filter macro command), then the average weight is recalculated every 1/60 th
second). If the filter is set for 2, 4 or 8 seconds, then the average weight is recalculated every 2/60 th
, 4/60 th
or 8/60 th seconds respectively.
The average gross and net parameters contain an accumulated weight value. The average weight is calculated when accessed by dividing the accumulated weight by the average count of 17P . Thus if a value is to be entered directly into 15P , the average count should first be assigned at
17P . When recalling a gross average value from a database, the average count column should precede the average gross column.
%, M OTION D ELAY
Syntax Motion Delay
M < scale# > [ ;prompt ] %,
Arguments prompt scale#
Text to be displayed as a prompt on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
Select from the following scale numbers:
4
5
2
3
6
7
0 Current scale
1 Scale 1
Scale 2
Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5
Scale 6
Scale 7
8 Scale 8
* All scales
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-39
Motion Delay
Suspends macro execution until a stable weight is achieved as determined by the settings for P114 (motion divisions) and P115 (motion delay).
M0%, Pause during motion on the currently selected scale.
Pause during motion on scale 1.
M1%,
M*%, Pause during motion on all scales. All scales must be stable before macro execution will resume.
M1;Mot’nDelay%, Display “Mot’n Delay” while pausing for motion on scale 1.
%P ERFORM S CALE S PECIFIC F UNCTION
Syntax Perform Scale Specific Function
< `|t|u|z > S < scale# > [ ; argument ] %-
Arguments u z t
` scale# argument
Notes
See Also
Scale select
Tare
Units
Zero
Scale number (1 à 8).
Valid argument to the %`, %t, %u or %z command.
The %- command is mode independent. Use caution when using this command to ensure the scale for which the function is intended will not be performing a critical function at the time the function is executed.
This command replaces the 660 Series mode independent commands previously available with the %`, %t, %u and
%z commands.
%` Scale Select
%t Tare
%u Units
%z Zero
Perform Scale Specific Function
Performs a mode independent scale-select, tare, units or zero function on a specific scale. These functions can be performed on the currently selected scale as well as all other enabled scales regardless of the current mode of operation. Motion delayed commands will be motion delayed for the intended scale whether or not it is the currently selected scale.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-40 Chapter 9
Commands that normally accept arguments such as ‘tare’ can also pass these arguments with the %- command.
`S3%tS2%tS1;10%-
Selects scale 3 as the current scale.
Performs an auto-tare on scale 2.
uS1%uS2;2%-
Establishes a tare weight of 10 on scale 1. This operation is considered a manual tare entry. If preset is enabled at P412, the preset status is considered preset.
Toggles the units selection for scale 1.
Selects the third enabled units (P133) for scale 2. Note that the first enabled unit (P131) is considered unit #0, the second enabled unit (P132) is unit #1 and so on.
zS4%zS1;15R%-
Zeros scale 4.
Performs a relative zero offset of 15 for scale 1.
Example:
Re-Prompt Entry if Macro Interrupted
1%T tag 1
Enter ID%G get entry
** INTERRUPT HERE AND RETURN **
%/ if interrupted…
1%J jump to tag 1
%E end if
%/ I F M ACRO I NTERRUPTED
Syntax If Macro Interrupted
%/
See Also Interrupt Macros
If Macro Interrupted
Determines if one macro was interrupted by another macro set for Invok
Immed at P9992. When a macro is configured as an interrupt macro at
P9992, an internal flag is set whenever the interrupt macro is invoked during the execution of another macro. The %/ command will be true if this flag is set. When the interrupt macro ends and the interrupted macro resumes, it is possible to determine if there was an interruption. Thus if a macro was interrupted during an entry as with the %G or %K command, you can jump back to the beginning of the prompt routine as shown in example – Re-Prompt Entry if Macro Interrupted .
The following is a list of operator interface commands that can be interrupted that would otherwise suspend macro execution:
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-41
%P
%Y
%W
W%r
%K
%G
%n
Pause
If Yes
Wait for Keypress
Wait for A/D Interval
Get Entry from 4X20 VFD
Get Entry
Get Numeric Entry
%z Zero
%t Tare
%p Print i
Any of the commands listed above will reset the internal interrupt flag for the %/ command. Therefore, if any of the above commands are used in the interrupting macro, the interrupted flag would be cleared and the interrupted macro would be unable to discern that an interrupt had occurred.
Example:
Setting the Pause Time Period
5%@ pause time = 5 seconds
BatchDone!%P prompt and pause
1%@ pause time = 1 second
%@ S ET P AUSE T IME
Syntax Set Pause Time
< seconds > %@
Arguments seconds
Notes
See Also
Number of seconds (0.01 à 5,000,000) to pause macro execution for each %P command encountered.
Pause time is set to 1 second at power up.
A new pause time remains in effect until changed by another %@ command.
%P Pause
Set Pause Time
Defines the time period for each %P command. By default, the pause time is 1 second. The current pause time period remains in effect until changed by another %@ command.
10%@ Sets the pause time period to 10 seconds.
1%@ Sets the pause time period to 1 second (default).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-42 Chapter 9
Example:
Canceling an Activation Delay Without
Invoking a Macro
If the activation delay of setpoint #2 expires precisely after the operator presses [START] , macro #9 will be pushed on the stack. Removing macro #9 from the stack prevents it from being invoked should this happen.
===================================
5099%s2%e SPT #2
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sMIXER%e SPNam MIXER
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s4.00%e AcDly 4.00
5112%s9%e AcMac 9
5130%s5%e Deact Never
5131%s0.00%e DeDly 0.00
5132%s0%e DeMac None
MACRO #6 – MANUAL START
MANUAL STARTP4,1c%C
2:0%A start mixer
9%B clear macro from stack
MACRO #9 – MIXER STARTED
AUTO STARTP4,1c%C
%A A CTIVATE S ETPOINT
Syntax Activate Setpoint
[ L | U ] < setpoint# > [ : delay ] %A
Activate All Setpoints
* [ L | U ] %A
Arguments
L
U setpoint# delay
Notes
See Also
Locks specified setpoint(s) in an active state.
Unlocks specified setpoint(s).
Setpoint(s) (1 à 256) to be activated.
Delay time in seconds (0.002 à 5,767,168) before the specified setpoint(s) will activate.
The %A command does not apply to setpoints configured as inputs (except inputs used by Modbus to invoke macros).
A range or list of setpoints may be specified for setpoint# as described in the following examples.
A delay cannot be specified when locking or unlocking setpoints.
A variable value can be substituted for setpoint# and/or delay using the syntax
< variable# >P where variable# is a valid variable 1 à 999.
%D Deactivate Setpoint
%O If Setpoint Activated
Activate Setpoint
[ L | U ] < setpoint# > [ : delay ] %A
Activates any setpoint configured as an output or disabled.
An activation delay can be specified to postpone the activation of a setpoint after the %A command is executed. Specifying a delay will override the activation delay setting at P5111. If an activation delay has not expired before issuing another activation delay for the same setpoint, the delay timer is reset to the new delay time. Macros assigned at P5112 to be invoked upon activation of a setpoint will not execute until the activation delay time has expired. If delay is omitted from the activation command, the macro assigned at P5112 will not be invoked unless a delay time is specified at P5111. If delay is specified with a value of zero (0), then any delay specified at P5111 is cancelled and the macro assigned at
P5112 will not be invoked.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-43
Example:
Locking a Setpoint During a Weight
Surge
This setup operates a fill output with setpoint #1.
When [START] is pressed, setpoint #1 activates and locks. This prevents the initial product surge from deactivating the fill output prematurely.
After a 2-second delay, setpoint #200 deactivates invoking macro #12. This unlocks the fill output after the weight surge allowing the output to eventually deactivate at the appropriate weight.
===================================
5099%s1%e SPT #1
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sFILL%e SPNam FILL
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s0%e AcMac None!
5130%s0%e Deact Above
5131%s0.00%e DeDly 0.00
5132%s13%e DeMac Mc 13
5133%s0%e DeMtn Ign'd
5134%s80.5%e DLPar TARGET
5150%s1.0%e CmPar Net
5099%s200%e SPT #200
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sSPIKE%e SPNam SPIKE
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s0%e AcMac None!
5130%s5%e Deact Never
5131%s0.00%e DeDly 0.00
5132%s12%e DeMac Mc 12
MACRO #6 – START FILL
L1%A lock output
200%A activate timer
200:2%D start spike delay
MACRO #12 – UNLOCK FILL OUTPUT
U1%A unlock output
MACRO #13 – FILL COMPLETE
Fill Done!%S%P prompt i
Activating a setpoint with a delay of zero (0) does not guarantee that the macro specified at P5112 will not be invoked. If an activation delay was already in progress, the delay may have expired during execution of the macro that is supposed to cancel the delay, resulting in that macro being placed on the macro stack and invoked upon completion of the cancellation macro. To prevent this, always clear the unwanted macro from the stack immediately after canceling the activation delay (see example – Canceling an
Activation Delay Without Invoking a Macro ).
Setpoints can also be “locked” in an active state to prevent unwanted deactivation. This technique is often used in filling applications where the initial surge of product can actually spike the weight reading above the target value, potentially deactivating the setpoint prematurely (see example – Locking a Setpoint During a Weight Surge ). An active-locked setpoint cannot be deactivated outside the setup mode by any means. It must first be unlocked before being deactivated. Note that unlocking a setpoint does not automatically change its state.
1%A
1:10%A
5:0%A
L1%A
U1%A
Activates setpoint 1 immediately unless a delay is specified at P5111. A macro specified at P5112 will not be invoked unless a delay is specified at P5111.
Activates setpoint 1 in 10 seconds. A macro specified at
P5112 will be invoked after the 10 second delay regardless of any delay specified at P5111.
Activates setpoint 5 immediately. A macro specified at
P5112 will not be invoked.
Activate and lock setpoint 1 immediately without invoking the macro specified at P5112.
Unlock setpoint 1 without changing its state. No macros are invoked as a direct result of this command.
17-32%A Activates setpoints 17 through 32 immediately unless a delay is specified at P5111. A macro specified at P5112 will not be invoked unless a delay is specified at P5111.
A group of setpoints can be activated by specifying a range and/or comma delimited list of setpoint numbers. The criteria for activation delays, invoking macros are the same as previously described.
1,3,5%A Activates setpoints 1, 3 and 5.
1-8,15,16%A Activates setpoints 1 through 8, 15 and 16.
1-4,5:10%A Activates setpoints 1 through 4 immediately and activates setpoint 5 after a 10 second delay.
When locking or unlocking a group of setpoints, only the setpoints listed without a delay time will be locked or unlocked. Those with a specified delay time will activate when the delay expires.
L1,3,5%A
U1,3,5%A
Activates and locks setpoints 1, 3 and 5.
Unlock setpoints 1, 3 and 5.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-44 Chapter 9 i
The current value of a setpoint’s activation delay timer can be accessed via 76P and 77P. See
Setpoint Timers for more details.
L7-
10,13:10%A
Activates and locks setpoints 7 through 10. Setpoint 13 will activate after a 10 second delay.
U1-7,9:5,21-
23%A
Unlocks setpoints 1 through 7 and 21 through 23.
Setpoint 9 will activate after a 5 second delay.
Variable values can also be used to specify a setpoint number or activation delay. This technique is useful when recalling setpoint numbers from a database to serve as valve numbers, mixer numbers, etc. This allows you to write one routine to handle a fill routine for multiple ingredients.
1P%A
5P:6P%A
Activates the setpoint specified by the value of VAR#1.
Activates the setpoint specified by the value of VAR#5 using the delay specified by the value of VAR#6.
Activate All Setpoints
* [ L | U ] %A
Immediately activates all setpoints. No delay time can be specified.
Delays in progress are cancelled.
*%A Activates all setpoints immediately, overriding all delays. No macros are invoked as a direct result of this command.
*L%A
*U%A
Activate and lock all setpoints immediately without invoking macros.
Unlock all setpoints without changing states. No macros are invoked as a direct result of this command.
%B B REAK M ACRO
Syntax Abort Current Macro
%B
Abort All Other Macros
$%B
Abort All Macros
*%B
Remove Macro from Stack
[D] < macro# > %B
If Macro on Stack
? < macro# > %B
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-45
Clear Macro Trace Buffer
TB%B
Reset Macro Trace Timer
TT%B
Suspend Macro Trace
TS [ * ] [ macro# ] %B
Resume Macro Trace
TR [ * ] [ macro# ] %B
Arguments
D
* macro#
See Also
Remove only first occurrence of specified macro from stack.
Suspend or resume all macros individually.
Macro number (1 à 250).
%^ Call \ Go To Macro
%/ If Macro Interrupted
Example:
Using the %B Command
This routine uses VAR#1 to count how many times macro 10 appears on the macro stack. If it is not on the stack, the macro stack is cleared.
==================================
80.1P=0%o clear VAR#1
%T tag
?10%B if macro on stack…
80.1P+=1%o increment VAR#1
D10%B remove from stack
%J jump to tag
%E end if
80.1P==0%o if VAR#1 = 0…
*%B abort all macros
%E end if
10%^ go to macro 10
Abort Current Macro
%B
Stops execution of a macro before its natural end. If the current macro was called by another macro, the calling macro is removed from the macro stack. This command does not remove additional occurrences of the current macro from the macro stack.
Abort All Other Macros
$%B
Clears the macro stack but allows the current macro to continue execution.
This command could be used in an interrupt macro to ensure that no other system functions are queued before proceeding.
Abort All Macros
*%B
Clears the entire macro stack and stops execution of the current macro.
Remove Macro From Stack
[D] < macro# > %B
Clears one or all occurrences of a specified macro from the macro stack.
10%B Removes all occurrences of macro 10 from the macro stack.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-46 Chapter 9
D5%B Removes one occurrence of macro 5 from the macro stack.
If Macro on Stack
? < macro# > %B
Determines if a specified macro is on the stack.
?10%B Determines if macro 10 is on the macro stack.
Macro Debug Trace Buffer
Controls the data recorded in the macro debug table at P50001.
TB%B
TT%B
Clears the macro trace buffer.
Resets the macro trace timer to zero (0).
TS%B
TR%B
TS*%B
TR*%B
Suspends tracing for all macros collectively.
Resumes tracing for all macros collectively.
Suspends tracing for all macros individually. Each macro may be resumed individually.
Resumes tracing for all macros that were individually suspended.
TS10-50%B Suspends tracing individually for macros 10 through
50.
TR10-20%B Resumes tracing for macros 10 through 20 that were suspended individually.
i
The TR%B will not resume tracing for macros suspended individually.
Example:
Disabling Standard Text on the 4X20
VFD
GSE SCALE SYSTEMSP1,2a%C
4X20 VFDP2,7%C
Use %%C to send text;P3,1%C
Use %%K to get entry.P4,1%C
GSE SCALE SYSTEMS
4X20 VFD
Use %C to send text;
Use %K to get entry.
P3,1A%C
GSE SCALE SYSTEMS
4X20 VFD
11.0.18433P%oP4,1%C
GSE SCALE SYSTEMS
4X20 VFD
12:00:01 pm 09/30/99
P4,13C%C
GSE SCALE SYSTEMS
4X20 VFD
12:00:01 pm
%C D
ISPLAY
T
EXT ON
4X20 VFD
Syntax Display Standard Text on 4X20 VFD
[ text ] P [ row , column ] [ clear ] %C
Display Extended Text on 4X20 VFD
[ text ] p [ row , column ] [ clear ] %C
Arguments text row column
Text to be displayed beginning at cursor position.
Row (1 à 4) to position cursor.
Column (1 à 20) to position cursor.
GSE Scale Systems
clear
Notes
See Also
Macros 9-47
Select one of the following clear options: a Clears entire display before displaying text
A Clears to the end of display after displayed text c Clears entire line before displaying text
C Clears to the end of line after displayed text
Omitting row and column assumes the current cursor position.
%d Display Control
4X20 VF Display
Display Standard Text on 4X20 VFD
[ text ] P [ row , column ] [ clear ] %C
Sends text out comm port 4 to be displayed on the 4x20 VFD. This command uses an upper case ‘P’ to separate preceding text from the row/column coordinates where the text will be displayed.
Pa%C
P2,1a%C
P2,1%C
P2,1c%C
Clears the entire display. Cursor position does not change.
Clears the entire display and positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
Positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
Clears line 2 and positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
P2,1A%C
Enter TargetP3,1%C
Enter TargetP3,1c%C
Enter TargetP3,1A%C
Clears lines 2, 3 & 4 and positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
Displays text starting on line 3, column
1.
Clears line 3 and displays text starting on line 3, column 1.
Clears lines 3 & 4 and displays text starting on line 3, column 1.
11.0.18496P%oP3,5C%C Displays current time starting on line 3, column 5, clearing to the end of line 3.
i
Using the %C command to display standard text will cancel a blinking cursor. You can maintain a blinking cursor after a %C command by transmitting an ASCII decimal value of 21 to the display (i.e. via %& Send Control Code command or by including
‘\021’ within the %C extended text command).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-48 Chapter 9
Example:
Disabling Extended Text on the 4X20
VFD
The lower case ‘p’ identifies the ASCII decimal values 025, 153 and 021 as the commands to select the Katakana character set, display the right-arrow, and blink the cursor.
==================================
CUSTOMER ENTRY FORMP1,1a%C
Customer Name?P3,1%C
\025\153\021p4,1%C
CUSTOMER ENTRY FORM
Customer Name?
™ ø
Display Extended Text on 4X20 VFD
[ text ] p [ row , column ] [ clear ] %C
Allows non-displayable control codes and extended ASCII characters to be transmitted to the LCD. This command is identical to the display standard text on 4X20 VFD with the exception of the position identifier ‘p’. Here, the lower case ‘p’ is used to identify three digits preceded by a backslash ‘\’ character as a single ASCII decimal value.
For example,
\025\152 Use Arrow Keys \154p1,1a%C will display
˜ Use Arrow Keys š
In this command, the ‘\025’ is sent as a single ASCII decimal value. This control code selects the Katakana character set. The ‘\152’ and ‘\154’
ASCII decimal values are extended control codes that display the down and up arrows. You can also use this method to send display commands such as blink cursor, backspace, scroll mode, etc.
i
U International characters are used when the top line of the 4X20 VFD is enabled for auto-update. When these symbols must be displayed, the international character set is automatically selected, possibly resulting in the display of unexpected symbols when using the
Katakana character set. Always reselect the Katakana character set when the top line auto-update is enabled for Katakana characters.
%C D ISPLAY T EXT ON 8X40 AND 16X40 LCD
Syntax Display Standard Text on LCD
[ text ] P [ row , column ] [ clear ] [ ,
F|f size ] %C
Display Extended Text on LCD
[ text ] p [ row , column ] [ clear ] [ ,
F|f size ] %C
Arguments
F f text row column
Normal text (black on white)
Inverse text (white on black)
Text to be displayed beginning at cursor position.
Row (1 à 16) to position cursor.
Column (1 à 40) to position cursor.
GSE Scale Systems
clear size
Notes
Macros 9-49
Select one of the following clear options: a Clears entire display before displaying text c Clears entire line before displaying text
C Clears to the end of line after displayed text
Select one of the following font size options:
1 Small font size (H = 1 line, W = 1 column)
2 Medium font size (H = 2 lines, W = 2 columns)
4 Large font size (H = 4 lines, W = 4 columns)
Omitting row and column assumes the current cursor position.
Once a font size is selected, that size remains in effect until changed.
Addressing the LCD does not utilize the transmit port of comm 4 as with the 4X20 VFD.
%d Display Control See Also
Display Standard Text on 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
[ text ] P [ row , column ] [ clear ] [ ,F|f size ] %C
Sends text out the LCD interface to be displayed on the 4x20 VFD. This command uses an upper case ‘P’ to separate preceding text from the row/column coordinates where the text will be displayed.
Pa%C
P2,1a%C
P2,1%C
P2,1c%C
TOTALP7,1,F2%C
TOTALP7,1a,f2%C
WELCOMEP3,7a,F4%C
Clears the entire display. Cursor position does not change.
Clears the entire display and positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
Positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
Clears line 2 and positions the cursor on line 2, column 1.
Displays medium size standard text starting on line 7, column 1.
Clears the entire display and displays medium size inverse text starting on line
7, column 1.
Clears the entire display and displays large size standard text starting on line
3, column 7.
11.0.18496P%oP3,5C,f1%C Displays current time in small size inverse text starting on line 3, column 5, clearing to the end of line 3.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-50 Chapter 9
Display Extended Text on 4X20 VFD
[ text ] p [ row , column ] [ clear ] [ ,F|f size ]%C
Allows non-displayable control codes and extended ASCII characters to be transmitted to the LCD. This command is identical to the display standard text on LCD with the exception of the position identifier ‘p’. Here, the lower case ‘p’ is used to identify three digits preceded by a backslash ‘\’ character as a single ASCII decimal value.
For example,
\179 Use Arrow Keys \180p1,1a,F2%C will display
á Use Arrow Keys â
The ‘\179’ and ‘\180’ ASCII decimal values are extended control codes that display the up and down arrows. Refer to Appendix C for a complete list of displayable LCD characters.
%C D
RAW
B
OX
/ L
INE ON
8X40
AND
16X40 LCD
Syntax Draw Line / Box on LCD
< start row > , < start column> , < end row > ,
< end column > < W|w > < line code > [ C|c|A ]
B%C
C c
A
Arguments start row Row (1 à 16) to position cursor at starting coordinate.
start column Column (1 à 40) to position cursor at starting coordinate.
end row end column
Row (1 à 16) to position cursor at ending coordinate.
Column (1 à 40) to position cursor at ending coordinate.
W w line code
Normal line (black on white).
Inverse line (white on black).
A line style number (1 à 21). See Table 9-2.
1 à 7
8 à 15 box lines horizontal lines
16 à 21 vertical lines
Clears characters within the box (clear blank / white).
Clears characters within the box (clear solid / black).
Clears characters with alternating pixels (gray fill).
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-51
Notes Variable values can be substituted for all numeric values.
See Substituting Variables for Numeric Values in the following sections.
Draw Box on 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
To draw a box on the LCD, specify beginning (upper-left) and ending
(lower-right) coordinates. Use line codes 1 à 7 (see Table 9-2).
5,20,8,40W1B%C
5,1,8,40w2AB%C
1,1,16,40W7CB%C
Draws a box in the lower-right corner of the
8X40 LCD, black lines (style 1)
Draws a box in the bottom half of the 8X40
LCD, white lines (style 2), gray fill
Draws a box bordering the entire 16X40
LCD, black lines, clear box
Draw Horizontal Line on 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
To draw a horizontal line on the LCD, specify the same start row and end row . Use line codes 8 à 15 (see Table 9-2).
5,1,5,40W8B%C Draws a horizontal black line across row 5
(style 8)
Draw Vertical Line on 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
To draw a vertical line on the LCD, specify the same start column and end column . Use line codes 16 à 21 (see Table 9-2).
1,20,8,20W1B%C Draws a vertical black line down column 20
(style 1)
Substituting Variables for Numeric Values
Variables can be substituted in the syntax for all numeric values. One possible use of this feature is storing box/line coordinates in a database.
1P,2P,3P,4PW1PB%C Draws a box using the coordinates specified by the values stored in variables 1, 2, 3 and
4, black line (style specified by value of variable 5)
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-52 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
Table 9-2: Box / Line Drawing Styles
S TYLE
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
6
7
4
5
8
1
2
3
9
20
21
D ESCRIPTION
Box : 1-pixel line width
Box : 2-pixel line width
Box: 3-pixel line width
Box: 4-pixel line width
Box: 5-pixel line width
Box: 1-pixel line width; double border
Box: 2-pixel line width; double border
Horizontal line: 1-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 2-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 3-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 4-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 5-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 6-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 7-pixel line width
Horizontal line: 8-pixel line width
Vertical line: 1-pixel line width
Vertical line: 2-pixel line width
Vertical line: 3-pixel line width
Vertical line: 4-pixel line width
Vertical line: 5-pixel line width
Vertical line: 6-pixel line width
%D D
EACTIVATE
S
ETPOINT
Syntax Deactivate Setpoint
[ L | U ] < setpoint# > [ : delay ] %D
Deactivate All Setpoints
* [ L | U ] %D
Arguments
L
U setpoint# delay
Notes
Locks specified setpoint(s) in a deactivated state.
Unlocks specified setpoint(s).
Setpoint(s) (1 à 256) to be deactivated.
Delay time in seconds (0.002 à 5,767,168) before the specified setpoint(s) will deactivate.
The %D command does not apply to setpoints configured as inputs (except Modbus inputs used to invoke macros).
A range or list of setpoints may be specified for setpoint# as described in the following examples.
A delay cannot be specified when locking/unlocking setpoints.
A variable value can be substituted for setpoint# and/or delay using the syntax
< variable# >P where variable# is a valid variable 1 à 999.
Macros 9-53
See Also %A Activate Setpoint
%F If Setpoint Deactivated
Example:
Canceling a Deactivation Delay Without
Invoking a Macro
If the deactivation delay of setpoint #2 expires precisely after the operator presses [STOP] , macro
#9 will be pushed on the stack. Removing macro
#9 from the stack prevents it from being invoked should this happen.
===================================
5099%s2%e SPT #2
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sMIXER%e SPNam MIXER
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.00%e AcDly 0.00
5112%s0%e AcMac None!
5130%s4%e Deact Alwys
5131%s60.00%e DeDly 60.00
5132%s9%e DeMac 9
5133%s0%e DeMtn Ing’d
MACRO #6 – MANUAL START
2%A start mixer
Mixing...P4,1c%C
MACRO #7 – MANUAL STOP
2:0%D stop mixer
9%B clear macro from stack
Mixer Stopped!P4,1c%C
MACRO #9 – MIX COMPLETE
Mix Complete!P4,1c%C
Deactivate Setpoint
[ L | U ] < setpoint# > [ : delay ] %D
Deactivates any setpoint configured as an output or disabled.
A deactivation delay can be specified to postpone the deactivation of a setpoint after the %D command is executed. Specifying a delay overrides the deactivation delay setting at P5111. If a deactivation delay has not expired before issuing another deactivation delay for the same setpoint, the delay timer is reset to the new delay time. Macros assigned at P5112 to be invoked upon deactivation of a setpoint will not execute until the deactivation delay time has expired. If delay is omitted from the deactivation command, the macro assigned at P5112 will not be invoked unless a delay time is specified at P5111. If delay is specified with a value of zero (0), then any delay specified at P5111 is cancelled and the macro assigned at P5112 will not be invoked.
i
Deactivating a setpoint with a delay of zero (0) does not guarantee that the macro specified at P5112 will not be invoked. If a deactivation delay was already in progress, the delay may have expired during execution of the macro that is supposed to cancel the delay, causing that macro to be placed on the macro stack and to be invoked upon completion of the cancellation macro. To prevent this, always clear the unwanted macro from the stack immediately after canceling the deactivation delay (see example – Canceling a
Deactivation Delay Without Invoking a Macro ).
Setpoints can also be “locked” in a deactive state to prevent unwanted activation. This technique is often used in emergency stop routines to prevent outputs from activating when the normal activation condition occurs. A deactive-locked setpoint cannot be activated by any means. It must first be unlocked before being activated. Note that unlocking a setpoint does not automatically change its state.
1%D
1:10%D
5:0%D
Deactivates setpoint 1 immediately unless a delay is specified at P5131. A macro specified at P5132 will not be invoked unless a delay is specified at P5131.
Deactivates setpoint 1 in 10 seconds. A macro specified at P5132 will be invoked after the 10 second delay regardless of any delay specified at
P5131.
Deactivates setpoint 5 immediately. A macro specified at P5132 will not be invoked.
L1%D
U1%D
Deactivate and lock setpoint 1 immediately without invoking the macro specified at P5132.
Unlock setpoint 1 without changing its state. No macros are invoked as a direct result of this command.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-54 Chapter 9 i
The current value of a setpoint’s deactivation delay timer can be accessed via 76P and 77P. See
Setpoint Timers beginning on page 7-24 for more details.
17-32%D Deactivates setpoints 17 through 32 immediately unless a delay is specified at P5131. A macro specified at P5132 will not be invoked unless a delay is specified at P5131.
A group of setpoints can be deactivated by specifying a range and/or comma delimited list of setpoint numbers. The criteria for deactivation delays, invoking macros are the same as previously described.
1,3,5%D
1-8,15,16%D
1-4,5:10%D
Deactivates setpoints 1, 2 and 3.
Deactivates setpoints 1 through 8, 15 and 16.
Deactivates setpoints 1 through 4 immediately and deactivates setpoint 5 after a 10 second delay.
When locking or unlocking a group of setpoints, only the setpoints listed without a delay time will be locked or unlocked. Those with a specified delay time will deactivate when the delay expires.
L1,3,5%D
U1,3,5%D
L7-10,13:10%D
Deactivates and locks setpoints 1, 3 and 5.
Unlock setpoints 1, 3 and 5.
Deactivates and locks setpoints 7 through 10.
Setpoint 13 will deactivate after a 10 second delay.
U1-7,9:5,21-23%D Unlocks setpoints 1 through 7 and 21 through 23.
Setpoint 9 will deactivate after a 5 second delay.
Variable values can also be used to specify a setpoint number or deactivation delay. This technique is useful when recalling setpoint numbers from a database to serve as valve numbers, mixer numbers, etc.
This allows you to write one routine to handle a fill routine for multiple ingredients.
1P%D
5P:6P%D
Deactivates the setpoint specified by the value of
VAR#1.
Deactivates the setpoint specified by the value of
VAR#5 using the delay specified by the value of
VAR#6.
Deactivate All Setpoint
* [ L | U ] %D
Immediately deactivates all setpoints. No delay time can be specified.
Delays in progress are cancelled.
*%D Deactivates all setpoints immediately, overriding all delays. No macros are invoked as a direct result of this command.
*L%D Deactivate and lock all setpoints immediately without invoking macros.
GSE Scale Systems
*U%D
Macros 9-55
Unlock all setpoints without changing states. No macros are invoked as a direct result of this command.
?
Every IF command should be terminated with an END IF .
%E E ND I F
Syntax End If
%E
See Also %N Else (If Not)
%{ Start Group
%} End Group
Boolean Logic
End If
Serves as the termination point for all comparison ( if ) statements. If the condition of the comparison is false, macro execution will skip ahead to the next %N or %E command, whichever occurs first. Every comparison command should be terminated with a %E command.
Example:
Using the %F Command to Toggle a
Flag
This routine uses setpoint #201 to toggle a display flag every time [F1] is pressed.
===================================
5099%s201%e SPT #201
5100%s0%e SPTyp Disbl
5101%sSYSTEM%e SPNam SYSTEM
MACRO #1 – TOGGLE SYSTEM
201%F if SYSTEM flag not set…
201%A set SYSTEM flag
SYSTEM #1P4,1%C
%N else
201%D clear SYSTEM flag
SYSTEM #2P4,1%C
%E end if
MACRO #6 – SYSTEM START
201%F if SYSTEM flag not set…
10%^ go to macro 10
%N else
11%^ go to macro 11
%E end if
%F I F S ETPOINT D EACTIVATED
Syntax If Setpoint Deactivated
< setpoint# > %F
If Setpoint Queued for Deactivation
. < setpoint# > %F
Arguments setpoint#
Notes
See Also
Setpoint (0 à 256) to check for deactivation.
The %F command applies to all setpoint configurations.
Setpoint ‘0’ (zero) checks for the program jumper in the
‘NO’ position (yields a true condition).
%D Deactivate Setpoint
%O If Setpoint Activated
If Setpoint Deactivated
< setpoint# > %F
Determines if a setpoint input or output is deactivated. The example –
Using the %F Command to Toggle a Flag shows how to use the %F command to toggle a setpoint used as a prompting flag.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-56 Chapter 9
If Setpoint Queued for Deactivation
. < setpoint# > %F
The if setpoint queued for deactivation command is a conditional statement that determines if a setpoint output has a deactivation delay in effect.
.5%F Determines if setpoint 5 is queued for deactivation.
%G G ET E NTRY
Syntax Get Entry
[ prompt ] [ ,* ] %G
Arguments prompt
*
Notes
See Also
Text to be displayed as an entry prompt on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
Entered characters will be displayed as an asterisks ‘*’.
The prompt should be limited to 10 characters. If more than 10 characters are specified, only the last 10 will be used for the prompt .
The first 5 characters of the prompt will be displayed on the top line of the 2X5 matrix, the last 5 characters on the bottom line.
%K Get Entry from 4x20 VFD
%n Get Numeric Entry
%\ If No Entry
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%o Math Assignment
Example:
Qualifying an Operator Entry
This routine requires a valid entry before allowing it to be stored in VAR#2. The operator will be prompted to repeat the entry if no entry was made or if the entry was beyond the acceptable range.
===================================
80.2P=0%o clear target value
%T tag position
EnterTargt%G get entry
%\ if no entry…
Must Enter%P prompt
%J jump to tag
%E end if
%[ save entry
%]>1000%o if entry > 1000
%| OR
%]<0%o if entry < 0…
OutOfRange%P prompt
%J jump to tag
%E end if
80.2P=%]%o store entry (VAR#2)
Get Entry
Accepts alphanumeric user input. When this command is executed, the macro is suspended until the entry is completed by pressing [ENTER] .
The optional prompt will be displayed until the first entry character is received. The %G command will accept an entry from the front panel keypad or any enabled comm port. Up to 79 characters can be entered and will remain in the entry buffer after [ENTER] is pressed (or a carriage return <CR> is received on one of the comm ports) requiring the next macro command to retrieve and/or store the entry. An entry in process can be cleared by pressing [CLR] . This clears the entire entry from the entry buffer, displays the optional prompt , and restarts the entry process.
Use of the asterisks ‘*’ argument will cause each entered character to appear as an asterisks on the display. This provides a means of adding security to a user entry such as a password. Note that the asterisks
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-57
Example:
Using the %H Command to Redefine
Keys
The [SETUP] key invokes macro 8 which displays the main setup menu and reassigns keys to invoke macro 9. Macro 9 will display a new menu depending on which key was pressed,
[F1] , [F2] or [F3] . Each new menu reassigns keys to yet another macro intended to perform the functions of the sub-menu. The [F4] key is used to exit the menu. Other keys are ignored.
===================================
MACRO #8 – SETUP KEY
[F1] Set TargetsP1,1a%C
[F2] Set TimersP2,1%C
[F3] Set CountersP3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,9%H
MACRO #9 – SETUP MENU SELECTION
128P0C%( if [F1] key pressed…
[F1] Final TargetP1,1a%C
[F2] Slow FillP2,1%C
[F3] Pre-ActP3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,10%H
%N else
--------------------------------
129P0C%( if [F2] key pressed…
[F1] Mix TimerP1,1a%C
[F2] Surge TimerP2,1%C
[F3] Pump TimerP3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,20%H
%N else
--------------------------------
130P0C%( if [F3] key pressed…
[F1] Batch CountP1,1a%C
[F2] Master CountP2,1%C
[F3] Ticket No.P3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,30%H
%N else
--------------------------------
131P0C%( if [F4] pressed…
Pa%C clear display
X%d auto-update
0,0%H reset keypad normal
%N else
--------------------------------
%) clear keypress
%E end if characters only appear during the entry. When [ENTER] is pressed to complete the entry, the entered characters are put into the entry buffer and become visible on the display. Be sure to copy the entry to a variable or other parameter immediately after the entry is complete to prevent this from happening.
i
Alphanumeric characters may be entered during the %G command using the front panel as described in the Key-In Value Parameters section on page 3-8.
?
Unexpected results may occur when entries contain both number and alpha characters, especially when including math symbols.
Refer to the section on string assignments on page 9-117 for information on how to handle these special cases.
KeyInTargt%G
=80.11P%o
11%i
%G
%e
EnterTank#%G
%A
TruckID# ?%G
%[
EnterTare?%G
%t
EnterCode?,*%G
Prompts for target entry and stores entry in
VAR#11.
Simulates a manual entry into VAR#11.
VAR#11 is selected as the current mode using the variable’s name as the prompt. Use this method when entering time/date values or scale-specific float values for selectable units.
Prompts for a tank number, expecting a valid output setpoint number for activation.
Prompts for a truck ID# and moves the entry from the entry buffer to the temporary buffer.
Prompts for a tare entry and uses the entry as manual tare value.
Prompts for a code entry and displays an asterisks ‘*’ symbol in place of each character.
%H R EDEFINE C OMM P ORT F UNCTION
Syntax Redefine Comm Port Function
< comm > , < macro# | receive mode > %H
Redefine Comm Port Function For DSD
591, < comm > %H
Arguments comm Communication port (0 à 4; port 0 = front panel keypad or disabled in the case of DSD).
macro# Macro number (0 à 250 for port 0; 4 à 250 for ports 1 à
4 ) to be invoked upon receiving a character from specified port.
receive mode Receive mode for ports 1 à 4 corresponding to selections for P205 of the setup mode:
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-58 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
Notes
See Also
0
1
2
3
Disable port receive
Set port receive standard
Set port receive for input interpreter
Set port receive for Modbus
A port will remain redefined as specified until changed again by another %H command.
The receive mode argument does not change the setup mode selection at P205, rather it temporarily changes the receive mode function until power is interrupted or upon saving changes when exiting the setup mode.
When a macro is invoked, the received character remains in the receive buffer. Thus the macro can test the port with the %( command and identify the character that invoked the macro.
When specifying port 0, keys on front panel keypad will no longer perform standard functions automatically.
Specify macro# 0 for port 0 to restore standard front panel keypad functions.
%( If Character Received
%) Clear Receive Buffer
%T Tag Position
%!
Enable/Disable Comm Port
Redefine Comm Port Function
< comm > , < macro# | receive mode > %H
Temporarily changes a comm port’s receive function (disabled, enabled, input interpreter or Modbus) or it can specify a macro to be invoked when a character appears in the receive buffer. When used in conjunction with the front panel keypad to invoke a macro, the %H command allows you to customize the function of every key. Refer to the example – Using the %(
Command to Get Entry command on page 9-37 for additional information.
The %H command cannot be used to interrupt a macro. Characters received during macro execution are buffered and will invoke a specified macro once the macro stack is cleared. The %H command takes precedence over keypad macro assignments at P800 à P820.
Macro entry commands that require a keypress (%G, %W, %Y, etc.) revert to normal keypad operation while the entry command is in effect. A subsequent keypress resumes the function set forth by the last %H command.
?
A character or keypress received while the %H command is in effect will remain in the receive buffer until cleared. Failure to clear a received character will result in the macro being invoked in an endless loop, thus locking up the system. Should this happen, press
[CLR] + [SELECT] to invoke the macro abort menu. Select the
“suspend macro” option to stop macro execution. Remember to
Macros 9-59 resume execution after correcting the problem by pressing [CLR] +
[SELECT] and selecting the “resume macro” option.
2,2%H
2,3%H
2,4%H
0,1%H
0,2%H
0,0%H
1,0%H
1,1%H
1,2%H
1,3%H
Disables receive on comm 1.
Enables the standard receive mode on comm 1.
Enables the input interpreter receive mode on comm 1.
Enables the Modbus receive mode on comm 1.
1,4%H Invokes macro 4 when a character is received on comm 1.
1,10%H Invokes macro 10 when a character is received on comm 1.
2,0%H
2,1%H
Disables receive on comm 2.
Enables the standard receive mode on comm 2.
Enables the input interpreter receive mode on comm 2.
Enables the Modbus receive mode on comm 2.
Invokes macro 4 when a character is received on comm 2.
Invokes macro 1 when a front panel key is pressed.
Invokes macro 2 when a front panel key is pressed.
Restores the front panel keypad to normal operation.
Redefine Comm Port Function For DSD
591 , < comm > %H
Changes a comm port’s receive function for use with the Data Storage
Device (DSD) feature (see page 6-13). It allow overriding the DSD port selection at P591. This change is temporary, and will be lost on power-up or if the setup mode is entered and saved.
The DSD function temporarily overrides whatever other receive function was setup for use of the port (P205). When the DSD functionality is moved to another port, the previous behavior is restored.
Note that if a comm port is programmed as receive disabled at P205, then it will not be possible to use the %H macro command to turn the comm port on. No data will be received.
Use of this macro command to change the operation of a comm port that is in use by DSD does not take control away from DSD. If DSD is then moved to another port, this previous selection would then begin operation.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-60 Chapter 9
Example:
Updating a Displayed Variable Value
%T tag position
80.4P<100%o if VAR#4 < 100…
80.4P+=1%o increment
%I refresh display
%J jump to tag
%E end if
%I R EFRESH D ISPLAY
Syntax Refresh Display
%I
Refresh Display
Updates a displayed value during macro execution. If the display is not refreshed, the displayed value will not change until macro execution has ended.
Example:
Using a Jump-to-Tag to Copy a
Database
5,1%y get first row in dbase#1
1%T tag position #1
4%_ if row not found…
%N else
3,2%y make row in dbase#2
6,1%y next row in dbase#1
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
%J J UMP TO T AG
Syntax Jump to Tag
[ tag# ] %J
Jump to Tag (Macro Independent)
@ < text > [ , macro# ] %J
Arguments tag# text macro#
Notes
See Also
Tagged position (0 à 99) to jump to.
Alphanumeric tag identifier.
Macro number (1 à 250) to search for specified tag.
Omitting tag# is the equivalent of specifying a tag position of 0.
Omit macro# to search for the specified tag within the same macro.
%T Tag Position
Example:
Jumping to Resume After a Power
Failure
If VAR#5 contains a saved resume location at power-up, macro 250 will jump to that location.
The resume location can be changed in other macros by assigning a different tag in VAR#5.
================================
MACRO #6 – START FILL
80.3P+=1%o increment batch#
%t tare
@RESUME%T tag location
80.5P="@RESUME,6"%o save resume location
1%A activate fill output
Filling...P4,1c%C prompt
MACRO #250 – POWER-UP
80.5P!=""%o if resume saved…
80.5P%o%J jump to resume
%E end if
Jump to Tag
[ tag# ] %J
Jumps backwards in a macro to a previously tagged position. Jumping is most commonly performed after a conditional statement that determines whether or not a particular routine should be repeated. Both jump and tag must occur within the same macro. Each tag within a macro should be unique, however individual jump commands can be used as often as necessary. It is not possible to jump to a tagged location that has not been executed within the macro. Even though a tag may be positioned before a corresponding jump, the jump will be invalid if the tag was skipped due to a branching command.
0%J
10%J
Jumps backward to the last
Jumps backward to the last
0%T or
10%T
%T
tag.
tag.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-61
Jump to Tag (Macro Independent)
@ < text > [ , macro# ] %J
Jumps backwards or forwards to a tag in the same macro or to a tag in another macro. The tag identifier can consist of up to 79 alphanumeric characters, but must not include a comma (,). Each tag within a macro should be unique, however individual jump commands can be used as often as necessary. When a macro independent jump is performed, the jump function begins searching for an ‘@’ character from the beginning of the specified macro. When it encounters this character, it proceeds to compare the tag identifier with the jump identifier. When an exact match is found, macro execution resumes with the command following the tag.
This tag search routine allows jumping to a tagged location that has not been executed within a macro.
@START%J Searches the current macro for a @START%T command and resumes execution with the following command.
@FILL,10%J Searches macro 10 for a @FILL%T command and resumes execution with the following command.
Example:
Simple 4X20 VFD Entry Screen
This entry routine displays a complete entry form before blinking the cursor in the first entry field. When [ENTER] is pressed to complete the part number entry, the part number is stored in VAR#12. The cursor will then blink in the tare weight entry field awaiting another entry.
Note the use of square brackets [ ] to help identify the location and size of the entry window.
===================================
PACKAGE INFORMATIONP1,1a%C
Part Number [ ]P3,1%C
Tare Wt. [ ]P4,1%C
3,14,6,6%K
=80.12P%o
4,14,6,6n%K
=80.13P%o
PACKAGE INFORMATION
Part Number [? ]
Tare Wt. [ ]
%K G ET E NTRY FROM 4X20 VFD
Syntax Get Entry from 4X20 VFD
< row , column,window >[, max entry ][n][b][u][g][*]%K b u
Arguments n g
* row column window max entry
Allow only numeric entry characters (0 à 9, '. ', ' -'. ' +').
Do not blink cursor.
Display underscore ‘_’ in place of cursor.
Defines the 4X20 VFD entry window as the new entry buffer. Operator input is not expected and macro execution continues, however any keypress or received character that would normally be displayed on the 2X5 matrix of the 7-segment VFD will instead be displayed in the entry window of the 4X20 VFD. The entry window will persist, even while in the setup mode, until cancelled by a
%K command issued without arguments.
Entered characters will be displayed as an asterisks ‘*’.
Row (1 à 4) to position beginning entry position.
Column (1 à 20) to position beginning entry position.
Entry window size (1 à 79) in terms of characters.
Maximum number of characters (1 à 79) to be entered.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-62 Chapter 9
Notes
See Also
Omitting max entry assumes a maximum entry of 79 characters.
An entry error occurs if window exceeds the number of character locations from the cursor origin to the end of the display.
%G Get Entry
%n Get Numeric Entry
%\ If No Entry
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%o Math Assignment
Get Entry from 4X20 VFD
Formats operator entries using the 4X20 VFD. An entry “window” can be defined by specifying the beginning coordinates, window size and maximum entry length. The entry window will overwrite any underlying text with spaces. By default, the cursor will blink at the leftmost location of the entry window. With each character entered, the cursor will shift right one position until it reaches the end of the window. If the entry length exceeds the window size, the cursor will remain in the rightmost location and characters in the window will shift left as additional characters are appended to the entry. Additional characters may not be entered once the maximum entry length is reached.
When the %K command is executed, the macro is suspended until the entry is completed by pressing [ENTER] . Any prompting should be displayed prior to the %K command. Entries will be accepted from the front panel keypad or any enabled comm port. Entered characters will remain in the entry buffer until [ENTER] is pressed (or a carriage return
<CR> is received on one of the comm ports) allowing the next macro command to retrieve and/or store the entry. An entry in process can be cleared by pressing [CLR] . This clears the entire entry from the entry buffer and restarts the entry process.
Use of the asterisks ‘*’ argument will cause each entered character to appear as an asterisks on the display. This provides a means of adding security to a user entry such as a password. Note that the asterisks characters only appear during the entry. When [ENTER] is pressed to complete the entry, the entered characters are put into the entry buffer and become visible on the display. Be sure to copy the entry to a variable or other parameter immediately after the entry is complete to prevent this from happening.
i
Alphanumeric characters may be entered during the %K command using the front panel as described in the Key-In Value Parameters section on page 3-8.
4,10,6,6%K Creates a 6-character entry window beginning at row 4, column 10. A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
1,17,4%K Creates a 4-character entry window beginning at row 1, column 17. A maximum of 79 characters can be entered.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-63
Example:
Displaying Values Before New Entry.
A break-tag is used to stop macro #1 execution until the first entry character is pressed. The %H command then redirects the keypress to macro
#10 which determines if the character is alphanumeric. If so, the character is passed back to macro #1 at the break-tag resume location (note that the character is not cleared from the receive buffer in macro #10). The %K command then completes the entry process and continues with the next entry field.
MACRO #1 – CUSTOM DATA ENTRY
CUSTOMER INFORMATIONP1,1a%C
Customer Name:P3,1%C
\025\153p4,1%C
80.2.16403P%oP4,2%C
\021p4,2%C blink cursor
0,10%H keypad invokes macro 10
4,10%H alpha key invokes macro 10
1B%T break-tag #1
4,2,19,19%K get entry
%\ if no entry…
%N else
=80.2P%o save entry in VAR#2
%E end if
--------------------------------
Customer Address:P3,1%C
\025\153p4,1%C
80.3.16403P%oP4,2%C
\021p4,2%C blink cursor
0,10%H keypad invokes macro 10
4,10%H alpha key invokes macro 10
1B%T break-tag #1
4,2,19,19%K get entry
%\ if not entry…
%N else
=80.3P%o save entry in VAR#3
%E end if
MACRO #10 – GET FIRST KEYPRESS
32,126P04%( if alphanumeric keypress
%| OR
229P04%( if [ENTER] pressed…
0,0%H normal keypad operation
4,1%H normal alpha operation
1%J jump to break-tag
%N else
--------------------------------
227P0C%( if [CLR] pressed…
0,0%H normal keypad operation
4,1%H normal alpha operation
20%^ go to macro 20
%N else
--------------------------------
%) clear keypress
%E end if
3,1,6,6n%K
3,1,6,6nb%K
3,1,20g%K
3,1,20gb*%K Same as above but without a blinking cursor. Entered characters to be displayed an asterisks ‘*’.
%K
å
Creates a 6-digit (numeric-only) entry window beginning at row 3, column 1. 6 digits can be entered.
Same as above but without a blinking cursor.
Relocates the entry buffer from the 7-segment VFD to row 3, column 1of the 4X20 VFD. The entry buffer size is increased to 20 characters.
Cancels the 4X20 VFD entry buffer and restores the entry buffer to the 7-segment VFD.
When prompting for an operator entry, it is often desirable to display the current value of an entry field. Although the %K command cannot preload a value within the entry window, it is possible to display a formatted value in the location of the entry window and wait for the first entry keypress before executing the %K command. The example – Displaying
Values Before New Entry demonstrates an advanced entry technique using the %H command to pass the first entered character to the %K entry window. Because the %K command is not in effect when the entry begins, the parameter’s value can be displayed without being overwritten by the entry window. Note that macro 10 makes it possible to check for other keys pressed at the beginning of the entry. In this example, pressing
[CLR] without an entry in process will abort the entire entry routine.
G
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
Customer Name:
™ A CME Products
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
Customer Name:
™G ø eneral Products
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
Customer Name:
™General Products ø
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-64 Chapter 9
%K G ET E NTRY FROM 8X40 AND 16X40 LCD
Syntax Get Entry from 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
< row , column,window >[, max entry ][n][u][g]
[*][,F|f size ]%K f n
Arguments
F u g
* row column window max entry size
Notes
See Also
Normal entry text (black on white)
Inverse entry text (white on black)
Allow only numeric entry characters (0 à 9, '. ', ' -'. ' +').
Display underscore ‘_’ in place of cursor.
Defines the 4X20 VFD entry window as the new entry buffer. Operator input is not expected and macro execution continues, however any keypress or received character that would normally be displayed on the 2X5 matrix of the 7-segment VFD will instead be displayed in the entry window of the 4X20 VFD. The entry window will persist, even while in the setup mode, until cancelled by a
%K command issued without arguments.
Entered characters will be displayed as an asterisks ‘*’.
Row (1 à 16) to position beginning entry position.
Column (1 à 40) to position beginning entry position.
Entry window size (1 à 79) in terms of characters.
Maximum number of characters (1 à 79) to be entered.
Select one of the following font size options:
1 Small font size (H = 1 line, W = 1 column)
2 Medium font size (H = 2 lines, W = 2 columns)
4 Large font size (H = 4 lines, W = 4 columns)
Omitting max entry assumes a maximum entry of 79 characters.
An entry error occurs if window exceeds the number of character locations from the cursor origin to the end of the display.
Once a font size is selected, that size remains in effect until changed.
Addressing the LCD does not utilize the transmit port of comm 4 as with the 4X20 VFD.
%G Get Entry
%n Get Numeric Entry
%\ If No Entry
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%o Math Assignment
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-65
Get Entry from 8X40 and 16X40 LCD
Formats operator entries using the 8X40 and 16X40 LCD. An entry
“window” can be defined by specifying the beginning coordinates, window size and maximum entry length. The entry window will overwrite any underlying text with spaces. By default, the cursor will be positioned at the leftmost location of the entry window. With each character entered, the cursor will shift right one position until it reaches the end of the window. If the entry length exceeds the window size, the cursor will remain in the rightmost location and characters in the window will shift left as additional characters are appended to the entry. Additional characters may not be entered once the maximum entry length is reached.
When the %K command is executed, the macro is suspended until the entry is completed by pressing [ENTER] . Any prompting should be displayed prior to the %K command. Entries will be accepted from the front panel keypad or any enabled comm port. Entered characters will remain in the entry buffer until [ENTER] is pressed (or a carriage return
<CR> is received on one of the comm ports) allowing the next macro command to retrieve and/or store the entry. An entry in process can be cleared by pressing [CLR] . This clears the entire entry from the entry buffer and restarts the entry process.
Use of the asterisks ‘*’ argument will cause each entered character to appear as an asterisks on the display. This provides a means of adding security to a user entry such as a password. Note that the asterisks characters only appear during the entry. When [ENTER] is pressed to complete the entry, the entered characters are put into the entry buffer and become visible on the display. Be sure to copy the entry to a variable or other parameter immediately after the entry is complete to prevent this from happening.
i
Alphanumeric characters may be entered during the %K command using the front panel as described in the Key-In Value Parameters section on page 3-8.
4,10,6,6,F1%K Creates a 6-character, small font size entry window beginning at row 4, column 10. A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
1,17,4,8,F2%K Creates a 4-character, medium font size entry window beginning at row 1, column 17. A maximum of 8 characters can be entered.
1,17,4%K Creates a 4-character entry window beginning at row 1, column 17. A maximum of 79 characters can be entered. The previous font size remains in effect.
7,1,6,6n,f2%K Creates a 6-digit (numeric-only), medium inverse font size entry window beginning at row 3, column 1. 6 digits can be entered.
5,1,20g%K Relocates the entry buffer from the LCD auto-update to row 5, column 1of the 4X20 VFD. The entry buffer size is increased to 20 characters.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-66 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
%K Cancels the relocated LCD entry buffer and restores the entry buffer to the LCD auto-update.
%K I F E NTRY T ERMINATED BY F UNCTION K EY
Syntax If Entry Terminated by Function Key
? < key > %K
Arguments key
See Also
Select one of the following function keys:
0
2
6
7
8
[ENTER]
[F2]
[START]
[STOP]
[SETUP]
(660 Series only)
%G Get Entry
%n Get Numeric Entry
If Entry Terminated by Function Key
Determines which key was used to terminate an entry from a %G, %K or
%n command.
Pass-word?%G
?7%K
Abort%P
%N
=80.1P%o
%E
Prompts for a password, then determines if the
[STOP] key terminated the entry. If [STOP] was pressed, then “ Abort ” is displayed. Otherwise the entry is stored in VAR#1.
%L L
ANGUAGE
S
ELECTION
Syntax Get Current Language
%L
Set Language
< language# > %L
Arguments language# Select one of the following language numbers:
Macros 9-67
Notes
See Also
5
6
3
4
7
8
0
1
2
9
10
11
12
USA
France
German
UK
Denmark
Sweden
Italy
Spain
Japan
Norway
Denmark 2
Spain 2
Latin America
The language# argument does not change the setup mode selection at P411, rather it temporarily changes the language until power is interrupted or upon saving changes when exiting the setup mode.
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%o Math Assignment
Table 6.2: International Characters
Get Current Language
%L
Copies the current language number to the entry buffer.
%L Copies the current language number to the entry buffer.
%L=80.11P%o Saves the current language number in VAR #11.
%L%[ Saves the current language number in the temporary buffer.
Set Language
< language# > %L
Overrides the power-up language selection at P411.
12%L Selects the Latin American character set.
0%L Selects the USA character set.
80.11P%o%L Selects the character set as determined by the value of VAR#11.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-68 Chapter 9
Example:
Saving and Restoring the Current
Mode
If VAR#5 is configured as a scale-specific float, a macro must simulate a manual entry rather than performing a direct assignment. This is the only way to ensure the value is entered in terms of the current units. Simulating a manual entry requires the mode to be changed to the entry parameter. This routine restores the previous parameter selection, thus making the mode change transparent to the operator.
================================
%M%[ save current mode
5%i select VAR#5
EnterTargt%G get target weight entry
%e enter target weight
%]%s restore saved mode
%M M ODE S ELECTION
Syntax Get Current Mode
%M
If Current Mode
< mode > %M
Arguments mode
Notes
Operating parameter with the syntax:
< parm > . [ instance ] where parm is a operating parameter with a valid instance .
The instance argument is required when specifying parameter 50, 51, 52, 80, 81 or 82.
Example:
Simulating the Mode Selections at
P300.
Pressing [F1] will scroll through the operating parameters included in macro 1, similar to how the [SELECT] key scrolls through the modes assigned at P300
à
P309. Note that this routine does not limit the number of selectable parameters. Macro 4 could also be programmed to scroll in reverse order via the
[F4] key.
===============================
0%M if gross mode…
1%s select net mode
%N else
1%M if net mode…
2%s select tare mode
%N else
2%M if tare mode…
0%s select gross mode
%E end if
See Also %[ Save Entry Buffer
%o Math Assignment
%s Select Mode
Get Current Mode
%M
Copies the current mode to the entry buffer. Example 9-36 shows how to use this command to save and restore the operating mode. This is useful when getting entries such as time/date or scale-specific variables where the mode must be temporarily changed in order to accept the entry in the proper format. This technique could also be used to restore a mode upon power-up if an auto-save variable is used to save and restore the mode.
%M Copies the currently displayed parameter number to the entry buffer.
%M=80.3P%o Saves the currently displayed parameter number in
VAR #3.
%M%[ Saves the currently displayed parameter number in the temporary buffer.
If Current Mode
< mode > %M
Determines if the specified mode argument is the currently displayed parameter number.
0%M Determines if the current mode is gross .
1%M
1.2%M
Determines if the current mode is
Determines if the current mode is net net
.
of scale 2 .
GSE Scale Systems
80.5%M
Macros 9-69
Determines if the current mode is variable 5 .
%N E LSE (I F N OT )
Syntax
See Also
Else (If Not)
%N
%E End If
%{ Start Group
%} End Group
Boolean Logic
Else (If Not)
Serves as the point where macro execution will resume after determining a comparison ( if ) statement to be false. Macro commands between the comparison ( if ) statement and the %N command will not be executed.
Example:
Assigning One Macro for Setpoint
Activation and Deactivation.
Setpoint input 10 invokes macro 100 when activated and when deactivated. The %O command allows the macro to branch to the appropriate routine.
================================
5099%s10%e SPT #10
5100%s2%e SPTyp Input
5101%sLEVEL%e SPNam LEVEL
5112%s100%e AcMac 100
5132%s100%e DeMac 100
MACRO #100 – START/STOP MIXER
10%O if input active…
Valve OpenP4,1c%C display text
1%D stop mixer
%N else
Valve ShutP4,1c%C display text
1%A start mixer
%E end if
%O I F S ETPOINT A CTIVATED
Syntax If Setpoint Activated
< setpoint# > %O
If Setpoint Queued for Activation
. < setpoint# > %O
Arguments setpoint#
Notes
See Also
Setpoint (0 à 256) to check for activation.
The %O command applies to all setpoint configurations.
Setpoint ‘0’ (zero) checks for the program jumper in the
‘YES’ position (yields a true condition).
%A Activate Setpoint
%F If Setpoint Deactivated
If Setpoint Activated
< setpoint# > %O
Determines if a setpoint input or output is active. The example – Assigning
One Macro for Setpoint Activation and Deactivation shows how the %O command can be used to allow a single macro to handle both the activation and deactivation condition of a setpoint input. This helps
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-70 Chapter 9 simplify program development by reducing the number of macros required and by making the setup easier to follow.
10%O Determines if setpoint 10 is activated.
If Setpoint Queued for Activation
. < setpoint# > %O
Determines if a setpoint output has an activation delay in effect.
.10%O Determines if setpoint 10 is queued for activation.
%P P
AUSE
Syntax Pause
[ prompt ] %P
Arguments prompt Text to be displayed as a prompt on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
See Also
Pause
%@ Set Pause Time
Suspends macro execution while displaying an optional prompt. The default pause time set at power-up is one second. The %@ command can be used to change the pause time from 0.01 à 5,000,000 seconds.
%P Suspends macro execution for 1 second.
BatchDone!%P Suspends macro execution for 1 second while displaying Batch Done!
.
5%@
BatchDone!%P
Suspends macro execution for 5 seconds while displaying Batch Done!
. The default 1 second pause time is restored.
1%@
Example:
Toggling Continuous Transmits.
Pressing [SELECT] toggles between GROSS and NET for 2 scales on the 4X20 display.
Pressing [PRINT] will uses the same custom transmits to redirect data out comm port 1. Note how the <FF> serves a dual purpose, advancing the printed form and positioning the cursor.
GSE Scale Systems
425%s0%e 4x20 Disbl
800%s24%e Selct Mc 24
805%s25%e Print Mc 25
%Q S END C USTOM T RANSMIT
Syntax Send Custom Transmit
Macros 9-71
< transmit# > [ . comm ] %Q
Enable / Disable Continuous Transmit
< transmit# > [ . comm ] [C | D] %Q
Set Continuous Transmit Interval
< seconds > I%Q
Set Continuous Transmit Interval to Display Rate
< transmit# > [ . comm ] X%Q
If Custom Transmit Continuous
< transmit# > [ . comm ] ?%Q
Arguments
C
D
X transmit# comm seconds
Notes
See Also
Send custom transmit continuos.
Cancel continuous custom transmit.
Send custom transmit at display rate while in net or gross mode.
Custom transmit (1 à 250) to send.
Communication port (1 à 4).
Number of seconds (0.01 à 2,883,584) to delay between continuous transmits.
The seconds argument does not change the setup mode selection at P980, rather it temporarily changes the continuous transmit interval until power is interrupted or upon saving changes when exiting the setup mode.
Only one custom transmit is allowed to be transmitted at the display rate any new #X%Q will replace the previous.
0X%Q or X%Q will stop this custom transmit.
%p Print
Send Custom Transmit
< transmit# > [ . comm ] %Q
Initiates the transmission of a specified custom transmit. The %Q command will send a custom transmit regardless of the send criteria at
P991 (even if set to ‘Off’). The transmission will occur out the comm port specified at P992 unless a different port is specified with the comm argument. Motion delay criteria at P993 à P997 will be enforced and macro will be suspended for the duration of any motion delay.
1%Q
2.3%Q
Sends custom transmit 1 out the comm port specified at
P992.
Sends custom transmit 2 out comm 3.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-72 Chapter 9
Enable / Disable Continuous Transmit
< transmit# > [ . comm ] [C | D] %Q
Allows any custom transmit to be transmitted on a continuous basis.
Enabling or disabling a continuous transmit with the %Q command will override the continuous transmit selection at P998. The transmission will occur out the comm port specified at P992 unless a different port is specified with the comm argument. Motion delay criteria at P993 à P997 will be enforced but will not suspend macro execution during a motion delay.
As many as 16 custom transmits may be set for continuous transmission.
An attempt to send more than 16 continuous transmits will be disregarded and result in a Code72 ConTx >Max!
error message. Attempting to specify a continuous transmit that is already continuous at the specified comm port will result in a Code75 Tx is Cont.
error message.
The interval at which the continuous transmit list will be sent is based on the interval specified at P980. This interval can be overridden with the
I%Q command.
Continuous transmits are sent in the order in which they were added to the continuous transmit list. For example, if custom transmit 3 is specified as continuous prior to custom transmit 1, then custom transmit 3 will be sent before custom transmit 1 at the beginning of each custom transmit interval.
A custom transmit set for continuous transmission that is set for motion delay at P993 à P997 will be skipped if the motion criteria exists at the time of the next custom transmit interval. Continuous transmits are not sent if the transmit buffer of the intended port is not empty. This prevents a backlog of transmission data. If the size of a transmission exceeds the transmit buffer size, the weight conversion process may become delayed by the transmission. Make sure the transmit buffer size at P207 is large enough to accommodate the largest transmission.
1C%Q
2.3C%Q
Sends custom transmit 1 continuously out the comm port specified at P992.
Sends custom transmit 2 out comm port 3 continuously.
2D%Q
2.3D%Q
D%Q
Cancels the continuous transmission of custom transmit 2 out the comm port specified at P992.
Cancels the continuous transmission of custom transmit 2 out comm port 3.
Cancels all continuous transmissions.
Set Continuous Transmit Interval to Display Rate
< transmit# > [ . comm ] [X] %Q
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-73
Allows any custom transmit to be transmitted on a continuous basis at the display update rate in when the scale is in gross or net weigh modes. Any other mode will stop the transmission until the gross or net weigh modes are displayed. Enabling or disabling a continuous transmits does not affect the continuous transmit display rate. The transmission will occur out the comm port specified at P992 unless a different port is specified with the comm argument. Motion delay criteria at P993 à P997 is ignored for continuous transmits at display rate.
Only one custom transmit can be sent at the display update rate. Sending a new custom transmit will cause the new transmit to replace the old one.
If one selects any weigh mode other than gross or net the display custom transmits will stop until you return. Entering setup mode will stop the custom transmit at display rate but it will startup at on exit provided the custom transmit still exists. The custom transmit at display rate will be lost on power off and on.
1X%Q
2.3X%Q
X%Q
Sends custom transmit 1 at the display update rate out the comm port specified at P992.
Sends custom transmit 2 out comm port 3 at the display update rate and will replace any previously custom transmit specified by X%Q
Cancels the continuous custom transmit at the display update rate.
0X%Q Cancels the continuous custom transmit at the display update rate
If Custom Transmit Continuous
< transmit# > [ . comm ] ?%Q
Determines if a custom transmit is set for continuous transmission.
1C?%Q Determines if custom transmit 1 is set for continuous transmission out the comm port specified at P992.
2.3C?%Q
?%Q
Determines if custom transmit 2 is set for continuous transmission out comm port 3.
Determines if any custom transmits are set for continuous transmission.
Set Continuous Transmit Interval
< seconds > I%Q
Sets the number of seconds between each attempt to send all continuous transmits. This command overrides the transmit interval assigned by P980 at power-up.
2I%Q Sets the continuous transmit interval to 2 seconds.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-74 Chapter 9
.2I%Q
0I%Q
Sets the continuous transmit interval to 0.2 seconds.
Suspends all continuous transmits.
Example:
Using a Parameter’s Name as a
Prompt.
When [START] is pressed, the net mode is renamed to prompt “Fast” when the fast fill output is activated. When setpoint #1 deactivates, macro #101 is invoked to activate the slow fill output and prompt “Slow”. When the fill is complete, setpoint #2 deactivates invoking macro #102 to prompt “Done!” and then restore the original parameter name.
================================
601%sNet %e Net Net
MACRO #6 START FAST FILL
%t tare
1%A activate fast fill output
1,Fast%R rename “Net”
MACRO #101 START SLOW FILL
? activate slow fill output
A parameter must be renamed at
1,Slow%R rename “Net”
P600 à P646 to allocate memory command.
rename “Net”
%S%P sound beeper and
p ause
1,Net%R restore “Net” name
%R R
ENAME
M
ODE
Syntax Rename Mode
< parm > , < name > %R
Arguments parm name
Notes
See Also
Operating parameter ( do not specify an instance ).
New name to appear in place of the default parameter name on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
Only operating parameters that appear in the setup mode at P600 à P646 can be renamed with the %R command.
A parameter cannot be renamed with the %R command unless it has first been renamed in the setup mode. The number of characters for name cannot exceed that of the parameter’s given name in the setup mode.
Although the %R command does not change a parameter’s given name in the setup mode, the new name is retained indefinitely if it is in effect when saving changes to the setup mode. The %R command must be used to restore the default name.
%u Units
%s Select Mode
Example:
Rename Mode Data Format
10)00 kg
Gross
0,Bruto%R
10)00 kg
Bruto
Rename Mode
Allows a parameter’s displayed name to be changed. Once changed, the new name will be displayed every time the parameter is accessed.
Renaming the mode in this manner allows you to display parameters in multiple languages or use a parameter’s name to display a prompt without suspending macro execution.
0,Bruto%R
1,Neto%R
2,Tara%R
1,Fast%R
Renames “Gross” to display “Bruto” when the gross mode is selected.
Renames “Net” to display “Neto” when the net mode is selected.
Renames “Tare” to display “Tara” when the tare mode is selected.
Renames “Net” to display “Fast” when the net mode is selected.
Example:
Beeper Frequency Conversion Chart
Note frequencies are represented in Hertz (Hz).
C 33 65 130
D b
35 69 139
D 38 73 147
E b
E
39 78 156
GSE Scale Systems
F 44 87 175
Gb 46 92 185
Macros 9-75
1,Slow%R Renames “Net” to display “Slow” when the net mode is selected.
1,Done!%R Renames “Net” to display “Done!” when the net mode is selected.
The example – Using a Parameter’s Name as a Prompt demonstrates how to use the %R command to prompt the various cycles of a filling routine.
Note that in this example P601 was renamed as “Net”, the original parameter name. This retains the parameter name while allocating memory for the %R command. Note also the extra two spaces appended to “Net” in P601. This reserves the full 5 characters for the %R command to use when prompting.
%S S OUND B EEPER
Syntax Sound Beeper
%S
Program Beeper Sequence
{[C][F frequency ][D duration ][V volume ]%S
Set Keypad Beeper Volume
{K [ volume ] %S
If Beeper Sequence Running
{?%S
Arguments
C frequency duration volume
Notes
Cancel the execution of a programmed beeper sequence.
Frequency (10 à 10,000 Hz) of the beeper tone.
Duration of the beeper tone in milliseconds.
Beeper volume (0 à 7; 0 = silent, 7 = loudest).
A sequence of tones may be specified as in the following examples.
Sound Beeper
%S
Produces a 0.5 second, 2 KHz tone through the internal beeper. Macro execution is not suspended while the beeper is running. A longer tone duration is possible using the program beeper sequence commands.
Program Beeper Sequence
{ [C] [ F frequency ] [ D duration ] [ V volume ] %S
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-76 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
Provides variation of the beeper’s tone, duration and volume. A sequence of various tones can be queued for execution without suspending macro operation by including multiple commands in a comma-delimited list.
Once a frequency, duration or volume is specified, it is not necessary to include them in subsequent beeper commands if the previous value will remain the same. The program beeper sequence command does not affect characteristics of the keypad beeper.
{F2000D1000V7%S
{F2000D50V7,V0,V7%S
Sounds the beeper at 2 KHz for 1 second at the loudest volume.
Produces a fast “double-beep”. The frequency and duration is maintained while the volume changes from maximum, to silent, back to maximum.
{F2000D100,F1600,F2000%S Produces a “two-tone” warble by varying the frequency while maintaining duration and volume.
{C%S Cancels all queued beeper sequences.
Set Keypad Beeper Volume
{K [ volume ] %S
Overrides the power-up keypad volume set at P460.
K0%S
K1%S
Turns off the keypad beeper.
Sets the minimum keypad beeper volume.
K7%S Sets the maximum keypad beeper volume.
If Beeper Sequence Running
{?%S
Determines if a programmed beeper sequence is still running. This command could be used in a loop to suspend macro operation until a beeper sequence is completed.
%T T AG P OSITION
Syntax Tag Position
[ tag# ] %T
Macros 9-77
Example:
Tagging a Location to Force an Entry
1%T tag position #1
EnterID# ?%G get entry
%\ if no entry…
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
=80.1P%o save entry in VAR#1
Example:
Tagging Menu Locations in One Macro
MACRO #250 – POWER-UP
@MAIN MENU%T
[F1] Set TargetsP1,1a%C
[F2] Set TimersP2,1%C
[F3] Set CountersP3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,9%H
%B
@TARGET MENU%T
[F1] Final TargetP1,1a%C
[F2] Slow FillP2,1%C
[F3] Pre-ActP3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,10%H
%B
@TIMER MENU%T
[F1] Mix TimerP1,1a%C
[F2] Surge TimerP2,1%C
[F3] Pump TimerP3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,20%H
%B
@COUNTER MENU%T
[F1] Batch CountP1,1a%C
[F2] Master CountP2,1%C
[F3] Ticket No.P3,1%C
[F4] Exit MenuP4,1%C
0,30%H
%B
Tag Resume Position
[ tag# ] B%T
Tag Position (Macro Independent)
@ < text > %T
Arguments
B tag# text
Notes
See Also
Stop macro execution and tag as a resume location.
Tag position (0 à 99).
Alphanumeric tag identifier.
Omitting tag# is the equivalent of specifying a tag position of 0.
%J Jump To Tag
%H Redefine Comm Port Function
Tag Position
[ tag# ] %T
Marks a location within a macro that can be jumped back to using the %J
Jump To Tag command. A tag must be executed before it can be jumped to. Therefore, it is not possible to jump forward to a tag using this method.
Also, a tag skipped due to other branching commands will not be recognized. Avoid duplicating tag numbers within a macro to minimize confusion and eliminate potential branching errors.
%T Tags a position that can be jumped to with a %J or 0%J command.
10%T Tags a position that can be jumped to with a 10%J command.
Tag Resume Position
[ tag# ] B%T
Stops macro execution and marks a location within a macro that can be jumped back to using the %J Jump To Tag command. This command is used in conjunction with the %H command, allowing another macro to execute and later resume operation at the tagged location in the original macro. When the B%T command stops macro execution, the original macro and all calling macros are removed from the macro stack.
Unlike the standard tag position command, the tag resume position command is commonly used multiple times within one macro. This allows you to develop a common entry routine using the %H command where only one jump command is required to branch back to multiple tag locations. Refer to the example – Displaying a Parameter’s Value Prior to
Entering a New Value of the %K command on page 9-68 for a practical application using the B%T command.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-78 Chapter 9
Tag Position (Macro Independent)
@ < text > [ , macro# ] %T
Marks a location within a macro that can be jumped to from within the same or other macros. The tag identifier can consist of up to 79 alphanumeric characters, but must not include a comma (,). Each tag within a macro should be unique, however individual jump commands can be used as often as necessary. When a macro independent jump is performed, the jump function begins searching for an ‘@’ character from the beginning of the specified macro. When it encounters this character, it proceeds to compare the tag identifier with the jump identifier. When an exact match is found, macro execution resumes with the command following the tag. This tag search routine allows jumping to a tagged location that has not been executed within a macro.
@START FILL%T Tags a position that can be jumped to with an
@START FILL%J command.
@RESUME FILL%T Tags a position that can be jumped to with an
@RESUME FILL%J command.
@MAIN MENU%T Tags a position that can be jumped to with an
@MAIN MENU%J command.
The example - Tagging Menu Locations in One Macro shows how one macro could be used to set up various menus and redirect operator interface to different macros. Each menu is identified by a descriptive tag location. Menus and operator interface routines are easy to identify as they are all contained in one macro. Additional menus are easily added.
A break command ends each menu item to prevent macro execution from continuing to the next menu. This macro could be used as a power-up macro to automatically display the main menu selections.
Example:
Verifying a Successful Transmission
This routine sends custom transmit #1 to a printer connected to comm 2. Assuming the printer uses hardware handshaking, the transmission will not be completed if the printer is off. The transmitted characters will remain in the indicator’s transmit buffer and generate an error prompt to make the operator aware of the problem. The number of characters remaining in
GSE Scale Systems buffer is then cleared.
================================
%U T RANSMIT B UFFER
Syntax If Transmit Buffer Empty
%U
Get Number of Characters in Transmit Buffer
< comm > %U
Clear Transmit Buffer
< comm > * %U
Arguments comm
Notes
See Also
Communication port (1 à 4).
When used as an if condition, the %U command tests the port last specified by the %” command.
%” Select Comm Port
Macros 9-79
If Transmit Buffer Empty
%U
Determines if the comm port transmit buffer currently selected by the %” command is empty.
2%”
%U
Determines if the transmit buffer on comm 2 is empty.
Get Number of Characters in Transmit Buffer
< comm > %U
Copies the number of characters remaining in the specified comm port transmit buffer to the entry buffer.
1%U Copies the number of characters remaining in the comm port 1 transmit buffer to the entry buffer.
Clear Transmit Buffer
< comm > *%U
Clears all remaining characters from the specified comm port transmit buffer.
3*%U Clears the comm port 3 transmit buffer.
%W W
AIT FOR
K
EYPRESS
Syntax Wait for Keypress
[ prompt ] %W
Arguments prompt
See Also
Text to be displayed as a prompt on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
%Y If Yes (Enter)
Wait for Keypress
Suspends macro execution until any front panel key is pressed or any character is received on one of the enabled comm ports. An optional prompt can be displayed while waiting for the keypress. The keypress or received character is immediately cleared from the receive buffer. This command can be used to require an operator’s acknowledgement before continuing a process. It is useful as a debugging aid, providing a means of
“stepping” through a macro routine.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-80 Chapter 9
%W
BatchDone!%W
Suspends macro execution and waits for a keypress or a received character before resuming with the next macro command.
Suspends macro execution and prompts Batch
Done!
until a keypress or character is received.
Example:
Echo Display Data Format
10)00 kg
Gross
The display above would be transmitted as shown below when using the %X command.
================================
<STX><NUL>kg Gross<ETX>
<STX><LF> 100.00<ETX> i
Display data may be sent continuously out a comm port specified at P290 in a format similar to the %X command.
%X R EQUEST D ISPLAY D ATA
Syntax Request Display Data
%X
See Also Echo Display
Request Display Data
Echoes the 7-segment display in a format compatible with the remote display mode of the GSE M450 and M550 series indicators. Display data is transmitted out the comm port last selected by the % Select Comm Port command.
1%”%X
2%”%X
Echoes display data out comm port 1.
Echoes display data out comm port 2.
%X Echoes display data out last selected comm port.
Display data is sent in the following format:
<STX> <NUL> <UPPER> <LOWER> <ETX> <STX> <LF> <7-SEGMENT> <ETX>
UPPER
LOWER is a fixed-width field containing the 5 characters of the upper row of the 2X5 display matrix.
is a fixed-width field containing the 5 characters of the lower row of the 2X5 display matrix.
7-SEGMENT is a variable-width field containing the 6 digits of the 7segment display. Blank digits are sent as spaces. Each displayed decimal point is sent as a separate byte.
%Y I
F
Y
ES
(E
NTER
)
Syntax If Transmit Buffer Empty
[ prompt ] %Y
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Prompting a YES / NO Question
1%T
Enter Item# [ ]P4,1%C
4,14,6,6%K
=80.6P%o
Add Another Item?P2,3a%C
[YES] / [NO]P4,5%C
%Y if YES…
1%J jump to tag #1
%N else
Pa%C clear display
%E end if
Macros 9-81
Arguments prompt
See Also
Text to be displayed as a prompt on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
%W Wait for Keypress
If Yes
Determines if the [ENTER/YES] key was pressed. An optional prompt can be displayed while waiting for the keypress. When a %Y command is encountered, macro execution is suspended until a front panel key is pressed or until a character is received on any enabled comm port. If the
[ENTER/YES] key is press, or if a carriage return <CR> is received on a comm port, then the condition is true. Any other key or received character yields a false condition. The keypress or received character is immediately cleared from the receive buffer.
StartFill?%Y Suspends macro execution and prompts
Start Fill?
until a keypress or character is received.
%[ S AVE E NTRY B UFFER
Syntax Save Entry Buffer
%[
See Also %] Restore Entry Buffer
Entry Buffer
Save Entry Buffer
Stores all data in the entry buffer in a temporary register . The entry buffer is then cleared. Contents of the temporary register can be restored to the entry buffer with the %] Restore Entry Buffer command. Restoring the entry buffer does not change the contents of the temporary register. Thus, the original contents of the entry buffer can be restored multiple times.
The temporary register can only be cleared by issuing a %[ command when the entry buffer is empty.
%[ Saves the entry buffer contents in a temporary register.
%c
%[
Clears the entry buffer and the temporary register.
80.1P%o%[ Copies the value of VAR#1 to the entry buffer and saves it in the temporary register.
100%[ Copies the value 100 to the temporary register.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-82 Chapter 9
Example:
Determining if an Entry Was Made
1%T tag #1
EnterID# ?%n get numeric entry
%\ if no entry…
Must!Enter%P prompt
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
%\ I F N O E NTRY
Syntax
See Also
If No Entry
%\
%G Get Entry
%K Get Entry from 4X20 VFD
%n Get Numeric Entry
%] Restore Entry Buffer
If No Entry
Determine if the entry buffer is empty. This command is commonly used following a “get entry” command to determine if an entry was made prior to pressing [ENTER] . It can also be used after a the %] Restore Entry Buffer command to determine if the temporary register is empty.
%] R ESTORE E NTRY B UFFER
Syntax Restore Entry Buffer
%]
See Also %[ Save Entry Buffer
Entry Buffer
Restore Entry Buffer
The restore entry buffer command is used in conjunction with the %[ Save
Entry Buffer command, copying the contents of the temporary register back to the entry buffer. The temporary register is unaffected by the %] command, allowing the contents of the temporary register to be copied to the entry buffer multiple times.
%] Restores the contents of the temporary register to the entry buffer.
Scale %]
3,%]%y
80.1P=”P3,10”%o
80.1P%o%[
80.2P%o%]%C
Copies “Scale ” to the entry buffer and appends the contents of the temporary register.
Inserts the contents of the temporary register as the database number in this “make row” command.
Displays the contents of VAR#2 on the 4X20
VFD beginning at the position assigned in
VAR#1.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-83
Example:
Branching from One Macro to Another
1.1P<10%o if net < 10 (under tolerance)…
110%^ go to UNDER WT macro
%N else
1.1P>10.5%o if net > 10.5 (over tolerance)…
111%^ go to OVER WT macro
%E end if
Example:
Using a Macro as a Subroutine
Macro 20 is a subroutine called by macros 11 and 12 to deactivate system outputs. After macro 20 completes, execution resumes in the calling macro to display the cause of shut-down.
================================
MACRO #11 – HI LEVEL INPUT
20C%^
HI LEVEL SHUT-DOWNP1,2a%C
[START] to ResumeP3,1%C
[STOP] to AbortP4,1%C
MACRO #12 – THERMAL OVERLOAD
20C%^
THERMAL SHUT-DOWNP1,2a%C
[START] to ResumeP3,1%C
[STOP] to AbortP4,1%C
MACRO #20 – SHUT-DOWN SEQUENCE
U1-5%D
1-5:0%D
10%B
11%B
%^ C ALL \ G O T O M ACRO
Syntax Go To Macro
< macro# > %^
Call Macro
< macro# > C%^
Arguments macro#
See Also
Macro number (1 à 250).
%T Tag Position
%J Jump to Tag
Go To Macro
< macro# > %^
Ends execution of one macro and resumes execution at the beginning of another. This command is typically used after a conditional statement to invoke a new macro routine based on the outcome of the comparison (see example – Branching from One Macro to Another ).
Another method of branching to a new macro uses a variable’s value as the macro number to “go to”. The macro number can be assigned in many ways, such as through a “get entry” command or recalling the macro number from a database.
110%^
80.15P%o%^
EnterProd#%G
%^
Ends the current macro and executes macro 110.
Ends the current macro and executes the macro specified by the current value of VAR#15.
Ends the current macro and executes the macro specified by the operator entry.
Call Macro
< macro# > C%^
Suspends execution of one macro while executing another. The suspended macro is placed in the first position of the macro stack. Thus when the called macro completes, the suspended macro resumes execution ahead of any other macros. The macro resumes with the command immediately following the call statement.
A called macro can call yet another macro. The first called macro is then placed in the first position of the macro stack ahead of its calling macro.
Macros can call other macros in this manner up to the remaining capacity of the macro stack allowing called macros to resume in reverse order.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-84 Chapter 9
Calling a macro can be used to invoke a common subroutine as shown in the example – Using a Macro as a Subroutine . This reduces memory consumption and helps streamline you macros.
110C%^ Suspends execution of the current macro, executes macro
110, then returns to the next command of the calling macro.
i
If the execution of a called macro is terminated by a %B Break command, all calling macros are cleared from the macro stack and will not be resumed.
%_ I F D ATABASE E RROR
Syntax If Database Error
[ error# ] %_
Arguments error# Database error that occurred as a result of the last database macro command. Select one of the following database errors:
0 If no error occurred
1 If bad entry (invalid entry type)
2 If invalid database specified (database not defined)
3 If invalid column specified (column not defined)
4 If record not found
5 If not enough memory
6 If checksum error (row contains corrupt data)
7 If list corrupt (bad link - list of stored rows not intact)
8 If operation aborted (i.e. search, print, sort, upload)
9 If ID too long (entry exceeds ma ximum string length)
10 If data type mismatch
11 If greater than maximum number of row allowed
12 If invalid data type (string stored in numeric parameter; results in ‘0’ stored for numeric parameter)
13 If extra characters found (string characters found when numeric-only data was expected)
14 If not enough columns / row received during database upload
15 If too many columns / row received during database upload
16 If greater than maximum number of columns found
(likely due to missing <CR> at end of each data row)
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-85
Example:
Determining if a Database Record
Exists
This routine determines if the entered ingredient number exists in database 2. If not, an error message is displayed and the macro stops.
================================
EnterIng#?%G prompt for entry
%[ save entry
1,2;%]%y recall from database
4%_ if record not found…
NOT FOUND%S%P error prompt
%B break
%E end if
Notes
See Also
Omit
%y error to test for any database error.
Database Commands
If Database Error
[ error# ] %_
Determines if a database error occurred during the last database operation. The error code generated by the last %y database command remains unchanged until the next %y command is executed.
%_
0%_
4%_
9%_
Determines if any database error occurred.
Determines if no database error occurred.
Determines if the specified record is not found.
Determines if a string entry exceeded the maximum length.
%` S
CALE
S
ELECT
Syntax Scale Select
[ scale# ] %`
Reset A/D Converter
R [ scale# ] %`
Arguments scale#
Notes
See Also
Select from the following scale numbers:
0
1
Current scale (Reset A/D Converter only)
Scale 1
4
5
2
3
6
7
Scale 2
Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5
Scale 6
Scale 7
8 Scale 8
* All scales (Reset A/D Converter only)
Omitting scale# for the Scale Select command selects the next enabled scale.
Omitting scale# for the Reset A/D Converter command is the equivalent of specifying the current scale (0).
%# Current Scale
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-86 Chapter 9
%Perform Scale Specific Function
Scale Select
[ scale# ] %`
Simulates the operation of the [SCALE SELECT] key. It can be used to select the next enabled scale as the current scale, or it can access a specific scale number directly.
%` Selects the next enabled scale as the current scale. If the current scale is the last enabled scale, the first enabled scale is selected.
1%`
2%`
Selects scale 1.
Selects scale 2.
3%`
4%`
Selects scale 3.
Selects scale 4.
Reset A/D Converter
R [ scale# ] %`
Reset a scale’s A/D converter in the event the displayed weight locks up.
This command is used primarily as a diagnostic tool.
R%`
R0%`
R1%`
R2%`
R*%`
Resets the A/D converter for the current scale.
Resets the A/D converter for the current scale.
Resets the A/D converter for scale 1.
Resets the A/D converter for scale 2.
Resets the A/D converter for all scales.
%a T ARGET A CCURACY
Syntax If Target Accuracy Achieved
%a
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Checking for Sample Accuracy
1%T tag #1
%b perform sample
%a if accuracy achieved
10%^ go to macro 10
%N else
Re-Sampl%S%P error prompt
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
Macros 9-87
Set Target Accuracy
< %accuracy > %a
Get Target Accuracy
?%a
Restore Default Accuracy
*%a
Arguments
%accuracy Target accuracy percentage (90
à
99.96; 0
= Not Enforced).
Notes The %accuracy argument does not change the setup mode selection at P183, rather it temporarily changes the accuracy requirement until power is interrupted or upon saving changes when exiting the setup mode.
A %accuracy less than 90 eliminates the accuracy requirement.
See Also %b Perform Sample
%g Sample / Macro Error
If Target Accuracy Achieved
%a
Determines if the last sample was large enough to meet the accuracy requirement set at P183. This command can be used to ensure an accurate sample before proceeding with other macro routines (see example – Checking for Sample Accuracy ).
Set Target Accuracy
< %accuracy > %a
Override the power-up accuracy selection at P183.
99.48%a Sets the target accuracy requirement to 99.48%.
99.92%a Sets the target accuracy requirement to 99.92%.
0%a Eliminates the accuracy requirement.
Get Target Accuracy
?%a
Copies the current accuracy requirement to the entry buffer where it can be saved to a parameter and/or used in math commands.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-88 Chapter 9
Restore Default Accuracy
*%a
Restores the accuracy requirement to the value set at P183.
%b P ERFORM S AMPLE
Syntax Perform Sample
%b
See Also %a Target Accuracy
%g Sample / Macro Error
Sampling to Establish The Piece Weight
Perform Sample
Suspends macro execution and performs the sample routine. The quantity mode is selected automatically and a tare is performed. The display then prompts for the default sample size and the standard sample routine continues.
Once the sample routine is completed, macro execution resumes with the next instruction after the %b command. Pressing [CLR] will completes the sample routine by aborting the sample process.
%c C LEAR E NTRY B UFFER
Syntax Clear Entry Buffer
%c
See Also %[ Save Entry Buffer
Example:
Clearing the Currently Selected
Parameter
%c clear entry buffer
1%i select VAR#1
%c clear VAR#1 (set to 0)
%G get entry
%e save entry in VAR#1
Clear Entry Buffer
Simulates the operation of the [CLR] key. It can be used at the beginning of a macro to ensure the entry buffer is clear before the macro begins.
The %c command can also be used to clear the value of the currently selected parameter (see example – Clearing the Currently Selected
Parameter ).
%d D ISPLAY C ONTROL
Syntax 7-Segment VFD On/Off
< mode > %d
7-Segment VFD and Backlight Brightness
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-89 i
The LED remote display is not available at this time. Please contact GSE for more information.
< %brightness > P%d
4X20 VFD and LCD Enable/Disable Auto-Update
< X | x > %d
LCD Auto-Update Position (Standard, Large Font)
< row > < H | h > %d
LCD Auto-Update Position (Standard, Medium Font)
< row > , < column > < I | i > %d
LCD Auto-Update Position (Single-Line, Medium Font)
< row > < J | j > %d
LCD Auto-Update Position (Single-Line, Small Font)
< row > , < column > < K | k > %d
Enable LCD/LED Remote Display Auto-Update
R%d
Disable LCD Remote Display Auto-Update
[ text ] r%d
Disable LED Remote Display Auto-Update
< A|B|C|D|E|F|G|H|I|J > [ text ] r%d
LCD Enable/Disable Backlight
< B | b > %d
LCD Remote Display Enable/Disable Mirror Image
< M | m > %d j
I i
Arguments (VFD and LCD Displays)
H h
J
K
Select large font standard auto-update, normal (black on white).
Select large font standard auto-update, inverse (white on black).
Select medium font standard auto-update, normal (black on white).
Select medium font standard auto-update, inverse (white on black).
Select medium font single-line auto-update, normal (black on white).
Select medium font single-line auto-update, inverse (white on black).
Select small font single-line auto-update, normal (black on white).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-90 Chapter 9 k
X x
Select small font single-line auto-update, inverse (white on black).
Enable VFD and LCD auto-update.
Disable VFD and LCD auto-update.
mode Select from the following standard VFD controls: display off display on
A auto shut-off
%brightness Percentage of brightness for standard VFD (0 à 100).
row Row (1 à 16) to position LCD cursor.
column Column (1 à 40) to position LCD cursor.
Arguments (Remote Displays)
I
J
G
H
B b
M m
D
E
F
A
B
C text
Clear LED remote display.
Display first 12 LED text characters.
Scroll LED text from left to right.
Scroll LED text from right to left.
Set LED scroll speed to very fast.
Set LED scroll speed to fast.
Set LED scroll speed to medium.
Set LED scroll speed to slow.
Set LED scroll speed to very slow.
Turn on all pixels of the LED display
Enable LCD backlight.
Disable LCD backlight.
Enable LCD mirror imaging.
Disable LCD mirror imaging.
Text to be displayed.
Notes
See Also
Arguments for the %d command will not change the corresponding setup mode selections (P420 for mode ,
P423 for %brightness , P425 for X and x ), rather they temporarily change the function until power is interrupted or upon saving changes when exiting the setup mode.
%C Display Text on 4X20 VFD and LCD
%K Get Entry from 4X20 VFD and LCD
Standard VFD On/Off
< mode > %d
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-91
Override the power-up display selection at P420. The display can be turned on, off, or set for auto shut-off.
Turning the display off when the scale is idle or when the display is not required can help reduce power consumption and improve macro execution speed. Turning the display on or off uses the percentage of brightness or dimness settings at P423 and P424 respectively. P424 must be set to “OFF” to completely blank the display.
0%d
1%d
Turns the standard 7-segment VF display off using the dimness specified at P424.
Turns the standard 7-segment VF display on using the brightness specified at P423.
A%d Sets the standard 7-segment VF display to auto shut-off.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-92 Chapter 9
Example:
Disabling/Enabling the 4X20 Auto-
Update
MACRO #250 – POWER-UP x%d disable auto-update
GSEP1,9a%C
Batch SystemP3,5%C v 1.00P4,8%C
%P%P pause (2 sec)
Pa%C clear display
X%d enable auto-update
4X20 VFD Auto-Update
< X | x > %d
Override the power-up display selection at P425. The top line auto-update of the 4X20 VFD can be turned on or off. This allows the 4X20 VFD to use the top line auto-update feature to mimic the information of the standard 7segment VFD, or turn the auto-update off to use the entire display for prompting. Turning the top line auto-update feature off does not clear the displayed information.
X%d x%d
Turns the 4X20 VF display auto-update on. Any characters on the top line will be overwritten.
Turns the 4X20 VF display auto-update off. Any characters on the top line will continue to be displayed until cleared.
Example:
Flashing the 7-Segment Display
5099%s100%e Setpt 100
5100%s1%e SPTyp Outpt
5101%sFLASH%e SPNam FLASH
5110%s5%e Activ Never
5111%s0.25%e AcDly 0.25
5112%s100%e AcMac 100
5130%s4%e Deact Alwys
5131%s0.75%e DeDly 0.75
5132%s100%e DeMac 100
5133%s0%e DeMtn Ign'd
MACRO #100 – FLASH VFD
100%O if FLASH active…
100P%d set brightness to 100%
%N else
10P%d set brightness to 10%
100%A restart FLASH timer
%E end if
MACRO #101 – STOP FLASHING VFD
100:0%D cancel FLASH timer
100%B clear macro 100 from stack
100P%d set brightness to 100%
Example:
VF Display Brightness control
23P%d this will set the brightness to 23%
Standard VFD Brightness
< %brightness > P%d
Overrides the power-up display brightness selection at P423. The brightness of the standard 7-segment VF display can be changed from 0
à 100%.
Example 9-55 shows how to flash the 7-segment VFD using the brightness command in combination with a timer setpoint providing an eye-catching strobe effect. The flash routine can be started in any macro with a 100%A command. Invoking macro 101 will stop the flashing and ensure the display reverts to 100% brightness.
Turns the standard 7-segment VF display off.
0P%d
50P%d Sets the standard 7-segment VF display brightness to 50%.
100P%d Sets the standard 7-segment VF display brightness to 100%.
Example:
LCD Display Brightness control
23P%d This will set the brightness to 100%
0P%d This will turn the backlight OFF
VF Display Brightness Control
This command is for the 6 digit VF display. Please refer to chapter 17 for brightness control of the 4 x 20 VFD.
Syntax: XP%d Where ‘X’ is the percentage of brightness desired, and ‘P’ is required as a fixed character prefix.
LCD backlight ON/OFF only: 0=OFF any other number = ON
LCD Auto-Update Position (Standard, Large Font)
< row > < H | h > %d
Allows the row position of the standard LCD auto-update display window
(large size font) to be specified. For example,
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-93
5H%d will position the auto-update window in the lower half of the 8X40 LCD.
The 6-digit weight display data will be displayed in large font size, while the 2X5 character prompting area will be displayed in medium font size.
LCD Auto-Update Position (Standard, Medium Font)
< row > , < column > < I | i > %d
Allows the coordinates of the standard LCD auto-update display window
(medium size font) to be specified. For example,
15,21I%d will position the auto-update window in the lower right corner of the 16X40
LCD.
The 6-digit weight display data will be displayed in medium font size, while the 2X5 character prompting area will be displayed in small font size.
LCD Auto-Update Position (Single-Line, Medium Font)
< row > < J | j > %d
Allows the row position of the single-line LCD auto-update display window
(medium size font) to be specified. For example,
3J%d will position the auto-update window in across the 3 rd
and 4 th
lines of the
LCD.
All display data will be displayed in medium font size across the entire width of the display (similar to the standard auto-update of the 4X20 VFD).
LCD Auto-Update Position (Single-Line, Small Font)
< row > , < column > < K | k > %d
Allows the coordinates of the single-line LCD auto-update display window
(small size font) to be specified. For example,
1,21K%d will position the auto-update window in the upper-right corner of the LCD.
All display data will be displayed in small font size across 20 columns of the display.
Enable LCD/LED Remote Display Auto-Update
R%d
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-94 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
Re-enables the auto-update of weight data on the LCD/LED remote display. This command would normally be used revert back to a remote weight display after displaying text.
Disable LCD Remote Display Auto-Update
[ text ] r%d
Disables the auto-update of weight data on the LCD remote display. This allows you to display alphanumeric data on the remote display using the text argument.
For example,
PEN 15r%d or
80.1P=”PEN 15”%o
80.1P%or%d will display a pen location on the remote display. The text will remain on the display until changed with another r%d command, or until the autoupdate is re-enabled with the R%d command.
Note that the LCD remote display is not capable of displaying all alpha characters. Choose your text to include only characters that can be represented in 7-segment style. Any non-displayable LCD character will be displayed as three horizontal bars. Also note that the LCD remote display will only display the first 6 characters of a string.
Used without the text argument, the r%d command will “freeze” the displayed weight.
Disable LED Remote Display Auto-Update
< A|B|C|D|E|F|G|H|I|J > [ text ] r%d
Disables the auto-update of weight data on the LED remote display. This allows you to display alphanumeric data on the remote display using the text argument as well as control display features such as scrolling text.
Text will remain on the display until changed with another r%d command, or until the auto-update is re-enabled with the R%d command.
Note that the LED remote display will only display the first 12 characters of a string unless the scroll mode is used.
Ar%d
BMix Completer%d
Clears the LED remote display.
Displays “Mix Complete” on the LED
Macros 9-95 remote display.
C Drive Truck On Scaler%d Scrolls the message “Drive Truck On
Scale” from left to right using the last scroll speed specified (see note below).
DGDrive Truck On Scaler%d Scrolls the message “Drive Truck On
Scale” from right to left using a medium scroll speed.
Fr%d Changes the current scroll speed to fast.
Note: The first two characters of a scroll command are reserved for command characters. Thus, if the second character of a scroll string is A
à H, it will be misinterpreted as a display control command. To avoid this problem, use a space to separate the control command from the first character of the scroll string. For example, the command
CGSE Scale Systemsr%d would interpret the ‘C’ as a scroll command, and the ‘G’ as a set scroll speed command, leaving only “SE Scale Systems” as the scroll characters. Instead, write the command as
C GSE Scale Systemsr%d
Since the space character is not a valid command character, it will have no effect on the remote display.
LCD Enable/Disable Backlight
< B | b > %d
Enables or disables the LCD remote display backlight.
B%d Enables the LCD remote display backlight.
b%d Disables the LCD remote display backlight.
LCD Remote Display Enable/Disable Mirror Image
< M | m > %d
Enables or disables the LCD remote display mirror imaging. When enabled, displayed characters can be viewed correctly through the use of a mirror.
M%d Enables the LCD remote display mirror imaging.
m%d Disables the LCD remote display mirror imaging.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-96 Chapter 9
%e E NTER / S AMPLE
Syntax Enter / Sample
[ entry ] %e
Arguments entry
See Also
In the weigh mode, entry is typically a parameter value to be entered. In the counting mode, entry is the sample quantity.
%b Perform Sample
%G Get Entry
%K Get Entry from 4X20 VFD
%n Get Numeric Entry
Enter / Sample
Simulates the operation of the [ENTER] key. It can be used in a macro:
After a “get entry” command to save an entry to the currently selected parameter.
To perform an accumulation if the currently selected parameter is a valid accumulation parameter.
To initiate the sample routine from the quantity mode.
1%i
%G
%e
Selects VAR#1 as the current mode and stores an operator entry in VAR#1.
Selects the gross mode and performs an accumulation.
0%s
.%e
30%s
%e
Selects the quantity mode and initiates the sample routine.
Example:
Identifying a Preset Parameter
This routine transmits the Gross, Tare and Net values out comm port 1. If the tare weight of the current scale is preset, “MANUAL ENTRY” is sent at the end of the tare data.
================================
MACRO #10 – PRINT Gross-Tare-Net
1%” select comm 1
0.0.0P%o%$ transmit gross weight
13,10%& transmit <CR><LF>
2.0.0P%o %$ transmit tare weight
2.0%f if tare preset…
(MANUAL ENTRY)%$ send text
%E end if
13,10%& transmit <CR><LF>
1.0.0P%o%$ transmit net weight
13,10%& transmit <CR><LF>
%f I F P ARAMETER P RESET
Syntax If Parameter Preset
< parm > . < instance > %f
Arguments parm instance
Notes
Presettable operating parameter.
Valid parameter instance (0 à 4).
Parameters 34P and 35P are common to all scales. An instance of 0 should be specified, however any instance number will yield the same result.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-97
See Also Presettable Parameters
If Parameter Preset
Determines if a presettable parameter from the following table is preset
(i.e. contains a manually entered value):
P ARAMETER N AME O PERATING
P ARAMETER
31
34
35
2
3
6
64.5
64.6
64.7
Tare
Gross Total
Net Total
Quantity Total
Average Piece Weight
Average Piece Weight X1000
DSD Tare Weight
DSD Gross Total
DSD Net Total
2.1%f
3.2%f
34.0%f
Determines if the tare value for scale 1 is preset.
Determines if the gross total value for scale 2 is preset.
Determines if the average piece weight is preset.
%g S AMPLE / M ACRO E RROR
Syntax If Sample Error
[ error# ] %g
Get Sample Error
?%g
If Macro Error
E%g
Arguments error#
2
3
0
1
4
5
6
Sample error that occurred as a result of the last sample routine. Select one of the following sample errors:
Sample OK
Sample too small
Sample not accurate
Sample size error (sample entry was 0 or > 9999)
Sample cannot be counted (required sample >
9999)
Sample aborted acc
Sample aborted by pressing the [CLR] key
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-98 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
Notes
See Also
7
8
APW entered manually
Sample aborted during auto-tare
Omit error to test for any sample error.
%a Target Accuracy
%b Perform Sample
If Sample Error
[ error# ] %g
Determines if a specific error occurred during the last sample routine.
0%g Determines if no error occurred during the last sample.
7%g
%g
Determines if the APW was entered manually.
Determines if any sample error occurred during the last sample.
Get Sample Error
?%g
Copies the last sample error code to the entry buffer where it can be saved to a parameter and/or used in math commands.
If Macro Error
E%g
Determines if an error occurred during macro execution. After testing for errors with the E%g command, the error flag is cleared until another macro error is encountered.
%i ID
Syntax ID
[ variable# ] %i
Arguments variable#
See Also
Variable number (1 à 999) to select as the current operating mode.
%e Enter / Sample
ID
Simulates the operation of the [ID] key. It is most commonly used to select a variable as the current mode of operation to simulate manual entries.
1%i Selects VAR#1 as the current operating mode.
100%i
%I
Macros 9-99
Selects VAR#100 as the current operating mode.
Invokes the macro menu (if enabled at P806).
%j I
F
K
EY
/R
EMOTE
K
EY
H
ELD
Syntax If Key/Remote Key Held
[ key ] %j
Arguments key
Notes
ASCII value of the key being held.
Omit key to test for any key held.
If Key/Remote Key Held
Checks if a specified key is being held (see Table 9-3). If the specified key is held, the condition is considered true.
Table 9-3: Keypress ASCII Values
K EY
F1
F2
F2
F4 / TARGET
F5
START
STOP
SETUP
SELECT
ZERO
TARE
UNITS
SCALE SELECT
ID
0
1
2
ENTER
.
CLEAR
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
Any Key
460/560 Series Remote Key 1
460/560 Series Remote Key 2
ASCII
V ALUE
134
135
243
250
244
245
224
240
233
128
129
130
131
132
133
229
227
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Omit
133
134
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-100 Chapter 9
128%j
133%j
%j
Checks if [F1] key is held.
Checks if [START] key is held on 660 Series.
Checks if remote key #1 is held on 460 / 560 Series.
Checks if any key is held.
%k D IGITAL F ILTER
Syntax Get Current Filter
%k
Set Filter
< filter# > %k
Restore Default Filter
*%k
Clear Rate Filter History
R%k
Example:
Changing the Filter Setting While Filling
This setup changes the filter setting during a filling process. The filter is set to a low value during the fast fill process to provide a fast response to the rapidly changing weight. When the fast fill target is reached, macro 12 is invoked to begin the slow fill. The filter setting is increased to provide a more stable weight reading as it approaches the final target. Once the target is achieved, the default filter setting is restored to 2.0 seconds providing a stable static weight display.
===================================
116%s5%e fltr1 2.0 s
MACRO #6 – START FAST FILL
2%k set 0.25 second filter
1%A activate fast output
MACRO #12 – START SLOW FILL
3%k set 0.5 second filter
2%A activate slow output
MACRO #13 – FILL COMPLETE
*%k set default filter (2 sec)
Fill Done!%S%P prompt
Arguments filter#
Notes
Get Current Filter
%k
Select one of the following filter numbers:
0.06 seconds
0.13 seconds
0.25 seconds
0.50 seconds
1.00 seconds
2.00 seconds
4.00 seconds
8.00 seconds
No filtering
The filter# argument does not change the setup mode selection at P116, rather it temporarily changes the filter until power is interrupted or upon saving changes when exiting the setup mode.
Auto-filter selections cannot be selected with the %k command, but can be restored with the *%k command.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-101
Copies the current filter selection for the selected scale to the entry buffer where it can be saved to a parameter and/or used in math commands.
Set Filter
< filter# > %k
Override the power-up filter selection at P116. This command affects only the currently selected scale. Auto-filter selections are not valid with the set filter command.
0%k
11%k
Selects 0.06 second filter.
Disables filtering.
Restore Default Filter
*%k
Restores the filter setting for the currently selected scale to the value set at
P116.
Restore Default Filter
R%k
Clears the rate history and begins recalculating the average rate with the next A/D conversion. This is useful in applications such as loss-in-weight during a reversal in flow rate. For example, consider emptying a hopper using a rate measurement period of 10 seconds. When the low limit is reached the supply hopper begins refilling the weigh hopper. This causes a reversal in the flow rate. However, since the rate is an average of the last 600 A/D readings (60 A/D per second X 10 seconds), the displayed rate will not be accurate until 10 seconds after the rate reversal. If the
R%k command was executed at the time of rate reversal, then the rate history would be cleared and the rate reversal would be instantly realized.
%m M
ODIFY
S
TRING
Syntax Parse String
M < variable# > , < position > [ , length ] %m
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-102 Chapter 9
Notes
Set String Case
< U | L > < variable# > %m
Get String Length
N < variable# > %m
Get Character Position in String
P <variable#> , <character>[,position][,length]
%m
If Character Found in String
I < variable# > , < character > %m
A variable value can be substituted for position and/or length using the syntax
< variable# > P
Arguments
U
L variable# position length character
See Also
Convert all characters in string to upper case .
Convert all characters in string to lower case.
String variable number (1 à 999) to modify or evaluate.
Starting position in string variable.
Number of characters to evaluate within string variable.
Character to find within string variable.
%o String Concatenation
Parse String
M < variable# > , < position > [ , length ] %m
Modifies the contents of a string variable to contain a subset of the original string (see Table 9-4). The subset is specified in terms a starting position within the string followed by the number of characters (length) to parse. If a length is not specified, all characters from the starting position to the end of the string are assumed.
Set String Case
< U | L > < variable# > %m
Changes the case of all characters in a string to either upper or lower case
(see Table 9-4) .
Get String Length
N < variable# > %m
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-103
Copies the length of a string to the entry buffer where it can be saved to a parameter and/or used in math commands (see Table 9-5) .
Get Character Position in String
P < variable# > , < character > [, position ] [, length ] %m
Copies the position of a character in a string to the entry buffer where it can be saved to a parameter and/or used in math commands (see Table
9-5) . If a starting position is specified, characters preceding the starting position are ignored. If a length is specified, trailing characters are ignored. A value of zero (0) is copied to the entry buffer is the character is not found.
If Character Found in String
I < variable# > , < character > [, position ] [, length ] %m
Determines if a string contains a specified character (see Table 9-6). If a starting position is specified, characters preceding the starting position are ignored. If a length is specified, trailing characters are ignored.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-104 Chapter 9
Table 9-4: String Operations with Result Replacing Original String
String Command
(VAR#2 = 2)
(VAR#3 = 3)
M1,3,4%m
M1,7%m
M1,2P,3P%m
M1,2P,1%m
U1%m
L1%m
String 1 contains
“1234567890”
3456
7890
234
2
1234567890
1234567890
String 1 contains
“abcdefgh” cdef gh bcd b
ABCDEFGH abcdefgh
String 1 contains
“AbCdE12345”
String 1 contains
“abcdeabcde”
CdE1
2345 bCd b
ABCDE12345 abcde12345 cdea bcde bcd b
ABCDEABCDE abcdeabcde
Table 9-5: String Operations with Result Stored in Entry Buffer
String Command
(VAR#2 = 2)
(VAR#3 = 3)
P1,b%m
P1,b,4%m
P1,1,1,3%m
P1,2,3P%m
P1,C%m
N1%m
String 1 contains
“1234567890”
0
0
1
0
0
10
String 1 contains
“abcdefgh”
2
0
0
0
0
8
String 1 contains
“AbCdE12345”
String 1 contains
“abcdeabcde”
2
0
0
7
3
10
2
7
0
0
0
10
Table 9-6: Conditional String Operations
String Command
(VAR#2 = 2)
(VAR#3 = 3)
I1,b%m
I1,b,4%m
I1,1,1,3%m
I1,C,2P,3P%m
I1,b,3P%m
String 1 contains
“1234567890”
False
False
True
False
False
String 1 contains
“abcdefgh”
True
False
False
False
False
String 1 contains
“AbCdE12345”
String 1 contains
“abcdeabcde”
True
False
False
True
False
True
True
False
False
True
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Getting a Numeric Operator Entry
80.2P=0%o clear target value
%T tag position
EnterTargt%n get entry
%\ if no entry…
Must Enter%P prompt
%J jump to tag
%N else
=80.2P%o save entry
%E end if
Macros 9-105
%n G ET N UMERIC E NTRY
Syntax Get Numeric Entry
[ prompt ] [ ,* ] %n
Arguments prompt
*
Notes
See Also
Text to be displayed as an entry prompt on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
Entered characters will be displayed as an asterisks ‘*’.
Limit the prompt to 10 characters. If more than 10 characters are specified, only the last 10 will be used.
The first 5 characters of the prompt are displayed on the top line of the 2X5 matrix, the last 5 characters on the bottom line.
%G Get Entry
%K Get Entry from 4X20 VFD
%\ If No Entry
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%o Math Assignment
Get Numeric Entry
[ prompt ] [ ,* ] %n
Accepts operator numeric-only input. When this command is executed, the macro is suspended until the entry is completed by pressing [ENTER] .
The optional prompt will be displayed until the first entry character is received. The %n command will accept an entry from the front panel keypad or any enabled comm port. Numbers remain in the entry buffer until [ENTER] is pressed or a carriage return <CR> is received on one of the comm ports, allowing the next macro command to retrieve and/or store the entry. Press [CLR] to clear the entire entry from the entry buffer, display the optional prompt , and restart the entry process.
Use of the asterisks ‘*’ argument will cause each entered character to appear as an asterisks on the display. This provides a means of adding security to a user entry such as a password. Note that the asterisks characters only appear during the entry. When [ENTER] is pressed to complete the entry, the entered characters are put into the entry buffer and become visible on the display. Be sure to copy the entry to a variable or other parameter immediately after the entry is complete to prevent this from happening.
KeyInTargt%n
=80.11P%o
11%i
Prompts for target entry and stores entry in
VAR#11.
%n
Simulates a manual entry into VAR#11. Here,
VAR#11 is selected as the current mode, using the variable’s name as the prompt. Use this method when entering time/date values or scale-specific
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-106 Chapter 9
%e float values when using selectable units.
EnterTank#%n
%A
TruckID# ?%n
Prompts for a tank number, expecting a valid output setpoint number for activation.
%[
EnterTare?%n
%t
EnterCode?,*%n
Prompts for a truck ID# and moves the entry from the entry buffer to the temporary buffer.
Prompts for a tare entry and performs a tare using the entry as manual tare value.
Prompts for a code entry and displays an asterisks
‘*’ symbol in place of each digit.
%o M ATH A SSIGNMENT
Syntax A = B ( Copy Value )
< parm | const > = < parm | const > %o
A = Entry Buffer ( Entry Buffer Assignment )
= < parm > %o
A = B + C ( Equation Assignment )
<parm>=<parm|const> <math> <parm|const> %o
A = A + B ( Modify Original Value )
< parm > < math > = < parm | const > %o
A = A + (B + C) ( Modify Original Value )
<parm><math>=<parm|const> <math> <parm|const>
%o
Entry Buffer = A + B ( Equation Assignment )
< parm | const > < math > < parm | const > %o
Copy A to Entry Buffer
< parm > %o
Arguments parm Operating parameter with the syntax:
< parm > [ . instance ] [ . format ] < P | p | q > where parm is an operating parameter with a valid instance and format code, and
P represents parm as any parameter value, p represents parm as a pointer to another variable,
GSE Scale Systems
q const math
Notes
See Also
Macros 9-107 represents parm as a pointer to a non-variable parameter.
Constant value.
Select one of the following math operators:
+ Add
Subtract
* Multiply
/ Divide
| Modulus (divide and determine remainder)
^ Exponent
The instance argument is required when specifying parameter 50, 51, 52, 80, 81 or 82.
Omitting instance for a scale-specific parameter assumes the current scale.
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%] Restore Entry Buffer
%v Write Value to EEPROM
Pointers
A = B (Copy Value)
A math assignment can be used to copy the value of one parameter or constant to another parameter. Assignment is from right to left. For example,
80.1P=0.1P%o copies the gross weight of scale 1 to VAR#1. It is possible to reverse this statement and copy the value of VAR#1 to the gross weight of scale 1.
However, the gross weight is an active weight parameter that will be recalculated when the next A/D conversion occurs (typically every 1/60 th second). This holds true for all other active weight parameters such as net, quantity, rate, etc.
A = Entry Buffer (Entry Buffer Assignment)
When assigning a value directly from the entry buffer, assignment is from left to right. For example,
=80.1P%o copies the contents of the entry buffer to VAR#1.
A = B + C (Equation Assignment)
A math assignment can assign the math operation of two parameters and/or constants to another parameter. Assignment will be in the direction of the single parameter. For example,
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-108 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
80.2P=1.1P+1.2P%o
1.1P+1.2P=80.2P%o are equivalent statements that copies the sum of the net weights for scales
1 and 2 to VAR#2.
A = A + B (Modify Original Value)
A math operator can be used in the assignment location of a math operation to modify the original value of a parameter. For example,
80.3P+=1%o is equivalent to
80.3P=80.3P+1%o which increments the original value of VAR#3 by one. Likewise,
80.3P^=.5%o will calculate the square root of VAR#3.
A = A + (B + C) (Modify Original Value)
Two parameters and/or constants can be used when modifying the original value of another parameter. For example,
80.3P+=0.1P+0.2P%o is equivalent to
80.3P=80.3P+0.1P+0.2P%o ( invalid syntax ) which adds the gross weights of scales 1 and 2 to the original value of
VAR#3. Note that the second macro statement could not be used as a valid command because a math operation may not contain more than two parameters and/or constants.
Entry Buffer = A + B ( Equation Assignment )
Performing a math operation without an assignment parameter will copy the result of the operation to the entry buffer. For example,
6.1P+6.2P%o copies the sum of the net totals for scales 1 and 2 to the entry buffer.
Copy A to Entry Buffer
Performing a math operation without an assignment or math operation will copy the contents of a parameter to the entry buffer. For example,
80.1P%o copies the contents of VAR#1 to the entry buffer.
Macros 9-109
Formatted Math Assignments
Parameters in a math assignment command can be formatted as described in Entering Parameters on page 8-26. This is useful when copying numeric values to a string variable or to the entry buffer. When formatting parameters in a math assignment, you must specify an instance. For parameters that do not have an instance, specify an instance of zero. For example,
80.3P=11.0.18560%o copies the a text format of the time/date parameter to string VAR#3.
Similarly,
11.0.18560P%o%$ copies a text format of the time/date parameter to the entry buffer, then transmits it out the comm port last selected by the %” command.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-110 Chapter 9
Math Assignments Using Different Data Types
When assigning a float value to a float-type parameter, the result will be stored as a float value. Similarly, assignments using only integers will store integer values. Assignments using only strings will produce string values. However, different rules apply when using math assignments to combine more than one data type (see Table 9-7 ).
Table 9-7: Rules for Assignments Using Different Data Types
W HEN C OPYING …
Float Values to Integer
Parameters
Float Values to
Unsigned Integer
Parameters
Float Values to String
Variables
Integer Values to Float
Parameters
The decimal portion of the float value is truncated.
The decimal portion of the float value is truncated.
The original float value is stored as a string.
R ULES
The original integer value is stored as a float to a resolution of 1 part in 16,000,000.
Integer Values to
Unsigned Integer
Parameters
A positive integer value is stored as an unsigned integer.
A negative integer value is subtracted from the roll-over unsigned integer value of +4294967296.
For example, copying an integer value of –1 to an unsigned integer yields a value of 4294967295.
The original integer value is stored as a string.
Integer Values to
String Variables
Unsigned Integers to
Float Parameters
The original unsigned integer value is stored as a float to a resolution of 1 part in 16,000,000.
Unsigned Integers to
Integer Parameters
Unsigned Integers to
String Variables
An unsigned integer value less than +2147483648 is stored as a positive integer value.
An unsigned integer value of +2147483648 or greater is subtracted from the roll-over value of
+4294967296 and stored as a negative integer value. For example, copying an unsigned integer value of +2147483648 to an integer yields a value of -2147483648.
The original integer value is stored as a string.
STRING VALUES TO
FLOAT PARAMETERS
String Values to
Integer Parameters
String Values to
Unsigned Integer
Parameters
The original string value up to the first non-numeric character is stored as a float value. If the string begins with a non-numeric character, the float is set to zero (0). For example,
A string value of “10.55” will be stored in a float parameter as 10.55.
A string value of “1.3a45” will be stored in a float parameter as 1.3.
A string value of “A100.50” will be stored in a float parameter as 0.
The original string value up to the first non-numeric character is stored as an integer value. If the string begins with a non-numeric character, the integer is set to zero (0). All other rules for assigning values to integer parameters apply.
The original string value up to the first non-numeric character is stored as an unsigned integer value. If the string begins with a non-numeric character, the unsigned integer is set to zero (0). All other rules for assigning values to unsigned integer parameters apply.
GSE Scale Systems
Table 9-8: Math Assignment Examples
A SSIGNMENT T YPE
A = B (Copy Value)
80.1P=10.95%o
80.2P=80.1P%o
100=80.3P%o
80.4P=50-10%o
80.4P="50-10"%o
80.3P=80.4P%o
80.2P=2147483647%o
80.2P=2147483648%o
80.2P=2147483649%o
80.2P=-2147483648%o
80.2P=-2147483649%o
80.3P=4294967295%o
80.3P=4294967296%o
80.3P=4294967297%o
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
Macros 9-111
String Assignments
Strings containing numeric values can be used to perform math calculations. For example, if variable #5 is a string containing the value
10, then
80.5P+=1%o will increment VAR#5 to a value of 11.
Due to a string’s ability to perform math calculations, assigning a value to a string directly from the entry buffer, as with a “get entry” command, requires special consideration when a math operator could appear as part of the entry. For example,
EnterPart#%G
=80.5P%o will store an operator part number entry in VAR#5. However, suppose the part number was entered as 100-25 . Since variable 5 is a string, the presence of a " " character entry will cause the entry to be treated as a math command. The value 75 will be stored in VAR#5!
To prevent math operations on string assignments, the assigned value should be encapsulated in quotes " ". This can be accomplished using the
%[ Save Entry Buffer and %] Restore Entry buffer commands to store the entry in the temporary register and insert it within quotes in the assignment command. The following example will store a value in string VAR#5 exactly as entered:
EnterPart#%G
%[
80.5P=”%]”%o
VAR#1
(F LOAT )
VAR#2
(I NT )
VAR#3
(U-I NT )
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10.95
10
2147483647
-2147483648
-2147483647
10
10
10
10
-2147483648
2147483647
2147483647
2147483647
2147483647
50
50
50
50
100
100
100
50
50
4294967295
0
1
VAR#4
(S TRING )
40
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
E NTRY
B UFFER
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-112 Chapter 9
A SSIGNMENT T YPE
80.4P=12A34.8%o
80.1P=80.4P%o
80.1P=0.99%o
80.2P=0.99%o
A = B
A = B
A = B
A = B
80.4P=0.99+.01%o
80.4P="0.99+.01"%o
A = B
A = B
A = Entry Buffer (Entry Buffer Assignment)
=80.1P%o
=80.2P%o
=80.3P%o
=80.4P%o
=80.4P%o
A = Entry Buffer
A = Entry Buffer
A = Entry Buffer
A = Entry Buffer
A = Entry Buffer
A = B + C (Equation Assignment)
80.1P=10*10%o
10*5.59=80.2P%o
80.3P=80.1P+80.2P%o
80.1P=80.2P-100%o
80.1P=80.3P/10%o
80.2P=80.3P/10%o
80.4P=80.3P/10%o
80.2P=2*80.1P%o
80.3P=80.2P|10%o
80.3P=80.2P/10%o
80.1P=80.3P^80.3P%o
80.2P=80.3P^4%o
80.3P=80.2P^.5%o
A = B + C
B * C = A
A = B + C
A = B – C
A = B / C
A = B / C
A = B / C
A = B * C
A = B | C
A = B / C
A = B ^ C
A = B ^ C
A = B ^ C
A = A + B (Modify Original Value)
80.1P*=0%o
80.1P+=1%o
80.1P+=1%o
80.1P-=1%o
80.1P*=10%o
80.1P*=10%o
80.1P/=50%o
80.1P^=3%o
80.1P|=3%o
A = A + B
A = A + B
A = A + B
A = A - B
A = A * B
A = A * B
A = A / B
A = A ^ B
A = A | B
A = A + (B + C) (Modify Original Value)
80.1P*=80.2P*0%o
80.2P/=80.3P+80.4P%o
80.3P+=80.2P*10%o
80.4P-=80.3P*-1%o
80.2P^=80.2P^80.2P%o
A = A * (B * C)
A = A / (B + C)
A = A + (B * C)
A = A - (B * C)
A = A ^ (A ^ A)
80.3P|=80.2P/4%o A = A | (B / C)
Entry Buffer = A+ B (Equation Assignment)
80.1P+80.2P%o
80.4P-80.3P%o
80.1P*8.1%o
Buffer = A + B
Buffer = A - B
Buffer = A * B
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
10
10
2
1
10
0
1
100
2
8
2
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
100
100
100
-45
15.5
27
27
27
VAR#1
(F LOAT )
10.95
12
.99
.99
.99
.99
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
VAR#2
(I NT )
2147483647
2147483647
2147483647
0
0
0
VAR#3
(U-I NT )
4294967295
4294967295
4294967295
4294967295
4294967295
4294967295
-25
-25
-25
-25
100
100
100
VAR#4
(S TRING )
12A34.8
12A34.8
12A34.8
12A34.8
1
0.99+.01
70
100-30
10
2
2
2
16
16
20
20
20
15
15
31
31
55
55
55
55
31
31
81
81
23
23
3
3
23
3
30
30
30
155
155
155
155
155
155
1
3
3
3
9
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
2
25
2
2
25
25
40
40
40
E NTRY
B UFFER
1.5
-25.8
100
100-30
"100-30"
30
10
81
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-113
A SSIGNMENT
80.3P/6%o
80.2P|6%o
2^80.1P%o
Copy A to Entry Buffer
80.1P%o
80.3P%o
T YPE
Buffer = A / B
Buffer = A | B
Buffer = A ^ B
Entry Buffer = A
Entry Buffer = A
VAR#1
(F LOAT )
10
10
10
10
10
VAR#2
(I NT )
20
20
20
20
20
VAR#3
(U-I NT )
30
30
30
30
30
VAR#4
(S TRING )
40
40
40
40
40
E NTRY
B UFFER
5
2
1024
10
30
%o M
ATH
C
OMPARISON
Syntax If A = B
< parm | const > < cond > < parm | const >
%o
If A = B + C
<parm> <cond> < parm | const > <math> < parm | const > %o
If A + B = C
< parm | const > <math> < parm | const >
<cond> < parm > %o
If Entry Buffer = A
< cond > < parm | const > %o
Arguments parm const math cond
Operating parameter with the syntax:
< parm > [ . instance ] [ . format ] < P | p | q > where parm is an operating parameter with a valid instance and format code, and
P represents parm as any parameter value, p represents parm as a pointer to another variable, q represents parm as a pointer to a non-variable parameter.
Constant value.
Select one of the following math operators:
+ Add
Subtract
* Multiply
/ Divide
| Modulus (divide and determine remainder)
^ Exponent
Select one of the following conditional operators:
> Greater than
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-114 Chapter 9
See Also
>= Greater than or equal to
< Less than
<= Less than or equal to
== Equal to
!= Not equal to
%] Restore Entry Buffer
Boolean Logic
Pointers
If A = B
Determine the relationship between two parameters and/or constants.
80.1P==10%o Determines if VAR#1 equals 10.
0.0P<=0%o Determines if the gross weight is less than or equal to 0.
Determines if the tare weight is NOT equal to 0.
2.0P!=0%o
34P>80.3P%o Determines the APW is greater than the value in
VAR#3.
If A = B + C
If A + B = C
Evaluates a mathematical expression.
80.1P==6.1P+6.2P%o
80.2P>=80.3P*10%o
80.5P^.5>80.4P%o
80.2P|80.3P<2%o
Determines if VAR#1 equals the sum of the net totals for scales 1 & 2.
Determines if VAR#2 is greater than or equal to 10 times VAR#3.
Determines if the square root of VAR#5 is greater than VAR#4.
Determines if the remainder of VAR#2 divided by VAR#3 is less than 2.
If Entry Buffer = A
Evaluates the contents of the entry buffer.
==6.1P+6.2P%o
>20*80.4P%o
Determines if the entry buffer equals the sum of the net totals for scales 1 & 2.
Determines if the entry buffer is greater than 20 times VAR#4.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-115
%o S TRING C ONCATENATION
Syntax A = Concatenation of B & C
< parm > = < parm | const > \ < parm | const > %o
A = Concatenation of A & B
< parm > \= < parm | const > %o
A = Concatenation of A & B & C
< parm > \= < parm | const > \ < parm | const > %o
Entry Buffer = Concatenation of A & B
< parm | const > \ < parm | const > %o
Arguments parm const
See Also
Operating parameter with the syntax:
< parm > [ . instance ] [ . format ] < P | p | q > where parm is an operating parameter with a valid instance and format code, and
P represents parm as any parameter value, p represents parm as a pointer to another variable, q represents parm as a pointer to a non-variable parameter.
Constant value.
%[ Save Entry Buffer
%m Modify String
%v Write Value to EEPROM
Pointers
A = Concatenation of B & C
“Pastes” two variables together.
80.1P=80.2P\80.3P%o Copies VAR#2 to VAR#1 and appends the value of VAR#3 to
VAR#1.
80.1P="Scale #"\80.4P%o Copies the text “Scale #” to VAR#1, then appends the value of VAR#4.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-116 Chapter 9
A = Concatenation of A & B
A = Concatenation of A & B & C
Append alphanumeric data to an existing string.
80.1P\=80.2P%o
80.1P\=" Cycles"%o
80.1P\=80.2P\80.3P%o
Appends the value of VAR#2 to the value of VAR#1.
Appends the text “ Cycles” to the value of VAR#1.
Appends the value of VAR#2 and the value of VAR#3 to VAR#1.
Entry Buffer = Concatenation of A & B
Combine alphanumeric data in the entry buffer.
80.1P\80.2P%o
3%"
Scale #\80.1P%o
%$
Copies the value of VAR#1 to the entry buffer and appends the value of VAR#2.
Copies the text “Scale #” to the entry buffer and appends the value of
VAR#1, then sends the data out comm port #3.
Table 9-9: Concatenation Examples
A SSIGNMENT T YPE
80.1P="Bin #"\80.2P%o
80.1P=80.2P\80.3P%o
80.1P=80.2P\80.4P%o
80.1P\=80.2P%o
80.1P\=80.2P\80.3P%o
80.1P\=A%o
80.4P=80.2P\80.3P%o
80.4P\=80.1P%o
80.1P\80.2P%o
Batch #\80.4P%o
A = B \ C
A = B \ C
A = B \ C
A = A \ B
A = A \ B \ C
A = A \ B
A = B \ C
A = A \ B
Entry Buffer
Entry Buffer
VAR#1
(S TRING )
Bin #7
Scale #2
Bin #5
Bin #50
Bin #5007
Bin #5007A
13A77
Row:
VAR#2
(S TRING )
7
Scale #
Bin #
0
0
20
14
VAR#3
(S TRING )
2
7
44
VAR#4
(I NT )
5
2044
204413
23
E NTRY
B UFFER
Row:14
Batch #23
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-117
%p P RINT
Syntax Print
[ transmit# ] %p
Arguments transmit#
Notes
See Also
Custom transmit (1 à 250) to send.
At least one transmit# , P991must be set for ‘onreq’ or
‘prmpt’.
%Q Send Custom Transmit
Simulates the operation of the [PRINT] key. All custom transmits set for
‘onreq’ (on request) at P991 will be transmitted in numeric order out their respective comm ports.
If any custom transmits are set for ‘prmpt’ (prompt) at P991, then the message Which Tx# ?
will be displayed prompting the entry of a transmit number. The entered custom transmit number will then be sent, along with any other custom transmits specified as ‘onreq’.
Specify a transmit# preceding the print command to send only the specified custom transmit. For example,
2%p sends only custom transmit #2, regardless of any others set for ‘onreq’.
The message Which Tx# ?
will be not displayed for transmits set for
‘prmpt’. Transmits set for ‘off’ cannot be sent using this method. Instead, use the %Q Send Custom Transmit command.
%q E
NABLE
RS-485 T
RANSMITTER
Syntax Enable RS-485 Transmitter
%q
See Also %$ Send Text
%& Send Control Code
Enable RS-485 Transmitter
Enables the transmit interrupt for comm port #1. This command is primarily used in conjunction with the RS-485 network option to immediately send all information in the transmit buffer.
Normally, this interrupt is enabled as soon as data is put into the transmit buffer. However if networking is enabled at P250, the transmit interrupt s not enabled until the entire transmission is assembled. In the case of custom transmits or database transmissions, the transmit interrupt is not
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-118 Chapter 9 enabled until the transmit is complete or the transmit buffer becomes full.
However in the case of the %$ and %& macro commands, the transmit interrupt is not enabled by itself. Instead it requires the %q command to enable transmitter and begin the transmission. Otherwise data will continue to collect in the transmit buffer until it becomes full at which time the transmitter will become enabled automatically.
%r A/D I NTERVAL
Syntax Set A/D Interval
< scale# > , < interval > %r
Get A/D Interval
G < scale# > %r
Wait for A/D Interval
W < scale# > %r
Example:
Changing the A/D Interval to Increase
Macro Execution Speed
This macro example demonstrates how to reduce the A/D interval to more quickly execute a routine that searches through all rows of a database to add one week of time to time/date VAR#2.
===================================
*,59%r A/D interval = 1/sec
5,1%y recall first row
1%T tag #1
4%_ if row not found
%N else
80.2P+=604800%o add 1 week
2,1%y update row
6,1%y get next row
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
*,0%r A/D interval = 60/sec
Arguments scale# interval
Notes
Select from the following scale numbers:
0
Scale 1
Scale 2
Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5
Scale 6
Current scale
Scale 7
Scale 8
* All scales (Set A/D Interval only)
A/D interval at which weight values are recalculated.
The interval is specified in terms of 1/60 th
second intervals with an offset of 1 ( interval + 1 = A/D conversion rate).
For example, an interval of 0 results in the fastest A/D conversion rate, 1/60 th conversion rate of 2/60
second. An interval of 1 yields a th
second. An interval of 59 yields
1 conversion per second.
Setpoint status is monitored and updated using the A/D interval specified for scale #1.
Set A/D Interval
< scale# > , < interval > %r
Sets the rate at which weight values for the specified scale are recalculated. Reducing the A/D conversion rate can significantly increase
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-119
!
Setpoint status is not updated between A/D intervals. Do not specify a long interval during a critical I/O process!
macro execution speed by reducing the time the processor must spend calculating active weight parameters. For example,
1,59%r sets the A/D interval for scale #1 to once per second. This results in 59 fewer interrupts from the A/D converter reporting new weight values.
Consequently, more macro commands can be executed each second.
Reducing the A/D interval is most useful when executing lengthy macro routines (see example – Changing the A/D Interval to Increase Macro
Execution Speed ). However, it is important to realize that weight data and setpoint status will not processed as often. Therefore, do not reduce the
A/D interval significantly during a critical process such as a high speed filling cycle. Also remember to set the A/D interval back to a short interval after the macro routine is complete.
Specifying an A/D interval does not guarantee that the interval will be achieved. For example, it is not possible to achieve 60 updates per second on four scales simultaneously even if you specify this interval.
However, it is possible to obtain 60 updates per second on any one scale by reducing the interval of the others.
Get A/D Interval
G < scale# > %r
The get A/D interval command copies the current A/D conversion rate for the specified scale to the entry buffer.
G1%r
G2%r
Copies the A/D interval for scale #1 to the entry buffer.
Copies the A/D interval for scale #2 to the entry buffer.
G3%r
G4%r
G1%r
=80.6P%o
Copies the A/D interval for scale #3 to the entry buffer.
Copies the A/D interval for scale #4 to the entry buffer.
Copies the A/D interval of scale #1 to the entry buffer, then stores the value in VAR#6.
G3%r
>10%o
Copies the A/D interval of scale #3 to the entry buffer, then determines if it is greater than 10.
Example:
Waiting for the Next A/D Interval
This macro example demonstrates the need to wait for the next A/D interval before activating a setpoint based on the net weight. Without the wait command, it is uncertain that the next A/D interval would occur immediately after the tare function.
Thus the net weight would not be updated and consequently the fill output may have deactivated if the previously reported net weight exceeded the new ingredient target.
===================================
MACRO #6 - START PRESS
%t tare scale
W1%r wait for A/D interval
1%A activate fill output
Wait for A/D Interval
W < scale# > %r
Suspends macro execution until the next A/D interval for the specified scale occurs. This command is typically used immediately following a tare function to ensure that all affected weight parameters have been recalculated before checking the result of the tare. This is especially important in batching applications where a tare is performed prior to loading each ingredient. The example – Waiting for the Next A/D Interval demonstrates the potential problem of activating the fill output for next ingredient.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-120 Chapter 9
The wait for A/D interval command can also be used to temporarily
“freeze” weight values. This is accomplished by waiting for the next A/D interval, then immediately setting a longer interval. Then wait for the next interval before restoring the original interval duration. Again, it is important to remember that setpoint status will also remain unchanged during this interval.
%s S
ELECT
M
ODE
Syntax Select Mode
[ parm ] %s
Exit Macro Menu
*%s
Arguments parm
Notes
See Also
Operating parameter with the syntax:
< parm > [ . instance ] where parm is a displayable operating parameter with a valid instance .
Omitting parm toggles through the operating modes specified in the setup mode at P300-P309.
%M Mode Selection
Select Mode
[ parm ] %s
Selects the specified parameter as the currently displayed operating mode. Omitting the parameter instance for scale-specific parameters assumes the currently selected scale.
0%s
0.0%s
2.2%s
80.1%s
11%s
%s
Selects the gross weight mode for the current scale.
Selects the gross weight mode for the current scale.
Selects the tare weight mode for scale #2.
Selects VAR#1 as the current operating mode.
Selects the time & date parameter as the current operating mode.
Selects the next operating mode from the operating modes specified in the setup mode at P300-P309.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-121
Exit Macro Menu
*%s
Exits the macro menu without invoking a macro. This can also be accomplished with the %i or %z command.
%t T ARE
Syntax Tare
[ value ] %t
Arguments value scale#
Notes
See Also
Tare weight value.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Select from the following scale numbers:
0 Current scale
Scale 1
Scale 2
Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5
Scale 6
Scale 7
Scale 8
Specifying a tare value sets the preset flag for the tare weight.
%z Zero
%` Scale Select
%Perform Scale Specific Function
Tare
[ value ] %t
Establishes a new tare weight for the current scale.
%t Performs a motion delayed auto-tare (tare = gross).
10%t
0%t
Simulates a manual tare entry (tare = 10).
Clears the tare weight (tare = 0).
A tare command must originate from the gross, net, tare, or any of the accumulation parameters (parameters 0P à 9P). If NTEP is disabled in the setup mode at P440, then the net mode is automatically selected after performing a tare (with the exception of performing a tare from the tare mode). If NTEP is enabled, the net mode is not automatically selected if the gross weight is zero.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-122 Chapter 9
Negative tares will not be allowed if the negative tare parameter is enabled at P162 in the setup mode.
%u U NITS
Syntax Units
[ unit#
1
] %u
If Current Units
< unit#
2
> [ . scale# ] ?%u
Rename Units
< unit#
2
> , < name > %u
Arguments unit#
1
Select from the following unit parameter selections: unit#
2 scale# name
Notes
0 Units assigned at P131 for the current scale
1 Units assigned at P132 for the current scale
2 Units assigned at P133 for the current scale
3 Units assigned at P134 for the current scale
Select from the following unit numbers:
0 lb (pounds)
1 kg (kilograms)
2 oz (ounces)
3 g (grams)
4 ton (tons)
5 t (metric ton)
6 ????1 (custom unit 1)
7 ????2 (custom unit 2)
8 LbOz (pounds/ounces)
Select from the following scale numbers:
6
7
8
4
5
0 Current scale
1 Scale 1
2 Scale 2
3 Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5
Scale 6
Scale 7
Scale 8
New name to appear in place of the default unit name on the 2X5 character matrix of the 7-segment VFD.
If a unit is renamed, the new name remains in effect until changed again with the %u command or until power is
GSE Scale Systems
See Also
Macros 9-123 interrupted. Accessing the setup will not change a unit’s name.
If a unit’s name exceeds 2 characters, the center-of-zero indication will not appear.
If a unit’s name exceeds 4 characters, the scale number will not appear in the case of multiple scale operation.
%R Rename Mode
%` Scale Select
%Perform Scale Specific Function
Example:
Determining the Current Unit of
Measure
This example shows how you can use the
[PRINT] key to send a unique custom transmit for each displayed unit of measure.
===================================
805%s10%e Print Mc 10
MACRO #10 - PRINT PRESS
0?%u if current units = lb…
1%Q send transmit #1
%N else
1?%u if current units = kg…
2%Q send transmit #2
%E end if
Units
[ unit#
1
] %u
Selects the displayed units of measure for the current scale. Omitting unit#
1
toggles through the units specified in the setup mode at
P131 à P134.
0%u Selects the units assigned at P131 for the current scale.
1%u
2%u
3%u
%u
Selects the units assigned at P132 for the current scale.
Selects the units assigned at P133 for the current scale.
Selects the units assigned at P134 for the current scale.
Toggles to the next units assigned at P131 à P134.
Example:
Renaming Units for Prompting
10)00 kg
Gross
The display above could be used to show a bag count in VAR#1 along with the gross weight.
================================
1,Bag#%u rename units
80.1P%o%[ copy bag# to temp buffer
0,%]%R rename gross mode
10)00 Bag#
00101
If Current Units
< unit#
2
> [ . scale# ] ?%u
Determine if a specific unit of measure is currently selected.
0?%u
0.0?%u
0.1?%u
0.2?%u
3.2?%u
Determines if “lb” is the current units for the current scale.
Determines if “lb” is the current units for the current scale.
Determines if “lb” is the current units for scale #1.
Determines if “lb” is the current units for scale #2.
Determines if “g” is the current units for scale #2.
Rename Units
< units#
2
> , < name > %u
Allows a unit’s displayed name to be changed. Once changed, the new name will be displayed every time the specified units are accessed.
Renaming the units in this manner allows you to use a unit’s name to display a prompt without suspending macro execution. The example –
Renaming Units for Prompting shows how to use the %u command along
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-124 Chapter 9 with the %R command to display a bag count on the 2X5 prompting display during a filling cycle.
0,LB%u Renames “lb” to display “LB” when pounds is selected.
3,Count% u
Renames “g” to display “Count” when grams is selected.
6,Liter%u Renames custom unit #1 to display “Liter” when selected.
%v W RITE V ALUE TO EEPROM
Syntax Write Value to EEPROM
80. < variable# > %v
Arguments variable#
Notes
See Also
Valid variable number to store in non-volatile memory.
A variable must be set for “OnReq” (on request) at P684 to utilize the %v command.
%o Math Assignment
Write Value to EEPROM
Stores the current value of a specified variable to non-volatile to the
EEPROM. The stored value will then be retained while the indicator is powered down and be restored upon power-up. Note that the value restored at power-up will be the last value stored using the %v command.
If the variable’s value was changed thereafter, the new value is not stored.
80.1%v Stores the value of VAR#1 to non-volatile EEPROM.
80.5%v Stores the value of VAR#5 to non-volatile EEPROM.
Use the %v command should be used instead of the “Auto” save selection at P684 whenever practical. This reduces the number of writes to
EEPROM which has a suggested life expectancy of 100,000 writes.
GSE Scale Systems
Example:
Recall Row - Sample Database
Structure
699%s1%e DB #: 1
700%sPARTS%e DBNam PARTS
701%s80.1%e Col01 Part#
702%s80.2%e Col02 Name
703%s2.1%e Col03 Tare
Box#
(80.1P)
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
1
2
Name
(80.2P)
SAE5W30
SAE10W30
SAE10W40
SAE15W40
SAE20W50
SAE30
SAE40
SAE50
SAE20W
Tare
(2.1P)
0.95
0.90
0.92
0.89
0.87
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.92
Macros 9-125
%y R ECALL R OW
Syntax Recall Row
1 [ , dbase# ] [, column ] [; value ] %y
Arguments dbase# column value
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Operating parameter representing a database search column with the syntax:
< parm > . [ instance ] where parm is a operating parameter with a valid instance .
Specific value or text to recall from the lookup column.
Omitting dbase# assumes the last database accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Value can be specified without specifying column .
%y Next Match in Database
%y Set Column in Database
%_ If Database Error
Recall Row
Accesses the first database row that matches the search criteria. The search always begins with the first row in the database and continues sequentially to the end. When a match is found, all parameters included in the database are updated with their corresponding values. If no matching rows are found, the ‘record not found’ flag is set (see %_ If Database
Error ) and the parameter values are unchanged. If a column is not specified, the first column is used for the search criteria. Use the data in the example – Recall Row for the following Recall Row commands:
80.1P=3%o
1,1%y
Recalls the row with a box# of 3.
1,1;8%y
1;5%y
80.2P=SAE30%o
1,1,80.2%y
Recalls the row with a box# of 8.
Recalls the row with a box# of 5 (assuming database #1 was the last database to be accessed).
Recalls the row with a name of SAE30.
1,1,80.2;SAE20W%y Recalls the row with a name of SAE20W.
1,1,2.1;.9%y
1,1,80.1;0%y
Recalls the first row with a tare weight of 0.90.
Sets the ‘record not found’ flag because a box# of ‘0’ does not exist in database #1.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-126 Chapter 9
%y U PDATE R OW
Syntax Update Row
2 [ , dbase# ] [, column ] [; value ] %y
Arguments dbase# column value
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Operating parameter representing a database search column with the syntax:
< parm > . [ instance ] where parm is a operating parameter with a valid instance .
Specific value or text to recall from the lookup column.
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y Recall Row in Database
%_ If Database Error
Update Row
Updates the values of all parameters in one row of a specified database with the current parameter values. If a value is not specified, the last row accessed is updated. When specifying a value , the update row command functions similar to the recall row command. The database is searched for the value , then the row is updated. If the value is not found, a new row is created at the end of the database. Note that the update row command does not set the ‘record not found’ flag if the search value is not found.
2%y
2,3%y
Updates the values of the last row accessed in last database selected.
Updates the values of the last row accessed in database #3.
2;5%y
80.2P=A%o
2,5,80.2%y
2,2,80.2;B%y
Searches the last database accessed for a row with a value of 5 in the first column, then updates all other values in that row. If the search value does not exist, then a new row is created.
Searches database #5 for the value ‘A’ in the column for VAR#2, then updates all other values in that row. If the search value does not exist, then a new row is created.
Searches database #2 for the value ‘B’ in the column for VAR#2, then updates all other values in that row. If the search value does not exist, then a new row is created.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-127
%y M AKE R OW
Syntax Make Row
3 [ , dbase# ] %y
Arguments dbase#
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y Update Row in Database
Make Row
Stores the current value of each database parameter as a new row appended to the end of the specified database.
3%y Makes a new row in the last database selected.
3,1%y Makes a new row in database #1.
3,2%y Makes a new row in database #2.
%y P RINT D ATABASE
Syntax Print Row
4 [ , dbase# ] [ ; comm ] [ . lines/page ]
[ . header ] %y
Arguments dbase# comm lines/page header
Notes
Database number (1 à 250).
Communication port (1 à 4).
Number of lines per page before form-feed character is transmitted.
Custom transmit number (1 à 250) to use as a custom header.
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Omitting comm assumes comm port #1.
Omitting lines/page assumes 60 lines per page.
Omitting header generates a default header. Parameter names will be used for column headings.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-128 Chapter 9
See Also
The header will be printed at the beginning of each new page.
%y Print Row in Database
%y Download Database
?
When specifying a custom transmit as a database print header, remember to select the correct comm port at P992.
Example:
Printing a Database with Variable Page
Length
This example shows how you can use the
[PRINT] key to prompt for a form length before printing a database.
===================================
805%s10%e Print Mc 10
MACRO #10 - PRINT PRESS
Lines/Pg.?%G get operator entry
%[ save entry
4,1;1.%]%y print database
Print Database
Transmits an entire database in fixed-width, spreadsheet format suitable for printing as a report. Data may be sent out any of the four communication ports. The number of lines per page (lines between automatic form-feed commands) can be changed. It is even possible to specify a custom transmit as the report header.
4%y
4,2%y
4,2;2%y
Prints the last database selected out comm port 1, 60 lines/page, default page header.
Prints database #2 out comm port 1, 60 lines/page, default page header.
Prints database #2 out comm port 2, 60 lines/page, default page header.
4,3;1.10%y Prints database #2 out comm port 1, 10 lines/page, default page header.
4,3;3.15.2
%y
Prints database #3 out comm port 3, 15 lines/page, using custom transmit #2 as the page header.
The following is a printout of the database in the example – Printing a
Database with Variable Page Length using the command
4,1%y
BOX# NAME Tare
1 SAE5W30 0.95 lb
2 SAE10W30 0.90 lb
3 SAE10W40 0.92 lb
4 SAE15W40 0.89 lb
5 SAE20W50 0.95 lb
6 SAE30 0.90 lb
7 SAE40 0.90 lb
8 SAE50 0.90 lb
9 SAE20W 0.92 lb
%y F
IRST
/ L
AST
R
OW
Syntax Recall First Row
5 [ , dbase# ] %y
Recall Last Row
5 [ , dbase# ] ;L%y
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-129
Arguments dbase#
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y Next / Previous & Get / Recall Row in Database
Recall First Row
5 [ , dbase# ] %y
Accesses the first row in the specified database. All parameters included in the database are updated with their corresponding values. If no rows are found, the ‘record not found’ flag is set (see %_ If Database Error ) and the parameter values are unchanged.
5%y
5,1%y
5,2%y
Recalls the first row in the last database selected.
Recalls the first row in database #1.
Recalls the first row in database #2.
Recall Last Row
5 [ , dbase# ] ;L%y
Performs the same function the same as the recall first row command, except that the last row is accessed.
5;L%y
5,1;L%y
5,2;L%y
Recalls the last row in the last database selected.
Recalls the last row in database #1.
Recalls the last row in database #2.
The recall last row command can be used together with the get row number command to determine the number of rows in a database. For example,
5,1;L%y
6,1;G%y
=80.5P%o copies the total number of rows in database #1 to VAR#5.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-130 Chapter 9
%y N EXT /P REVIOUS & G ET /R ECALL R OW
Syntax Recall Next Row
6 [ , dbase# ] %y
Recall Previous Row
6 [ , dbase# ] ;P%y
Get Row Number
6 [ , dbase# ] ;G%y
R ECALL R OW N UMBER
6 [ , dbase# ] ; < row# > %y
Arguments dbase# row#
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Database row number.
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y First/Last Row in Database
Example:
Copying One Database to Another
This macro routine uses the First Row and Next
Row commands to copy all data from database
#1 to a duplicate database #11.
===================================
699%s1%e DB #: 1
700%sPARTS%e DBNam PARTS
701%s80.1%e Col01 Part#
702%s80.2%e Col02 Name
703%s2.1%e Col03 Tare
699%s11%e DB #: 11
700%sTEMP%e DBNam TEMP
701%s80.1%e Col01 Part#
702%s80.2%e Col02 Name
703%s2.1%e Col03 Tare
MACRO #100 – COPY DATABASE
10,11%y clear TEMP dbase
5,1%y recall first row in DB#1
1%T tag #1
4%_ if row not found…
Done!%P prompt
%N else
3,11%y make row in DB#11
6,1%y recall next row DB#1
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
Recall Next Row
6 [ , dbase# ] %y
Advances the database pointer to the next row. This command is typically used after a recall first row or recall row command to sequentially access each row of the database.
6%y
6,1%y
Recalls the next row in the last database selected.
Recalls the next row in database #1.
6,2%y Recalls the next row in database #2.
Recall Previous Row
6 [ , dbase# ] ;P%y
Moves the database pointer backward to the previous row. It is the reverse function of the recall next row command.
6;P%y
6,1;P%y
6,2;P%y
Recalls the previous row in the last database selected.
Recalls the previous row in database #1.
Recalls the previous row in database #2.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-131
Get Row Number
6 [ , dbase# ] ;G%y
Copies the current row number of the database pointer to the entry buffer.
Used in conjunction with the recall row number command, it can be used as a bookmark – identifying a specific row in a database to be recalled later. It can also be used with the recall last row command to determine the number of rows in a database.
6;G%y
6,1;G%y
=80.9P%o
Copies the current row number of last database selected to the entry buffer.
Copies the current row number of database#1 to the entry buffer, then stores the row number in VAR#9.
A row number of ‘0’ is reported if the specified database has not yet been access, or if the result of the last search command resulted in a ‘record not found’ error.
Recall Row Number
6 [ , dbase# ] ; < row# > %y
Accesses a row in a database by moving the database pointer to specific row number. If the specified row number is not found, the ‘record not found’ flag is set.
6;10%y
6,3;253%y
Recalls the 10 th
row of last database selected.
Recalls the 253 rd
row of database #3.
80.9P%o%[ Recalls the row in database #1 as specified by VAR#9.
6,1;%]%y
Example:
Finding Multiple Database Matches
This macro routine uses the Recall Row and
Next Match commands to print all rows matching the entered search criteria.
===================================
MACRO #101 – PRINT ALL MATCHES
ENTERBOX#?%G get operator entry
%[ save entry in temp buffer
1,1;%]%y recall row
1%T tag #1
4%_ if record not found…
Done! prompt
%N else
14,1%y print row
7,1%y next match
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
%y N EXT M ATCH
Syntax Next Match
7 [ , dbase# ] %y
Arguments dbase#
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y Recall Row in Database
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-132 Chapter 9
Next Match
Finds the next row matching the original search criteria (see example –
Finding Multiple Database Matches ). This command is used after a recall row, update row, recall first/next/previous row or get row number.
i
The next match command always searches forward through a database, even after a recall previous row command.
7%y Recalls the next match in the last database selected.
7,2%y Recalls the next match in database #2.
Example:
Deleting Database Rows
This macro routine uses the Recall Row and
Delete Row commands to delete all rows matching the entered search criteria.
===================================
MACRO #102 – DELETE ALL MATCHES
ENTERBOX#?%G get operator entry
%[ save entry in temp buffer
1%T tag #1
1,1;%]%y recall row
4%_ if record not found…
Done! prompt
%N else
8,1%y delete row
1%J jump to tag #1
%E end if
%y D ELETE R OW
Syntax Delete Row
8 [ , dbase# ] %y
Arguments dbase#
Notes
Database number (1 à 250).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
See Also %y Clear Database
%y Clear Column in Database
Delete Row
Deletes the last row accessed in the specified database. The database pointer then moves to the previous row, however parameter values will remain unchanged. If the first row of a database is deleted, the database pointer is set to ‘0’.
8%y
8,2%y
Deletes the current row in the last database selected.
Deletes the current row in database #2.
%y C LEAR C OLUMN
Syntax Clear Column
9 [ , dbase# ] ; < column > %y
Arguments dbase# Database number (1 à 250).
GSE Scale Systems
column
Notes
See Also
Macros 9-133
Operating parameter representing a database search column with the syntax:
< parm > . [ instance ] where parm is a operating parameter with a valid instance .
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y Clear Database
%y Delete Row in Database
Clear Column
Clears all data in a specified database column. No rows are deleted. In columns containing numeric data, all data in the specified column is set to zero (0). In columns containing string data, all data in the specified column is set to an empty (null) string.
9;80.2%y Clears the VAR#2 column in the last database selected.
9,2;2.2%y Clears the TARE SCALE#2 column in database #2.
9,3;6.1%y Clears the NET TOTAL SCALE #1column in database #3.
%y C
LEAR
D
ATABASE
Syntax Clear Database
10 [ , dbase# ] %y
Arguments dbase#
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
%y Delete Row in Database
%y Clear Column in Database
Clear Database
Deletes all rows in the specified database. This command can be used to ensure a database is empty before making new rows or uploading database information.
10%y Deletes all rows in the last database selected.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-134 Chapter 9
10,2%y
DB#toCLR?%G
%[
10,%]%y
Deletes all rows in database #2.
Prompts for a database# entry, then deletes all rows in the database specified by the entry.
%y S ET D ATABASE
Syntax Set Database
11 , < dbase# > %y
Arguments dbase# Database number (1 à 250).
Set Database
Sets the currently selected database. This command rarely used since all other database commands allow you to specify the current database within the command syntax.
11,1%y
11,2%y
Sets database #1 as the current database.
Sets database #2 as the current database.
%y S
ET
C
OLUMN
Syntax Set Column
12 [ , dbase# ] [ ; . column ] %y
Arguments dbase# column
Notes
Database number (1 à 250).
Operating parameter representing a database search column with the syntax:
< parm > . [ instance ] where parm is a operating parameter with a valid instance .
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-135
Set Column
Sets the search column for which subsequent database commands will use. Once a column is set, it will remain in effect as the search column until changed by another set column command or another search command. The set column is rarely used since all other database commands requiring a column argument allow you to specify a column within the command syntax.
12;80.2%y
12,2;2.3%y
Sets the search column as VAR#2 in the current database.
Sets the search column as TARE SCALE#3 in database #2.
12%y Sets the first column in the current database as the search column.
%y D OWNLOAD
Syntax Download Database
13 [ , dbase# ] [ ; comm ] [ . format ] [ .
time/date ] %y
Arguments dbase# comm format time/date
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Communication port (1 à 4).
Transmit database with or without upload information:
Do not include upload information
Include upload information
Transmit time and/or date parameters as a number or as text:
Transmit as a number
Transmit as text
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Omitting comm assumes port 1.
Omitting format or time/date assumes a selection of 0.
%y Print Database
%y Upload New Database
Download Database
Transmits all database rows out a designated communication port in a comma-delimited ASCII text format.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-136 Chapter 9
13,3%y
13,3;1%y
13,4;3%y
13%y
Transmits database #3 out comm port 1.
Transmits database #3 out comm port 1.
Transmits database #4 out comm port 3.
Transmits the last database selected out comm port 1.
13;2%y
13,2;2.1%y
13,2;2.0.1%y
13,2;2.1.1%y
Transmits the last database selected out comm port 2.
Transmits database #2 out comm port 2 with upload information, time/date sent as a number.
Transmits database #2 out comm port 2 without upload information, time/date sent as text.
Transmits database #2 out comm port 2 with upload information, time/date sent as text.
All weight values are transmitted in the default units specified in the setup mode at P150. All floating point data (including weight values) are downloaded using full precision values (no rounding). String variable text is encapsulated in double-quotes (" ").
A format code can be specified after the comm port number to include upload information at the beginning and end of the transmission. This allows you to save the downloaded database as a text file that can later be uploaded to restore or transfer database information. Consider the following sample database:
2
3
PRODUCT#
1
NAME
Aggregate
Cement
Fly Ash
TARGET
5000
1000
500
4 Recycle 1000
5 River Rock 2000
Assuming this is database #1, the command
13,1;2%y will produce the following download out comm port 2
PRE-ACT TIME/DATE
250 958662865
100 958662875
50 958662883
250 958662899
250 958662908
?
When you include upload information in a download output, remember that you must use the same comm port if you later restore (upload) the database file.
1,”Aggregate”,5000,250,958662865
2,”Cement”,1000,100,958662875
3,”Fly Ash”,500,50,958662883
4,”Recycle”,1000,250,958662899
5,”River Rock”,2000,250,958662908
Including the format argument
13,1;2.1%y produces the following download out comm port 2 (including upload information)
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-137 i
Although downloading the time/date in text format produces a more readable output, using the number format is often more advantageous if exporting to a PC spreadsheet. See Time & Date
(Mode 11) on page 7-12 for more information.
16,1;2%y
1,”Aggregate”,5000,250,958662865
2,”Cement”,1000,100,958662875
3,”Fly Ash”,500,50,958662883
4,”Recycle”,1000,250,958662899
5,”River Rock”,2000,250,958662908
ENDofDB
Note that the upload command 16,1;2%y includes the comm port information. Thus the database file must be uploaded via comm port 2.
Including the time/date argument
13,1;2.1.1%y changes any time and/or date parameter output to text format
16,1;2%y
1,”Aggregate”,5000,250,03:14:25 pm 05/18/00
2,”Cement”,1000,100,03:14:35 pm 05/18/00
3,”Fly Ash”,500,50,03:14:43 pm 05/18/00
4,”Recycle”,1000,250,03:14:59 pm 05/18/00
5,”River Rock”,2000,250,03:15:08 pm 05/18/00
ENDofDB
Note that time/date text values are not encapsulated in double-quotes.
When using variables to represent time/date values, the download format will reflect the selection at P688 of the setup mode (time only, date only, or time & date).
%y P RINT R OW
Syntax Print Row
14 [ , dbase# ] [ ; comm ] %y
Arguments dbase# comm
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Communication port (1 à 4).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Omitting comm assumes port 1.
%y Print Database
Print Row
Transmits the currently selected row of a database in fixed-width, spreadsheet format similar to the Print Database command. This allows you to print selective rows rather than the entire database (see example –
Printing Database Rows ).
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
Example:
Printing Database Rows
9-138 Chapter 9 that fall within the range of dates entered in time/date VAR#1 and VAR#2. VAR#3 is used as a time/date column in database #2.
===================================
MACRO #100 – PRINT ALL MATCHES
StartTime?%G get operator entry
=80.1P%o save entry
End Time?%G get operator entry
=80.2P%o save entry
5,2%y recall first row
1%T tag #1
4%_ if record not found…
Done! prompt
%N else
%{
80.3P>=80.1P%o if >= start time, and
80.3P<=80.2P%o if <= end time…
4,2%y print row
%E end if
6,2%y get next row
1%J jump to tag #1
%}
%E end if
14,1%y
14,1;1%y
14,2;3%y
14%y
14;3%y
Transmits the currently selected row in database #1 out comm port 1.
Transmits the currently selected row in database #1 out comm port 1.
Transmits the currently selected row in database #2 out comm port 3.
Transmits the currently selected row of the last database selected out comm port 1.
Transmits the currently selected row of the last database selected out comm port 3.
%y P RINT D ATABASE E RRORS
Syntax Print Database Errors
15 [ , dbase# ] [ ; comm ] %y
Arguments dbase# comm
Notes
Database number (1 à 250).
Communication port (1 à 4).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Omitting comm assumes port 1.
Print Database Errors
Prints database rows containing corrupted data. This is a diagnostic tool used to check the integrity of stored data. A checksum is stored with each row of a database. Each time the row is accessed, the data’s checksum is recalculated and compared with the stored checksum. If the checksums do not match, the data is considered corrupt.
The print format is similar to the %y Print Database command, beginning with a header line identifying the columns, followed by corrupt rows and ending with a summary of the number of corrupt rows found.
15,3%y
15,4;3%y
15%y
Transmits errors for database #3 out comm port 1.
Transmits errors for database #4 out comm port 3.
Transmits errors for the last database selected out comm port 1.
GSE Scale Systems
15;2%y
Macros 9-139
Transmits errors for the last database selected out comm port 2.
%y U PLOAD N EW
Syntax Upload New
16 [ , dbase# ] [ ; comm ] %y
Arguments dbase# comm
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Communication port (1 à 4).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Omitting comm assumes port 1.
%y Upload Update Database
%y Download Database
?
A comm port must be specified for the database upload file. If upload data is received by a nonspecified port, it will not be processed and the message
Waiting... will be displayed.
Upload New
Initiates the upload of new data rows to a database. New data is appended to existing data rows. Data must be sent in a comma-delimited
ASCII text format with fields matching the database structure and column data types. Each data row must be terminated with a carriage return
<CR>. The last line of the upload file must be the text ENDofDB followed by a carriage return <CR>, or an end-of-file character <EOF> ( [CTRL]+Z on a PC keyboard).
Upload data must be received on the specified comm port. Once the upload command is executed, the prompt Waiting... is displayed until the first data row is received on the specified port. A line count is then displayed and incremented with each row received. Finally, Done!
is displayed when the ENDofDB or <EOF> character is received.
16,3%y
16,3;1%y
16,4;3%y
Upload database #3 via comm port 1.
Upload database #3 via comm port 1.
Upload database #4 via comm port 3.
i
If the upload count exceeds 99999 then the displayed count becomes ####x where #### are the four most significant digits and ‘x’ represents a place holder for the least significant digits.
The following is an example of an upload file format:
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-140 Chapter 9
16,1;1%y
1,”Aggregate”,5000,250,958662865
2,”Cement”,1000,100,958662875
3,”Fly Ash”,500,50,958662883
4,”Recycle”,1000,250,958662899
5,”River Rock”,2000,250,958662908
ENDofDB
The Upload New command is often used to restore database information acquired using the %y Download Database command. Ensure an empty database before uploading by including the %y Clear Database command at the beginning of the transmission as shown below:
10,1%y
16,1;1%y
1,”Aggregate”,5000,250,958662865
2,”Cement”,1000,100,958662875
3,”Fly Ash”,500,50,958662883
4,”Recycle”,1000,250,958662899
5,”River Rock”,2000,250,958662908
ENDofDB
%y U PLOAD U PDATE
Syntax Upload Update
17 [ , dbase# ] [ ; comm ] %y
Arguments dbase# comm
Notes
See Also
Database number (1 à 250).
Communication port (1 à 4).
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Omitting comm assumes port 1.
%y Upload New Database i
Because the Upload Update command must search the entire database before creating a new row, this method of upload is significantly slower than the
Upload New command, especially for larger databases.
Upload Update
Initiates the upload of new or existing data rows to a database. This command operates similar to the Upload New Database command with one exception. As new each row is received, the Upload Update command searches the existing rows for a match of the first column data.
If a match is found, all other columns in that row are updated with the new data. If a match is not found, the new row is appended to the end of the database. This method prevents the creation of duplicate records.
As with the Upload New command, data must be sent in a commadelimited ASCII text format with fields matching the database structure and column data types. Each data row must be terminated with a carriage return <CR>. The last line of the upload file must be the text ENDofDB
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-141 followed by a carriage return <CR>, or an end-of-file character <EOF> (
[CTRL]+Z on a PC keyboard).
Upload data must be received on the specified comm port. Once the upload command is executed, the prompt
Waiting... is displayed until the first data row is received on the specified port. A line count is then displayed and incremented with each row received. Finally, Done!
is displayed when the ENDofDB or <EOF> character is received.
17,3%y
17,3;1%y
17,4;3%y
Upload database #3 via comm port 1.
Upload database #3 via comm port 1.
Upload database #4 via comm port 3.
i
If the upload count exceeds 99999 then the displayed count becomes ####x where #### are the four most significant digits and ‘x’ represents a place holder for the least significant digits.
%y S ORT D ATABASE
Syntax Sort Database
18 [ , dbase# ] [ ; parm ] [ , parm ] %y
Arguments dbase# parm
Notes
Database number (1 à 250).
Operating parameter with the syntax:
< parm > [ . instance ] where parm is a displayable operating parameter with a valid instance .
Omitting dbase# assumes database last accessed. If no databases have been accessed, the first defined database is assumed.
Data can be sorted in descending order by preceding parm with a decimal point.
Sort Database
Sorts the rows of a database based on the sort criteria. Data can be sorted in ascending or descending order in any database column. Multiple parameters can be specified for sub-sort columns. Rows with exact matches are not sorted further unless a sub-sort column is specified.
18%y Sorts the first column of the last selected database in ascending order.
18,7%y Sorts the first column of database #7 in
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-142 Chapter 9
18,4;80.4%y
18,4;.80.4%y
18;.23.1%y
18,2;80.1,.80.2%y ascending order.
Sorts the column for VAR#4 of database #4 in ascending order.
Sorts the column for VAR#4 of database #4 in descending order.
Sorts the column for the RATE of scale #1 of the last selected database in descending order.
Sorts the column for VAR#1 of database #2 in ascending order with a sub-sort of the column for VAR#2 in descending order.
The time it takes to sort a database depends on the number of rows in the database and the complexity of the sort criteria. Macro execution does not resume until sorting is complete. During the sorting routing, the number of rows sorted increments on the display. Pressing [CLR] will abort the sorting process.
%y D
ATABASE
A
UTO
-T
EST
Syntax Database Auto-Test
19; < 0 | 1 > %y
Arguments
0
1
Notes
Disables Auto-Test
Enables Auto-Test
Database Auto-Test is disabled at power-up.
Database Auto-Test
Tests the integrity of the database after each database command is executed. If enabled, the auto-test adds the number of used and unused bytes and compares it to the number of bytes available for the database.
If the total does not match, an error is displayed and logged in the macro debug.
This command is a diagnostic tool that should only be enabled to trouble shoot database corruption problems. Enabling the auto-test will slow the execution of database macro commands.
19;1%y
19;0%y
Enables auto-test.
Disables auto-test.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-143
%w
Syntax
DSD D ATABASE F UNCTIONS
Lookup Data by ID#
I [ id# ] %w
Get Number of Existing Rows
N%w
Get Lowest ID# in Database
L%w
Get Highest ID# in Database
H%w
Arguments id#
Notes
See Also
DSD ID#
This command only works with the DSD database.
Data Storage Device (DSD) (page 6-13)
Lookup Data by ID#
I [ id# ] %w
Searches the database for the data row containing the specified ID#. If found, parameter P64 will reference this row’s data. This statement can be used in a macro IF conditional statement to detect whether the row was found or not (4%_).
Get Number of Existing Rows
N%w
Returns the number of database rows which are in existence. The result can range between zero and the maximum number of rows defined at
P594. The result is placed in the entry buffer.
Get Lowest ID# in Database
L%w
Searches the database and finds the lowest ID# that exists. The result can range between zero and the maximum ID# (999999). The result is placed in the entry buffer.
Get Highest ID# in Database
H%w
Searches the database and finds the highest ID# that exists. The result can range between zero and the maximum ID# (999999). The result is placed in the entry buffer.
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-144 Chapter 9 i
An Absolute Zero value references the last calibrated zero; it does not look at the re-zero value acquired by pressing the [ZERO] key.
%z Z ERO
Syntax Zero
%z
Absolute Zero
< value > A%z
Relative Zero
< value > R%z
Arguments scale# value
Select from the following scale numbers:
7
8
5
6
2
3
0 Current scale
1 Scale 1
4
Scale 2
Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5
Scale 6
Scale 7
Scale 8
Zero weight value.
See Also %t Tare
%` Scale Select
%Perform Scale Specific Function
Zero
%z
Establishes a gross zero reference for the current scale.
%z Performs a motion delayed auto-zero (gross = 0).
A zero command must originate from the gross, net, tare, or any of the accumulation parameters (parameters 0P à 9P). The gross mode is automatically selected after performing a zero.
Absolute Zero
< value > A%z
Changes the calibrated zero reference by an absolute offset.
10.5A%z
-21A%z
0A%z
Increases the original calibrated zero reference by 10.5
units.
Decreases the original calibrated zero reference by 21 units.
Restores the original calibrated zero reference.
GSE Scale Systems
Macros 9-145
This command operates similar to performing a “Zero Only” calibration.
For example, if 100 kg of dead-load was added to a scale platform, the command
100A%z increases the calibrated zero reference by 100 kg to compensate for the dead-load. This change in the zero reference is permanent, even in the event of a power loss. The original calibrated zero reference can be restored with the command
0A%z
The Absolute Zero command always uses the original calibrated zero reference established when adding or subtracting an absolute value. Thus the original zero reference can always be restored.
Relative Zero
< value > R%z
Adjusts the re-zero reference by adding or subtracting an offset value.
5R%z Increases the re-zero reference by 5 units.
-1R%z
0R%z
Decreases the re-zero reference by 1 unit.
Does not change the re-zero reference.
This command operates similar to the zero tracking feature. Subsequent
Relative Zero commands have a cumulative effect on the displayed zero reference. Changes to the re-zero weight are permanent, even in the event of a power loss. For example, if the [ZERO] key is pressed to establish a displayed gross weight of zero (0), then the command
10R%z results in a displayed gross weight of –10. Issuing this command a second time results in a displayed gross weight of –20.
The Relative Zero command can be used to make changes to the re-zero reference in dynamic applications such as conveyor belt scales. Here, the zero reference is not an instantaneous value, rather it is an average of the dead-load of the conveyor belt over it’s entire length. The average weight of the belt could be acquired using the %+ Averaging command. The average zero value could then be assigned as the Relative Zero value
15.1P%oR%z
This process could be repeated as desired to incorporate a dynamic zerotracking routine for the conveyor belt.
%{ S TART G ROUP
Syntax Start Group
%{
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-146 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
See Also %} End Group
Boolean Logic
Start Group
Begins a new level of nesting for “IF” statements, or groups Boolean logic statements. Each Start Group command should have a corresponding
End Group command later in the macro.
%| O R
Syntax Or
%|
See Also Boolean Logic
Or
%|
Provides a logical “OR” between two or more “IF” statements.
%} E ND G ROUP
Syntax End Group
%}
See Also %{ Start Group
Boolean Logic
End Group
Ends a level of nesting for “IF” statements, or group of Boolean logic statements. Each End Group command should have a corresponding
Start Group command earlier in the macro.
B
OOLEAN
L
OGIC
The 60 Series instruments are capable of making simple and complex decisions based on the results of conditional macro commands. Each conditional statement is evaluated and determined to be either TRUE or
FALSE. Program execution is then allowed to “branch” in one of two directions depending on the outcome of this evaluation.
All conditional macro commands follow a few fundamental rules. From these simple rules you can build virtually any conceivable logic algorithm.
Macros 9-147
•
EVERY “IF” statement (or group of “IF” statements) should have a corresponding “END IF”. Failure to follow this rule could yield unpredictable results.
•
If an “IF” statement is TRUE, program execution resumes with the macro command immediately following the “IF” statement.
Subsequent macro commands are executed in sequence until a corresponding “ELSE” command is encountered. All macro commands after the “ELSE” (if present) are skipped until the corresponding “END IF” is encountered.
•
If an “IF” statement is FALSE, program execution resumes with the macro command immediately following the first corresponding “ELSE” or “END IF” command.
•
Two or more sequential “IF” statements constitute a logical ‘AND’.
This means that all “IF” statements in sequence must be TRUE for the
‘AND’ condition to be TRUE.
•
A logical ‘OR’ can be created by separating two or more sequential
“IF” statements with an “OR” macro command. If any one of the “IF” statements is TRUE, the entire ‘OR’ condition is considered to be
TRUE. When the first TRUE condition is encountered, macro execution skips to the first command following the last “IF” statement of the ‘OR’ condition. It does not waste time evaluating additional “IF” statements since the ‘OR’ condition was already found to be TRUE.
•
Start Group and End Group braces must be used for nested “IF” statements. This ensures that the nested “ELSE” and “END IF” commands will not correspond with the “IF” statement outside the nest.
•
Start Group and End Group braces can be used to group combinations of ‘AND’ and ‘OR’ statements to change the standard logic conventions.
T HE "I F " S TATEMENT
The most basic “IF” statement uses a single macro comparison command to determine if a condition is TRUE as shown below. Macro commands that are executed are shown in gray.
The following example demonstrates macro execution for a TRUE condition. All macro commands following the “IF” statement are executed.
1%A activate setpoint #1
1%O if setpoint #1 is on…
%S sound beeper
SP#1 Activ%P prompt
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
This next example shows the execution of the same “IF” statement for a
FALSE condition. Note that the commands after the “IF” statement are not
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-148 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems executed. Since the condition if FALSE, execution skips to the “END IF” command.
1%D deactivate setpoint #1
1%O if setpoint #1 is on…
%S sound beeper
SP#1 Activ%P prompt
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
T HE "E LSE " (I F N OT ) S TATEMENT
The “ELSE” statement allows you to execute macro commands if the condition of a comparison if FALSE.
When an “ELSE” command is encountered after a TRUE conditional statement, all macro commands following the “ELSE” command are skipped up to the corresponding “END IF”.
1%A activate setpoint #1
1%O
%S if setpoint #1 is on…
sound beeper
SP#1 Activ%P prompt
%N else
SP#1 Deact%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
If the condition is FALSE, macro execution skips ahead and resumes with the first command after the “ELSE”.
1%D deactivate setpoint #1
1%O if setpoint #1 is on…
%S sound beeper
SP#1 Activ%P prompt
%N else
SP#1 Deact%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
T HE 'A ND ' C ONDITION
A logic ‘AND’ condition is achieved by using sequential macro comparison commands. A TRUE condition requires that all conditions in the sequence are TRUE.
1-3%A activate setpoints #1,#2,#3
1%O
2%O
3%O
%S if setpoint #1 is on, and if setpoint #2 is on, and if setpoint #3 is on…
sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
Macros 9-149
< Next macro command(s) >
If one of the comparison statements are FALSE, macro execution skips ahead and resumes with the first corresponding “ELSE” or “END IF”.
1,3%A
2%D activate setpoints #1 & #3 deactivate setpoint #2
1%O if setpoint #1 is on, and
2%O
3%O if setpoint #2 is on, and if setpoint #3 is on…
%S sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
T HE 'O R ' C ONDITION
A logic ‘OR’ condition is achieved by using the %| macro command to separate sequential “IF” statements. A TRUE condition only requires one of the “IF” statements to be TRUE. When the first TRUE condition is encountered, macro execution skips to the first command following the last
“IF” statement of the ‘OR’ condition.
1,3%D
2%A deactivate setpoints #1 & #3 activate setpoint #2
1%O
%|
2%O
%| if setpoint #1 is on
OR if setpoint #2 is on
OR
3%O
%S if setpoint #3 is on…
sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
If none of the conditional statements are TRUE, then the condition as a whole is considered to be FALSE.
1-3%D deactivate setpoints #1,#2,#3
1%O
%|
2%O
%|
3%O
%S if setpoint #1 is on
OR if setpoint #2 is on
OR if setpoint #3 is on…
sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-150 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
G ROUPING "I F " S TATEMENTS
Complex conditional statements can be created by combining ‘AND’ and
‘OR’ operations. In doing so, always consider the rules for these operations. You may find it necessary to use braces to group “IF” statements in order to achieve the desired results.
Consider the following example:
1-2%A activate setpoints #1 & #2
1%O
2%O
%|
3%O if setpoint #1 is on, and if setpoint #2 is on…
OR if setpoint #3 is on, and
4%O
%S if setpoint #4 is on…
sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
The intention is to create a TRUE condition if setpoints #1 and #2 are active, ‘OR’ if setpoints #3 and #4 are active. Since setpoints #1 and #2 are indeed active, we would expect the condition to be TRUE. However, this is not the case. Remember the rule for ‘OR’ conditions – when the first TRUE condition is encountered, macro execution skips to the first command following the last “IF” statement of the ‘OR’ condition. Here, the last statement of the ‘OR’ condition is 3%O . Thus the macro resumes with
4%O which is FALSE, making the entire condition FALSE.
In order to make this condition function as intended, the lines
3%O
4%O if setpoint #3 is on, and if setpoint #4 is on… must be treated collectively as a single condition. This can be accomplished by “grouping” these lines in braces.
%{
3%O
4%O
%} if setpoint #3 is on, and if setpoint #4 is on…
Now, both setpoints #3 and #4 must be active for this single condition to be TRUE.
1-2%A activate setpoints #1 & #2
1%O
2%O
%|
%{
3%O
4%O
%} if setpoint #1 is on, and if setpoint #2 is on…
OR if setpoint #3 is on, and if setpoint #4 is on…
i
It is possible to have up to 254 levels of nesting.
Macros 9-151
%S sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
More complex conditional statements can be created by nesting groups of conditions.
1-4%A activate setpoints #1,#2,#3,#4
1%O
2%O
%{
3%O
4%O
%|
%{
5%O
6%O
%}
%} if setpoint #1 is on, and if setpoint #2 is on, and if setpoint #3 is on, and if setpoint #4 is on… if setpoint #5 is on, and if setpoint #6 is on…
%S sound beeper
SPTs Activ%P prompt
%N else
SPT Error%P
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
This condition yields TRUE if setpoints #1 and #2 are active ‘AND’ if setpoints #3 and #4 ‘OR’ #5 and #6 are active.
N ESTED "I F " S TATEMENTS
Nested “IF” statements are required when one “IF” statement is contained within another. Nesting uses braces to keep track of corresponding
“ELSE” and “END IF” commands. Without braces, macro execution may not function as intended.
I NCORRECT N ESTING T ECHNIQUES
In the following example, the intention is to make sure setpoint #1 is active before a filling process begins. If so, another (nested) “IF” statement will transmit the product ID# if one was assigned. However, the program does not execute exactly as expected if both conditions are TRUE.
1%”
1%A
80.1P=5%o select comm1 activate setpoint #1
VAR#5 (Product ID) = 5
1%O if setpoint #1 is on…
StartFill%P prompt
80.1P!=0%o if PRODUCT ID not 0…
Product ID %$ send text
80.1P%o%$
%E
send PRODUCT ID
end if
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-152 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
SPT#1 is ON%$ send text
2%A
%N
activate fill output else
SPT#1 is OFF%$ send text
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
Note that every line of code was executed – even the line stating that setpoint #1 is off! To understand why, look at the first “IF” statement
( 1%O ). When this statement is TRUE, it will execute all subsequent macro commands up to the first “ELSE” or “END IF” command it encounters. In this case, the first “END IF” command it encounters is the one corresponding to the product ID# ( 80.1P!=0%o ). This terminates the first
“IF” statement before it reaches the “ELSE” statement. Thus the “ELSE” is ignored and the prompt is send indicating that setpoint #1 is off.
Now consider what happens if setpoint #1 is off.
1%”
1%D
80.1P=5%o select comm1 deactivate setpoint #1
VAR#5 (Product ID) = 5
1%O if setpoint #1 is on…
StartFill%P prompt
80.1P!=0%o if PRODUCT ID not 0…
Product ID %$ send text
80.1P%o%$ send PRODUCT ID
%E end if
SPT#1 is ON%$ send text
2%A activate fill output
%N else
SPT#1 is OFF%$ send text
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
Once again, the wrong “END IF” command is used to terminate the first
“IF” statement. This time the prompt is sent indicating that setpoint #1 is on. Even more concerning is the fact that the fill output was activated!
C ORRECT N ESTING T ECHNIQUES
In order to avoid the problems encountered in the previous example, Start
Group and End Group braces should be used to ensure “ELSE” and “END
IF” commands will only correspond to their respective “IF” statements.
The following example will operate as intended.
1%”
1%A
80.1P=5%o select comm1 activate setpoint #1
VAR#5 (Product ID) = 5
1%O
%{ if setpoint #1 is on…
StartFill%P prompt
80.1P!=0%o if PRODUCT ID not 0…
Product ID %$ send text
Macros 9-153
80.1P%o%$
%E
send PRODUCT ID
end if
SPT#1 is ON%$ send text
2%A
%}
%N
activate fill output else
SPT#1 is OFF%$ send text
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
Note how the commands between the Start Group and End Group braces are treated as the TRUE condition of the first “IF” statement. The second
“IF” statement and corresponding “END IF” command are executed independent of the first “IF”. The “ELSE” now corresponds to the first “IF” statement.
Here is the same code as executed with a FALSE condition for setpoint
#1.
1%”
1%D
80.1P=5%o select comm1 deactivate setpoint #1
VAR#5 (Product ID) = 5
1%O
%{ if setpoint #1 is on…
StartFill%P prompt
80.1P!=0%o if PRODUCT ID not 0…
Product ID %$ send text
80.1P%o%$ send PRODUCT ID
%E end if
SPT#1 is ON%$ send text
2%A
%}
%N
activate fill output else
SPT#1 is OFF%$ send text
%E end if
< Next macro command(s) >
Again, note how the braces control macro execution. The first “IF” statement is FALSE. Since a Start Group brace immediately follows, all subsequent commands are skipped until the corresponding End Group brace is encountered.
P
OINTERS
60 Series Technical Reference Manual
9-154 Chapter 9
GSE Scale Systems
Macro pointers use the value one variable to access or change the value of another variable or operating parameter. This allows you to write concise routines to manipulate multiple data registers.
V ARIABLE P OINTERS
A pointer variable uses the number it stores as a “pointer” to address another parameter. Any variable can be a pointer. For example,
80.21P=1%o is a standard variable assignment that assigns a value of 1 to VAR#21. In order to use VAR#21 as a pointer, use a lower-case ‘p’ in place of the upper-case ‘P’. Thus,
80.21p=5%o
“points” to VAR#1 and assigns it a value of 5. Note that VAR#21 still contains a value of 1. Similarly,
80.21P=2%o
80.21p=5%o assigns a value of 2 to VAR#21, then “points” to VAR#2 and assigns it a value of 5. We could continue incrementing the value of VAR#21 in this manner and initialize all variables 1-20 with a value of 5. Of course this would result in twice as many lines of code as compared to simply assigning these 20 variables a value of 5 directly. Instead, consider the following example:
80.21P=1%o initialize VAR#21
%T tag
80.21P<21%o
80.21p=5%o if the value of VAR#21 is less than 21…
assign a value of 5 to the addressed VAR
80.21P+=1%o
%J
%E end if
increment the value of VAR#21
jump to tag
Here, only a few lines of code are required to initialize all 20 variables. In fact, this same routine could be used to initialize 200 variables simply by referencing VAR#201 instead of VAR#21.
80.201P=1%o initialize VAR#201
%T tag
80.201P<201%o
80.201p=5%o if the value of VAR#201 is less than 201…
assign a value of 5 to the addressed VAR
80.2